JP2021074290A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can increase interest of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: winning/losing determination means for executing a winning/losing determination regarding a predetermined winning on the basis of a first random number value; symbol determination means for determining the winning type on the basis of the winning/losing determination result and a second random number value; and game state control means capable of controlling to a time saving state. The target of the winning/losing determination by the winning/losing determination means at least includes a big winning that triggers the operation of an accessory continuous operation device and a special time saving that does not trigger the operation of the accessory continuous operation device. When the special time saving is won, the game state is controlled to the time saving state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

A game machine, for example, a ball-and-ball game machine, takes the opportunity of entering a ball into a starting port to perform a big hit lottery and a symbol variation display game, and various various lottery results are reflected in the symbol variation display game. It is configured to display a notice effect to entertain the game. In this type of gaming machine, it is known that when a jackpot is won, after the jackpot game is completed, the gaming machine shifts to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time saving state (for example, Patent Document 1 below).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-239986

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the time saving state does not occur unless the jackpot is passed, the degree of freedom of the game and the directing is narrow, and the game is not interesting.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the fun of a game by providing a new winning type capable of shifting to a time saving state without going through a big hit.

The above object of the present invention is achieved by the following means.
(1) An acquisition means (main control unit 20, S314 in FIG. 11) for acquiring a plurality of types of random values including at least a first random value and a second random value based on the establishment of a start condition.
A winning determination means (main control unit 20, S410 in FIG. 12) that executes a winning determination regarding a predetermined winning based on the first random value.
A symbol determination means (main control unit 20, S411 in FIG. 12) for determining the type of winning based on the result of the winning determination and the second random number value, and
A symbol display means (special symbol display devices 38a, 38b, liquid crystal display device 36) capable of performing a variable display operation of a symbol and stopping and displaying the symbol in a display mode according to a determination result of the symbol determination means.
A special electric accessory (special variable winning device 52) configured to open or expand the entrance of the big winning opening,
The accessory continuous operation means (main control unit 20 (accessory continuous operation device), FIG. 15) capable of continuously operating the special electric accessory, and
Game state control means (main control unit 20, FIG. 4, S412 in FIG. 12, S509 in FIG. 15) capable of controlling a game state control means (main control unit 20, FIG. 4, S412 in FIG. 12, S509 in FIG. A gaming machine including FIGS. 42 and 43).
The target of the winning judgment by the winning judgment means is
A big hit that triggers the operation of the accessory continuous operation means (for example, a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 4R probability variation jackpot: FIG. 4) and a special time reduction that does not trigger the operation of the accessory continuous operation means (support time reduction A, Support time reduction B, support time reduction C: Fig. 4, Fig. 25, Fig. 29) are included at least.
The game state control means
When the special time reduction is won, the gaming machine is controlled to the time reduction state (FIGS. 4, 25, 29, 42).

According to the present invention, the fun of the game can be improved.

It is an external view of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game board and the effect button. It is a block diagram which shows the control device. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the winning type and the game state transition. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device. It is explanatory drawing used for the explanation of the look-ahead notice production. This is a game flow used to explain the game content (usually, time saving, probability variation mode). It is a figure which shows the production example of the probability change mode according to the number of consecutive villas. It is a figure which shows the production example of the time saving mode according to the remaining time saving number of times. It is a flowchart which shows the main process on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process of a main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 start opening check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special symbol change in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the first half part of the special symbol confirmation time processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the latter half of the processing during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process on the effect control side. It is a flowchart which shows the hold addition command reception process in the command analysis process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol designation command reception process in the command analysis process in FIG. It is a figure which shows the winning random number determination table (the lottery form for winning lottery). It is a figure which shows the symbol table selection table (the lottery form for winning lottery). It is a figure which shows the jackpot symbol table (the lottery form for winning lottery). It is a figure which shows the support time saving symbol table (the lottery form for winning lottery). It is a figure which shows the loss symbol table (the lottery form for winning lottery). It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the winning type and the game state transition which concerns on the winning type target lottery form (variant example 1 of the lottery form). It is a figure which shows the hit random number determination table (the hit type target lottery form). It is a figure which shows the symbol table selection table (the lottery form for hit type, lottery form for loss type). It is a figure which shows the jackpot symbol table (the lottery form for hit type). It is explanatory drawing which provides for the explanation of the winning type and the game state transition which concerns on the loss type target lottery form (variant example 2 of the lottery form). It is a figure which shows the loss symbol table (the lottery form for loss type). It is a figure which shows the normal middle hit, support time shortening winning variation pattern distribution table (the lottery form to win lottery). It is a figure which shows the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table (the lottery form to win lottery) in normal. It is a figure which shows the probability change middle hit, support time shortening winning variation pattern distribution table (the lottery form for winning lottery). It is a figure which shows the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table (the lottery form for winning lottery) during probable change. It is a figure which shows the modification (transformation example A) of the probability variation middle hit / support time shortening winning variation pattern distribution table of FIG. 33. It is a figure which shows the modification (transformation example A) of the loss variation pattern distribution table during probability variation of FIG. 34. It is a figure which shows the modification (transformation example B) of the probability variation middle hit / support time shortening winning variation pattern distribution table of FIG. 33. It is a figure which shows the modification (transformation example B) of the loss variation pattern distribution table during probability variation of FIG. 34. It is a figure which shows the time saving middle hit / support time saving winning variation pattern distribution table (the lottery form for winning lottery). It is a figure which shows the time saving medium loss fluctuation pattern distribution table (the lottery form to win lottery). It is a figure which shows the loss variation pattern distribution table (the lottery form for loss type) in normal. It is a figure which shows the game state transition table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number table. It is a timing chart which shows the decorative pattern effect which concerns on a normal variation 13s. This is a timing chart focusing on the stop operation pattern of the decorative pattern. It is a figure which shows the example which the stop operation pattern of a decorative pattern effect differs depending on the effect to be executed. It is a figure which shows the example which the stop operation pattern of a decorative symbol effect is different when the same effect is executed with the variation pattern which the variation time is different. It is a figure which shows the example which the stop operation pattern of a decorative symbol effect is different when the same effect is executed with the variation pattern which the variation time is different. It is a reference figure for comparing the decorative pattern effect shown in FIG. 31 and FIG. 32. It is a figure which shows the example which the stop operation pattern is different depending on the effect type to be executed, and the presence or absence thereof. It is a figure which shows the example which the stop operation pattern is different depending on the production stage. It is a figure which shows the example which the reach stop operation pattern is different depending on the effect type to be executed, and the presence or absence thereof. It is a figure which shows the example which the reach stop operation pattern is different depending on the production stage. It is a figure which shows the modification of the stop operation pattern. It is a figure which shows the modification of the stop operation pattern. It is a figure which shows the modification of the stop operation pattern. It is a figure which shows the modification of the stop operation pattern. It is a figure which provides the explanation of the time saving rush notification effect when the support time saving is elected. It is a figure which shows the production example 1 of the time saving rush notification effect. It is a figure which shows the production example 2 of the time saving rush notification effect. This is the first half of the game flow used to explain the game content (usually, time saving, probability variation mode). This is the second half of the game flow, which is used to explain the game content (precursor, ceiling, heaven mode). It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the look-ahead notice which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start processing which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ceiling function management process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ceiling activation management processing which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition preparation process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special symbol change which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the first half part of the special symbol confirmation time processing which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the latter half of the special symbol confirmation time processing which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the game state transition table which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the hit / support time saving variation pattern distribution table (general, for precursors) which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the hit / support time saving variation pattern distribution table (for ceiling, heaven) which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table (general use) which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table (for precursor, ceiling, heaven (heaven time shortening)) which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern distribution designation number table which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the modification of the privilege giving form. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the modification of the privilege giving form. It is a figure which shows the case (in the case of the activation type at the start of a ceiling game) that the ceiling function is activated while the ceiling time is shortened. It is a figure which shows the case (in the case of the activation type at the start of a ceiling game) that the ceiling function is activated during the jackpot time reduction state. It is a figure which shows the case which the ceiling function is activated during the support time shortening state (in the case of the activation type at the start of a ceiling game). It is a figure which shows the case (in the case of the activation type at the end of a ceiling game) that the ceiling function is activated during the ceiling time reduction state. It is a figure which shows the case (in the case of the activation type at the end of a ceiling game) that the ceiling function is activated during the jackpot time reduction state. It is a figure which shows the case which the ceiling function is activated during the support time shortening state (in the case of the activation type at the end of a ceiling game).

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the embodiment described below, a ball game machine will be described as an example of the game machine according to the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
<1. Outline of configuration: Fig. 1 and Fig. 2>
An outline of the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of the gaming board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 (hereinafter, abbreviated as “gaming machine 1”), a frame-shaped front frame 2 is attached to the front surface of a wooden outer frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, and a game attached to the back surface of the front frame 2. The game board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted in a board storage frame (not shown), and the game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 faces the opening of the front frame 2. A glass door 6 supporting transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a. Further, on the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling the game operation are arranged.

A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6, and if a key is inserted into this key cylinder and operated on one side, the locked state of the glass door 6 with respect to the front frame 2 can be obtained. By operating the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 can be released and the front frame 2 can be opened to the front side.

Below the glass door 6, a front operation panel 7 that is pivotally supported by a hinge (not shown) on the front frame 2 is arranged. The front operation panel 7 is provided with an upper saucer unit 8, and the upper saucer unit 8 is formed with an upper saucer 9 for storing the discharged game balls.

Further, the upper saucer unit 8 has a ball removal button 14 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper saucer 9 below the game machine 1, and a game ball lending device (not shown) on the island equipment side. A ball lending button 11 for requesting the payout of balls and a card return button 12 for requesting the return of the valuable medium inserted in the game ball lending device are provided.

Further, the upper tray unit 8 is composed of a push button type effect button 13 (first operating means), a button 75a pointing upward, a right button 75b, a lower button 75c, and a left button 75d, and is composed of up, down, left, and right. A cross-shaped direction key 75 (second operating means) that can be input and operated in a direction is provided. The effect button 13 and the direction key 75 function as an operation means that can be operated by the player, and a predetermined operation valid reception period (button valid period) in a specific advance notice effect (for example, "player participation type effect" described later). ), The reception of operation input is enabled, and if a predetermined operation (for example, one press, long press, repeated hits, etc.) is performed during this valid period, the production may change before and after the operation. It is possible. In addition, these operation means are "game setting screens (menu screen: for example) related to waiting for customers (“pre-customer waiting effect (demo start waiting display)” or “customer waiting effect (demo display)” described later)). (See FIGS. 58 to 60) ”, it is also used when the player sets his / her favorite game. In this game setting, for example, the player can set the game environment such as favorite volume adjustment and light amount adjustment within a predetermined range (see, for example, FIG. 58). The effect button 13 is provided with a button LED 13b inside, and depending on the difference in the light emitting mode of the LED, the operation reception valid period (lights or blinks in a predetermined color) and the operation reception invalid period (for example, extinguishes). Middle) and can be notified.

Further, a launch operation handle 15 for operating the launch device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7. The launching device 32 according to the present embodiment has a launching performance of about 100 shots per minute.

Further, speakers 46 that exert a sound effect (sound effect) by sound are provided on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and on the upper side of the firing operation handle 15. Further, in a suitable place of the gaming machine, for example, a decorative lamp 45 (for directing) that exerts a light effect by decorating light inside a decorative member around the front frame of the glass door 6 and a center decorative body 48 (see FIG. 2). A plurality of LEDs) are provided.

(Game board: Fig. 2)
Next, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, a ball guide rail 5 for guiding the launched game ball is annularly mounted on the game board 3 as a board surface partition member, and a substantially circular region surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is formed on the game board 3. The game area 3a and the four corners are non-game areas.

A liquid crystal display (LCD) 36 is provided in a substantially central portion of the game area 3a. Under the control of the effect control unit 24, which will be described later, the liquid crystal display device 36 independently has a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, a left symbol) in a predetermined display area (symbol variation display area), such as numbers, characters, and symbols. Various effects including the variable display operation (variable display and stop display) of the three decorative symbols (see, for example, FIG. 5A) of the middle symbol and the right symbol are displayed by images.

Further, in the game area 3a, a center decorative body 48 is provided so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a long-winding manner. The center decorative body 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3, forms a front mounting plate 48a fixed to the game board 3 and an outer periphery of the center decorative body 48, and surrounds the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. The armor frame portion 48b is integrally provided to protect the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from the surrounding game balls, and the flow path of the game balls is distributed to the left and right depending on the launch strength or stroke length of the game balls. It works as a flow path distribution means that enables this. In the present embodiment, a floating region through which the game ball can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center decorative body 48 and the ball guide rail 5, and the game ball driven into the upper side of the game area 3a by the launching device 32. Is distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and flows down either the left flow path 3b on the left side of the center ornament 48 or the right flow path 3c on the right side.

In addition, the non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 is a various function display unit, and the 7-segment display (with dots) is on the upper start port 34 (for the first special symbol) and on the lower side. A special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device: first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b (first special symbol display device: first special symbol display means) configured side by side corresponding to the starting port 35 (for the second special symbol). A second special symbol display device: a second special symbol display means) is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a "special symbol variation display game" is executed by the variation display operation (variation display and stop display) of the "special symbol" represented by the 7-segment display. In the liquid crystal display device 36 described above, the decorative symbol by the image is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and various notice effects (effect images) are displayed. At the same time, a'decorative pattern variable display game'is being executed. The details of the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game will be described later.

Further, in the various function display units, a composite display device (LED display for holding composite display) 38c composed of a 7-segment display (with dots) is arranged next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. The compound is called the display of the number of operation-holding balls of the special symbol 1, the display of the number of operation-holding balls of the special symbol 2, the display of the number of operation-holding balls of the normal symbol, the right-handed advantageous state notification, and the fluctuation time shortening function. Hold / time saving / high accuracy composite display device (hereinafter simply referred to as "composite display device") having multiple display functions such as game status information such as status notification during operation (during time saving) and high probability state (during high probability). This is because it is called).

Further, the various function display units are provided with a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged next to the composite display device 38c. In the ordinary symbol display device 39a according to the present embodiment, the ordinary symbol variation display game is executed by the variation display operation of the ordinary symbol represented by the two LEDs. For example, as a variable display operation, the normal symbol on the LED repeatedly turns on and off in a seesaw manner, and stops with either side lit, so that the success or failure of the normal symbol fluctuation display game can be determined. There is.

Further, a right-handed display device 39b is provided adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a. The right-handed display device 39b is advantageous for "right-handed" in which the game ball aims to pass (flow) through the right flow path 3c by the combination of the LED lighting and extinguishing states, or the game ball is on the left. Notifies whether "left-handed" aiming to pass (flow) through the flow path 3b is advantageous. For example, it is notified that when the light emitting state of the LED is in the lit state, it is advantageous to hit right, and when it is off, it is advantageous to hit left.

Further, a round number display device 39c is provided in which two LEDs (round display LEDs) are arranged adjacent to the right-handed display device 39b. The round number display device 39c notifies the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) related to the jackpot by combining the lighting / extinguishing states of the plurality of LEDs.

Below the center decoration body 48, an upper starting port 34 (first special symbol starting port: first starting means) and a lower starting port 35 (second special symbol starting port: second starting means) are provided. A normal variable winning device 41 is provided above and below, and detection sensors 34a and 35a (upper start port sensor 34a, lower start port sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) are formed inside each of the devices to detect the passage of a game ball. Has been done.

The upper starting port 34, which is the first special symbol starting port, is the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device) (hereinafter, the first special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 1". It is a winning opening related to the starting conditions of the variable display operation (referred to as "Special Figure 1" in some cases), and is a "fixed winning rate type" that does not have a "starting opening opening / closing means" that allows the starting opening to be opened or expanded. It is configured as a "winning device". In the present embodiment, a left flow path to the upper start port 34 due to the action of a game ball falling direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center decoration body 48, etc.) in the game area 3a. The game ball that has flowed down 3b has a structure that makes it easy to enter (win), while the game ball that has flowed down the right flow path 3c has a structure that makes it difficult or impossible to enter.

The ordinary variable winning device 41 is configured as a "winning rate variable winning device" in which the winning rate of the game ball at the starting port can be changed by the starting port opening / closing means. In the present embodiment, a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (movable members) 47 are provided as a starting port opening / closing means, and the movable wing pieces 47 perform an opening / closing operation to open and close the lower starting port 35, which is a second special symbol starting port. Can be opened or expanded.

Further, the lower starting port 35 of the normal variable winning device 41 is referred to as a second special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 2") in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device). , In some cases, abbreviated as "Special Figure 2"), which is a winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation, and the winning area of the lower starting opening 35 depends on the operating state (operated or non-operating) of the movable wing piece 47. Then, it is converted into an open state that facilitates winning (easy winning state) and a closed state that makes it more difficult to win or makes it impossible to win than the open state (difficult to win). In the present embodiment, when the movable wing piece 47 is inactive, it holds a closed state (a winning impossible state) that makes it impossible to win a prize in the lower starting port 35.

Further, on both sides of the normal variable winning device 41, four general winning openings 43 (43a to 43d) are arranged on the left side and one (43e) on the right side, for a total of five, and a game is provided inside each of them. A general winning opening sensor 43h (corresponding to each of the general winning openings 43a to 43e) for detecting the passage of the ball is formed.

Further, an ordinary symbol starting port 37 (third starting means) composed of a passing gate through which a game ball can pass is provided diagonally upward to the right of the ordinary variable winning device 41, that is, above the middle portion of the right flow path 3c. Has been done. The normal symbol start port 37 is a winning opening related to the fluctuation display operation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 39a, and inside the normal symbol start port sensor 37a (see FIG. 3), which detects a passing game ball. Is formed. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol start port 37 is formed only on the right flow path 3c side and not on the left flow path 3b side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and both flow paths may be formed. ..

In the middle of the route from the normal symbol start port 37 in the right flow path 3c to the normal variable winning device 41, the large winning opening 50 can be opened or expanded by the retractable open door 52b. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, and a large winning opening sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 50 is formed inside the device 52 (special electric accessory).

The circumference of the large winning opening 50 is a bulging portion (decorative member) 55 bulging from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 forms a downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c. There is. If the large winning opening 50 is closed by the open door 52b (the large winning opening is closed), the downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c (by forming a surface continuous with the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55). It is designed to form a part of the upper side 55a). Further, in the downstream area of the right flow path 3c, in the area above the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55, to be exact, in the game area above the large winning opening 50, the flow path correction plate is substantially parallel to the flow direction of the game ball. The 51d is projected so as to move the flowing game ball toward the large winning opening 50.

The process of entering the game ball into the grand prize opening 50 is as follows. The game ball that has passed through the floating area between the upper surface of the center decorative body 48 and the ball guide rail 5 is on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulging portion 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. It flows down along. Then, the game ball comes into contact with the right end of the flow path correction plate 51d protruding from the three surfaces of the game board, whereby the flow direction of the game ball is corrected to the direction (downward direction) of the large winning opening 50. At this time, if the large winning opening 50 is covered by the retractable open door 52b (the large winning opening is closed), the game ball rolls on the large winning opening 50, and a gauge configuration (not shown) is further formed. (Arrangement of game nails) guides the player in the direction of the tulip-type normal variable winning device 41 (lower starting port 35). At this time, if the lower start opening 35 is in a winning state (starting opening open state), the game ball can win in the lower starting opening 35, but the open door 52b is retracted into the game board surface and the large winning opening 50 If is open (the big winning opening is open), the game ball is guided into the big winning opening 50.

In the case of the present embodiment, when the player aims the launch position on the special variable winning device 52 side (when the game ball is aimed so as to pass through the right flow path 3c), the upper start port 34 side The game ball is difficult to be guided or is not guided. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", it is difficult or impossible to win a prize in each of the starting ports 34 and 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates.

When the above-mentioned winning means belongs to either the left or right flow path, that is, whether the game ball flowing down the left flow path 3b or the right flow path 3c can win a prize, the winning means belonging to the left flow path 3b. There are an upper starting port 34, a lower starting port 35, and general winning ports 43a to 43d on the left side, and the winning means belonging to the right flow flow path 3c include an upper starting port 34, a lower starting port 35, and a normal symbol starting port. There are 37, a large winning opening 50, and a general winning opening 43e on the right side. If the movable wing piece 47 is open (starting port is open), the lower starting port 35 belongs to both the left flow path 3b and the right flow path 3c, and a prize is awarded from either the left or right flow path. It is possible. However, since the operating condition of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35 is the passage (winning) of the game ball through the normal symbol starting port 37 located on the right side of the game area 3a, the movable wing piece 47 actually flows down to the right. It can be said that it is a winning means that belongs only to the route 3c. Further, the large winning opening 50 belongs only to the right flow path 3c, and only the game ball from the right flow path 3c can win a prize.

(Right-handed advantageous configuration under specific conditions)
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball is "right-handed" aiming to pass through the right flow path 3c, the game ball is likely to win a prize in the normal symbol start port 37, but the upper start port. The game ball is difficult to be guided or is not guided to the 34 side. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", it is difficult or impossible to win the starting ports 34 and 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates. However, when the "electric support state (electric support state)" described later occurs, the movable wing piece 47 operates in an opening / closing pattern that is at least more advantageous than the normal state (normal game state). Therefore, under this electric support state, instead of "left-handed" aiming at the game ball to pass through the left flow path 3b, "right" aiming at the game ball passing through the right flow path 3c. "Strike" is considered to be advantageous. On the other hand, in the case of "no electric support (during non-electric support)" described later, on the contrary, the game ball is on the left instead of "right-handed" aiming at the game ball passing through the right flow path 3c. "Left-handed" aiming to pass through the flow path 3b is considered to be advantageous. That is, the game progress is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player depending on which of the left flow path 3b and the right flow path 3c the game ball is caused to flow down according to the game state. Although the details will be described later, the gaming state with the electric support state includes the "time saving state" and the "probability change state", and the game state with the electric support state includes the "normal state" and the "latent state".

Each of the above-mentioned upper start opening 34, lower start opening 35, normal symbol start opening 37, large winning opening 50, or general winning opening 43a to 43e functions as a winning means arranged in the game area 3a. Further, detection switches (winning detection switches) such as the upper start opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the large winning opening sensor 52a, or the general winning opening sensor 43h enter the winning means. It functions as a winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has been played. The number, shape, formation position, and the like of each of the above-mentioned winning means can be appropriately changed according to the playability. Further, for each winning means, whether the game ball flowing down the left flow path 3b and / or the right flow path 3c is difficult to win, cannot be won, or can be won is appropriately changed according to the playability. be able to.

When a game ball is won in each winning opening, the number of winning balls per winning ball promised for each winning opening is paid out from the game ball payout device 19 (see FIG. 3). For example, the upper start opening 34 is 3, the lower start opening 35 is 1, the normal symbol start opening 37 is 0 (without a prize ball), the large winning opening 50 is 15, and the general winning openings 43a to e are 3 pieces. Will be paid out. The game balls that do not win in each of the above winning openings are discharged from the gaming area 3a through the out opening 49. Here, the "winning" is not a structure in which the winning opening takes in the game ball inside, or the winning opening takes in the game ball inside, but a winning opening consisting of a passing type gate (for example, a normal symbol start opening 37). ), It means that the game ball passes through the gate, and when the game ball is actually detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning opening, "winning" is made in the winning opening. Is treated as if it occurred. The game ball related to this winning is also referred to as a "winning ball".

<Movable body accessory>
Further, in the game area 3a, a plurality of movable body accessories are arranged at positions that do not interfere with the flow of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the first movable body accessory 80 is arranged on the upper right side of the center decorative body 48, and the second movable body accessory 90 is arranged on the diagonally lower right side thereof. The first movable body accessory 80 includes a clock face portion 81 composed of a number display unit in which numbers from the Roman numerals "I" to "XII" are assigned and divided into 12 number sectors, and a clock board portion 81 on the clock face portion 81. It has a clock hand 82 composed of a minute hand and a minute hand formed so as to be rotatable, and forms a "wall clock portion" as a whole. In this sense, the first movable body accessory 80 is also referred to as a "clock-type accessory". The clock face portion 81 has a full-color LED on the back side or inside for each sector division location indicated by the short hand, or the number sector itself is composed of the full-color LED, and each number sector is independently and independently of a different color. It has a structure that can emit light.

Further, in the second movable body accessory 90, a corolla composed of a plurality of petals is arranged around the flower center, and a calyx is further arranged around the outer side of the corolla to double the perianth, thereby forming a flower shape. The flower-shaped portion 91 (first movable body 91) is attached to the tip of the arm 92 (second movable body 92) capable of swinging, and is configured as a flower-shaped accessory 90 as a whole. The flower-shaped portion 91 has a plurality of petals that can rotate around the center of the flower. The flower-shaped accessory 90 is normally stationary at an original position (shown by a solid line in FIG. 2) defined on the edge inside the liquid crystal screen or on the side outside the liquid crystal screen, and when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied, the arm 92 Tilts and moves together with the arm 92 to a position where the flower-shaped portion 91 covers the liquid crystal screen (shown by a broken line in FIG. 2). Then, when moving to the effect position shown by the broken line in FIG. 2, the flower-shaped portion 91 rotates at the tip of the arm, and the translucent flower center and petal portion can be illuminated from behind by a lamp or a full-color LED to illuminate beautifully. .. When the flower-shaped accessory 90 finishes its operation, it returns from the effect position of the broken line to the origin position of the solid line. The flower-shaped portion 91 can perform a plurality of types of motion patterns such as high-speed rotation, low-speed rotation, and reverse rotation as the petal rotation motion, and the arm 92 has a predetermined tilting motion in addition to the fully open tilting motion of tilting to the broken line portion. Multiple types of motion patterns are possible, such as a quasi-tilt motion that tilts to a tilt angle, a vibration motion in which the arm rattles, and a sizing motion. The clock-shaped accessory 80 (clock hand 82) and the flower-shaped accessory 90 (first movable body 91, second movable body 92) are used for advance notice effect depending on the operation mode, and the setting suggestion described later. It is also used when performing (appearing) the production.

<2. Control device: Fig. 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, the control device that controls the game operation control of the game machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing an outline of the control device.

The control device of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a main control board (main control means) 20 (hereinafter, referred to as “main control unit 20”) that collectively controls control related to overall gaming operations (game operation control). The effect control board (effect control means) 24 (hereinafter referred to as "effect control unit 24") that receives the effect control command from the main control unit 20 and controls the execution (appearance) of the effect by the effect means. ), A payout control board (payout control means) 29 that controls the payout of prize balls by the game ball payout device 19, and a power source (including a backup power source) required for each board of the game machine from an external power source. It is mainly composed of a power supply board (power supply control means (not shown)) to be supplied. A liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control unit 24. The power supply route is omitted in FIG.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor incorporating a CPU 201 (main control CPU), and is ROM 202 (main control) that stores various data necessary for game operation control in addition to a control program that describes a game operation control procedure. It is equipped with a ROM) and a RAM 203 (main control RAM) that functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and constitutes a microcomputer (Z80 system equivalent) as a whole.

Although not shown, the main control unit 20 applies interrupt signals to the CTC and CPU, which provide the Z80 system with a periodic interrupt, a pulse output creation function (bit rate generator) with a constant cycle, and a time measurement function. Interrupt controller circuit that exerts interrupt enable / interrupt prohibition function such as timer interrupt, reset circuit that can detect power on / off or power failure, output system reset signal, and reset CPU, control program Watchdog timer (WDT) circuit that monitors the operation abnormality of, out-of-designated area prohibition (IAT) circuit that monitors whether the program is executed correctly within the preset address range, hardware within a certain range It also has a counter circuit for generating random numbers (hard random numbers). At least the main control unit (main control board) 20 and the payout control board 29 receive a voltage drop signal (power supply abnormality signal) from a power supply board (not shown) to start a backup process prior to power interruption. The game operation before the power is cut off can be resumed after the power is restored (backup function). The gaming machine 1 can retain each stored content of the RAM for at least several days.

The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates a random number and a sampling circuit that samples a random number value at a predetermined timing from the random number generation circuit, and acts as a 16-bit counter as a whole. By sending an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state, the CPU 201 acquires the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random number value (big hit determination random number (random number size: 65536)). , The random number value is used for the big hit lottery. The random number for the internal lottery is obtained by adding the soft random number value generated by appropriate software processing and the hard random number value in order to prevent the hitting and the like.

Further, the main control unit 20 includes an upper start port sensor 34a for detecting a prize in the upper start port 34, a lower start port sensor 35a for detecting a prize in the lower start port 35, and a game ball for the normal symbol start port 37. The normal symbol start port sensor 37a for detecting the passage of the above, the large winning opening sensor 52a for detecting the winning of the large winning opening 50, and the general winning opening sensor 43h for detecting the winning of the general winning opening 43 are connected. The main control unit 20 receives the detection signals from these sensors and grasps which winning opening the game ball has won (winning).

Further, the main control unit 20 is connected to an "OUT monitoring switch 49a" that detects a game ball (so-called out ball) discharged from the gaming machine through the out port 49 and each winning port, and can receive the detection signal. It has become. The main control unit 20 includes out ball counting means for counting the number of out balls based on the detection signal from the OUT monitoring switch 49a. The number of out balls is one of the "game performance information" defined by a specific value. For example, if "Today's cumulative number of out balls is 30,000", the operation information that the gaming machine 1 has been operating for 300 minutes today ("Cumulative number of out balls (pieces) / launch performance (100 shots per minute) = operation" Time ") can be obtained. In addition, the number of out balls is used for calculating the base value (one of the game performance information) described later.

Further, a fraud detection sensor (for example, vibration sensor, radio wave sensor, magnetic sensor: not shown) for detecting fraudulent activity against the gaming machine 1 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 is connected to the fraud detection sensor. It is possible to monitor fraudulent activity against the gaming machine based on the detection signal of.

Further, the main control unit 20 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35, and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling the opening and closing of the opening door 52b of the large winning opening 50. Is connected, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for driving and controlling them.

Further, the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for displaying and controlling the special symbols 1 and 2. Further, a normal symbol display device 39a is connected to the main control unit 20, and a control signal for displaying and controlling the normal symbol can be transmitted.

Further, the composite display device 38c, the right-handed display device 39b, and the round number display device 39c are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can display and control various information displayed on these devices. ing.

Further, a frame external terminal board 21 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 provides predetermined game information (outer end signal) to the outside of the gaming machine via the frame external terminal board 21. It is possible to transmit to an external device such as a "data counter DT" or a "hall computer HC". Predetermined game information includes, for example, winning game start / end information, winning information, fluctuation start / fluctuation stop information of special symbols, prize ball number information, various security information (fraud detection information, RAM clear, door opening, etc. Occurrence information such as setting changes). The above "data counter DT" refers to specific information about the gaming machine, such as the number of big hits, the number of times the symbol variation display game is executed (the number of times the symbol changes), and the number of times the game is executed between big hits, based on the game information included in the outer end signal. It is a game information notification device that can be notified, and is usually installed on the upper part of the game machine. In addition, the hall computer HC is exclusively for halls that monitors and collects the game progress status of the game machines based on the game information contained in the outer end signal, and comprehensively manages the operating status of the game machines installed in the pachinko hall. Management computer.

In addition, the main control unit 20 corresponds to the type test (test related to the type verification of the gaming machine based on the rules regarding the certification of the gaming machine and the type verification, etc.) conducted by the Security Electronics and Communication Technology Association (Hotsukyo). Therefore, it is possible to output a type test signal for specifying the game operation in real time from the external terminal board 21 for the frame. When installing a gaming machine that conforms to the type test in a pachinko hall, no change in the conforming control program is permitted. Therefore, the type test signal is repeatedly output processed even after being installed in the pachinko hall.

Further, in the main control unit 20, a RAM clear switch 98 for initializing a predetermined area (memory in the area) of the RAM 203 and a setting key are inserted and an ON / OFF operation is performed to change a set value. Allowable setting change Allowable state (ON) and setting change prohibition state (OFF) can be switched between the setting key switch 94 and the setting change switch for changing the set value (details will be described later) under the setting change allowable state. The 95 and the setting change completion switch 96 for determining the setting value selected by the setting change switch 95 are connected, and the main control unit 20 can receive the detection signals from these switches. The RAM clear switch 98, the setting change switch 95, and the setting change completion switch 96 are all push-button switches that can be operated by the operator. These switches 94, 95, 96, 98 are formed at appropriate positions inside the gaming machine, which the player cannot see, from the viewpoint of preventing fraudulent acts against the set values, and unless the front frame 2 is opened, the switches 94, 95, 96, 98 are from the outside of the gaming machine. The ON / OFF operation is impossible.

Further, a setting display 97 (setting display means) for displaying information related to the set value is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for displaying and controlling the setting display 97. .. The setting display 97 according to the present embodiment is composed of one 7-segment display and is mounted on the main control unit (main control board) 20. The setting display 97 is not limited to the main control board 20, but the payout control board 28, the launch control board 29, and the relay board (relay board for relaying the connection between various display devices, switches, etc. and the control board: FIG. It can be provided at an appropriate place inside the gaming machine, such as an effect control unit (effect control board (including a liquid crystal control board)) 24 (not shown).

(About set value)
The main control unit 20 is provided with a "setting change function" that can change the expected value (profit) of the profit given to the player such as the ball output rate (so-called machine discount, PAYOUT rate) in stages. The above-mentioned "set value" is a value indicating this stage. This set value can be confirmed by the setting display 97, and is appropriately set by the hall clerk based exclusively on the sales strategy of the pachinko hall (game store).

The "set value" defines, for example, the lottery probability (winning probability) of a big hit (the winning type at which the condition device described later is activated) for each stage. The higher the set value, the higher the lottery probability of the big hit ( The jackpot winning probability) is set high, and it works in favor of the player. Such a set value can be provided with at least two stages (at least a first set value and a second set value). In the present embodiment, six setting values of settings 1 to 6 are provided. For example, at low probability, setting 1 is 1/200, setting 2 is 1/196, and setting 3 is 1/192. 4 is 1/188, setting 5 is 1/184, setting 6 is 1/180, and so on. That is, the higher the set value, the easier it is to win a big hit (the higher the machine discount), which is advantageous to the player. As described above, the "set value" is a value that defines the events that affect the machine discount for each stage, and means a value for a grade related to the likelihood of a special event such as a big hit. That is, the jackpot lottery probability at the low probability and / or the jackpot lottery probability at the low probability can be configured to be different depending on the set value. When the jackpot lottery probability is in a high probability state (when the special symbol probability variation function described later is activated), the probability can be increased to a value not exceeding 10 times. However, the rate of increase may be the same or different for each set value. In the case of this embodiment, the rate of increase is the same for each set value. In the above example, if the jackpot lottery probability at low probability is set 1 to 6 = 1/200 to 1/180 and the rate of increase is quadrupled, the jackpot lottery probability at high probability is set 1 to 6. = 1/50 to 1/45.

Further, when a plurality of types of jackpots are provided, the winning probability of one or a plurality of types of jackpots can be changed according to the set value. For example, when there are four types of jackpots 1 to 4, the higher the set value, the higher the winning probability of all jackpots 1 to 4, or some jackpots may be configured. Only a certain jackpot 1 to 3 may be configured to be high (in this case, the jackpot 4 has a common winning probability for all set values), or only a specific jackpot (for example, jackpot 1 only). ) May be configured to be high only (in this case, the winning probabilities common to all set values for jackpots 2 to 4). Further, the higher the set value is, the higher the total winning probability of the jackpots 1 to 4 may be. Further, the winning probability of the small hit type and / or the support time saving type that does not trigger the operation of the conditional device may be changed according to the set value as in the case of the large hit described above, or the same winning in all settings. It may be a probability. The details of the big hit, the small hit, and the support time reduction will be described later.

(About the operation to change the set value)
In the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, at least when the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are in the ON state, the setting change is controlled to the allowable state, and when the power is turned on by other switch operations, the power is turned on. It is controlled to the setting change prohibition state. When the setting change switch 95 is turned ON in this setting change allowable state, the current display value of the setting display 97 is "1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → ...". It is switched to the circulation type and displayed in the usage range of settings 1 to 6 as shown in. Then, when the desired setting value is displayed, when the setting change completion switch 96 is turned ON (setting confirmation operation), the current display value is confirmed as the current setting value, and the setting value data is the predetermined area of the RAM 203 (the setting confirmation operation). It is stored in the setting value storage area). Then, when the setting key switch 94 is operated from the current ON state to the OFF state, the setting change allowable state is terminated, and thereafter, the game is started under the fixed set value. The main control unit 20 has a setting function (setting means) capable of setting a set value related to the winning probability by a big hit lottery (random number lottery). The present invention can also be applied to a "game machine without setting" which does not have a setting function. Further, the set value is not switchable to a plurality of stages, and may be a "game machine with a one-stage setting function" provided with only one set value. "Game machine with one-step setting function" means a type in which setting values can be set, but there is only one setting value, and mainly "game machine with setting function" and "setting". It is used to facilitate design by providing design compatibility and versatility when designing new models with "no gaming machines". This one-step setting function-equipped gaming machine is substantially the same as the "non-setting gaming machine" in that the set value has only one step. In the case of a one-step setting gaming machine, even if the setting change switch 95 is operated, the display value of the setting display 97 is a certain setting value, for example, "1 → 1 → 1 → 1 → ...". Is displayed, and the setting operation itself of the set value is possible.

Further, the main control unit 20 can transmit various game processing information such as information about the special symbol variation display game and error information to the effect control unit 24 by the effect control command according to the processing state. .. However, in order to prevent a goto action from the outside, the main control unit 20 only transmits a signal to the effect control unit 24, and the signal from the effect control unit 24 cannot be received. It has become.

(About performance indicator 99)
Further, the main control unit 20 is connected to a performance display 99 (information display means) for notifying information (hereinafter, referred to as "performance information") related to the game result of a predetermined period (specific game period), and is connected to the main control unit 20. 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling the display of the display. The performance display 99 of the present embodiment is composed of a plurality of 7-segment LEDs, and specifically, four 7-segment LEDs (7-segment displays 99a to 99d) in which a display unit and a circuit unit are unitized are laterally arranged. This is mounted on the main control board 20, for example, to form a display capable of displaying a 4-digit number. Further, each 7-segment LED has a decimal point DP (dot) below the 7-segment number. The above "performance information" is information mainly used by pachinko hall stores and related agencies for confirmation and investigation, and for example, abnormalities in ball ejection performance occur due to illegal adjustment of game nails or goto acts. Information for investigating whether or not the original ball ejection performance of the gaming machine (designed ball ejection performance) is properly exhibited, in other words, "information on game performance (game performance information)". .. Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the game progress itself when the player enjoys the game, unlike the advance notice effect and the setting suggestion effect described later. Therefore, the performance display 99 is not installed in a place that is visible to the player, but is mounted in a place that is easily visible inside the gaming machine, for example, on a control board or a board case that protects the control board.

In the present embodiment, the total number of payouts (the number of payouts in the normal state) in the normal state (the jackpot lottery probability is low (normal probability) and there is no electric support described later) and the cumulative number of out balls in the normal state (normal). The number of outs during normal times) is measured in real time, and the value obtained by dividing the number of outs during normal times by the number of outs during normal times multiplied by 100 (number of outs during normal times ÷ number of outs during normal times x 100 base value: normal) The hour-based value) is adopted as the above-mentioned "performance information", and this is displayed in a predetermined mode by the performance indicator 99. As for the base value, the value rounded to the first decimal place is displayed on the performance display 99. However, instead of simply measuring permanently and displaying the base value (performance information), when the number of out balls being measured reaches a predetermined specified number (for example, 60,000), the measurement is temporarily terminated. , The base value at the end of the measurement is stored in the RAM 203 as history information (the current base value is stored), and the measurement of a new base value is started again. In the case of this embodiment, the above-mentioned "specified number (60,000)" that triggers the end of measurement is not the number of outs in the normal state, but the cumulative outs measured during all game states (including during the winning game). The number of balls (the number of outs in all states) is adopted, and this "number of outs in all states" is also measured in real time. The processing program related to the display control and the base value on the performance display 99 and its work area are defined in an area (out-of-area memory) different from the area (in-area memory) accessed by the CPU 201 during normal game progress. ing. Further, the performance information is not limited to the above-mentioned base value in the normal state, and is not particularly limited as long as it is useful game performance information.

A payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the payout control board 29 is connected to a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 that controls the launch device 32 and a game ball to be paid out. A game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 for performing the above is connected.

The main roles of the payout control board 29 are reception of a payout control command from the main control unit 20, prize ball payout control of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command, and information on a payout operation state to the main control unit 20 ( Status signal) transmission, etc. When it is necessary to pay out the balls, the main control unit 20 can send a control command related to the payout (“payout control command” for specifying the number of prize balls) to the payout control board 29, while the main control unit 20 can send the payout control command. The payout control board 29 can transmit the above status signal to the main control unit 20.

The payout control board 29 has a full detection sensor 60 that detects the storage state of the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 (whether or not the upper tray 9 is full), and the front frame 2 and / or the front operation panel. A door opening sensor 61 (ON when opened / OFF when closed) for detecting the open / closed state of No. 7 is connected, and the payout control board 29 can receive detection signals from these sensors.

Further, the payout control board 29 is detected by a supply shortage detection sensor 19a for detecting a supply shortage of game balls, a ball counting sensor 19b for detecting a game ball (prize ball) to be paid out, and the like provided in the game ball payout device 19. The signal can be received. Further, the payout control board 29 can transmit a control signal for controlling the payout motor 19c (the motor that drives the ball payout mechanism unit (not shown) for paying out the game ball) of the game ball payout device 19. ing.

The payout control board 29 indicates a full state based on detection signals from various sensors such as a fullness detection sensor 60, a door open sensor 61, a replenishment shortage detection sensor 19a, and a ball counting sensor 19b as the above state signals. "Signal", "Door open signal" indicating that the front frame 2 and front operation panel 7 are open, "Supply out signal" indicating insufficient supply of game balls, Abnormal payout of prize balls (insufficient payout, excessive payout) Various status signals such as a "counting error signal" indicating "counting error signal" and a "payout completion signal" indicating that the payout operation has been completed can be transmitted to the main control unit 20. Based on these status signals, the main control unit 20 determines whether the front frame 2 and the front operation panel 7 are in the open state (door opening error) and whether the payout operation of the game ball payout device 19 is normal (whether the payout operation of the game ball payout device 19 is normal). The prize ball error) and whether or not the upper saucer 9 is full (ball jam error) are monitored.

Further, a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 is connected to the payout control board 29, and a launch control signal ES (launch permission signal ES) can be transmitted to the launch control board 28. The launch control board 28 controls the energization of the launch solenoid (not shown) provided in the launch device 32 based on the output of the launch permission signal ES from the payout control board 29, and the launch operation handle 15 The game ball is launched by the operation of. Specifically, it is detected that the launch permission signal ES is output from the payout control board 29 and that the player is touching the handle by the touch sensor (not shown) provided on the launch operation handle 15. The firing operation of the game ball is permitted provided that the game ball is present (detection of the touch state) and the firing stop switch (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15 is not operated. Therefore, when the launch permission signal ES is not output, the launch operation is not executed even if the launch operation handle 15 is operated, and the game ball is not launched. Further, the launch strength of the game ball can be changed according to the operation amount of the launch operation handle 15.

(2-2. Production control unit 24)
The effect control unit 24 is equipped with a microprocessor having a CPU 241 (effect control CPU), a ROM 242 (effect control ROM) that stores the effect data required for the effect control process, and a RAM 243 (effect control ROM) that functions as a work area or a buffer memory. It is mainly composed of a microcomputer equipped with an effect control RAM), an acoustic control unit (sound source LSI), an RTC function unit (Real Time Clock), and a counter circuit (16 bits) for generating a fixed range of hard random numbers. Counter for 8 bits), interrupt controller circuit, reset circuit, WDT circuit, etc. are provided to control the overall effect operation. In addition, the RTC function unit is a clock IC that keeps track of time, and is related to time information in real time and / or date (month, day, day of the week) such as the current time (“current time is hour, minute, second”). It works as a clock means to provide calendar information. Further, like the main control unit 20, it also has a backup function and soft random number generation means (for example, random number generation means for production lottery).

The main roles of the effect control unit 24 are receiving the effect control command from the main control unit 20, determining the selection of the effect based on the effect control command, controlling the image display of the liquid crystal display device 36, controlling the sound of the speaker 46, and various other types. Light emission control of the effect LED (decorative lamp 45, button LED 13b, other effect LED), operation control of various movable body accessories (clock type accessory 80, flower type accessory 90), and the like.

Further, the effect control unit 24 includes a display control unit (not shown) that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 36. This display control unit is developed by a VDP that controls overall video output processing such as image development processing and image drawing, an image ROM that stores image data (directed image data) that the VDP performs image development processing, and a VDP. A VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores the image data, a liquid crystal control CPU that outputs control data necessary for VDP to perform display control, and a program that describes the display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU and its It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal control ROM that stores various data necessary for display control and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area or a buffer memory.

Further, the effect control unit 24 displays light on the light display device 45a including various effect LEDs such as a decorative lamp 45 and a button LED 13b in order to execute an image display effect, a light effect, a sound effect, or a movable body effect. Movable accessory motors 80c, 91c that operate the acoustic control unit (sound source LSI) for the acoustic generator 46a including the control unit and the speaker 46, and the movable accessory (clock-shaped accessory 80, flower-shaped portion 91, arm 92). , 92c is provided with a drive control unit (motor drive circuit) and the like.

Further, the effect control unit 24 is connected to a position detection sensor 82a that monitors the movement of the movable body accessory, and the effect control unit 24 is based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a and the current operation of the movable body accessory. The operation mode is controlled while monitoring the position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position). Further, the effect control unit 24 monitors the malfunction of the operation of the movable body accessory based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, and if the malfunction occurs, performs a predetermined error notification process.

Further, the effect control unit 24 is connected to the effect button switch 13a for detecting the operation of the effect button 13 and the direction key switches 75a'to 75d' for detecting the operation of the direction keys 75 (75a to 75d) to control the effect. The unit 24 can receive the operation detection signal from the effect button 13 and the direction key 75.

When the effect control unit 24 receives the effect control command sent from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 determines by lottery or uniquely from a plurality of types of effect patterns prepared in advance based on the information contained in the command. Then, various production means are controlled at the required timing to bring out the desired production. As a result, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 (image display effect), the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46 (sound effect), and the lighting / blinking drive of the decorative lamp 45 and other effect LEDs (light effect) are realized. , Various effect patterns (variable display operation of decorative patterns, notice effect, etc.) are developed in chronological order, and a "effect scenario" in a broad sense is realized. Further, the effect control unit 24 responds to the effect button 13 and / or the direction key 75 based on the operation detection signals from the effect button switch 13a and the direction key switches 75a'to 75d' during the predetermined operation reception valid period. It is configured so that it can be identified whether such an operation has been performed (for example, pressing, long pressing, repeated hitting, pressing order of the direction key 75 in the up / down / left / right direction, etc.) (operation identification means), depending on the operation mode. It is configured so that the production can be executed and controlled.

Note that the effect control command defines the function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and a 1-byte length event (EVENT), and in order to distinguish between MODE and EVENT, Bit7 of MODE is used. Bit7 of ON and EVENT is turned OFF. When this information is transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and the first time after a predetermined time has elapsed from this setting. The strobe signal is transmitted. Further, the event (EVENT) information is set and output after a lapse of a predetermined time from the transmission of the strobe signal, and the second strobe signal is transmitted after the lapse of a predetermined time from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled in the active state by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (effect control CPU) can reliably receive the command.

Further, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal, executes the control program for the command reception interrupt process, and acquires the effect control command in this interrupt process. It has become. Further, unlike the CPU 201, the CPU 241 is executing an interrupt process (a timer interrupt process that is periodically executed) based on another interrupt when an interrupt occurs based on the input of a strobe signal. Even if there is, the command reception interrupt process is performed by interrupting the process, and the command reception interrupt process is preferentially performed even if other interrupts occur at the same time.

<3. Overview of operation>
Next, a gaming operation related to the gaming machine 1 using the control device (FIG. 3) will be described.

(3-1. Symbol variation display game)
(3-1-1. Special symbol variation display game, decorative symbol variation display game)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 receives a predetermined starting condition, specifically, the gaming ball enters (wins) the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35. A "big hit lottery" is held by random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 variablely displays the special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b to start the special symbol variable display game, and displays the result as a special symbol after a lapse of a predetermined time. Derived display is performed on the device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the big hit lottery based on the winning of the upper starting port 34 and the big hit lottery based on the winning of the lower starting port 35 are performed separately and independently. Therefore, the jackpot lottery result for the upper starting port 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the jackpot lottery result for the lower starting port 35 is derived on the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the special symbol display device 38a side, on the condition that the game ball enters the upper start port 34, the special symbol 1 is variablely displayed and the first special symbol variable display game is started. On the other hand, on the special symbol display device 38b side, the special symbol 2 is variablely displayed and the second special symbol variable display game is started on the condition that the game ball enters the lower start opening 35. ing. Then, when the special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, after the predetermined variation display time elapses, if the jackpot lottery result is "big hit", the predetermined jackpot symbol mode. In the case of "small hit", the variable display is in the predetermined small hit symbol mode, in the case of "support time reduction", in the predetermined support time reduction symbol mode, and in other cases, in the predetermined loss symbol mode. The special symbol of is stopped and displayed, so that the game result (big hit lottery result) is derived.

In the present specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol display device 38b side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1". The special symbol variation display game of the above may be referred to as "special symbol variation display game 2". Unless otherwise required, "special symbol 1" and "special symbol 2" are simply referred to as "special symbol" (sometimes abbreviated as "special symbol"), and "special symbol variation display game 1" and "special symbol 2" are used. It may be referred to as a "special symbol variation display game" without distinguishing it from the "special symbol variation display game 2".

When the above-mentioned special symbol variation display game is started, the decorative symbol (directing game symbol) is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 to start the decorative symbol variation display game, which accompanies this. Then, various productions are developed. When the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends, and the special symbol display device reflects a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the jackpot lottery result. The decorative design is derived and displayed. That is, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the dramatic decorative symbol variation display game including the variation display operation of the decorative symbol.

Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game (result of the jackpot lottery) is "big hit", the decorative symbol variation display game develops an effect that reflects the result. Then, in the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (for example, the 7-segment is in the display state of "7"), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays "left", "middle", and "right". In each display area of "", the decorative symbol reflects "big hit" (hit symbol: for example, in each display area of "left", "middle", and "right", three decorative symbols are "7" and "7". 7 ”and“ 7 ”are displayed in a stopped manner.

In the case of this "big hit", specifically, the special symbol variation display game ends, and the decorative symbol variation display game ends accordingly, and as a result, the symbol mode of the "big hit" is derived and displayed. After that, the large winning opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) of the special variable winning device 52 operates to open and close the opening door 52b in a predetermined pattern, whereby the large winning opening 50 is opened and closed, and the game is played more than in the normal state. A special game state (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player occurs. In this big hit game, the opening time of the big winning opening by the opening door 52b is until a predetermined time (maximum opening time: 29.8 seconds, for example) elapses, or the number of winning balls to the big winning opening 50 is the maximum number of winnings (maximum number of winning balls). The winning area is opened or expanded until the entrance is opened by one operation of the accessory, or the maximum number of winning balls allowed for the expanded winning opening: (for example, 10) is reached. A "round game" such that the big winning opening is closed when any of the conditions is met (the condition for ending the round game (closing condition) is satisfied) is a predetermined number of rounds (for example, a maximum of 10 rounds). )Repeated.

When the above jackpot game starts, the opening effect (production during the start INT) is first performed using the start interval time (start INT), and when the start INT ends, the round game has a predetermined number of predetermined rounds (maximum round). It is performed multiple times up to the number). Then, when the maximum number of rounds is completed, the ending effect (effect during the end INT) is performed using the end interval time (end INT), and a series of jackpot games is completed. When the current round game is completed, the next round game is started via a predetermined interval time (integ between rounds). In addition, "in-round production" appears during the round game, and "inter-round INT production" appears during the round game (during the inter-round INT). That is, the jackpot game is roughly classified into each game period of the opening period (start INT period), the round game period up to the maximum number of rounds, and the ending period (end INT period).

Regarding the information necessary for executing the above-mentioned decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20 first enters (wins) a game ball into the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35, and specifically. , "Big hit", "Small hit", or "Loss" on condition that the game ball is detected by the upper start opening sensor 34a or the lower start opening sensor 35a and the start condition (starting condition related to the special symbol) is satisfied. If it is a "big hit", the big hit type is selected, if it is a "small hit", the small hit type is selected, and if it is a "miss", the big hit type is selected. Perform a big hit lottery including'design lottery (winning type lottery)'to draw a lottery of the loss type (If there is only one type of big hit, small hit or loss, it is not necessary to perform the symbol lottery, so omit the lottery. Based on the lottery result information, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol and the special symbol (special stop symbol) to be finally stopped and displayed are determined. , FIG. 25, FIG. 29, etc.), which will be described later). Then, as an effect control command for specifying the processing state, a "variation pattern designation command" including at least variation pattern information of the special symbol (for example, information on the jackpot lottery result and the variation time of the special symbol) is provided by the effect control unit 24. Send to the side. As a result, the basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control unit 24. In the present embodiment, a "decorative symbol designation command" including information on the special stop symbol (design lottery result information) is also transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in order to enrich the variation of the effect.

In addition to the jackpot lottery result, the fluctuation pattern information of the special symbol may include information for designating the execution of a specific advance notice effect (for example, reach effect or pseudo-ream effect (including the number of pseudo-reams) described later). it can. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is roughly classified into a "hit fluctuation pattern" in the case of a hit and a "loss fluctuation pattern" in the case of a loss according to the result of the big hit lottery. "Reach variation pattern" that specifies the execution of the reach effect (including the specification of the type of reach), "normal variation pattern" that does not specify the execution of the reach effect, and "pseudo-ream" that specifies the execution of the pseudo-ream effect and the reach effect. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are included, such as "with reach fluctuation pattern" and "pseudo-ream normal fluctuation pattern" in which execution of pseudo-ream effect is specified and execution of reach effect is not specified. Further, with respect to the reach fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation pattern with pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is basically set longer than the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation pattern in order to secure the production time of the advance notice effect. Hereinafter, the reach fluctuation pattern may be abbreviated as "reach fluctuation", and the normal fluctuation pattern may be abbreviated as "normal fluctuation".

The effect control unit 24 is time-series during the decorative symbol variation display game based on the information included in the effect control commands (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command) sent from the main control unit 20. The content of the effect (effect scenario) to be developed in the game, the decorative pattern to be finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop pattern), etc. are decided, and according to the time schedule based on the variation pattern of the special symbol, the advance notice effect during the decorative symbol variation display game and Controls the variable display effect of decorative patterns. As a result, the decorative symbol by the liquid crystal display device 36 is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the period of the special symbol variable display game and the decorative symbol variable display game are in progress. The period of is substantially the same time width. Further, the effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the light display device 45a, or the sound generator 46a, respectively, so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. As a result, image reproduction (image effect) on the liquid crystal display device 36, sound effect reproduction (sound effect), and lighting / blinking drive (light effect) of the effect LED such as the decorative lamp 45 are realized.

In this way, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and what reflects the display result of the special symbol variation display game is expressed in the decorative symbol variation display game. , These two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. Unless otherwise specified in the present specification, the above two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as "symbol variation display games". In addition, the number of executions (number of games) of the symbol variation display game (particularly, the special symbol variation display game) is set to "number of symbol variation" or "number of variation" or "* rotation ("*" is a natural number) for convenience of explanation. : For example, 1 rotation, 10 rotations, 1000 rotations, etc.) ".

(3-1-2. Ordinary symbol variation display game)
Further, in the gaming machine 1, based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed (winning) through the normal symbol start port 37, the main control unit 20 performs a "subsidy winning lottery" by a random number lottery. Based on this lottery result, the normal symbol represented by the LED is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display device 39a to start the normal symbol variable display game, and after a predetermined fluctuation time elapses, the result is turned on and off by the LED. It is designed to stop and display in combination. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is "auxiliary hit", the display unit of the normal symbol display device 39a is stopped and displayed in a specific lighting state (for example, all two LEDs 39 are in the lighting state).

In the case of this "auxiliary hit", the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) is activated, whereby the movable wing piece 47 opens in an inverted "C" shape and the lower starting port 35 opens. Alternatively, the game ball is expanded to a state in which the game ball easily flows in (starting opening open state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as "solenoid open game") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state occurs. In this general electric opening game, the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates (opens), and the opening time of the lower starting port 35 (starting opening open state time) is the maximum opening time (for example, maximum 6 seconds). ) Elapsed, or until the number of winning balls to the lower starting port 35 reaches a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 10), the winning area is controlled to be open or expanded, and one of these conditions is satisfied. In that case, the opening operation of the movable wing piece 47 is completed and the lower starting port 35 is closed. The lower starting port 35 can be opened one or more times within the maximum opening time.

(3-1-3. Operation hold ball)
In the present embodiment, each start port 34, 35 or the normal symbol start port 37 wins a prize during the symbol variation display game, the normal symbol variation display game, the big hit game, the small hit game, or the normal electric open game. When it occurs, that is, when a detection signal is input from the upper start port sensor 34a, the lower start port sensor 35a, or the normal symbol start port sensor 37a and the corresponding start condition is satisfied, this is used as the start right of the variable display game. As such data, except for those related to the variable display, the maximum number of reserved storages, which is a predetermined upper limit, is retained and stored. The pending data that is not used for this symbol variation display operation or the game ball related to the reserved data is also referred to as an "operation pending ball". In order to clarify the number of operation holding balls to the player, a dedicated holding display (not shown) provided at an appropriate position in the game machine 1 or a holding display provided as an icon image on the screen by the liquid crystal display device 36. Turn on the device.

Further, in the present embodiment, up to four operation holding balls related to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the ordinary symbol are reserved and stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203, and are retained as the number of times the fluctuation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol is confirmed. The maximum number of stored balls (maximum number of reserved balls) for each of the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is not particularly limited. In addition, all or part of the maximum number of reserved memories of each symbol may be different, and the number can be appropriately determined according to the playability. In the present specification, for convenience of explanation, each operation holding ball of the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the ordinary symbol is referred to as "special figure 1 operation holding ball", "special figure 2 operation holding ball", and "special figure 2 operation holding ball", respectively. Also called "Public figure operation hold ball".

(3-2. Game state)
Next, the gaming state will be described. The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be capable of generating a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot, which is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) related to the occurrence of various gaming states will be described.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a "probability variation function (probability variation function)" in which the main control unit 20 (CPU201) is responsible for the functional unit. There are two types of this, a probabilistic function related to a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol probabilistic function") and a probabilistic function related to a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary symbol probabilistic function").

The special symbol probability change function is a function that changes the jackpot lottery probability from a low probability of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability to generate a "high probability state (big hit high probability state)" that is more advantageous than the normal state. .. Under the gaming state (high probability state) in which this special symbol probability change function is operating, the jackpot lottery probability is high, so that a jackpot is likely to occur. As described above, in the case of the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery probabilities at the time of low probability and at the time of high probability differ depending on the set value (see FIG. 4).

The normal symbol probability change function changes the lottery probability per auxiliary from a low probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, changes from 1/256 to 255/256), which is more advantageous than the normal state. It is a function to generate a "probability change state per auxiliary". Under the game state (auxiliary hit probability change state) in which this normal symbol probability change function is operating, the auxiliary hit lottery probability becomes a high probability state, so that auxiliary hits are likely to occur, and the public electric open game frequently occurs. The operating rate is improved, in which the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved as compared with the normal state.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a "variation time shortening function (time saving function)" in which the main control unit 20 is responsible for its functional unit. There are two types of this: a time saving function related to a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol time saving function") and a time saving function related to a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary symbol time saving function").

The special symbol time reduction function generates a "special symbol time reduction state" that shortens the average time required for one special symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the special symbol starts to change to when it is stopped and displayed). It is a function to make it. Under the gaming state (special symbol time saving state) in which this special symbol time saving function is operating, the average fluctuation time of the special symbol in one special symbol fluctuation display game is shortened (for example, the average required for the reachless loss fluctuation). The time is shortened from 8 seconds to 2 seconds), and the number of big hit lottery per unit time is improved as compared with the normal state.

The normal symbol time saving function generates a "normal symbol time saving state" that shortens the average time required for one normal symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the normal symbol starts to change to when it is stopped and displayed). It is a function to make it. Under the gaming state (normal symbol time saving state) in which the normal symbol time saving function is activated, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol in one normal symbol variation display game is shortened (for example, from 20 seconds to 0.6 seconds). (It will be shortened), and the number of lottery times per unit time will be improved compared to the normal state.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has an "open extension function" in which the main control unit 20 is responsible for its functional unit. This open extension function is a function of generating an "open extension state" in which the open operation period (opening time of the movable wing piece 47) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is extended from the normal state. Under the open extension state, the open operation period (start opening open state time) of the movable wing piece 47 is extended from, for example, 0.2 seconds to 1.6 seconds, and the number of times of opening and closing is, for example, once (open extension function). Is extended from (when is not operating) to twice (when the open extension function is operating), and the operating rate is improved, in which the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved as compared with the normal state. Therefore, when the opening extension function is activated, the frequency of winning the lower starting port 35 increases, and therefore, as a game state, the frequency of establishment of the starting condition of the special symbol variation display game for deriving the lottery result of the big hit is higher than the normal state. Compared to the state in which the opening extension function is not activated (non-operating), the gaming state is advantageous for the player. In this respect, the open extension state is also referred to as an "electric chew support state (electric support state)".

By operating one or a plurality of types of each of the above functions, it is possible to bring about a change in the internal gaming state (internal gaming state) of the gaming machine. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the gaming state in which the special symbol probability change function, the special symbol time saving function, the normal symbol probability change function, the normal symbol time reduction function, and the open extension function are activated is referred to as a "probability change state", and among these functions, The game state in which the special symbol probability change function is removed is referred to as a "time saving state", and at least the game state in which the special symbol probability change function is activated and the open extension function is not activated (in the present embodiment, only the special symbol probability change function is activated). ) Is referred to as a "latent state", and a state in which all functions are not operating (non-operating) is referred to as a "normal state". Therefore, paying attention to the jackpot lottery probability in these gaming states, when the gaming state is the "time saving state" or the "normal state", the jackpot lottery probability becomes the "low probability state (normal probability)" and the gaming state becomes. In the case of "latent state" or "probability change state", the jackpot lottery probability is "high probability state". In addition, during the big hit related to the operation of the condition device, a hit game in which the big winning opening is opened and closed occurs, but all the functions are not activated for each of the above functions, and basically the same game state as the above normal state. It is placed below and the variable display of the special symbol is interrupted.

(High base game state)
In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned functions related to the normal symbol, that is, the normal symbol probability change function, the normal symbol time saving function, and the open extension function, operate at the same trigger. However, when the above-mentioned normal symbol probability change function, the normal symbol time reduction function, and the open extension function are individually focused on, when at least one of these functions is activated, the operation rate of the movable wing piece 47 is improved. Since the rate is improved and the frequency of winning the lower start opening 35 increases (it becomes easier to win), as a game state, the frequency of establishment of the start condition of the special symbol variation display game for deriving the lottery result of the big hit or the payout of balls It becomes a "high base game state (starting port entry advantageous state)" in which the rate (base) is higher than the normal state. The "high-base game state" here refers to a game state when a function related to a normal symbol (at least one function of a normal symbol probability change function, a normal symbol time saving function, and an open extension function) is activated, and is a special symbol. It is different from the game state when at least one of the special symbol probability change function and the special symbol time saving function is activated.

On the other hand, when focusing on the functions related to the special symbol (special symbol probability variation function and special symbol time saving function) individually, when the above special symbol probability variation function is activated, the jackpot lottery probability becomes higher than the normal state, resulting in a "high probability state". When the above-mentioned special symbol time reduction function is activated, the average execution time (average fluctuation time of the special symbol) of the special symbol variation display game becomes a "special symbol time reduction state" shorter than the normal state. In this respect, it is distinguished from the above-mentioned "high-base game state" in which the frequency of establishment of the start condition of the special symbol variation display game is higher than that in the normal state.

In the present embodiment, as an example of the above-mentioned "high-base gaming state", at least the electric chew support state to which the open extension function is provided is treated as the "high-base gaming state". Under this electric chew support state, the operating rate (opening time and number of times of opening) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is improved, the winning rate to the lower starting port 35 is increased, and the winning frequency per unit time is increased. Since it rises, it becomes an advantageous gaming state for the player as compared with the case where it is not in the electric chew support state (low base gaming state). Focusing on the presence or absence of this electric chew support state, when the game state is "normal state" or "latent state", it becomes "no electric chew support state", and the game state is "time saving state" or "probability change state". If is, it means that there is an electric chew support state. In the present specification, "without electric support state" is referred to as "without electric support state" or "non-electric support state", and "with electric chew support state" is referred to as "electric support state" or "electric support state". ".

(3-2-1. Internal game state (game state determination number YJ): FIG. 43)
Regarding the operating status of each of the above functions (special symbol probability change function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time reduction function, and open extension function) that determine the game state, the main control unit 20 side has these functions. The operation (5AH) / non-operation (00H) is managed by the ON / OFF state of the corresponding flag. A gaming state focusing on the operating status of each function is also referred to as an "internal gaming state". What kind of internal gaming state the current internal gaming state is is managed by using an identifier of "game status determination number YJ". For example, when the game state determination number YJ is "00H", "normal state (normal)" is specified, when "01H", "probability change state (probability change)" is specified, and when "02H", "time reduction" is specified. Specify the'state (time saving)', and in the case of "03H", specify the'latent state (latent)'.

(3-2-2. Fluctuation pattern selection mode (variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode): FIG. 43)
Here, in the present embodiment, in order to realize various effects related to the above-mentioned internal gaming state, one internal gaming state can be further classified and managed. Details will be described later, but for example, the probabilistic state includes a plurality of types of probabilistic states such as "probability change modes 1 to 3", and the time saving state includes a plurality of types of time saving states such as "time saving modes 1 to 3". These are included, and these are managed as different gaming states by using the identifier "variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode". The substance of this "variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode" is an identifier (variable pattern selection mode) used when selecting the "variable pattern distribution table (see FIGS. 31 to 41)" corresponding to the current gaming state. Data that identifies). For example, when the probability variation state (game state determination number YJ = 01H) is classified into "probability variation modes 1 to 3", the variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode corresponding to the probability variation state (YJ = 01H) is set to "01H (probability variation)". By defining "mode 1)", "02H (probability change mode 2)", and "03H (probability change mode 3)", it is possible to select different fluctuation pattern distribution tables for each of the probability change modes 1 to 3.

The above-mentioned "variation pattern distribution table" is used when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol related to the symbol variation display game, and one or a plurality of types of variation patterns (variation patterns of the special symbol) are at least. It is determined in association with the current game state (variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode) and the jackpot lottery result (see S413 in FIG. 12 and FIGS. 31 to 41 described later). For example, when the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode is "01H", the fluctuation pattern distribution table for the probability variation mode 1 is specified, and when it is "02H", the variation pattern distribution table for the probability variation mode 2 is specified. Is specified and is "03H", the variation pattern distribution table for the probability variation mode 3 is specified. That is, even if the internal gaming states are the same "probability variation state", variation patterns related to different variation pattern distribution tables are selected according to the variation pattern distribution designation numbers Tcode "01H" to "03H". It will be.

Therefore, the operating status of each function (special symbol probability change function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time reduction function, and open extension function) related to determination of jackpot lottery probability and presence / absence of electric support, that is, "internal game" When paying attention to the "state (game state determination number YJ)", for example, although the same "probability change state", the change pattern of the special symbol is different from the game state (probability change mode 1 to 3) (variation pattern distribution). The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the designated number Tcode)) can be selected.

Further, due to this, a plurality of types of "effect modes" related to the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode (variation pattern selection mode) are provided, and the production control unit 24 side performs the production under each production mode. It can be made to appear (execute). The details of the effect mode will be described later.

In this way, the "internal game state" when focusing on each function related to the determination of the jackpot lottery probability and the presence / absence of electric support, and the "game state" focusing on the determination of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (determination of the effect). By managing the "variation pattern selection mode)" as different, it is possible to support different variation pattern selection modes (for example, probability variation modes 1 to 3) even though they are in the same internal gaming state (for example, probability variation state). It is possible to select a variation pattern of the symbol. As a result, even under the same internal gaming state, it is possible to bring about a dynamic change in the digestion time (variation time of the special symbol) of the symbol variation display game and the effect related thereto.

In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, the types of the "internal gaming state" include a normal state, a probabilistic state, a time saving state, and the like (see the column of "YJ" in FIG. 43). On the other hand, there are more types of game states (game modes) related to the determination of the variation pattern of the special symbol, that is, the variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode (variation pattern selection mode) than the types of the internal gaming states. , "Normal mode", "Probability change mode 1", "Probability change mode 2", "Probability change mode 3", "Time saving mode 1", "Time saving mode 2", "Time saving mode 3", etc. ..

Unless otherwise specified in the present specification, at least the game state related to the variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode is referred to as "game mode" (see the column of "game mode type" in FIG. 43). As shown in FIG. 43, this game mode is a game state related to the “variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode and the game state determination number YJ (internal game state)”, in other words, the “game state captured as the entire game machine”. Can also be treated as. For convenience of explanation, the internal gaming state and the gaming mode may not be distinguished and may be simply referred to as the "gaming state". Further, the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode may be referred to as "variation pattern selection mode" or simply "Tcode".

<4. About hit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the “hit” according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram provided for explaining the winning type (big hit type, support time saving type, loss type), the winning game operation mode, and the transition destination game state (transition destination game mode) after the winning game.

(4-1. About hit type)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the winning type (win type) of the big hit lottery target, as shown in the figure, "10R probable big hit", "4R probable big hit", "4R time saving big hit (4R non-probable big hit)", etc. Multiple types of hits are included. These hits belong to the "big hit type" that triggers the operation of the conditional device, and are different from the hits (small hits) that belong to the so-called "small hit type" that does not trigger the operation of the conditional device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device (device for continuously operating the special electric accessory) for performing the round game, and is specified. The combination of the special symbols of is displayed, or the game ball operates when it passes through a specific area in the big winning opening (excluding the one that won the big winning opening while the accessory continuous operation device is operating). .. Further, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is a condition for causing an electric support state (open extension function operation) and a probability fluctuation (shifting from one internal gaming state to another internal gaming state).

Therefore, when the "small hit" is won, the condition device does not operate and the accessory continuous operation device does not operate, so that there is no transition of the internal gaming state (transition control of the internal gaming state due to the small hit winning). Is not done). However, the transition control of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) can be performed. In addition, in the hit game by the small hit (small hit game), since the accessory continuous operation device does not operate, the round game like the big hit is not executed, but it looks like it depends on how the opening / closing pattern of the big winning opening is determined. It is possible to realize a "pseudo round game" that behaves as if a round game is being executed. If such a transition mode is used, for example, the game state after the small hit game and the game state after another big hit game are shifted to the same variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) by using such a transition mode. If you do, you can stay in the production mode where both sides perform the same production. Further, due to the small hit winning, it is possible to shift from the first fluctuation pattern selection mode to the second fluctuation pattern selection mode, or to shift from the second fluctuation pattern selection mode to the first fluctuation pattern selection mode again. Is. Although the "small hit" is not provided in the present embodiment, one or a plurality of types of small hits may be provided for the lottery target on the special figure 1 side and / or the special figure 2 side in consideration of game playability and the like. it can.

The operation mode of the small hit game is basically the same as that of the big hit game except that the round game is not executed. Specifically, after the elapse of a predetermined start INT, a "opening / closing operation game (pseudo round game)" for opening the large winning opening is executed, and when the opening / closing operation game is completed, a series of operations is performed after a predetermined end INT. The small hit game of is finished. Such a small hit is a winning type that triggers a transition (execution trigger) of a hit game (special game state) that involves opening and closing of the big winning opening, similar to a big hit. To be different. Although the "small hit" is not provided in the present embodiment, one or a plurality of types of small hits may be provided for the lottery target on the special figure 1 side and / or the special figure 2 side in consideration of game playability and the like. it can.

(4-2. About winning games)
Next, the contents of the winning game by each of the above-mentioned hits will be described.

In "10R Probability Change Big Hit", the maximum number of rounds is 10 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening in one round game may reach the maximum number of winnings (10). It is a big hit set to a sufficiently promising "long opening time (for example, 29.8 seconds)". In addition, for "4R probability variation jackpot" and "4R time reduction jackpot", the maximum number of rounds is set to 4, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening in one round game is the same "long opening time" as the 10R probability variation jackpot. It is a big hit to be set. The profit status (profit degree) during the jackpot game becomes higher as the maximum number of rounds is relatively larger, and the maximum opening time of the jackpot becomes higher as the maximum opening time becomes longer. In the case of the present embodiment, since the maximum opening time for each jackpot is the same, the larger the maximum number of rounds, the higher the profit state during the jackpot game.

It is up to you to decide what kind of opening pattern the opening pattern of the big winning opening related to the round game should be. For example, the opening pattern of the large winning opening related to at least some round games (round games of a specific number of rounds) may be set to a "short opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds)" shorter than the above long opening time. , It may be set to be a shorter "extremely short opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds)". In addition, during the maximum opening time, the large winning opening may be continuously opened, or an opening pattern involving one or more closings (for example, "1.3 seconds opening + 0.5 seconds closing + 27 seconds opening"). May be.

(4-3. About the transition destination game state after the hit game)
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the game state to be transferred after the end of each of the above-mentioned big hit games will be described. In the column of "game state at the time of winning / transition destination game state" shown in FIG. 4, the game state at the time of winning and the game state to be transferred after the winning game (transition destination game state) are shown according to the hit type. The relationship is shown. The "game state at the time of winning" in FIG. 4 indicates the internal game state type at the time of winning (the corresponding game mode type in parentheses), and the "transition destination game state" is the internal game state type of the transfer destination. (In parentheses, the corresponding game mode type) is shown. Details of the game mode to be shifted will be described later.

(If you win the 10R probability variation jackpot)
In the case of "10R probability variation jackpot" or "4R probability variation jackpot", regardless of the game state at the time of winning the hit, the game shifts to the "probability variation state" after the jackpot game. These big hits are called "probable change big hits" in that they are big hits that trigger a transition to a probable change state.

When the game shifts to the above "probability change state", it continues until the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (number of symbol variation) ends the predetermined specified number of times, or until the jackpot is won within the specified specified number of times. It is possible, and when the special symbol variation display game ends without winning the jackpot within the specified number of times, the probability change state ends and the game shifts to the normal state from the next game. Whether or not the specified number of times has been reached is determined by counting the number of executions of the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 (the number of fluctuations of the special figures 1 and 2) (the same applies to the time saving state described later). )). That is, the probability change state is terminated when the total number of executions of the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 (total number of fluctuations of the special figures 1 and 2) is completed by the specified number of times without a big hit.

In the present embodiment, after shifting to a gaming state (probability variation state or latent probability state) in which the jackpot lottery probability is at least high, a jackpot (however, "small hit" that does not trigger the transition to the internal gaming state is excluded). When the special symbol variation display game ends a predetermined number of times without winning, the high probability state is terminated and the jackpot lottery probability is shifted to the low probability state. )) ”. Hereinafter, if necessary, the upper limit number of times of the special symbol variation display game (number of fluctuations of the special symbol) in which this high probability state is continued is referred to as "ST number of times".

Therefore, in the case of shifting to the probabilistic state, as in the present embodiment, when the number of STs ends, the probabilistic state ends and the normal state (YJ = 00H) is shifted (probability change → normal). , Unlike this embodiment, the case where only the high probability state ends when the number of STs ends, for details, "Special symbol probability change function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time saving function, and open extension" There is a case (probability change → time reduction) in which only the "special symbol probability change function" is completed from the "functions" and the state is shifted to the "time saving state (YJ = 02H)". In the case of this embodiment, the number of STs is set to 65535 (see remark (3) in FIG. 4), and due to the jackpot lottery probability, the probability change state is substantially guaranteed until the next jackpot is won. Although it is treated as "probability change", in reality, if the number of STs is 65535 without winning the jackpot, the normal state will be entered.

Whether the number of STs is infinite (including the number of STs that can be continued until the next big hit is substantially won) or finite can be appropriately determined according to the playability. When the number of STs is set to a finite value, the denominator (value of the probability denominator) of the jackpot winning probability at the time of high probability is set to "F1" in consideration of the point that "it is not the number of STs that can be continued until the next jackpot winning". , When the number of STs is "F2 (natural number)", "0 <F2 <F1 (arbitrary number of STs less than the probability denominator)" or "F1 ≤ F2 ≤ 5 x F1 (1 to 5 times the probability denominator)" Within): It is preferable that the number of STs satisfies the arbitrary number of STs) ”with a continuous villa rate of about 63% to 99%).

(If you win the 4R time saving jackpot)
In the case of "4R time saving big hit", regardless of the game state at the time of winning the hit, after the big hit game, it shifts to the "time saving state". These jackpots are referred to as "time-saving jackpots" in that they are jackpots that trigger a transition to a time-saving state.

When the game is shifted to the above "time saving state", the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game is continued until the predetermined number of times is completed, and a big hit is made within the specified number of times (however, a small amount that does not trigger the transition to the internal gaming state). When the special symbol variation display game ends without winning (excluding hits), the time saving state ends and the game shifts to the normal state from the next game. In the case of the present embodiment, the specified number of times (time reduction number) related to the time reduction state includes "100 times (support time reduction A, time reduction jackpot: finite time reduction)" and "200" including the time reduction state related to "support time reduction" described later. There are times (support time reduction B: finite time reduction) "," 65535 times (support time reduction C: infinite time reduction that can be continued until the next big hit is actually won "(see remarks (2) in Fig. 4). Although one type of 4R time-saving jackpot is provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of time-saving jackpots having different times may be provided. In this case, at least one time-saving jackpot is time-saving due to support time-saving. It is the same as the number of times, and other time-saving jackpots may be different from the number of time-savings due to the support time-saving. Further, all the time-saving jackpots may be different from the number of time-savings due to the support time-saving.

Whether the number of time reductions related to the time reduction jackpot is infinite (including the number of time reductions that can be continued until the next big hit is substantially won) or finite can be appropriately determined according to the playability. When the number of time reductions is set to a finite value, the denominator of the jackpot winning probability at the time of low probability (value of the probability denominator) is taken into consideration in consideration of the fact that "it is not the number of time reductions that can be continued until the next big hit winning". When is F3 and the number of time reductions F4 (natural number), "0 <F3 <F4 (arbitrary number of time reductions less than the probability denominator)" or "F3 ≤ F4 ≤ 5 x F3 (within 1 to 5 times the probability denominator): It is preferable to set the number of time reductions to satisfy "any number of time reductions)" of the consecutive villa rate of about 63% to 99%).

(About loss)
Further, as shown in the drawing, a plurality of types of loss types A, B, and C having different symbol lottery rates are provided on the special figure 1 side. In the case of this embodiment, the relationship satisfies "Loss A> Loss B> Loss C". For example, Loss A is 95%, Loss B is 4%, and Loss C is 1%. Note that the special drawing 2 side shows an example in which one type of loss A is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of loss may be provided.

(About shortening the support time)
In this embodiment, a big hit (short-time big hit) is used as an opportunity as an aspect of the addiction relief function (supporting privilege) or for the purpose of expanding the degree of freedom of the game and improving the fun of the game. Instead, there is a "support time reduction" that grants a "time reduction state". This "support time reduction" is characterized in that the time reduction state is given without going through the big hit winning (condition device operation, accessory continuous operation device operation) (without going through the big hit game).

(A. Special electric operation type support time reduction)
If you win the "support time reduction", the condition device will not operate (because the condition device does not operate, the continuous accessory operating device will not operate), but as with the case where the "small hit" is won, the special electric accessory will not operate. May be operated to execute the opening / closing operation game (the large winning opening is opened / closed in a predetermined opening pattern), and then the time saving state may be given. In the present specification, the support time reduction for operating the special electric accessory is referred to as "special electric operation type support time reduction", and a series of opening / closing operation games resulting from this is referred to as "support time reduction opening / closing game". This support time-saving opening / closing game can be configured to include a predetermined start INT, an opening / closing operation game in which a large winning opening is opened / closed in a predetermined opening / closing pattern, and a predetermined end INT, as in the small hit game. .. Therefore, if the "special electric operation type support time reduction" is won, the time reduction state will be given through the support time reduction opening / closing game.

To put it simply, the special electric operation type support time reduction includes a support time reduction (small hit winning type support time reduction) that grants a time reduction state via a small hit winning, and a winning type different from the small hit type. There is a support time reduction that grants a time reduction status (time reduction symbol winning type support time reduction). The former "small hit winning type support time reduction" is suitable when it is desired to provide a special electric operation type support time reduction that grants a time reduction state via a small hit game. On the other hand, the latter "time saving symbol winning type support time saving" is when you want to manage the small hit type and the support time saving type separately, for example, the small hit game related to the small hit and the support time saving opening related to the special electric operation type support time saving. It is suitable when you want to control the game separately, or when you do not provide a small hit itself. In addition, as for the type of time saving symbol winning type support time saving, the time saving state is set without operating the special electric accessory (without performing the support time saving opening / closing game) as in the case of "special electric non-operating type support time saving" described later. There is a shortage of support to be given. It should be noted that it can be appropriately determined depending on the playability whether or not the support time reduction of the small hit winning type support time reduction or the time reduction type support time reduction is provided, and which support time reduction is provided by one or more.

(When providing a small hit and a special electric operation type support time reduction)
When "small hit (here, it means" simple small hit (hereinafter referred to as "normal small hit") "that does not give a time saving state)" and "special electric operation type support time saving" are provided, a small hit game And support time saving opening and closing game mode (opening and closing pattern of the big winning opening, production during the game (opening production (start INT during production), ending production (end INT during production), right-handed instruction production (launch guidance notification production), etc. If)) is the same or similar, it is possible to set the winning state as a concealed state (support time shortened winning concealed state). As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether he / she usually won the small hit or whether he / she won the support time in a short time. In particular, at least a part of the effect during the symbol fluctuation (the effect during fluctuation) between the case where the small hit is won and the case where the special electric operation type support time is won is made common, and the small hit and the support time are shortened in terms of the effect. It is preferable to configure which of the winners has been won in a confidential manner for a predetermined period. For example, in at least a part of the fluctuating period and the winning game period (small hit game and short-time support opening / closing game), which one is won is kept secret in terms of production. More preferably, a common hit variation pattern can be selected between the case where the small hit is won and the case where the support time is shortened, and the effect during the variation is the common effect mode. Then, during the period of the hit game executed after the end of the hit fluctuation, it is possible to notify whether the small hit or the support time reduction is won. The "common effect" referred to here may include a combination of stop decoration symbols. For example, when the decorative symbol related to the small hit winning is "123", the decorative symbol related to the support time reduction winning is also set to "123", and it is preferable to conceal which one was won from the stopped form of the decorative symbol. Of course, by making the effect during fluctuation different, the opening pattern of the big winning opening different, or the start INT and / or the end INT (opening effect and / or ending effect) different, either appearance or effect. It may be configured so that it is possible to notify (the player can recognize) whether or not the player has won.

Further, when a plurality of small hit winning types including the small hit winning type support time reduction are provided, the following (small 1) to (small 3) configurations can be used.
(Small 1) Of a plurality of small hits, at least one small hit can be made to function as a "normal small hit", and the remaining small hits can be made to function as a "small hit winning type support time reduction". For example, when a plurality of small hits A, B, and C are provided, the small hit A and the small hit B function as "small hit winning type support time reduction", and the small hit C functions as "normal small hit". In this case, the same number of time reductions may be given to both "small hit A" and "small hit B" that function as the small hit winning type support time reduction, or different times (for example, small hit A) may be given. In the case of, the number of time reductions is 1000 times, and in the case of small hit B, the number of time reductions is 100 times). Regarding the winning probability of the small hit, considering the degree of advantage (profit state) to the player, when the same or substantially the same time reduction number is given to the small hits A and B, "small hit C <small hit B ≤ small hit" When the number of time reductions given to the small hit A is larger than that of the small hit B, it is preferable to set the winning probability to satisfy the relationship of "small hit C <small hit B <small hit A". In addition, in the normal small hit (small hit C) winning and the small hit winning type support time saving (in this example, small hit A and / or small hit B) winning, the above-mentioned support time saving winning concealment state is executed. It may be a possible configuration.
(Small 2) All of the support time reductions A, B, and C shown in FIG. 4 can be small hit winning type support time reductions (in each figure, the support time reductions A to C are read as small hits A to C. Can be applied as appropriate). For example, if the small hit A is won, the number of time reductions is 100 (small hit A = the same time reduction performance as the support time reduction A), and if the small hit B is won, the time reduction is 200 times (small hit B = support time reduction B). (Same time saving performance as), and if the small hit C is won, the time saving number of 65535 times (small hit C = the same time saving performance as the support time saving C) can be given.
(Small 3) In the case where multiple small hit winning type support time reductions are provided, if a specific small hit winning type support time reduction is won during the time reduction state, a new number of time reductions can be set (updated) (renewal). The same applies to the above-mentioned (small 1) and (small 2) as well as the case). For example, in the case of small hit winning type support time reduction in which small hit A gives 1000 times of time reduction and small hit B gives 100 times of time reduction, if small hit B wins during the time reduction state, 100 times of time reduction is set. However, if the small hit A, which gives a larger number of time reductions than the small hit B, is won, it can be configured so that the number of time reductions is not set. More specifically, for example, when the small hit B (100 times of time reduction) is won at the current 30th remaining time reduction, 100 new time reductions are set in the winning game, and the remaining time reduction is 100. Updated every time. However, if the small hit A (1000 times of time reduction) is won, the new number of time reductions is not set, the winning of the small hit A this time is treated as invalid (it can be treated as a loss), and the remaining number of time reductions. From this, the amount for this game will be subtracted (remaining time reduction -1).

(B. Special electric non-actuated support time reduction)
In addition, after the winning game ends (after the special symbol fluctuation time ends or after the special symbol confirmation display time elapses) without operating the special electric accessory, or when the next game starts, the time is shortened. You may let me. In the present specification, such a support time reduction is referred to as a "special electric non-actuated support time reduction".

It is up to you to adopt one or more of the above-mentioned special electric operation type support time reduction and special electric non-actuation type support time reduction, or to adopt one or more of both support time reductions. In this embodiment, an example in which the "special electric operation type support time reduction" is adopted will be mainly described.

The "support time reduction" according to the present embodiment is the target of the big hit lottery, and like the big hit, the winner is won with a predetermined probability (for example, about 1/500) (the winning lottery target form). In detail, one of "big hit", "support time reduction", or "loss" (including "small hit" if a small hit is provided) is drawn by the winning lottery, and the "support time reduction" is won. Then, the support time reduction type (for example, any of the support time reductions A to C) is determined by lottery by a symbol lottery (see the remarks column (4) in FIG. 4). Although the lottery probability for shortening the support time is common to all the set values, the lottery probability may be different for each set value, or the same lottery probability may be used for a part of each set value.

(Support time reduction performance)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, a plurality of types of support time reductions A, B, and C are provided on the special figure 1 side, and a plurality of types of support time reductions B, C are provided on the special figure 2 side. By lottery, one of the support time reductions is determined based on a predetermined symbol lottery rate (see the column of symbol lottery rate in FIG. 4). In addition, the support time reductions A to C have different time reduction performances. Specifically, it is as follows.

(A) If you win the "Support Time Saving A", you will be given 100 times of time saving, which is the same as the time saving state given by the big hit (4R time saving big hit) (small privilege).
(B) If you win the "Support Time Saving B", you will be given 200 times of time saving, which is more than the time saving state given by the big hit (medium privilege).
(C) If you win the "Support Time Reduction C", you will be given 65535 times of time reduction (substantially continuing until the next big hit), which is larger than the time reduction state given by the big hit (a big privilege). When the number of time reductions is set to 65535 times, due to the jackpot lottery probability, the time reduction state is substantially guaranteed until the next big hit is won, which is "infinite time reduction".
To be precise, infinite time reduction means that the number of time reductions is "unlimited (infinite)", but the number of time reductions (for example, 10000 times or 65535 times) is substantially guaranteed until the next big hit. Is treated as belonging to "infinite time saving" in this specification. In addition, even when the number of indigestible time reductions (for example, about 5000 times) is given during the business hours of the pachinko hall, it can be treated as belonging to "infinite time reduction".

It is up to you to adopt one or more types of support time reductions A to C. In addition, there are no particular restrictions on what kind of support time reduction should be provided on any special map side. For example, at least one of the support time reductions A to C may be provided on the special figure 1 side and / or the special figure 2 side, or at least one of the support time reductions A to C may be provided only on one special figure side. Good.

In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, it is easier to win the support time saving, which has higher time saving performance, on the special drawing 2 side (lower starting port 35 side) than on the special drawing 1 side (upper starting port 34 side). The 10R probability variation jackpot is also easy to win. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to receive the lottery on the special figure 2 side.

In the figure, regardless of the game state at the time of winning, when the support time reductions A, B, and C are won, the number of time reductions is 100 times (finite time reduction), 200 times (finite time reduction), and 65535 times (infinite time reduction), respectively. Although it is shifted to the time saving state of, it may be configured as follows (Structure A) to (Structure G) by taking advantage of the peculiarity of "supporting time saving".

(Structure A: Fall transition avoidance function)
In order to prevent a “falling transition” situation such as a transition to a time-saving state with a low profitability, the following configurations (α1) to (α4) can be adopted.
(Α1) After the infinite time reduction is given, if the support time reduction for giving a finite time reduction (for example, 100 times or 200 times) is won, the infinite time reduction remains. For example, when the support time reduction A (time reduction 100 times) or the support time reduction B (200 times) is won during the infinite time reduction, the number of time reductions is controlled so as not to be updated to.
(Α2) During the gaming state (time saving state, probability change state) accompanied by electric support, the support time saving is excluded from the lottery target. Specifically, if the support time reduction is won during the game state (time reduction state, probability change state) accompanied by electric support, the winning is treated as invalid and the time reduction state due to the support time reduction (hereinafter, the time reduction state due to the support time reduction is referred to as "support time reduction". By executing a big hit lottery that excludes the support time reduction from the lottery target, it is possible to invalidate the support time reduction and not to give the support time reduction state. In the former case, the winning of the short support time can be processed in the same way as when the loss is won (if there are multiple types of loss, the same process as when one of the losses is won is performed. Can be done).
(Α3) Only during the probabilistic state, the time saving state (supporting time saving state) due to the support time saving may not be given. Since the probability change state (high probability state + electric support state) is more advantageous than the time saving state (low probability state + electric support state), if the support time reduction state is given indiscriminately during the probability change state, the game state falls. Because it ends up. If the number of STs is not infinite but a finite number (for example, a finite probability variation such as 100 STs or 50 STs), the next big hit is not promised during the ST depending on the number of STs, that is, during ST. The probability of a big hit consecutive villa may be low (for example, the ST middle consecutive villa rate is about 30% to 50%). In such a case, the number of time reductions due to the support time reduction and the profit degree with the finite probability change (advantage to the player (profit state given to the player (profit degree)) are taken into consideration, and even during the probability change state. , The support time saving state may be given. For example, considering the jackpot lottery probability (considering the so-called "TS" value), even if the time saving state is reached, the next big hit will be won during the time saving state. It is not necessary to invalidate the winning of the support time reduction that can give the number of time reductions that can be greatly expected (for example, the consecutive villa rate is about 95% to 99%). The jackpot winning probability is 1/189 to 1/240 (setting 6 to setting 1), and the support time reduction A (time reduction number 100 times), support time reduction B (time reduction number 200 times), and infinite time reduction (time reduction number 65535 times) are The rate of each consecutive villa in each time reduction when given is about 41.2% to 34.1% (time reduction 100 times) and about 65.4% to 56.6% (time reduction 200 times), respectively. , Approximately 100% (65535 times of time reduction). Support time reduction C that grants infinite time reduction grants a benefit that can be substantially promised to win the next big hit during the time reduction state, that is, the consecutive villa rate is about 100%. Therefore, the support time saving C does not have to be treated as invalid even in the probabilistic state. Also, as described above, the time saving number of times that the next big hit can be greatly expected to be won can be given during the time saving state. If the support time reduction, for example, the number of time reductions (for example, 720 times) that is three times or more the TS (1/240) of setting 1, the consecutive villa rate of about 95% or more should be given in settings 1 to 6. Therefore, the support time reduction that grants such a finite time reduction is in the probability change state, and it is not necessary to treat this as invalid. (Α4) In the present embodiment, when the electric support state is reached, “right-handed” Then, a lottery on the special figure 2 side may be received, and a situation may occur in which a big hit consecutive villa state can be aimed at. Therefore, in order to prevent a fall transition when receiving a lottery on the special figure 2 side, the special figure 2 side is , (1) No support time reduction, (2) Support time reduction that gives infinite time reduction, or (3) Support time reduction that gives more time reduction times than the time reduction jackpot (100 times in the case of this embodiment) More time saving times).

(Structure B: Addition function)
(I-20) If the support time reduction is won during the time reduction state, it will be added to the current remaining time reduction number (the current time reduction counter can be added to the time reduction number due to the support time reduction). For example, if the support time reduction A is won when the remaining time reduction number is 50 times, it is updated to "remaining time reduction number 50 times + 100 times = 150 times". In addition, a support time reduction that can be added and a support time reduction that cannot be added may be provided. For example, if the support time reduction A is won, it is added, but if the support time reduction B is won, it is not added. The addition function expands the range of playability and can improve the fun of the game. In addition, it is possible to enhance the game interest of the player.
(Means for limiting the number of times saved)
In addition, in order to prevent an excessive addition, the addition may not be performed more than a predetermined number of times (means for limiting the number of times of time reduction). For example, the upper limit of the number of time reductions due to the addition can be set to "300 times". If the support time reduction B (time reduction 200 times) is won when the remaining time reduction number is 150 times, it is limited to the maximum number of times "300 times" instead of "remaining time reduction number 150 times + 200 times = 350 times". To. Even if the additional restriction is applied, if the support time reduction C that grants the infinite time reduction is won, the restriction is lifted so as not to give the player a feeling of loss, and the infinite time reduction is achieved. (65535 times) may be given. In addition, when there is an addition, "+50!""+100" with respect to the number of notifications (displays) by the "remaining time reduction number notification effect (for example, countdown display)" described later, which notifies the remaining time reduction number of times in a dramatic manner. It is preferable to execute an "additional notification effect" that notifies that the number of time reductions has been added (increased), such as "!".

(Structure C: Infinite / finite time reduction promotion function)
Infinite time reduction can be granted when the support time reduction is won during the time reduction state (time reduction state promotion means). If the time reduction state is due to infinite time reduction, the support time reduction may be won or the number of time reductions may not be updated or may be updated. Further, instead of giving an infinite time reduction, a predetermined number of time reductions may be given. For example, if the support time reduction B is won during the time reduction state, the time reduction 200 times is originally given, but if the support time reduction state is won, the time reduction frequency, for example, the time reduction 300 times, is increased. It may be given. In addition, the maximum number of time reductions given by the jackpot and / or support time reduction may be given. In the case of the present embodiment, since the infinite time reduction (65535 times) is the maximum number of time reductions, the infinite time reduction is given. Further, it may be configured to give an infinite time reduction or a predetermined number of time reductions only when a specific support time reduction is won during the time reduction state. For example, if the support time reduction A (high probability of winning) is won, only 100 times of time reduction is given, but if the support time reduction B (low probability of winning) is won, the infinite time reduction is given. May be good. When the number of time reductions increases, it is preferable to bring out the above-mentioned "additional notification effect".

(Structure D: Time saving jackpot and support time saving according to special design)
When the number of types of support time reduction on the special figure 1 side is "X" and the number of types of support time reduction on the special figure 2 side is "Y", the following relational expression (a) is satisfied.
"X" = "Y", "X"<"Y", or "X">"Y" ... (a)
If the above relational expression (a) is satisfied, set as "X = 0 (no support time reduction on the special figure 1 side)" or "Y = 0 (no support time reduction on the special figure 1 side)". May be good.
Further, one or a plurality of types of support time reductions having the same time reduction performance (number of time reductions) may be provided on the special figure 1 side and the special figure 2 side (for example, support time reduction B is provided in special figures 1 and 2). , One or a plurality of types of support time reductions having different time reduction performances (for example, support time reduction C is provided in special figure 1 and support time reduction B is provided in special figure 2) may be provided. Further, the support time reduction may be a finite time reduction or an infinite time reduction, and the number of types is not particularly limited. Further, when the time saving jackpot is provided on the special figure 1 side and / or the special drawing 2 side, the time saving jackpot having the same support time saving and the time saving performance may be provided, or the time saving jackpot having different time saving performance may be provided (). For example, when one special figure side time-saving jackpot and support time-saving are provided, they may have the same time-saving performance or different time-saving performance). In the case of this embodiment, since it is "right-handed advantage" during the electric support, that is, it is easy to receive the lottery on the special figure 2 side, the support time reduction provided on the special figure 2 side has a shorter time performance than the special figure 1 side. It is preferable to set a high support time reduction. When the support time reduction for giving the infinite time reduction and the infinite time reduction jackpot are provided, it is preferable to standardize the number of time reductions set as the infinite time reduction (for example, 65535 times) to reduce the control load.

(Structure E, Structure F: About the lottery probability of shortening the support time)
(Structure E) It is possible to determine the winning probability of the support time reduction according to the set value. For example, the lower the set value, the higher the probability of winning the support time reduction. In this case, the lower the setting, the more you can benefit from the shorter support time, which can contribute to avoiding addiction. In addition, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning the support time reduction. In this case, the higher the setting, the higher the ball output rate can be obtained without making a difference in the winning probability of the big hit according to the set value.
(Structure F) The winning probability of the support time reduction (the total winning probability may be the total winning probability when there are multiple support time reductions) is the same (approximately the same) as the jackpot winning probability at the low probability, preferably lower than that. It is preferable to do so. This is because the support time reduction is a "supporting privilege", and it is preferable not to win the prize with a high probability. For example, in setting 1, since the winning probability of the jackpot is about 1/200 (see FIG. 4), the winning probability of the support time reduction is set to be the same as or substantially the same as 1/200, or lower than that. It is preferable to set it (in this embodiment, it is set to about 1/500). If the probability of winning the jackpot of the set value that can be set in the gaming machine is the same or substantially the same, or lower than that, the probability of winning the support time reduction will not be excessively high, so it is not necessarily specific. It is not necessary to use the jackpot winning probability of the set value, for example, the jackpot winning probability of the minimum setting 1 or the maximum setting 6 as a reference.

(Structure G: About the special electric operation type support time saving opening and closing game)
When a plurality of special electric operation type support time reductions are provided, the support time reduction opening / closing game mode corresponding to each support time reduction may be the same, but at least one of the support time reductions may be different. For example, in the support time reduction opening / closing game by the support time reduction A to C, the opening patterns of the large winning openings are different from each other. Specifically, the opening time of the large winning opening 50 is 0.4 seconds for the support time reduction A, 0.8 seconds for the support time reduction B, 1.8 seconds for the support time reduction C, and the like. In this case, the number of prize balls won by the support time shortening opening / closing game can be different. In this way, when the opening pattern of the large winning opening differs depending on the type of support time reduction, even if the number of time reductions to be granted is the same, the support time reduction can be set to have different advantages (profit status). There is an advantage.

(Regarding the form of granting the number of time reductions due to support time reduction)
Here, when the finite time reduction / infinite time reduction by the support time reduction is given, the following grant forms (Ω1) to (Ω4) can be used.

(Limited time saving form Ω1)
When there are multiple types (number of types A) of the number of time reductions due to the jackpot (the number of time reductions given due to the jackpot winning (time reduction state)), the number of types of time reductions due to the support time reduction (support time reduction state) is smaller than that. Determined by type (number of types B). Specifically, it is configured to satisfy the relationship of "number of types B <number of types A". For example, when two types (number of types A) of 100 times (time reduction number A) and 50 times (time reduction number B) are provided as the number of time reductions due to the big hit, one type of time reduction number due to the support time reduction (for example, 100 times of time reduction) is provided. ) Is given. As long as the relationship of "number of types B <number of types A" is satisfied, the support time reduction may be given a time reduction number (for example, 150 times) different from the time reduction number due to the big hit. In addition, two or more types of time reduction times (time reduction state) due to support time reduction may be provided (in this case, the relationship is "2 ≤ number of types B <number of types A").

(Limited time saving form Ω2)
When the average number of time reductions due to the jackpot is N and the average number of time reductions due to the support time reduction is M, it can be configured to satisfy the following relationships (Equation 1) to (Equation 3).
(Equation 1) It is configured to satisfy the relationship of "average number of time reductions N <average number of time reductions M". For example, when the number of time reductions due to the time reduction jackpot is 100 times and 75 times, the average time reduction number N is 75 times, so the average time reduction number M due to the support time reduction is set to a larger number of time reductions (for example, 100 times). To do. In this case, since the profit margin is higher in the time-saving state due to the support time reduction than in the time-saving state due to the big hit, it can be a nice support privilege for the player who is in the middle of the game. The average number of time reductions M may be an infinite number.
(Equation 2) It is configured to satisfy the relationship of "average number of time reductions N = average number of time reductions M". In this case, the time saving state due to the big hit and the time saving state due to the support time saving have the same degree of profit. In addition, "infinite time reduction" may be included in both the time reduction state due to the big hit and the time reduction state due to the support time reduction. In this case as well, "average time saving number N (infinite number of times) = average time saving number M (infinite number of times)", and the above (Equation 2) is satisfied.
(Equation 3) It is configured so as to satisfy the relationship of "average time reduction number N> average time reduction number M". In this case, since the profit margin is relatively lower in the time-saving state due to the support time reduction than in the time-saving state due to the big hit, it is possible to maintain the position as a "support privilege" in which the support time reduction does not give an excessive benefit. .. The time saving state due to the big hit may include "infinite time saving", and in this case, the time saving state due to the support time saving does not include "infinite time saving".

(Limited time saving form Ω3)
(4) As in the case of (Equation 3) above, the number of time reductions can be set to satisfy the following relationships (4α) and (4β), paying attention to the fact that excessive benefits are not given.
(4α) Determine the number of time reductions that satisfies at least the relationship of "number of time reductions due to support time reduction ≤ maximum number of time reductions due to big hits". In this example, the number of time reductions due to the support time reduction is set to be less than or equal to the number of time reductions due to the time reduction jackpot (for example, 100 times for the 4R time reduction jackpot). For example, the number of time reductions due to the support time reduction is 100 times, 90 times, 70 times, and the like.
(4β) In addition, when a plurality of time reduction jackpots with different time reduction times are provided, paying attention to the minimum time reduction number MIN and the maximum time reduction number MAX due to the time reduction jackpot, "the minimum time reduction number MIN by the jackpot ≤ the time reduction number by the support time reduction ≤ the jackpot" The number of time reductions may be such that the relationship of "maximum number of time reductions MAX" is satisfied. For example, if a plurality of time reduction jackpots 1 and 2 are provided, the number of time reductions due to the time reduction jackpot 1 is 100 times, and the number of time reductions due to the time reduction jackpot 2 is 50 times, the number of time reductions due to the support time reduction is 50 times due to the time reduction jackpot 2. As described above, the number of time reductions by 1 for the time reduction jackpot can be set to 100 times or less or less than 100 times. For example, the number of time reductions due to the support time reduction is 60 times, 99 times, and so on.
The time saving state due to the big hit may include "infinite time saving", and in this case, the time saving state due to the support time saving does not include "infinite time saving". Further, the minimum number of time reductions due to the big hit may be 100 times or more, and if the above (Equation 3) is satisfied, the number of time reductions due to the support time reduction may be 100 times or more. Hereinafter, the "time saving state due to the big hit (the time saving state given due to the big hit)" is also referred to as the "big hit time saving state".

(Limited time saving form Ω4)
Regarding the jackpot or support time reduction, it is possible to give a larger number of time reductions than the probability denominator of the jackpot lottery probability at the time of low probability. Further, it may be configured to give the same or substantially the same number of time reductions as the probability denominator of the jackpot lottery probability at the time of low probability. If the probability denominator is not a natural number, the value rounded down to the nearest whole number may be used as the number of time reductions. For example, if the jackpot lottery probability is 1 / 300.15, it is "300 times", which is a value rounded down to the nearest whole number. Further, when the probability denominator is less than 100, the value calculated by "the tens digit value x 10", and when it is less than 1000, the value calculated by "the hundreds digit value x 100" may be adopted as the number of time reductions.
In this way, by adopting the same or substantially the same value as the probability denominator or an approximate value, it is possible to generate an appropriate number of consecutive villas during the time saving state due to the support time saving. Specifically, since the rate of consecutive villas can be set to about 63% to 64%, it does not become an excessive privilege, and the number of times can be shortened to balance the profits of both the player side and the hall side. it can.

(About the Fuden open game related to the support time saving state and the Fuden opening game related to the time saving state or the probability change state due to the big hit)
The operation mode of the normal power open game related to the support time reduction state (hereinafter, abbreviated as "support time short time normal power open game") and the normal power open game related to the time reduction state or the probable change state due to the big hit (hereinafter, "big hit public power open game") The relationship with) can be configured as follows. The operation mode of the normal electric opening game mainly means an opening / closing operation pattern of the movable wing piece 47 when it becomes an auxiliary hit.
(I-4) At least the support time-saving Fuden opening game and the jackpot Fuden opening game are common. By standardizing the Fuden open game, it is possible to reduce the number of programs related to the Fuden open game. In addition, at the development stage, it becomes easy to calculate the ball output rate during the electric support state. Further, depending on how the production is shown, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the jackpot time is shortened or the support time is shortened.
(I-5) At least the support time-saving Fuden open game and the jackpot Fuden open game are different. According to this configuration, it is possible to make a difference in the winning rate between the support time saving state and the big hit time saving state, so that the playability is improved.

<5. About production>
(5-1. Production mode)
Next, the effect mode (effect state) will be described. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of effect modes for producing effects related to the game state are provided, and the transition control between each effect mode is possible in response to the transition (update) of the game state. Specifically, the effect mode can be changed when the internal game state or the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated (changed). The effect modes include "normal effect mode" related to "normal state", "probability effect mode" related to probabilistic state, "time saving effect mode" related to time saving state, and "hit middle effect" related to hit game. A plurality of types of production modes are provided according to each game state, such as "mode". In addition, in each effect mode, a background display (background effect) is provided as the background of the variable display screen of the decorative pattern so that the player can grasp what kind of game state the player is staying in in the effect mode. , It is changed to the production mode related to the game state, respectively.

For example, under the "normal production mode", the first background production reminiscent of the season "spring" (for example, the background production that displays the background image of the cherry tree) is associated with the season "summer" under the "time saving production mode". A second background effect (for example, a background effect that displays a background image of the sea), and a third background effect (for example, a background image of an autumnal tree) that is reminiscent of the season'autumn'under the "probability effect effect mode". (Background effect to display), etc., which can suggest the game state during the stay. Not only the background display is changed, but also the BGM, the decorative pattern (picture), the hold display mode, and the like can be changed to the effect mode related to the game state. Although the details will be described later, the effect mode can be changed according to the number of big hit consecutive villas and the number of remaining time reductions (see, for example, FIGS. 7A and 7B described later).

(5-1-1. Production stage)
Further, at least one production mode includes a plurality of types of "production stages", and it is possible to shift between these production stages. This effect stage is an aspect of the effect mode that produces an effect related to the gaming state, like the effect mode. For example, in the normal state, as the production stage belonging to the normal production mode, the "cherry blossom stage (production stage A)" that displays the background image of the cherry tree and the "rape blossom stage (production stage B)" that displays the background image of the rape blossoms. ) ”,“ Gamo Koei Stage (Direction Stage C) ”, etc., in which the background image of Gama Koei is displayed, and the production according to each production stage appears. These effect stages A to C may be shifted, for example, when a certain advance notice effect (for example, a stage change effect described later) is executed. The above-mentioned effect stages A to C belong to the normal effect mode, and the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) itself of each effect stage is the same. Therefore, in any of the effect stages A to C, the fluctuation pattern distribution table used when selecting the fluctuation pattern is the same.

The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) is configured to be capable of transition control between each effect mode according to the transition (update) of the game state, and is a functional unit (effect state transition control means) for transition control between a plurality of types of effect modes. ). Among the effect control commands sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU201), the effect control unit 24 specifies an effect control command including information on the game state, specifically, the current game state, or the game state. The game state (internal game state (YJ) and / or variable pattern selection mode (Tcode)) is grasped based on the information included in the specific effect control command that specifies that the main control unit 20 is to be transferred. The production mode is managed in a way that is consistent with the game state on the side, and the transition from one production mode to another production mode (transition between multiple types of production modes) can be controlled according to the processing status. Has been done. The specific effect control commands described above include, for example, a variation pattern specification command, a game state specification command, and a specific command (big hit start command, big hit end command) transmitted during a hit. If the effect control unit 24 can independently determine the game state, it is possible to control the transition of the effect mode or the effect stage regardless of the specific effect control command.

(5-2. Notice production)
Next, the advance notice production will be described. The effect control unit 24 is a big hit based on at least the fluctuation pattern information included in the fluctuation pattern designation command (specifically, the fluctuation pattern designation command and / or the decorative symbol designation command, the information included in the winning command described later, etc.). It is configured so that various "notice effect" related to the lottery result can be executed and controlled (notice effect execution control means). The main role of the notice production is to suggest (notice) the degree of expectation (well-known "winning expectation") of whether or not the winning type (including support time reduction) has been won, and the degree of expectation of the occurrence of a specific notice production (notice). It is a suggestion of the specific notice occurrence expectation). Specifically, it is configured to be able to execute at least the above-mentioned effect mode (including the effect stage described later) and the effect related to the big hit lottery result (at least the winning lottery result). Most of the advance notice productions work as "fanning effects" to fuel the player's expectation of winning. Typical notice productions include "reach production", "pseudo-continuous production", "player participation type production", "step-up production", "stage change production", and "look-ahead notice production". Along with these effects, there are various advance notice effects (cut-in effects, etc.) that occur in a complex manner (simultaneously or overlappingly) or independently.

(5-2-1. Reach production)
The above-mentioned "reach effect" refers to an effect mode accompanied by a reach state (variable display mode accompanied by a reach state), and specifically, an effect mode in which a game result is derived and displayed via the reach state. The "reach state" means that a part of the decorative symbols derived and displayed in the middle of the decorative symbol variation display game is a big hit (big hit winning) in the stage before the result of the decorative symbol variation display game is derived. It is a display mode in which a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been derived and displayed is performed while forming a part of the display mode. It is a variable display mode that suggests that the display mode shown is easy to be derived (there is a possibility of winning a big hit) and allows the player to expect a big hit. For example, when the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbol) indicating the jackpot winning (big hit occurrence) is a set of symbols such as "7 (left symbol)", "7 (middle symbol)", and "7 (right symbol)", it is predetermined. On the hit effective line, a part of the decorative symbol is a part of the symbol alignment, and the left symbol and the right symbol display "7" (so-called tempai state), and the middle symbol (remaining that does not constitute the tempai state). The symbol) is in a state of performing fluctuation display while performing high-speed fluctuation, frame advance, swing, enlargement / reduction, deformation, and the like. Therefore, even if the reach state is formed, the result of the decorative symbol variation display game does not necessarily become a "big hit", and the finally derived result is not a stop display mode (big hit symbol) indicating a jackpot. In that case, the result of this game will be "missing". In the above example, the left symbol and the right symbol constituting the tempai state (reach symbol) are symbols constituting the reach state and are also referred to as “reach constituent symbols”. Further, the timing of reaching the reach state is also referred to as "reach timing" or "tempai timing".

The above-mentioned "reach effect" includes a plurality of types of reach effects associated with the winning expectation. For example, the conventionally known "N reach (normal reach)" and "SP reach (super reach)" in which the expectation of winning is relatively higher than when N reach appears are included, and this "SP reach" is included. Many of them have a relatively long production time (variable time) than N reach in order to fuel the expectation of winning a big hit. Further, the SP reach includes special SP reach such as "SP reach", "SP reach + SPSP reach", and "SPSP reach". The contents of each reach will be described below.

(R1) "N reach" notifies the game result (win or lose (information related to the big hit lottery result)) without SP reach only by passing through the normal reach state after the normal fluctuation. It is a variation mode when it ends, and it is a reach production with the lowest expectation of winning. The N reach includes N reach 1 and N reach 2 having different winning expectations, and the relationship between the winning expectations is "N reach 1 <N reach 2".
(R2) In "SP reach (normal SP reach)", the first reach effect (SP reach) occurs via the normal reach (N reach 1 or N reach 2), and then the game result is notified and the game ends. This is the reach variation mode of the case.
(R3) In "SP reach + SPSP reach", after normal fluctuation, the first reach effect (SP reach) occurs via the normal reach, and once the loss is notified, the player wins more than the above first reach effect. This is a reach variation mode when a second reach effect (SPSP reach) with a high degree of expectation occurs (developed into another SP reach system) and the game result is notified and ended (hereinafter, also referred to as "developed SPSP reach"). ).
(R4) "SPSP reach" normally goes through the normal reach state after fluctuating, but does not go through the first reach effect (SP reach), that is, is omitted, and immediately the second reach effect (SPSP reach). Is generated (directly developed into SPSP reach), and it is a reach variation mode when the game result is notified and the game is terminated (hereinafter, also referred to as "direct hit type SPSP reach").

The degree of expectation of winning in the reach production changes mainly according to the high or low selection rate of the reach production. For example, the selection rate in relation to the jackpot lottery result so that there is a relationship of winning expectation of "N reach 1 <reach N2 <SP reach <developed SPSP reach <direct hit type SPSP reach" between the normal reach. Is stipulated. Further, for example, among the reach during the probable change shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, "Churensochu reach A <Churensochu reach B" and "Daliansochu reach A <Daliansochu reach B <Daliansochu reach C" The big hit lottery so that there is a relationship between the winning expectations of "Time saving medium reach A <Time saving medium reach B <Time saving medium reach C" between the reach during the time saving shown in FIGS. 39 and 40. The selectivity is defined in relation to the result.

The actual degree of expectation of winning changes depending on whether or not other advance notice effects (for example, pseudo-continuous effects) are involved. For example, even when an advanced SPSP reach appears, if a notice production with a high expectation of winning is involved, the expectation of winning can be equal to or higher than that of the direct hit type SPSP reach. In this specification, for convenience of explanation, Zhonglian Zhonglian Reach A, Zhonglian Zhonglian Reach B, Dalian Zhonglian Reach A, Dalian Zhonglian Reach B, Dalian Zhonglian Reach C, Time Saving Medium Reach A, Time Saving Medium Reach B and short-time medium reach C are treated in the same line as the reach belonging to "SP reach", but in some cases, Churenso-chu reach A and short-time medium reach A, which have low expectations for winning, should be treated in the same line as "N reach". Can be done.

In the present embodiment, the reach effect is passed through in the process of deriving and displaying the combination of decorative symbols indicating the jackpot. Therefore, the presence or absence of reach is a clue for the player to know the possibility of a big hit. Therefore, a plurality of types of "expected advance notice effects" are provided as an effect mode that announces (suggests) the possibility of reach, in other words, an effect mode that can more clearly announce the degree of expectation of winning. This "expectation notice production" plays a role as a fanning effect that announces the degree of expectation of winning, but it is possible to announce that a specific effect (for example, reach effect) may occur, or a specific effect. It also plays a role of foretelling that the production is definite. Therefore, for example, in the reach effect scenario, a certain advance notice effect may occur before the reach effect occurs, foretelling the possibility of the reach effect and also foretelling the winning expectation. That is, the winning expectation may be clarified and the winning expectation may be higher if one or more expected advance notice effects are accompanied, as compared with the case where the reach effect occurs alone. Such expected notice effects include a "pre-notice effect" that can occur before the reach effect and a "post-advancement effect" that can occur during the reach effect.

(5-2-2. Pseudo-ream production (pseudo-ream))
In the present embodiment, as one of the expected advance notice productions, there is a "pseudo-ream production (hereinafter, abbreviated as" pseudo-ream ")". The "pseudo-ream" refers to an effect mode accompanied by a pseudo continuous fluctuation display state (so-called "pseudo-variation") of a decorative pattern. This "pseudo-variation" means that part or all of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during one decorative symbol variation display game (using one or more pseudo-ream-dedicated symbols instead of the normal decorative symbol). A variable display mode in which a display operation such as re-variable display operation of a decorative symbol is executed from the temporarily stopped state is repeated one or a plurality of times. This point is different from the "look-ahead notice effect" described later, which can be executed over a plurality of symbol variation display games.

Basically, the rate of occurrence of "pseudo-ren" is set so that the higher the number of pseudo-variations, the higher the expectation of winning. For example, the expectation of winning a notice, for example, SP reach, is higher when the number of pseudo fluctuations is twice than when the number of pseudo fluctuations is once. Therefore, in the case of a production scenario including a reach effect, it is mainly generated in the stage before the reach state is formed (the stage before the reach effect), and after performing one or a plurality of pseudo fluctuations, the reach is the main fluctuation. The production is executed, and the final game result is derived and displayed. In the present specification, when it is referred to as "pseudo-N", it means the total number of times of pseudo-variation M times and this variation. For example, when it is expressed as "pseudo 2", it means "pseudo fluctuation 1 time + main fluctuation", and when it is expressed as "pseudo 3", it means "pseudo fluctuation 2 times + main fluctuation" (for example, pseudo fluctuation in FIG. 32). 2 + SP reach, pseudo 3 + SP reach, etc.). Further, when pseudo-reams 2 to 3 are not attached, it means "no pseudo-ream", and pseudo-ream does not occur (for example, N reach 2 and SP reach in FIG. 32).

(5-2-3. Player participation type production)
Further, in the present embodiment, there is a "player participation type production" as one of the expected advance notice productions. The "player participation type effect" belongs to the so-called "button notice effect", and a predetermined operation (for example, one press, long press, etc.) is performed on the operation means (effect button 13 and / or direction key 75). When repeated hits are made), the content of the effect can be changed based on the operation content. In the player participation type effect, during the predetermined button validity period, an "operation instruction effect" for instructing the operation means to perform a predetermined operation is executed, and the player operates the operation means during the button validity period. Then, based on the operation content, the effect being displayed changes to another effect (effect at the time of operation), and depending on the effect mode (effect content) before and after the operation, the winning expectation degree, the winning result, or the setting suggestion information Etc. can be notified. The effect control unit 24 sets the operation validity period (button validity period) in which the operation of the operation means is effective based on a predetermined setting condition (for example, a predetermined timing during the player participation type production). Means, pre-operation effect control means for controlling a predetermined pre-operation effect during the button valid period, and post-operation effect control for controlling a predetermined post-operation effect based on the operation of the effect button during the operation valid period. It has means.

(5-2-4. Step-up production)
Further, in the present embodiment, there is a "step-up notice production" as one of the expected notice productions. The "step-up notice effect" is an effect mode in which one or a plurality of stages of the effect step are used. This is a notice production mode in which the expectation of winning is increased when the stage is developed to a higher stage (the expectation of winning is the highest when the stage is developed to the final stage). For example, the three-stage production SU1 If it is a step-up production consisting of ~ SU3, "Direction SU1 (Step 1): Winning expectation is low", "Direction SU1 → Production SU2 (Step 2): Winning expectation is medium", "Direction SU1 → Production SU2 → Production" The higher the production step stage, the higher the expectation of winning, such as "SU3 (step 3): high expectation of winning." In addition, some step-up productions belong to the player participation type production, for example. , The operation of the operation means (effect button 13 or the direction key 75), or the elapse of the button validity period can lead to the development to the previous stage.

(5-2-5. Stage change production)
Further, in the present embodiment, a "stage change effect" may occur as one of the expected notice effects. "Stage change effect" means that the current effect stage is changed to another effect stage during the symbol variation display game (for example, at the start of the symbol variation display game or at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display game). It is a notice production mode that suggests the degree of expectation of winning by shifting. In "stage change production", the production mode that suggests the degree of expectation of winning according to which production stage the current production stage shifts to, and the type of cut-in production that occurs when the current production stage shifts (for example, after a blue background) The stage transition to the production stage is a notice production mode in which the expectation of winning is low, and the transition to the production stage after the red background indicates the expectation of winning, etc.). However, this stage change effect is an effect mode in which the "effect stage" changes as a notice effect, and even if the stage change effect occurs, the game state (YJ, Tcode) shifts (changes) and the background is displayed. Etc. are not changing. In addition, the stage change production may shift from one production stage to another production stage in order to prevent the production from becoming monotonous due to the continuation of the same production mode, not as a preliminary production (for example). , See the production stage of FIG. 51 described later).

(5-2-4. Look-ahead notice production: Fig. 5A, Fig. 5B)
"Look-ahead notice effect" (hereinafter abbreviated as "look-ahead notice") is an operation-holding ball (undigested operation-holding ball) that has not yet been used for executing a symbol variation display game (special symbol variation display operation). , The expected degree of winning regarding the operation holding ball (not only the expected degree of winning regarding the jackpot, but also the support time reduction described later) by utilizing the hold display mode and the effect in the symbol variation display game executed earlier in chronological order It is a production mode that can notify in advance (which may include the degree of expectation of winning).

The outline of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 5A, including the pre-reading notice. FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram provided for explaining the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 according to the present embodiment.

In a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (in the figure, below the display area of the decorative symbol), a hold display area 76 for displaying the number of operation-holding balls in Special Figure 1 and the number of operation-holding balls in Special Figure 2 are displayed. A hold display area 77 for displaying is provided, and the presence or absence of the operation hold ball is indicated by a lighting state (with operation hold ball: “○ (white circle)” in the figure) or an off state (without operation hold ball:). Information on the current number of pending balls is notified by the dashed circles in the figure).

The display regarding the presence or absence of the operation holding ball (hereinafter referred to as "hold display") is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (winning order), and in each of the hold display areas 76 and 77, the leftmost operation hold ball corresponds to the operation hold ball. It is displayed as the earliest (that is, the oldest) activated holding ball on the time axis among all the activated holding balls in the hold display. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, hold display units a1 to d1 (icon images) composed of hold icons (icon images) provided in a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 in the same number (4 pieces) as the maximum number of hold storages (4). (Corresponding to the special symbol 1 side) and a2 to d2 (corresponding to the special symbol 2 side) are provided. The display modes of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 are usually switched to the operation state (lighting state) by the same number as the number of operation hold balls existing at the time of pre-reading determination, for example, only three. Therefore, this hold display unit acts as a hold display means for displaying the number of operation hold balls. However, when executing the look-ahead notice described later, the hold display mode of one of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 corresponding to the hold display unit is changed to a predetermined look-ahead notice display mode (special hold display mode). However, this acts as a means of generating a look-ahead notice.

Further, on the left side of the hold display areas 76 and 77, a changing display area 78 for showing the operation hold ball actually used in the special symbol change display game is provided. In the case of this embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured so that an image in which the icon of the game execution hold K currently used for the game is placed appears on the icon of the seat J. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the oldest icon (icon image) of the hold a1 or a2 displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is the hold K during game execution. As an icon, the icon is moved onto the icon of the seat J in the changing display area 78, and the state is maintained for a predetermined display time.

Further, in the lower right corner of the liquid crystal screen shown in FIG. 5A, as a display area for a sub-effect (sub-effect) different from the main effect such as a decorative pattern or a notice effect, the operation holding balls of Special Figures 1 and 2 are held. , A sub-display area 79 capable of displaying information on the number of balls on hold for the operation of the liquid crystal, information on the variable display operation of the special figures 1 and 2, and information on the variable display operation of the liquid crystal is provided. The information in the sub-display area 79 continues to be displayed even when the display of the decorative symbol and / or the hold display unit is hidden in displaying the notice effect. Therefore, whether or not the symbol variation display game is currently in progress and how many operation-holding balls are present can be identified by the information in the sub-display area 79.

Depending on the game state (game mode or internal game state), the hold display area 76 is highlighted more than the hold display area 77, and conversely, the hold display area 77 is highlighted more than the hold display area 76. Can be displayed. For example, during the first gaming state (during the normal state (effect mode belonging to the normal mode)), the hold display area 76 can be highlighted. When the hold display area 76 is highlighted, for example, the hold display area 76 may be displayed preferentially, the hold display area 76 may be displayed larger, or the hold display area 77 side may be hidden. The same applies to the case where the hold display area 77 is highlighted, and the hold display area 77 is displayed preferentially, the hold display area 77 is displayed in a large size, and the hold display area 76 side is hidden.

Further, during the second gaming state (for example, during the time saving state (effect mode belonging to the time saving mode) or the probability change state (effect mode belonging to the probability change mode)), the hold display area 77 can be highlighted. Further, both the hold display area 76 and 77 are displayed during the first game state, and the hold display area 77 is preferentially displayed during the second game state (for example, only the hold display area 77 is displayed). Can be done.

(About pre-reading notice)
Next, the look-ahead notice will be described. Regarding the appearance control related to this look-ahead notice, first, when the operation holding ball occurs in the main control unit 20 (when the start condition is satisfied), the operation holding ball is a symbol variation display game (special symbol variation display operation). The "pre-reading hit judgment (pre-reading winning judgment, pre-reading symbol judgment)" for preliminarily determining the jackpot lottery result (winning lottery result, symbol lottery result) related to the operation pending ball is performed ( See "Random number determination process-Special stop symbol data creation process (steps S318 to S319)" and "Special electric accessory operation determination random number determination process-Special stop symbol creation process (steps S410-S411)" of FIG. 11 to be described later. ).

Furthermore, using the above-mentioned "look-ahead hit determination" result, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (variation pattern at the start of fluctuation) when the operation holding ball is used to execute the symbol variation display game in the future is determined in advance. "Look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination" is performed (see "Random number determination process at start opening winning (step S320)" in FIG. 11). This pre-determined variation pattern of the special symbol is referred to as a "look-ahead variation pattern". In this look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination, for example, it is determined in advance what kind of reach state the reach fluctuation pattern goes through, or whether the normal fluctuation pattern does not go through the reach state.

Since the pre-reading variation pattern is determined by using at least the winning lottery result (in this embodiment, the preliminary determination result of the winning lottery and the symbol lottery), the pre-reading variation pattern information includes the "winning variation" at the time of winning. Not only information on whether it is a "pattern" or a "loss fluctuation pattern" at the time of winning a loss (information on the winning lottery result), but also the presence or absence of reach (if there is a reach, its type) and the presence or absence of a pseudo-ream (pseudo). Execution information may also be included for a specific advance notice effect, such as information on (the number of times if there is a series). In this way, a series of processes for determining the look-ahead fluctuation pattern through the look-ahead hit determination is referred to as "look-ahead determination".

When the information of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, the effect control unit 24 performs the effect control process related to the look-ahead notice. Specifically, when the look-ahead determination is executed, the "hold addition command" that can specify the number of operation-holding balls at the time of the look-ahead determination (the number of existing operation-holding balls including the operation-holding ball that occurred this time) and the above-mentioned look-ahead fluctuation pattern When the main control unit 20 transmits a "winning command" capable of specifying information (at least the information obtained by pre-reading the winning lottery result at the start of fluctuation) to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 receives these commands. , Based on the information contained in the command, the effect control process related to the hold display and the look-ahead notice is performed.

Specifically, when the effect control unit 24 receives the hold addition command and the winning command, it performs a "look-ahead notice lottery" regarding whether or not to execute (appear) the look-ahead notice based on the look-ahead fluctuation pattern information. Then, when executing the look-ahead notice, an effect scenario related to the look-ahead notice is created, and the look-ahead notice is displayed according to the effect scenario (see FIGS. 5A and 5B). The look-ahead notice is executed with a higher probability for the "big hit" than for the "loss", and for the look-ahead fluctuation pattern with a relatively high expectation of winning. Therefore, the degree of expectation of winning is indicated by whether or not the pre-reading notice is generated. The pre-reading notice is for the pre-reading ball for this operation hold ball at the timing when the operation hold ball occurs, at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display game that is performed earlier in chronological order, or at a predetermined timing during the game. Notice may appear.

The above-mentioned hold addition command is the data on the upper byte side that enables the identification of the special figure type information (different from the special figures 1 and 2), and the data on the lower byte side that enables the information on the number of operation hold balls at the time of pre-reading determination. It consists of 2 bytes with. Further, the winning command is composed of two bytes of data on the upper byte side (MODE1) that specifies the winning result and data on the lower byte side (EVENT) that enables the content of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern to be specified as the look-ahead determination information. .. It should be noted that instead of using the two commands of the hold addition command and the winning command, one command may be used for transmission. For example, hold addition in which the data that can specify the special figure type information and the operation hold ball number information at the time of pre-reading determination is the upper byte side data, and the data that can specify the winning result information and the look-ahead fluctuation pattern information is the upper byte side data. A command (or a winning command) may be sent, and a look-ahead notice may be executed based on the command.

(Pre-reading notice at the time of winning: Hold change notice)
In this embodiment, when the look-ahead notice is executed (when the look-ahead notice lottery is won), among the hold icons of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the hold icon targeted for the look-ahead notice is, for example. , From the white color of the normal hold display (normal hold display mode) to the white flashing of the notice display, and the hold display (special hold display mode) with special hold colors and colors of blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors. Changing pending change notices can be executed. Since this notice of change on hold can appear at the time of winning (holding display), it is also referred to as "pre-reading notice of winning time system".

As a notice of this hold change, FIG. 5A shows an example in which the hatched hold display unit b1 has changed to a special hold display. Here, the display of the hold icon in white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow color means that the winning expectation is high in this order, and in particular, the display of the rainbow-colored hold icon is confirmed as a big hit. It is a premium hold icon (notice of reservation) that will be displayed. The blinking white icon display is a hold icon that suggests the possibility of the "step-up hold change notice" described later, and is expected to be the final hold color (hold color). May remain blinking white without changing). In the case of blinking white, if the hold display remains as it is, the winning expectation is the lowest among the special hold displays, but if it changes to another hold color, the winning expectation due to the hold color increases.

In the present embodiment, regarding the advance notice effect, if the big hit lottery result is lost, it is selected with a relatively low probability (low appearance rate), and if it is a big hit, it is selected with a relatively high probability (high appearance rate). As a notice production with a high expectation of winning, such as, if the expectation of winning is equal to or higher than a predetermined expected value (in this embodiment, the expectation of winning is 20% or more), the "high expectation (expectation of winning) is achieved. "High" notice production, and the others are treated as low expectation notice effects. In the case of the above-mentioned pending change notice, the winning expectations of blinking white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors are 1%, respectively. If it is 5%, 9%, 20%, 30%, 100%, "green, red, rainbow color" belongs to the high expectation notice production, and the others (blinking white, blue, yellow) are low. It belongs to the expectation notice production. When a look-ahead notice occurs, a high expectation notice (high number of pseudo-reams, SP reach, etc.) with a relatively high winning expectation during the symbol variation display game targeting the operation holding ball ), Combined with the content of the pre-reading notice production, the expectation of winning the winning will be further increased.

The existing operation hold balls are sequentially digested when the symbol variation display game is executed. At this time, in order to express that one operation-holding ball has been digested, the display position of the hold display unit corresponding to the existing operation-holding ball is moved forward (shifted to the left side in sequence), and the number of the display is reduced. Although control (shift display) is performed, the above-mentioned special hold display continues to be displayed continuously while changing the display position of the hold display during this period. In this respect, the look-ahead notice is a single symbol variation such as a pseudo-ream in that a dedicated advance notice effect can appear across multiple symbol variation display games (multiple symbol variation display operations). It is different from the notice production performed during operation.

The special hold display related to the hold change notice is (A) a case where it appears when a prize is won, in other words, a case where it appears at the timing of the hold display, and (B) a normal hold display (white) when a prize is won. However, there are cases where the normal hold display is changed to a special hold display (blue, etc.), and (C) the special hold display, which has a relatively higher expectation of winning than the current special hold display, is changed (for example, hold from blue to yellow or higher) In some cases, the color is changed step-up). In the case of (B) or (C), a predetermined timing during the shift display, a predetermined timing during the previously executed symbol variation display game, a predetermined timing during the appearance of a specific advance notice effect, and a hold. It is possible to change from one hold display mode to another hold display mode during a player-participation type production for a change notice (for example, during a button operation valid period). The hold change notice that changes to the hold display with a higher winning expectation as in (B) or (C) above is referred to as "step-up hold change notice".

Further, when the hold K during game execution is placed on the seat J, basically, the same display mode as the hold display mode in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is maintained, and the symbol variation display game is related to this time. A look-ahead notice (special hold display) for the operation hold ball can be notified to the player even during the game, but the hold display mode of the game execution hold K at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display game. May change to other hold display modes. Such a change in the display mode of the hold K during game execution is also treated as belonging to the above-mentioned step-up hold change notice.

As a general rule, there is no "falling down of the special hold display" that changes from the current holding color to the holding color with a relatively low expectation of winning, but if there is an exceptional downfall, the operation holding ball is correct. It is suggested that this is the same premium notice of change on hold as the notice of reservation. An example of a downfall is a case where the hold color changes to a hold display having a lower expectation of winning than the current hold display, such as "blue → white" or "red → blue". In addition, the hold display mode is not limited to the hold icon display (static display mode) by a still image, but the hold icon display by a moving image (animation) (dynamic display mode: for example, the hold icon is rotated, vibrated, swayed, and blinked (). It may be displayed with high-speed blinking or low-speed blinking).

(Pre-reading notice during design fluctuation: Pre-reading notice during fluctuation)
Further, in the present embodiment, unlike the pre-reading notice effect of the above-mentioned "winning time system", the "pre-reading notice during fluctuation" made when the symbol variation display game is started can be displayed. This pre-reading notice during change is also referred to as a pre-reading notice of "design change middle system (change start time change system)" because it can appear at a predetermined timing during symbol change display, unlike the above-mentioned pending change notice.

This "pre-reading notice during fluctuation" means, for example, displaying a notice image dedicated to pre-reading on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, and executing this in one or a plurality of symbol fluctuation display games (single or continuous display). ) Is a look-ahead notice. That is, the pre-reading notice during fluctuation temporarily holds the right to execute the symbol variation display game related to the establishment of the start condition when the game ball wins a prize at the start port and the start condition is satisfied during a certain symbol variation display game. At the same time, a look-ahead notice lottery is performed regarding whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect, and when this look-ahead notice lottery is executed, if there are a plurality of existing operation hold balls (hold memory) at that time, , All or part of the reserved memory, the symbol variation display game can be expressed with some relevance. For example. (For example, a preview image imitating the lightning bolt of FIG. 5B) is displayed. In this case, in each symbol variation display game, a look-ahead notice in which all or a part thereof is different may appear. For example, when appearing over three symbol variation display games, the first symbol variation display game is a thundercloud image, and the second symbol variation display game is a rain image (an image display expressing how it rains from a thundercloud) or. The thundercloud image and the third symbol variation display game can be a lightning bolt image. In addition, the winning expectation may differ depending on the preview image. In the above example, the thundercloud image can have a low expectation, the rain image can have a medium expectation, and the lightning image can have a high expectation. In this case, if only the thundercloud image is finished, the winning expectation is low, but if the lightning bolt image is displayed, the winning expectation can be dramatically increased. In addition, it may be used as a pre-reading notice of a step-up system in which the degree of expectation gradually develops (the degree of expectation increases) as "thundercloud image-> rain image-> lightning bolt image" each time the symbol variation display game is executed.

In the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice during fluctuation and the notice of pending change can appear independently. Specifically, the lottery for executing the notice of pending change and the lottery for executing the notice of pre-reading during change are independent lottery. Therefore, there are cases where the pending change notice is generated independently, cases where the variable look-ahead notice is generated independently, and cases where the pending change notice and the variable look-ahead notice are generated simultaneously (overlapping). It should be noted that the effect means used when executing the pre-reading notice during fluctuation and the content of the effect can be appropriately determined.

(Example of pre-reading notice production mode: FIG. 5B)
Next, with reference to FIG. 5B, an example of the look-ahead notice effect woven by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

In the figure (1), during the symbol variation display game (“↓” in the figure indicates that the decorative symbol is in the variation display), the upper start opening 34 is won and the operation holding ball on the special symbol 1 side is held. Assuming that the number is 3, the second operation hold ball on which the fluctuation start operation is executed is the target of the look-ahead notice effect. Here, the hold change notice and the change look-ahead notice are given. Indicates a case where and is duplicated. Further, here, it is assumed that the first and third operation-holding balls held earlier are the operation-holding balls for which the pre-reading notice is not executed (pre-reading lottery is not won).

As shown in FIG. 1 (1), the effect control unit 24 changes the hold display of the second operation hold ball, which is the target of the look-ahead notice, to the special hold display. At this time, the hold display corresponding to the first and third operation hold balls that are not subject to the look-ahead notice is maintained as the normal hold display (white). In the figure, the display mode of the hold display of the second operation hold ball, which is the target of the look-ahead notice, is changed from the normal hold display (white circle (○) mark) to the special hold display (circle with hatching). Shown. As a result, the player is notified that the pre-reading notice effect has been started. Note that FIG. 1 (1) shows that the symbol variation display game currently being executed has ended, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "246" corresponding to the loss.

The game progress shifts to the figure (2), and the main control unit 20 starts a special symbol variation display game based on the operation hold ball on the special symbol 1 side, which was the first (oldest operation hold ball). The operation hold ball is digested (one is digested), and the effect control unit 24 shifts the hold display mode corresponding to each operation hold ball to the left at the start of the special symbol variation display game, and the operation hold ball is released. The hold display mode indicating one digested state is set, and the decorative symbol variation display game based on the first operation hold ball is started. At this time, as a pre-reading notice during fluctuation, a dedicated background image (lightning effect by displaying a lightning bolt image) is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. As a result, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 has a display mode as shown in FIG. 2 (2).

Then, the game progress shifts to the figure (3), and it is assumed that the symbol variation display game currently being executed ends and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "351" corresponding to the loss.

Subsequently, the game progress shifts to FIG. (4), and the main control unit 20 plays a special symbol variation display game based on the second operation hold ball, that is, the operation hold ball that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect. The operation holding ball is started and the operation holding ball is digested, and the effect control unit 24 shifts the holding display mode corresponding to each operation holding ball to the left at the same time as the start of the special symbol variation display game, which is the second. Start the decorative symbol variation display game based on the operation hold ball. At this time, the special hold display of the hold change notice disappears from the screen at the time of the above shift, ends with the start of this symbol change display game (with the digestion of the operation hold ball), and then displayed as the game execution hold K. Will be done. In addition, the pre-reading notice during fluctuation (here, lightning bolt production) will also end at the end of the occurrence during this symbol fluctuation display game. FIG. 4 (4) illustrates the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 immediately after the start of the symbol variation display game. In the same figure (4), the lightning bolt effect of the pre-reading notice during the change (pre-reading notice during the change) is the symbol change display game (the symbol change display game related to the operation hold ball (second) subject to the look-ahead notice). It has been explained that the occurrence of the inside is terminated at the end, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the occurrence during the previous symbol variation display game may be terminated at the end. In this case, the pre-reading notice during the change will be terminated when the "special hold display" of the hold change notice is provided to the execution of the symbol change display game.

(5-2-6. Setting suggestion production)
Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to appear an effect mode (setting suggestion effect) that suggests information regarding the above "set value". For example, it is a setting suggestion effect as shown in (a) to (shi) below.
(A) "Low setting suggestion effect" that suggests a low setting range (settings 1-3, 1-2, 2-3, etc.).
(S) "High setting suggestion effect" that suggests a high setting range (settings 4 to 6, 4 to 5, 5 to 6, etc.).
(G) "Even-numbered setting suggestion effect" that suggests even-numbered settings (settings 2, 4, and 6).
(Y) "Odd number setting suggestion effect" that suggests odd number settings (settings 1, 3, 5).
(M) A "specific setting confirmation effect" that deterministically notifies a specific setting value (any of settings 1 to 6 may be used). For example, "setting N confirmation effect" that deterministically notifies "setting N". However, it is not preferable to inform the internal set value deterministically. The reason is that anything that definitively suggests a low setting region, such as setting 1 and setting 2 confirmation, reduces the player's willingness to play. Therefore, it is preferable to definitively notify any one of the settings 4 to 6 in the high setting region. In particular, if a setting suggestion effect such as setting 5 confirmation or setting 6 confirmation appears, the player's willingness to play can be improved.
(M) A "specific setting denial effect" that deterministically notifies that the value is not a specific set value (any of settings 1 to 6 is acceptable).
(S) "Specific range suggestion effect" that suggests the set value of a specific range. For example, settings 3 to 5 (α ≤ set value ≤ β) are suggested, settings 4 or more (α ≤ set values) are suggested, and a plurality of specific values of “settings 1, 3, 5, 6” are suggested. .. In addition, the appearance rate is different depending on the set value, and there is a high possibility of a certain set value, for example, a specific effect is difficult to appear in setting 1, moderately appears in setting 4, and easy to appear in setting 6. / It is also possible to suggest low.

The appearance rate (execution probability) of the setting suggestion effect can be appropriately determined according to the set value. For example, it may be set so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect decreases as the set value is relatively low. Further, the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, and one or more of the sound effect, the light effect, the image display effect, and the movable body effect can be used.

Further, the setting suggestion effect can appear at a predetermined timing in the symbol variation display game, for example, in combination with or independently of the advance notice effect. In addition, not only during the symbol change game, but also during the big hit game and the "customer waiting effect (demo start waiting display)" and "customer waiting effect (demo screen)" described later, which are waiting for the start of the game, will appear. be able to.

Further, by defining the appearance rate of a specific advance notice effect according to the set value, the advance notice effect itself can be made to function as a "setting suggestion effect". For example, the appearance rate of at least one of a specific reach effect, a specific pseudo-ream (a specific pseudo-ream mode or a specific number of pseudo-reams), a specific player participation type effect, and a specific look-ahead notice. By making it different according to the set value, the notice effect itself can function as a "setting suggestion effect". For example, "high setting rich" when a specific SP reach is likely to appear at the time of loss, "high setting rich" when a pseudo-ream 3 times (pseudo fluctuation 2 times + main fluctuation) is likely to appear at the time of loss, a specific button When an operation effect appears, it suggests "setting 6 is confirmed". In addition, it is possible to make the look-ahead notice mode dedicated to the setting suggestion effect appear by using the look-ahead notice effect. For example, when the hold icon blinks at high speed, it is a high setting rich, and when one or all of the hold icons are changed to a dedicated hold icon (dedicated character or item image), it is a "high setting rich" suggestion.

(About setting suggestion production during support time reduction state)
(I6) It is possible to execute a plurality of setting suggestion effects, and the execution of a part or all of the plurality of setting suggestion effects is prohibited (restricted) during the support time reduction state. Alternatively, the execution probability can be different from that of other gaming states. These include the following (I 6-1) to (I 6-4).
(I 6-1) During the support time reduction state, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect can be made lower than in the normal state. In this case, the execution probability of one or more specific setting suggestion effects can be lowered.
(I 6-2) During the support time reduction state, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect can be higher than in the normal state. In this case, the appearance rate of one or more specific setting suggestion effects can be increased.
(I-6-3) During the support time reduction state, the execution of one or more specific setting suggestion effects can be prohibited (restricted). The specific setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but for example, when the setting suggestion effect as shown in (a) to (shi) above can be executed, the execution of at least one setting suggestion effect is prohibited. Can be done. Specifically, during the support time reduction state, it is possible to prohibit the execution of setting suggestion effects that are less useful as setting guessing factors, such as (ki) even number setting suggestion effects and (yu) odd number setting suggestion effects. preferable.
(I 6-4) There is one or more setting suggestion effects that appear only during the support time reduction state. For example, only during the support time reduction state, it is possible to make the setting N final effect of (me), which is highly useful, appear as a setting estimation element.
According to this configuration, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion notice can be changed according to the game state. In addition, a specific setting suggestion effect can be made to appear only in a specific game state (support time shortening state). As a result, the production can be made diverse and the fun of the game can be improved.

(About decorative patterns during support time reduction)
The display mode of the decorative symbol in the support time saving state can be configured as follows.
(I-9) At least the decorative symbols in the support time saving state (for example, arithmetic numerals) and the decorative symbols in the normal state (for example, Chinese numerals) or the jackpot time saving state (for example, Roman numerals or Chinese numerals). Is a different decorative pattern. In this case, since the decorative design differs depending on the game state, the production becomes diverse. In addition, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the support time is shortened. In addition, since the decorative design can be displayed while waiting for customers (for example, the effect before waiting for customers), when the player selects a game table, it is easy for the player to simply check the display screen and the support time is shortened. Can be identified.
(I-10) At least the stop display of the decorative symbol after the power failure is restored during the support time reduction state, and the stop display of the decorative symbol after the power failure recovery during the normal state or the decoration after the power failure recovery during the jackpot time reduction state. It is a stop display eye that is different from the stop display eye of the symbol. According to this configuration, when a player or a person involved in a hall grasps the state of the first game table in the morning, it becomes easy to grasp whether or not the support time is shortened.

(About the hold display area related to the support time reduction state)
(I-11) After the end of the winning game with a short support time (at the end of the symbol fluctuation time (see FIG. 13), during the symbol confirmation display time, or when the symbol confirmation display time elapses (see FIG. 14)), The hold display area 77 (hold display area on the special figure 2 side) can be displayed with the above emphasis (priority). When the hold display area 77 is highlighted, as described above, the hold display area 77 is preferentially displayed, the hold display area 77 is displayed larger, and the hold display area 76 side is hidden. and so on.
When the support time is shortened in the symbol variation display game 1 on the special figure 1 side, it is preferable to change the priority of the hold display from the special figure 1 side to the special figure 2 side at the timing when the winning game ends (). During the support time reduction state, it is advantageous to hit right, and the symbol variation display game on the special figure 2 side is the main). By changing the priority of the hold display at the timing when the game on the special figure 1 side ends, before the first special figure 2 side symbol variation display game in the support time reduction state is started, The hold display of the special figure 2 can be preferentially displayed.

(About the management form of the support time saving state and the jackpot time saving state)
The support time saving state and the jackpot time saving state are the same time saving state, but the internal gaming state can be configured as follows.
(I-12) As the internal gaming state managed by the main control unit 20, at least the support time saving state and the jackpot time saving state can be configured to be manageable as one winning easy state (electric support state). In this case, the flag indicating that the support time saving state is in progress and the flag indicating that the jackpot time saving state is in progress may be managed by the "common flag (first specific time saving state in progress flag)". By using a common flag for both, it will lead to a reduction in RAM capacity. Further, the data to the effect control unit 24 and the transmission processing thereof can be easily shared, and the program capacity and the data capacity can be reduced.
(I 13) As the internal gaming state managed by the main control unit 20, at least the support time saving state and the jackpot time saving state can be managed as different winning easy states. For example, the game state determination number YJ related to the support time reduction state is 05H, the game state determination number YJ related to the jackpot time reduction state is 07H, and the like, and they can be managed as different internal game states. According to this configuration, since the support time saving state and the jackpot time saving state can be managed by individual flags, each game state can be easily grasped on the main control unit 20 side. In addition, it becomes easy to execute the process according to the game state according to the game situation. For example, different information can be transmitted to the effect control unit 24 regarding the support time reduction state and the jackpot time reduction state. As a result, on the effect control unit 24 side, it is possible to shift to different effect modes in the support time reduction state and the big hit time reduction state, and to easily execute different effects.

(Regarding the conditions for activating the support time reduction state)
(I-14) In order to shift to the support time reduction state, it is necessary to win the support time reduction type in the big hit lottery, but the number of operations of the special electric accessory by the normal small hit (the number of executions of the small hit game) is predetermined. On the condition that the number of times (for example, 3 times) is reached, the support time may be shortened. In this case, it is possible to shift to the support time saving state without going through the big hit lottery, so that the game playability can be improved. In addition, the existence of a mere small hit becomes important, the significance of providing a normal small hit increases, and the range of playability is greatly expanded.
(I-15) When a specific support time reduction is won, when a predetermined number of games (for example, 3 games) are executed from the winning game, the support time reduction is performed after the end of the game (after the end of the third game). It can be transitioned to a state. According to this configuration, it is possible to create a novel playability of planning to enter the support time reduction state in the game executed after the game won in the support time reduction, and the degree of freedom of the playability is expanded.

(About special playability using support time reduction)
(I-17) If the support time is shortened during the normal state, a predetermined number of time reductions will be given, while the support time will be shortened in a game state (time reduction state, probability change state, latent state, etc.) that is more advantageous than the normal state. If so, the number of time reductions is 0. For example, as a virtual gaming machine, at least the support time reduction D (low probability winning of 1/5000) is provided for the winning type on the special figure 1 side, and the jackpot type on the special figure 2 side is "10R that grants 1000 times of time reduction". It is assumed that only "time saving big hit (winning at 1/100)" and "special support time saving with 0 times of time saving (winning at 1/200)" are provided. During the normal state, the game progresses while receiving the big hit lottery on the special figure 1 side. Then, when the support time saving D with an extremely low probability is won, the time saving state is shifted, and the game is advanced while receiving the big hit lottery on the special figure 2 side. On the special figure 2 side, "10R time reduction jackpot" and "special support time reduction with 0 time reduction" are subject to the big hit lottery, so before winning the special support time reduction with 0 time reduction, the 10R time reduction jackpot will be won. For example, it will be a big hit consecutive villa, but if you win the special support time reduction before the 10R time reduction big hit is won, 0 times of time reduction will be given and the time reduction state will be forcibly terminated, and it will fall to the normal state and will be reamed. The villa chance ends. In other words, if the special support time reduction is not won, the transition to the normal state is avoided and the possibility of a big hit consecutive villa remains. It becomes possible to create a game machine. By providing a special support time reduction of 0 times, the range of game playability is widened, and novel playability can be expected.

(About the end condition of the support time reduction state)
(I18) The end condition of the support time saving state according to the present embodiment is set to end when the number of time saving times is exhausted or when a big hit is won. However, other termination conditions may be adopted. For example, when the normal open game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), when the normal small hit is won a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) (when the small hit game by a normal small hit is executed a predetermined number of times). , When one of the special figures (either special figure 1 or special figure 2) fluctuates a predetermined number of times, when the "ceiling privilege" described later is granted (when the ceiling function activation condition is satisfied), the ceiling described later It can be adopted when the game is reached. One or more termination conditions can be provided. As a result, the conditions for ending the support time reduction state can be varied, the range of game playability can be expanded, and the fun of the game can be improved.

<6. Directing means ＞
Various effects in the game machine 1 are expressed by the effect means provided in the game machine. Such a directing means may be any stimulus transmitting means capable of exerting a directing effect by appealing to human perception such as sight, hearing, and touch, and is a light generating means (light directing means) such as a decorative lamp 45 or an LED device. ), Sound generator (sound effect means) such as speaker 46, effect display device (display means) such as liquid crystal display device 36, pressurizing device that transmits contact pressure to the operator's body, vibration device that gives vibration to the player. (For example, the launch operation handle 15 trembles), a wind pressure device that gives wind pressure to the player's body, or a movable body accessory that exerts a visual effect by its operation is a typical example. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals to the visual sense like the image display device (image display means), but differs from the image display device in that it includes a display device that does not depend on an image (for example, a 7-segment display). When referred to as an image display device, it mainly refers to a type that displays an effect (image display effect) by displaying an image, and a device that displays an effect other than an image, such as a 7-segment display, is a concept of the above-mentioned effect display device. Included in.

<7. Game mode transition form: Fig. 6>
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the contents of the "game mode" related to the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode), the transition control between the game modes (between the game states), and the game mode according to the present embodiment. The production mode related to the above will be described. FIG. 6 is a game flow showing an outline of each game mode and the effect mode related thereto.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, a plurality of types of game modes such as "normal mode", "time saving mode", and "probability variation mode" are provided, and the game is played under these game modes. Progress is controlled. In the following, it is explained that the player follows an advantageous striking method according to the gaming state, and unless otherwise specified, in the case of a left striking advantage (normal state), "design variation display game 1 on the special figure 1 side". Is executed, and in the case of right-handed advantage (probability change state, time saving state), it is assumed that the "design variation display game 2 on the special figure 2 side" is executed.

(7-1. About "normal mode")
The normal mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is related to the normal state (YJ = 00H), and this normal mode is the initial start when the RAM in the area is cleared by the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation. It is in the game mode of. ..

This normal mode includes a "normal mode" in which the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is "00H". This "normal mode" is a game mode in which the player can stay for the longest time while the game is in progress. Basically, a jackpot or support time reduction is won from the normal mode, and other game modes (probability change mode and time reduction mode described later). Will be migrated to.

(7-1. Normal mode)
During the above-mentioned "normal mode", the player stays in the "normal effect mode" that produces an effect related to the normal mode. In the normal effect mode, as a background effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 7B (b) and 7B (c), an effect expressing an air battle in which fighters fly around appears, and is also referred to as an "air battle mode".

(7-2. About "probability change mode")
Next, the "probability variation mode" will be described. As shown in the figure, the probabilistic mode is a game mode in which the internal gaming state is related to the probabilistic state (YJ = 01H), and the probabilistic mode has different fluctuation pattern selection modes, "probability mode 1 to 3 (Tcode =" 01H). "~" 03H ")" is included. This probabilistic mode can be transitioned to when a 10R probable jackpot or a 4R probabilistic jackpot is won (see FIG. 4).

In the case of the present embodiment, at the time of the first hit (winning in the normal mode), the game is shifted to the "probability change mode 1" belonging to the probability change mode, and the big hit is continuously won without falling from the probability change mode 1 to the normal mode. (Continuous villa) Then, according to the number of winnings (number of consecutive villas), the transition is gradually made to "probability change mode 1 ⇒ probability change mode 2 ⇒ probability change mode 3". That is, the number of consecutive villas is defined as a change condition (transition condition) of the game mode. For example, the number of consecutive villas is shifted to the probability change mode 1 up to the third time, and the number of consecutive villas is changed to the probability change mode from the fourth time to the sixth time. It shifts to 2 and shifts to probability variation mode 3 after the 7th consecutive villa (see FIG. 7A). By changing the probabilistic mode according to the number of consecutive villas, the production and playability during the consecutive villas can be diversified, and the game entertainment of the player can be greatly enhanced. In the case of the present embodiment, since the probabilistic state is infinitely probable (the number of STs is 65535, which is a substantially infinite number of times), it is actually possible to fall from the probabilistic state to the normal state (from the probabilistic mode to the normal mode). Absent. However, when a finite probability change (for example, the number of STs is 50 times, 100 times, etc.) is adopted as the probability change state, the total number of STs is digested without winning a big hit during the probability change state (probability change mode), and the normal state. There is a possibility of falling into (normal mode).

Here, in order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, first, the above-mentioned "number of consecutive villas" counting method used as an opportunity to shift to the game mode will be described.

The above "number of consecutive villas" will be described with reference to the "example of counting the number of consecutive villas" shown in FIG. 7A (a). As shown in Fig. (A), the count of the number of consecutive villas is basically "Probability change jackpot (first hit) ⇒ Probability change jackpot during probabilistic state (2 consecutive villas) ⇒ Probability change jackpot during probabilistic state (3 consecutive villas) ⇒ Probability change jackpot during probabilistic state (4 consecutive villas) ⇒ Probability change jackpot during probabilistic state (5 consecutive villas) ⇒ Probability change jackpot during probabilistic state (6 consecutive villas) ⇒ Probability change jackpot during probabilistic state (7 consecutive villas) The number of consecutive wins (number of consecutive villas) of the probabilistic jackpot until the transition to the normal mode (normal state) is counted as in "...". The "probability variation 1", "probability variation 2", and "probability variation 3" shown in the figure indicate the probability variation mode 1, the probability variation mode 2, and the probability variation mode 3, respectively.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the time saving big hit (4R time saving big hit) is provided, it becomes a problem whether or not the time saving big hit is to be counted as the number of consecutive villas.

<(A-1) Case where short-time jackpots are not counted (no count)>
As shown in the figure (A-1), the time saving jackpot may be excluded from the count of the number of consecutive villas. In the case shown in the figure, the time-saving jackpot won during the probability variation mode 1 of the second consecutive villa is not counted (no count). In the case of this case, the actual number of consecutive villas for a big hit is 7, but the number of consecutive villas is counted as "5 consecutive villas".

<(A-2) Case of clearing the count of the number of consecutive villas when winning a short-time jackpot>
As shown in the figure (A-2), when a short-time jackpot is won, the count of the number of consecutive villas may be cleared to zero. In the case shown in the figure, the number of consecutive villas becomes "zero" due to the time-saving jackpot won during the second consecutive villa mode 1, and the probability-changing jackpot won in the subsequent time-saving state is the first consecutive villa jackpot, that is, the first hit. It is treated as the same count as the time.

When the probability variation jackpot is to be counted, it is free to adopt either the counting method (A-1) or (A-2) described above.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3B, all jackpots may be counted. In this case, as shown in the figure, even if the first hit is a short-time jackpot, this is counted as the first consecutive villa, and after that, the number of consecutive villas is counted each time the jackpot is won until it falls to the normal state (normal mode). Go +1. In the case shown in the figure, the time saving jackpot is 3 times (first hit, 3rd consecutive villa, 4th consecutive villa), and the probability change jackpot is 4 times (2nd consecutive villa, 5th consecutive villa, 6th consecutive villa, 7th consecutive villa). ), A total of 7 big hits were won, so the number of consecutive villas will be 7 times.

The "number of consecutive villas" is counted by the "number of consecutive villas counting means" in which the main control unit 20 is responsible for its functional unit. The consecutive villa count counting means functions as a functional unit that counts the number of consecutive villas in a specific game period on condition that the winner is won. The number of consecutive villas is counted by the main control unit 20. The "number of consecutive villas" is the number of times the jackpot is won (+1 for each jackpot win) or the number of times the jackpot game is executed (for example, execution of the jackpot game). +1) for each, or monitor the number of operations of the condition device or continuous accessory operating device related to the jackpot to be counted (for example, ON (operation) / OFF (non-operation) of the condition device or continuous accessory operating device) , +1) may be set each time it is turned on. In the case of the present embodiment, in the jackpot winning game, a process of designating the game state after the jackpot game is performed (“Game state transition preparatory process during special symbol change start process (step)” in FIG. See S412) ”), and the number of consecutive villas counts the number of big hits.

In addition, although the support time reduction does not belong to the big hit, it is not counted, but the support time reduction may also be counted. However, if the support time reduction is to be counted, the special electric accessory will be activated and the prize ball will be obtained. The "special electric operation type support time reduction" will be counted and the special electric accessory will not be activated to obtain the prize ball. It is preferable to exclude the "special electric non-actuated support time reduction" that cannot be counted. In addition, a "small hit" in which a special electric accessory is activated may also be counted. Since the condition device and the continuous accessory operating device do not operate for the special electric operation type support time reduction and small hit, when counting these, the number of executions of the support time reduction opening / closing game and the small hit game (the number of operations of the special electric accessory) Just count.

(7-2-1. Features of probabilistic mode)
Next, the feature points of the probabilistic mode (probability mode 1 to 3) according to the present embodiment will be described. As described above, the probability variation modes 1 to 3 are game modes in which the variation pattern selection modes (Tcodes) are different (see FIG. 43), and the variation pattern distribution tables corresponding to the probability variation modes 1 to 3 (FIG. 33, (See FIG. 34) is selected. By utilizing this, it is possible to create a probability variation mode in which each of the probability variation modes 1 to 3 is characteristic.
For example, in the variation pattern distribution table for probability variation mode 1, a variation pattern with a variation time of 2 seconds (for example, normal variation) is selected with high probability, and in the variation pattern distribution table for probability variation mode 2, the variation pattern is selected. A fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected with a high probability, and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 4 seconds is selected with a high probability in the fluctuation pattern distribution table for probability variation mode 3 (Fig.). 34 FH11, FH15, FH19). In this way, the average fluctuation time of the special symbol related to each probability variation mode, in other words, the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game (average execution time or unit time of the symbol variation display game per game). Number of executions of the symbol variation display game per hit: Hereinafter, it is also referred to as "average digestion time"). The average digestion time of the above-mentioned symbol variation display game is at least the average digestion time at the time of loss, that is, the "average variation time of the loss variation pattern" in each probability variation mode.

In the case of this embodiment, the relationship of the average digestion time related to the probabilistic mode is defined to satisfy "probability mode 3 <probability mode 2 <probability mode 1". That is, in relation to the fluctuation state between the probability variation modes, the probability variation mode 1 is controlled under the “high speed fluctuation state”, the probability variation mode 2 is controlled under the “medium speed fluctuation state”, and the probability variation mode 3 is controlled under the “low speed fluctuation state”. That is, the average digestion time is controlled to be longer as the number of consecutive villas increases. As long as the average digestion time in each mode satisfies the above-mentioned relationship of "probability change mode 3 <probability change mode 2 <probability change mode 1", the time is not particularly limited, but the probability change mode is a game related to the probability change state. Since it is a mode and the "special symbol time saving function" operates during the probability variation mode, each fluctuation state is at least shorter than the average digestion time of the normal mode (normal state).

As described above, the reason for defining the relationship of the average digestion time (game digestion speed) related to the probability variation mode in "probability variation mode 3 <probability variation mode 2 <probability variation mode 1" is as follows.

In recent years, in order to moderately suppress the agitation of gambling, regulations have been set on the ball ejection performance of gaming machines by legal request. For example, the ball ejection rate (safe ball / out ball) in the short-term test (1 hour) related to the above type test is limited from the upper limit ball ejection rate "300% (old standard)" to "220% (new standard)". (Rules for certification of gaming machines and certification of types, etc. Appendix 4 Technical standards for pachinko gaming machines (related to Article 6) (1) Standards for performance (c), etc.). This regulation has a great influence on the ball ejection performance, especially the ball ejection performance at the time of consecutive villas, and if this regulation is observed, the "ball ejection performance" of the ball ejection can be reduced to about 2/3 of the conventional ball ejection performance. Specifically, if the firing time is 1 hour, the number of out balls is 6000 (the launching performance of the launching device 32 is 100 shots / minute x 60 minutes = 6000 shots), and according to the old standard, the upper limit ball ejection rate is "300". % ”, So safe balls can be allowed up to 18,000 shots per hour (6000 shots x 300% = 18,000 shots / h). However, since the upper limit ball ejection rate is limited to "220%" under the new standard, the upper limit of safe balls will be reduced to 13200 shots per hour (6000 shots x 220% = 13200 shots / h). Especially in the time saving state and the probable change state, it will be under the high base state (under the electric support state), so if the big hits are excessively consecutive, the upper limit ball output rate of 220% (13,200 shots) will easily be exceeded. Therefore, it becomes non-conforming in the type test. For example, when the base value under the electric support state is 70 (BA70), the number of safe balls in the open game is 4200 in one hour (BA70 × 100 shots / minute × 60 minutes = 4200 shots). Therefore, under the old standard, it is possible to pay out "13,800 shots" of "18,000 shots-4200 shots" by a jackpot game, but under the new standard, "9000 shots" of "13200 shots-4200 shots". You can only pay out. Therefore, under the above regulations, it is required to devise a device to control the ball ejection performance so that the ball ejection performance can be easily passed (conforming) without impairing the ball ejection feeling as much as possible.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the number of consecutive villas increases, the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game becomes longer, and the ball ejection speed when a big hit is consecutive villas increases extremely. We are trying to keep things down.

On the other hand, by adjusting the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game according to each game mode (here, each probability change mode 1 to 3), the degree of freedom of game playability and production is increased, and the game is deepened. You can also let it. Specifically, the above-mentioned "high-speed fluctuation state" is mainly useful in a game mode (game state) that emphasizes playability, such as "increasing the average digestion speed of the game and increasing the time efficiency related to the progress of the game". .. During the probability change mode (probability change state), it becomes "electric support state + high probability state (special symbol probability change function operation) + special symbol time reduction state (special symbol time reduction function operation)", and at least compared to the normal mode, the symbol variation display game The average digestion time is relatively short, and the game state is devised so that the big hit can be easily won. However, in such a game state, some players may enjoy the production rather than enjoying the production. Many players want to get a big hit quickly. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of the probability variation mode 1, it is easy to select a variation pattern having a relatively short variation time, and a “high-speed variation state” is generated. On the other hand, under the "medium speed fluctuation state" or the "low speed fluctuation state", the average digestion time of the symbol fluctuation display game is longer than that of the "high speed fluctuation state", but instead, it is possible to take a longer production time. Because it can be done, it is useful for a game mode that emphasizes playability such as "enjoying the production".

As described above, regarding the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game, the relationship of "probability variation mode 3 (low speed variation state) <probability variation mode 2 (medium speed variation state) <probability variation mode 1 (high speed variation state)" is given. Therefore, in particular, regarding the "loss variation pattern distribution table (FIG. 34)" that is referred to at the time of loss that is most likely to be encountered in the progress of the game, it is preferable to have the following configurations (T1) to (T19). .. The present invention is not necessarily limited to the relationship between the three probabilistic modes 1 to 3. That is, the present invention has a probability variation mode in which the number of consecutive villas is less than a predetermined number (hereinafter referred to as "probability variation mode A") and a probability variation mode in which the number of consecutive villas is equal to or greater than the predetermined number (hereinafter referred to as "probability variation mode B"). When the average digestion time between the probabilistic mode A and the probabilistic mode B is compared, the configuration may satisfy the relationship of "probability change mode A <probability change mode B" (modification example A and modification described later). B is the same). Hereinafter, when the term "probability change mode A ⇒ probability change mode B" is used, the meaning of "probability change mode 1 ⇒ probability change mode 2 ⇒ probability change mode 3" is also included.

(T1) The average fluctuation time of normal fluctuation is lengthened in the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B". In addition, one or a plurality of normal fluctuations can be provided.
(T2) The average fluctuation time of reach fluctuation is lengthened in the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B". In addition, one or a plurality of reach fluctuations can be provided.
(T3) In the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B", the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation having the highest selectivity is lengthened.
(T4) The fluctuation time of the reach fluctuation having the highest selectivity is lengthened in the order of “probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B”.
(T5) The selectivity of normal fluctuation is lowered in the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B". In addition, one or a plurality of normal fluctuations can be provided.
(T6) The selectivity of reach variation is increased in the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B". In addition, one or a plurality of reach fluctuations can be provided.
(T7) The fluctuation time of the shortest normal fluctuation in each mode is lengthened in the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B".
(T8) The fluctuation time of the shortest reach fluctuation in each mode is lengthened in the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B".
(T9) The types of normal fluctuations are reduced in the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B".
(T10) The types of reach fluctuations are increased in the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B".
(T11) When "first fluctuation time <second fluctuation time" is set, the types of fluctuation patterns of the second fluctuation time or more are increased in the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B". The "variation pattern of the second fluctuation time or more" may be a normal fluctuation or a reach fluctuation (the same applies hereinafter).
(T12) When "first fluctuation time <second fluctuation time" is set, the types of fluctuation patterns having the first fluctuation time or less are reduced in the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B". The "variation pattern of the first fluctuation time or less" may be a normal fluctuation or a reach fluctuation (the same applies hereinafter).
(T13) When "first fluctuation time <second fluctuation time" is set, the probability variation mode A has no fluctuation pattern of the second fluctuation time or more, and the probability variation mode B has a fluctuation pattern of the second fluctuation time or more.
(T14) When "first fluctuation time <second fluctuation time" is set, the probability variation mode A has a fluctuation pattern of the first fluctuation time or less, and the probability variation mode B has no fluctuation pattern of the first fluctuation time or less.
(T15) When "first fluctuation time <second fluctuation time" is set, the probability variation mode 1 and the probability variation mode 2 have no variation pattern of the second variation time or more, and the probability variation mode 3 has the second variation time or more. There is a fluctuation pattern.
(T16) When "first fluctuation time <second fluctuation time" is set, the probability variation mode 1 and the probability variation mode 2 have a variation pattern of the first variation time or less, and the probability variation mode 3 has a variation pattern of the first variation time or less. There is no fluctuation pattern.
(T17) In the probability variation mode A and the probability variation mode B, the variation selected when the operation hold ball at the start of the variation (excluding the operation hold ball used for the current variation display operation, the number of existing operation hold balls) is 0. The fluctuation time of the pattern is set to a common (same or substantially the same) fluctuation time, and when the operation holding ball is other than 0, fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times can be selected. For example, in the probabilistic variation modes 1 to 3, when the number of balls on hold is 0, the normal fluctuation 8s type (in this example, the normal fluctuation 8s in the small villa, the normal fluctuation 8s in the middle villa, the normal fluctuation in the Dalian villa). Only the fluctuation 8s) is selected, and when the operation holding ball is other than 0, fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times can be selected. In this case, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that is likely to be selected when the operation holding ball is other than 0 is lengthened in the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B".
(T18)) The normal variation is common in the probability variation mode A and the probability variation mode B, and the selectivity of the reach variation is set to the high probability in the order of “probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B”. For example, the normal variation is common in the probabilistic variation modes 1 to 3, and the selectivity of the reach variation is set to the high probability in the order of "probability variation mode 1 ⇒ probability variation mode 2 ⇒ probability variation mode 3".
(T19) The normal fluctuation is common between the probability variation mode A and the probability variation mode B, and the selection rate of the reach variation having a relatively long fluctuation time is set to a high probability in the order of “probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B”. For example, the normal fluctuations are common in the probability variation modes 1 to 3, and the selection rate of the reach variation having a relatively long fluctuation time is set to a high probability in the order of "probability variation mode 1 ⇒ probability variation mode 2 ⇒ probability variation mode 3".

Since the operation-holding balls are likely to be accumulated during the electric support state, the above-mentioned configurations (T1) to (T6) are set by paying attention to the fluctuation pattern that is easily selected when the number of operation-holding balls is relatively large. It can be said that it is important to adopt the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table that has. On the other hand, since it is difficult for the operation holding balls to accumulate in the state without electric support as in the latent probability state, the above-mentioned "probability change mode 3 (low speed fluctuation state) <probability change mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) <probability change mode" In order to realize "1 (high-speed fluctuation state)", the loss fluctuation pattern distribution having the configurations (T1) to (T19) is focused on the fluctuation pattern that is easily selected when the number of operation holding balls is relatively small. It is important to have a table.

Further, the fluctuation pattern distribution table of the winning system shown in FIG. 33 can be configured as shown in (T20) to (T27) below.

(T20) In the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B", the fluctuation time of the reach variation that is easily selected when winning is lengthened.
(T21) When the degree of advantage (profit degree) is "1st winning type <2nd winning type", it is relatively fluctuating time to win the 2nd winning type than to win the 1st winning type. Long reach variation is likely to be selected. In this case, the fluctuation time of the reach fluctuation can be lengthened in the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B".
(T22) When the degree of advantage (the degree of profit) is "1st winning type <2nd winning type", the reach fluctuation when the 1st winning type is won is common (the fluctuation time of the reach fluctuation is the same). The reach fluctuations that are likely to be selected when the second winning type is won are different (the fluctuation time of the reach fluctuations is different). In this case, the fluctuation time of the reach fluctuation can be lengthened in the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B".
(T23) The fluctuation time of the longest reach variation (first winning longest reach variation) that can be selected at the time of winning in the probability variation mode A is set to "R seconds", and the longest reach variation that can be selected at the time of winning in the probability variation mode B (second). When the fluctuation time of the winning longest reach fluctuation) is set to "S seconds",
R / S value (variation time extension rate at the time of winning) and
The fluctuation time of the longest reach variation (first loss longest reach variation) that can be selected at the time of loss in probability variation mode A is set to "T seconds", and the longest reach variation that can be selected at the time of loss in probability variation mode B (second loss longest reach). When the fluctuation time of (variation) is set to "U seconds",
It is different from the T / U value (variation time extension rate at the time of loss). In this case, "T / U"<"R / S" can be set. If the degree of advantage (profit degree) is "first winning type <second winning type", the first winning type The value of "R / S" is larger in the second winning type than in the second winning type.
(T24) In the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B", the fluctuation time of the reach fluctuation that can be selected at the time of winning is at least lengthened for the winning type (10R probability variation jackpot in this embodiment) of the highest profit.
(T25) In the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B", the fluctuation time of the longest reach variation among the reach variation that can be selected at the time of winning is selected for the winning type (10R probability variation jackpot in this embodiment) of the highest profit. At least make it longer.
(T26) When the probability variation mode A and the probability variation mode B are compared, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that can be selected in the case of loss does not change, but the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that can be selected in the case of winning is relatively long. Become. Although not shown, for example, the fluctuation pattern distribution table referred to in each probability variation mode 1 to 3 at the time of loss is referred to as a “loss variation pattern distribution table (for Churenso)” corresponding to probability variation mode 2 in FIG. In the case of a hit, the "probability change middle hit / support time reduction winning variation pattern distribution table" shown in FIG. 33 is used according to the number of consecutive villas. In addition, "winning" means "winning winning" and / or "supporting time saving winning" (the same applies to (T27) described below).
(T27) When the probability variation mode A and the probability variation mode B are compared, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that can be selected in the case of winning does not change, but the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that can be selected in the case of loss is relatively long. Become. Although not shown, for example, the variation pattern distribution table referred to in each probability variation mode 1 to 3 at the time of winning is the "probability variation middle hit / support time reduction winning variation pattern distribution table (middle) corresponding to the probability variation mode 2 in FIG. 32. (For consecutive villas) ”, and in the case of loss, the“ loss variation pattern distribution table during probability change ”shown in FIG. 34 is used according to the number of consecutive villas.

In the case of the present embodiment, after the transition to the probability variation mode 3, the probability variation mode 3 is not shifted to another game mode until the jackpot is won or the number of STs is exhausted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a predetermined number of games (variation number) is executed during the probability variation mode 3, the game may be shifted to another game mode (probability variation mode 1 or probability variation mode 2). This is because if the probability variation mode 3 in the low-speed fluctuation state continues for a long period of time, the player may feel tired or the game may become monotonous. The transition of the game mode is not limited to the transition mode of "probability change mode 3 ⇒ probability change mode 2 or probability change mode 1", but "probability change mode 3 (first fluctuation number digestion) ⇒ probability change mode 2 (second fluctuation number digestion) ⇒ probability change It may be "mode 1" or "probability variation mode 3 (first variation number digestion) ⇒ probability variation mode 1 (second variation number digestion) ⇒ probability variation mode 2". When the first fluctuation number is K times and the second fluctuation number is L times, "K times" = "L times", "K times <L times", or "K times> L times" can be set. it can.

(Modification example A)
In the present embodiment, as described above, the above-mentioned "probability variation mode 3 (low-speed fluctuation state) <probability variation mode 2 (probability variation mode 2)" is used by using the loss variation pattern distribution table (FIG. 34) corresponding to each of the probability variation modes 1 to 3. The relationship of "medium speed fluctuation state) <probability change mode 1 (high speed fluctuation state)" is realized, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, using the variation pattern distribution table corresponding to one probability variation mode (one Tcode), the above-mentioned "probability variation mode 3 (low speed variation state) <probability variation mode 2 (medium)". It is possible to realize the fluctuation state of the same event as the relationship of "rapid fluctuation state) <probability change mode 1 (high speed fluctuation state)". FIG. 35 shows an example of a probability variation middle hit / support time reduction winning variation pattern distribution table (winning system variation pattern distribution table) according to the modification A, and FIG. 36 shows a loss according to the modification A. An example of the fluctuation pattern distribution table is shown.

First, an outline of this example will be described with reference to the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. In this example, the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table used for the small consecutive villas (number of consecutive villas 1st to 3rd) is used as the reference table (see Fig. 36 (a)), and the middle consecutive villas (number of consecutive villas 4 to 6). At the time of the second time), the fluctuation pattern at the start of the current fluctuation is acquired by adding the first addition time (for example, 5 seconds) to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern defined in this reference table (FIG. 36). See (b)). In addition, in the case of Dalian villa (after the 7th number of consecutive villas), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern specified in the above reference table plus the second addition time (for example, 10 seconds) is added to the fluctuation start this time. It is acquired as a time fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 36 (c)). That is, it is a variation pattern selection technique that acquires variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of game modes by using a variation pattern distribution table corresponding to one game mode. In the case of this example, since the value obtained by adding the predetermined time is acquired, the selectivity of the fluctuation pattern does not change as shown in FIGS. 36 (a) to 36 (b). The same applies to the “win / support time saving variation pattern distribution table” shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to (b).

FIG. 36 (a) shows a loss variation pattern distribution table used when the number of consecutive villas is 1 to 3 times. Here, for convenience of explanation, as the variation pattern types to be selected, normal variation 1 to 4 during probability variation (variation time 1 second, 2 seconds, 3 seconds, 3 seconds), N reach during probability variation, SP reach A during probability variation ( A representative example is shown in which the winning expectation is low) and the SP reach B during the probability change (winning expectation is high) is provided.

As can be seen from FIGS. 36 (a) to (c), although the selection rate of each fluctuation pattern is the same, the fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time is selected as the number of consecutive villas increases. (The same applies to FIGS. 35 (a) to (c)). As a result, the fluctuation state of the same event as the relationship of "probability change mode 3 (low speed fluctuation state) <probability change mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) <probability change mode 1 (high speed fluctuation state)", that is, "Korenso (high speed fluctuation state)" It is possible to realize a fluctuation state such that (state) <Churenso (medium speed fluctuation state) <Dalianso (low speed fluctuation state) ".

In addition, FIG. 36 (b) shows the addition of 5 seconds (first addition time) to each fluctuation pattern of the reference table, and FIG. 36 (c) shows 10 seconds (second addition) to each fluctuation pattern of the reference table. It is configured so that what is added (time) is acquired. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be configured as follows (S1) to (S7).

(S1) At least one reach variation (N reach during probability variation, probability variation) is not added to the normal variation (normal variation 1 to 4 during probability variation) by adding a predetermined time (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "addition"). Add to medium SP reach A and probable change SP reach B). For example, in the case of Churenso, 5 seconds (first addition time) is added to the probabilistic N reach of the reference table (Fig. 36 (a)), and in the case of Dalian Zhuang, 10 seconds (1st addition time) is added to the probabilistic N reach. 2 Addition time) Add. It is preferable to add the reach variation that is relatively easy to select (here, N reach during the probability variation with the highest selection rate during the reach variation). Further, the first addition time and the second addition time may satisfy the relationship of "first addition time <second addition time" (the same applies to (S2) to (S5) described later).
(S2) Addition is performed for at least one normal fluctuation (normal fluctuations 1 to 4 during probability change), and addition is performed for reach fluctuation (N reach during probability change, SP reach A during probability change, SP reach B during probability change). Absent. For example, in the case of Churenso, 5 seconds (first addition time) is added to the probability change normal fluctuation 1 in the reference table (Fig. 36 (a)), and in the case of Dalian villa, 10 seconds to the probability change normal fluctuation 1. (Second addition time) Add. It is preferable to add the normal variation that is relatively easy to select (here, the normal variation 1 during the probability variation with the highest selection rate during the normal variation).
(S3) If there is a loss, it will not be added, and if it is won, it will be added. For example, in the case of winning, as shown in FIGS. 36 (b) and (c), 5 seconds (first addition time) is added, and 10 seconds (second addition time) is added, but in the case of loss, no addition is made. (In case of loss, use the reference table: Fig. 36 (a)). That is, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that can be selected in the case of loss does not change, but the fluctuation time that can be selected in the case of winning is relatively long. In addition, "winning" means "winning winning" and / or "supporting time saving winning" (the same applies to (S4) described later).
(S4) If there is a loss, it will be added, and if it is won, it will not be added. For example, in the case of loss, as shown in FIGS. 36 (b) and (c), 5 seconds (first addition time) is added, and 10 seconds (second addition time) is added, but in the case of winning, it is not added (winning). In the case of, the reference table: Fig. 35 (a) is used). That is, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that can be selected in the case of winning does not change, but the fluctuation time that can be selected in the case of loss is relatively long.
(S5) At least the longest fluctuation pattern is not added. For example, SP reach B during probabilistic change is excluded from the addition target, and at least one fluctuation pattern among the fluctuation patterns having a shorter fluctuation time is the addition target (the addition content is the above (T7) or (T8). be able to). The longest fluctuation pattern is because the original fluctuation time is long. The "longest fluctuation pattern" may be the longest of the lost fluctuations (FIG. 36) (in this example, SP reach B during probability variation), or in the table of the winning fluctuations (FIG. 35). It may be the longest one (in this example, SP reach B during probabilistic change).
(S6) A common effect can be performed during the first addition time or the second addition time. For example, "effect A" can be executed for 5 seconds of addition (during the first addition time), and "effect B" can be executed for 10 seconds of addition (during the second addition time). In addition, in the addition 10 seconds (during the second addition time), "effect A (the same effect as during the first addition time)" is executed for the first 5 seconds, and "effect C (first addition)" is executed for the latter 5 seconds. It is possible to perform an effect that is different from that during the time). It should be noted that "Direction A" is preferably a pseudo-ream. Further, "Direction B" is preferably a player participation type production.
(S7) If the number of operation-holding balls at the start of fluctuation (excluding the operation-holding balls used for the current fluctuation display operation, the existing number of operation-holding balls) is 0, the number is not added and the number of operation-holding balls is other than 0. Adds. This is because when the number of balls on hold is 0, a fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time is selected (in this example, only the reach fluctuation is selected), and it is not preferable to add them indiscriminately. The longest fluctuation pattern among the normal fluctuation types (in the case of this example, the normal fluctuation during the probability change 3 or the normal fluctuation during the probability change 4) may be easily selected.

(Modification example B)
Further, the relationship of "probability change mode 3 (low speed fluctuation state) <probability change mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) <probability change mode 1 (high speed fluctuation state)" is not limited to the above modification A, and for example, FIGS. 37 and 37. As shown in 38, it can also be realized by using a fluctuation pattern distribution table that changes the selection rate (distribution value) of the fluctuation pattern according to the number of consecutive villas.

First, an outline of this example will be described with reference to FIG. 38. In this example, the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table used for Korenso (number of consecutive villas 1st to 3rd) is used as the reference table (see Fig. 38 (a)), and Churenso (number of consecutive villas 4 to 6). At the time of the second time), the "first selection rate fluctuation table (FIG. 38 (b)") in which the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern defined in this reference table is changed is referred to.
Further, in the case of Dalian villa (after the 7th number of consecutive villas), the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern defined in the above reference table was changed, but the "first selection rate fluctuation table (Fig. 38 (b)"". Refer to the “second selection rate fluctuation table (FIG. 38 (c)”) having a selection rate different from that of the above.
Here, the reference table (Fig. 38 (a)) used at the time of Korenso (the number of consecutive villas 1st to 3rd) and
The above-mentioned "first selection rate fluctuation table (Fig. 38 (b))" used at the time of Churenso (4th to 6th consecutive villas),
The relationship of the average fluctuation time of the above "second selectivity fluctuation table (Fig. 38 (c))" used in Dalian villa (7th and subsequent consecutive villas) is
The selectivity is changed so as to satisfy at least the relationship of "second selectivity variation table (low speed) <first selectivity variation table (medium speed) <reference table (high speed)". Thereby, the above-mentioned relationship of "probability change mode 3 (low speed fluctuation state) <probability change mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) <probability change mode 1 (high speed fluctuation state)" can be realized.
In the case of this example, since the change in the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern of the reference table is acquired, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern related to each fluctuation pattern distribution table is set as shown in FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (b). It does not change (the variation pattern specification command (MODE2 + EVENT1) does not change either) (the same applies to the "winning / support time reduction winning variation pattern distribution table" in FIG. 37). In this respect, it is significantly different from the above-mentioned modification A in which the variation time of the variation pattern related to each variation pattern distribution table changes but the selectivity does not change.

FIG. 38 (a) shows a loss fluctuation pattern distribution table used when the number of consecutive villas is 1 to 3 times. Here, for convenience of explanation, as in the above-mentioned modification A, as the variation pattern types to be selected, normal variation 1 to 4 during probability variation (variation time 1 second, 2 seconds, 3 seconds, 3 seconds), N reach during probability variation. , SP reach A during probabilistic change (low expectation of winning) and SP reach B during probabilistic change (high expectation of winning) are provided as typical examples.

As can be seen from FIGS. 38 (a) to (c), although the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern is the same, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern changes according to the number of consecutive villas, and changes as the number of consecutive villas increases. Fluctuation patterns with relatively long times can be easily selected (the same applies to FIGS. 38 (a) to (c)). As a result, the fluctuation state of the same event as the relationship of "probability change mode 3 (low speed fluctuation state) <probability change mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) <probability change mode 1 (high speed fluctuation state)", that is, "Korenso (high speed fluctuation state)" It is possible to realize a fluctuation state such that (state) <Churenso (medium speed fluctuation state) <Dalianso (low speed fluctuation state) ".

In addition, this modification can be configured as follows (P1) to (P15).

(P1) The average fluctuation time of the "reference table" is "X seconds", the average fluctuation time of the "first selection rate fluctuation table" is "Y seconds", and the average fluctuation time of the "second selection rate fluctuation table" is "". When "Z seconds" is set, the following relational expression (α) is satisfied.
"Y / X"<"Z / Y" ... (α)
The extension rate of the average fluctuation time of "probability variation mode 2 ⇒ probability variation mode 3" is larger than the extension rate of the average fluctuation time of "probability variation mode 1 ⇒ probability variation mode 2".

(P2) The fluctuation time of the longest fluctuation pattern of the "reference table" is "X seconds", the fluctuation time of the longest fluctuation pattern of the "first selection rate fluctuation table" is "Y seconds", and the "second selection rate fluctuation table". When the fluctuation time of the longest fluctuation pattern of "" is "Z seconds", the following relational expression (β) is satisfied.
"Y / X"<"Z / Y" ... (β)
The extension rate of the fluctuation time of the longest fluctuation pattern of "probability change mode 2 ⇒ probability variation mode 3" is larger than the extension rate of the fluctuation time of the longest fluctuation pattern of "probability variation mode 1 ⇒ probability variation mode 2".

(P3) The total selection rate of the normal fluctuations of the "reference table", "first selection rate fluctuation table" and "second selection rate fluctuation table" is set to "X1", "Y1" and "Z1".
When the total selection rate of the reach fluctuations of the "reference table", "first selection rate fluctuation table" and "second selection rate fluctuation table" is "X2", "Y2", and "Z2", the following relational expression (γ) ) Satisfies.
"X2"<"X1","Y2"<"Y1", and "Z2"<"Z1" ... (γ)
In this case, it is possible to prevent the game time from becoming unreasonably long. However, in a table other than the reference table, the reverse total selection rate may be used (“Y2”> “Y1” or “Z2”> “Z1” may be used).

(P4) When the total selectivity of the reach variation of the "reference table", "first selectivity variation table" and "second selectivity variation table" is "X2", "Y2", "Z2", the following relationship Satisfy equation (ε).
"X2"<"Y2"<Z2"... (γ)

(P5) The total selection rate of N reach fluctuations in the "first selection rate fluctuation table" and "second selection rate fluctuation table" is "Y3" and "Z3", and the total selection rate of SP reach is "Y4" and "Z4". , ”, The following relational expression (ε) is satisfied in the“ first selectivity variation table ”and / or the“ second selectivity variation table ”.
"Y4" ≤ "Y3", "Z4" ≤ "Z3" ... (γ)

(P6) In the "first selection rate fluctuation table" and / or "second selection rate fluctuation table", one or more specific fluctuation patterns are not selected (selection rate 0: lottery target, but the selection rate is Not selected for 0).
(P7) The shortest normal variation in the "reference table" is not selected in the "first selectivity variation table" and / or the "second selectivity variation table" (selectivity 0).
(P7) The longest reach variation in the "first selectivity variation table" and / or the "second selectivity variation table" is not selected in the "reference table" (selectivity is 0).

(P8) In the "first selection rate fluctuation table" and / or the "second selection rate fluctuation table", the selection rate of the longest normal fluctuation is the highest. When referring to the "selectivity" of a certain fluctuation pattern, when there are a plurality of the fluctuation patterns, the meaning of the total selection rate of these fluctuation patterns is included (the same shall apply hereinafter).
(P9) In the "first selectivity variation table" and / or "second selectivity variation table", the selectivity of N reach variation is the highest.
(P10) In the "first selectivity variation table" and / or "second selectivity variation table", the selectivity of SP reach variation is the highest.

(P11) In the "first selection rate fluctuation table" and / or the "second selection rate fluctuation table", the selection rate of the normal fluctuation in the "reference table" is low, and the selection rate of the normal fluctuation in the "reference table" is lowered. However, it is distributed to increase the selectivity of at least one reach variation. In this case, when there are at least a plurality of types of reach fluctuations of "first fluctuation time <second fluctuation time <third fluctuation time", the reach fluctuation of the third fluctuation time is changed with high probability, and the first fluctuation time and the first fluctuation time are changed. 2 The selectivity of the reach fluctuation of the fluctuation time is not changed. Alternatively, the selection rate of the reach fluctuation of the first fluctuation time is not changed, but the selection rate of the reach fluctuation of the second fluctuation time and the third fluctuation time is changed (in this case, the selection rate of the reach fluctuation of the second fluctuation time is changed). ≤ increase in reach variation selectivity in the third fluctuation time "or" increase in reach variation selectivity in the third fluctuation time ≤ increase in reach variation selectivity in the second fluctuation time " be able to).

(P12) The average fluctuation time of the "reference table" is "X seconds", the average fluctuation time of the "first selectivity fluctuation table" is "Y seconds", and the average fluctuation time of the "second selectivity fluctuation table" is "Z". When "seconds" is set, the selection rate of fluctuation patterns other than the longest fluctuation pattern is changed.
It is configured to satisfy "X seconds"<"Yseconds"<"Zseconds".
In this case, the fluctuation pattern that changes the selectivity (the fluctuation pattern other than the longest fluctuation pattern) may be "normal fluctuation" or reach fluctuation.

(P13) The "first selection rate fluctuation table" is assumed to change the selection rate of one or a plurality of fluctuation patterns in the reference table, and the "second selection rate fluctuation table" is a table different from the reference table. Use.
In this case, the following configurations (P13-1) to (P13-7) can be used.
(P13-1) The “second selectivity variation table” has more types of variation patterns (normal variation and / or reach variation) than the reference table (first selectivity variation table).
(P13-2) The "second selectivity fluctuation table" has fewer types of fluctuation patterns (normal fluctuation and / or reach fluctuation) than the reference table (first selectivity fluctuation table), but the average fluctuation time is longer. ..
(P13-3) The longest fluctuation pattern of the “second selectivity fluctuation table” is longer than the longest fluctuation pattern of the reference table (first selectivity fluctuation table).
(P13-4) The shortest fluctuation pattern of the “second selectivity fluctuation table” is longer than the shortest fluctuation pattern of the reference table (first selectivity fluctuation table).
(P13-5) In the "second selectivity variation table", reach variation is more likely to be selected than normal variation.
(P13-6) The "second selection rate fluctuation table" and the "reference table (first selection rate fluctuation table)" have a common fluctuation pattern to be selected when the number of pending balls is 0 (operation). When the number of reserved balls is other than 0, the fluctuation pattern to be selected is different).
(P13-7) The "second selection rate fluctuation table" and the "reference table (first selection rate fluctuation table)" have a common fluctuation pattern to be selected when the number of pending balls is 0 to 2. There is (the fluctuation pattern to be selected is different when the number of pending balls is three).

(P14) At the time of loss, a table in which the selection rate of the reference table is changed is used, but at the time of winning (at the time of big hit and / or at the time of short support time winning), a common table is used.
(P15) At the time of winning (at the time of big hit and / or at the time of short support time winning), a table in which the selection rate of the reference table is changed is used, but at the time of loss, a common table is used.

(7-2-2. About the production in the probability change mode)
Next, the effect in the probabilistic mode will be described. In the present embodiment, as the probabilistic effect mode, the probabilistic effect modes 1 to 3 corresponding to the probabilistic effect modes 1 to 3 are provided. FIG. 7A (c) shows an example of the effect in the probability variation effect modes 1 to 3.

With reference to FIG. 7, the probabilistic effect mode 1 expresses an effect of intercepting an enemy aircraft, and the probabilistic effect mode 2 expresses an air raid on an enemy fleet or an enemy base by a dive bombing. The "detonation mode" and the probabilistic effect mode 3 are the "war bomb modes" that express the appearance of a strategic bomber attacking an enemy city. In other words, the probabilistic mode period is divided into three modes according to the number of consecutive villas: a production mode for small villas, a production mode for middle villas, and a production mode for Dalian villas, and stays in any of these three categories. Whether it is done or not is played mainly by the dynamic change of the fluctuation pattern (change of the fluctuation state such as high speed, medium speed, low speed) and the accompanying production (switching of background production, notice production, etc.). Will be notified. In addition, the display of "right-handed ⇒" in the figure is a "right-handed instruction effect (launch guidance notification effect)" that urges the player to right-handed. Although the hold icon is not shown, the hold icon corresponding to the probabilistic effect modes 1 to 3 is displayed. In the figure, the decorative symbol is in a variable display state, that is, the current game is being executed. If there is an operation pending ball after the end of the current game, the decorative symbol is displayed under the current production mode. The variable display game is executed in sequence.

If the time saving jackpot is won, the mode shifts to the "time saving effect mode" shown in FIG. 7B, which will be described later. However, if the time saving jackpot is won during the consecutive villa, the time saving mode dedicated to the consecutive villa (for example, The time saving mode 4 (Tcode = "07H") shown in FIG. 43 is shifted to, and as a corresponding effecting mode, the "time saving effect mode dedicated to the continuous villa (special time saving effect mode)" as shown in FIG. 7A (b). : It may be configured so that it can be shifted to "Lightning stroke mode)".

This special time saving effect mode is exclusively for the consecutive villas, for example, when you win a time saving big hit other than the first hit, or when the number of consecutive villas (for example, 4 consecutive villas (middle consecutive villas)) or more If you win, it is preferable to transfer. Specifically, the time saving state after the time saving big hit in the case of "the time saving big hit is not counted" in FIG. 7A (A-1), and the case 3 of the case of "counting all big hits" in FIG. 7A (B). It can be used as an effect mode related to the time saving state after the time saving big hit of the consecutive villas to the fourth consecutive villas. In the case of FIG. 7A (B), the time saving jackpot is counted, so it is preferable to display the effect image 761 that informs the current number of consecutive villas, such as "○ consecutive villas!", And FIG. 7A (A). In the case of -1), since the time saving jackpot is not counted (no count), it is preferable to display the effect image 761 such as "during the consecutive villa challenge" instead of notifying the number of consecutive villas. In the case of "Clearing the number of consecutive villas by winning the time saving jackpot" in FIG. 7A (A-2), it is preferable to shift to the time saving effect mode as usual.

(Result production)
In addition, it is possible to win the time saving big hit (4R time saving big hit) during the consecutive villas, and to make the result effect appear in the final fluctuation (100th rotation) at the end of the time saving number of times. This "result effect" is, for example, the number of jackpot consecutive villas acquired so far and the total number of balls acquired in the winning game (total number of prize balls) as predetermined game information when the symbol changes when the time saving state ends. It is an effect of notifying the final result such as (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-08642: FIG. 50, FIG. 54 to FIG. 56, etc.). Here, if the support time reduction is elected and enters (shifts) into the time reduction state (support time reduction state) without going through the first hit, specifically, the support time reduction A or the support time reduction B that grants a finite time reduction is used. In the case of entering the time reduction state, in the final fluctuation where the number of time reductions ends (since the support time reduction C is infinite time reduction, the final fluctuation cannot be practically reached, it is excluded here), the result production is performed. It may be executed, but it is preferable not to execute it. The reason is that if you enter the time saving state without winning the big hit and the time saving state ends without winning the big hit, the total number of prize balls is very small and the result production is shown. This is because there is little need to put it out. The same applies when the ceiling time reduction (finite time reduction) due to the ceiling privilege described later is activated and the time reduction state is entered. In general gaming machines, the ball ejection rate (ball ejection rate at low base) in the non-electric support state (normal state or latent state) is approximately 30% to 40%, and the electric support state (time reduction state or probability change). The ball ejection rate (the ball ejection rate at high base) is approximately 80% to 95%, and the ball ejection rate is less than 100% in each case (when the ball is left untouched). If you enter the support time reduction state without going through the first hit, or if you enter the time reduction state by activating the ceiling time reduction (finite time reduction) by the ceiling privilege described later, the time reduction state ends without winning the big hit. In that case, there is little need to show the result effect.

However, when going through the first hit, the significance of notifying the number of consecutive villas and the total number of acquired balls (total number of prize balls) increases. Therefore, if the support time reduction A or the support time reduction B is won after the first hit, it can be said that it is preferable to execute the result effect in the final fluctuation. For example, as shown in the remarks columns (3) and (4) of FIG. 40, the final variation is used as the variation pattern for the result effect, and in the case of the time saving mode 1, the longest normal variation in the time saving mode 1 (for example, the normal variation). 40s), in the case of the time saving mode 2, the longest normal fluctuation (for example, normal fluctuation 45s) in the time saving mode 2 can be selected and the result effect is displayed by using the effect time width (variation time). Can be made to. In this case, different result effects (for example, different display modes of game information, different background images, etc.) can be displayed between the time saving mode 1 and the time saving mode 2. Of course, the longest normal variation shows the same result effect (for example, the display mode of game information, the background image, etc.) as the same variation time or the same variation pattern in the time saving mode 1 and the time saving mode 2. You may let it out.

(About other productions)
In addition, the effects related to the probabilistic mode can be configured as follows (Probability 1) to (Probability 5).
(Probability 1) The appearance rate of the player participation type production is set to be high in the order of "probability change mode 1 ⇒ probability change mode 2 ⇒ probability change mode 3".
(Probability 2) The appearance rate of the look-ahead notice is set to low probability or high probability in the order of "probability change mode A ⇒ probability change mode B".
(Probability 3) In the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B", the appearance rate of pseudo-reams is set to a high probability (the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern specified with pseudo-reams increases).
(Probability 4) Increase the number of pseudo-reams in the order of "probability change mode A ⇒ probability change mode B". For example, the probability variation mode 1 is up to "pseudo 2", the probability variation mode 2 is up to "pseudo 3", the probability variation mode 3 is up to "pseudo 4", and so on.
(Probability 5) Regarding the reach variation (reach effect), the probability variation mode 3 includes at least the first variation pattern of the first variation time.
The probability variation mode 2 includes at least the second variation pattern of the second variation time, but does not include the first variation pattern.
The probability variation mode 1 includes at least the third variation pattern of the third variation time, but does not include the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern.
In this case, it is preferable to configure so as to satisfy the relationship of "third fluctuation time <second fluctuation time <first fluctuation time". For example, the probabilistic mode 3 includes at least an "advanced special reach variation" that performs a full rotation effect after the advanced SPSP reach (SP reach + SPSP reach), and the probabilistic mode 2 includes at least an "advanced SPSP reach". Does not include "advanced special reach variation" and probabilistic mode 1 includes at least SP reach, but does not include "developed SPSP reach" and "advanced special reach variation". In this case, the SP reach effect executed in the first half section will be standardized, and when the SP reach effect appears, you can enjoy how far the reach effect will develop due to the difference in the probability variation mode. Become.
Further, for example, the probability variation mode 3 includes at least a "direct hit type special reach variation" that performs a full rotation effect after the direct hit type SPSP reach (SPSP reach), and the probability variation mode 2 includes "SP reach including execution of a specific advance notice effect". ”, But does not include“ direct hit type special reach variation ”, and probability variation mode 1 includes at least SP reach, but does not include“ SP reach including execution of specific advance notice effect ”and“ direct hit type special reach variation ”. .. In this case as well, you can enjoy how far the reach effect develops depending on the difference in the probability variation mode.

(7-3. Time saving mode)
Next, the "time saving mode" will be described. As shown in the figure, the time saving mode is a game mode in which the internal gaming state is related to the probability change state (YJ = 01H), and the time saving modes 1 to 3 (Tcode = "04H" to "06H") in which the variation pattern selection modes are different. Is included. When the above-mentioned "special time saving effect mode" is provided, the time saving mode 4 (Tcode = "07H") can be provided (see FIG. 7A (b), FIG. 42 remarks column, and FIG. 43). This time saving mode is shifted to the case where the 4R time saving big hit or the support time saving A to C is won (see FIG. 4).

In the present embodiment, when any of the 4R time saving jackpot and the support time saving A to C is won, the time saving mode 1 is first shifted to, and the time saving mode 2 and the time saving mode are changed according to the number of time saving times given. Can be moved to 3. That is, according to the number of executed games in the time saving state, the time saving mode is changed from one time saving mode to another time saving mode. In other words, it shifts from one time saving mode to another time saving mode according to the number of remaining time saving times. Specifically, referring to the block frame of the “time saving mode” of FIG. 6 and FIG. 7B, the time saving mode 1 stays in the time saving mode 1 up to 100 times, and the time saving mode 2 stays in the time saving mode 2 up to 101 times to 200 times. It is designed to stay in the time saving mode 3 for 251 times or more of the time saving.

Therefore, if you win the 4R time reduction jackpot or support time reduction A that is given 100 times of time reduction, you will stay only in time reduction mode 1, and if you win the support time reduction B that is given 200 times of time reduction, you will be in the time reduction mode. If you stay in 1 and the time saving mode 2 and win the support time saving C to which the infinite time saving (the number of time saving times 65535 times) is given, you will stay in the time saving mode 1 to 3. If the number of time reductions can be increased due to the above-mentioned "additional function" or the like, there are cases where the person stays in the time reduction mode 2 or the time reduction mode 3 even if he / she wins the support time reduction A or the support time reduction B. However, here, unless there is a particular need, the configuration without additions will be mainly described.

(7-3-1. Features of time saving mode)
Next, the feature points of the time saving mode (probability variation mode 1 to 3) according to the present embodiment will be described. As described above, the time saving modes 1 to 3 are game modes in which the fluctuation pattern selection modes (Tcodes) are different (see FIGS. 39 to 40 and 43), and the fluctuation pattern vibration corresponding to the time saving modes 1 to 3 is performed. A minute table (see FIGS. 39 and 40) is selected. By utilizing this, it is possible to create a time saving mode in which each of the time saving modes 1 to 3 is characteristic. This point is based on the same method as the probabilistic mode described above.

In the time saving mode of the present embodiment, the relationship of the average digestion time is defined so as to satisfy "time saving mode 1 <time saving mode 2 <time saving mode 3" (see Remark 2 in FIG. 7B). That is, as the number of time reductions increases, in other words, the average digestion time is controlled in a short time each time the game mode is stepped up. In this respect, it is different from the probabilistic mode in which the average digestion time is controlled for a long time each time the game mode is stepped up. The reason for defining the relationship of the average digestion time (game digestion speed) related to the time-saving mode in "time-saving mode 1 <time-saving mode 2 <time-saving mode 3" is as follows.

In the time saving mode (time saving state), unlike in the probability variation mode (probability variation state), the jackpot lottery probability is a low probability electric support state, so it is a gaming state in which it is more difficult to win the jackpot than in the probability variation mode. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game is adjusted to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in the time saving mode. Specifically, in the case of the time saving modes 1 and 2, it is important for playability such as "enjoying the production" as "low speed fluctuation state" or "medium speed fluctuation state" in which the average digestion time of the symbol fluctuation display game is long. In the case of the time saving mode 3, the game mode is set to "high-speed fluctuation state", and the game mode emphasizes game playability such as "increasing the average digestion speed of the game and increasing the time efficiency related to the progress of the game". It is supposed to be. In particular, when the relationship of the average digestion time (game digestion speed) is set to "time reduction mode 1 <time reduction mode 2 <time reduction mode 3", there are the following advantages.

In the present embodiment, a time saving number of times larger than the conventional time saving number of 100 times can be given. In particular, if the number of time reductions is 200 times or infinite time reduction, and the number of times that can be a long time is given before the time reduction number is exhausted, the game digestion speed will be slow and the time reduction number will be exhausted. It gives the player stress and dissatisfaction. Therefore, as the number of times the game is executed during the time saving state increases, the game digestion speed is increased so that the next big hit can be won in the shortest possible time.

Specifically, referring to the "time saving medium loss fluctuation pattern distribution table" of FIG. 40, the normal fluctuation 4s is easily selected in the time saving mode 1, and the normal fluctuation 2s is easily selected in the time saving mode 2. In the time saving mode 3, the normal fluctuation 1s (shortest normal fluctuation) can be easily selected. As a result, the game digestion speed is increased in the order of "time saving mode 1 ⇒ time saving mode 2 ⇒ time saving mode 3".

As described above, regarding the average digestion time of the symbol fluctuation display game, the relationship of "time saving mode 1 (low speed fluctuation state) <time saving mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) <time saving mode 3 (high speed fluctuation state)" is given. Therefore, in the time saving modes 1, 2 and 3 of the present embodiment, the following (J1) is particularly related to the "loss fluctuation pattern distribution table (FIG. 40)" referred to at the time of loss that is most likely to be encountered in the progress of the game. It is preferable to have a configuration as shown in (J20). The present invention is not necessarily limited to the relationship between the three time saving modes 1 to 3. That is, the present invention has a time-saving mode in which the number of game executions (variation number) in the time-saving state is less than a predetermined number (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving mode A") and a time-saving mode in which the game is executed more than the predetermined number of times (hereinafter, "time-saving mode B"). When the average digestion time of the time saving mode A and the time saving mode B is compared, the configuration may satisfy the relationship of "time saving mode A <time saving mode B". Hereinafter, when the term "in the order of" time saving mode A ⇒ time saving mode B "" is used, the meaning of "in the order of" time saving mode 1 ⇒ time saving mode 2 ⇒ time saving mode 3 "" is also included.

(J1) The average fluctuation time of normal fluctuation is shortened in the order of "time saving mode A ⇒ time saving mode B". In addition, one or a plurality of normal fluctuations can be provided.
(J2) Shorten the average fluctuation time of reach fluctuation in the order of "time saving mode A ⇒ time saving mode B". In addition, one or a plurality of reach fluctuations can be provided.
(J3) In the order of "time saving mode A ⇒ time saving mode B", the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation having the highest selectivity is shortened.
(J4) In the order of "time saving mode A ⇒ time saving mode B", the fluctuation time of the reach fluctuation having the highest selectivity is shortened.
(J5) The selectivity of normal fluctuation is increased in the order of "time saving mode A ⇒ time saving mode B". In addition, one or a plurality of normal fluctuations can be provided.
(J6) Decrease the selection rate of reach fluctuation in the order of "time saving mode A ⇒ time saving mode B". In addition, one or a plurality of reach fluctuations can be provided.
(J7) The fluctuation time of the shortest normal fluctuation in each mode is shortened in the order of "time saving mode A ⇒ time saving mode B".
(J8) The fluctuation time of the shortest reach fluctuation in each mode is shortened in the order of "time saving mode A ⇒ time saving mode B".
(J9) The types of normal fluctuations are increased in the order of "time saving mode A ⇒ time saving mode B".
(J10) Reduce the types of reach fluctuations in the order of "time saving mode A ⇒ time saving mode B".
(J11) When "first fluctuation time <second fluctuation time" is set, the types of fluctuation patterns of the second fluctuation time or more are reduced in the order of "time reduction mode A ⇒ time reduction mode B". The "variation pattern of the second fluctuation time or more" may be a normal fluctuation or a reach fluctuation (the same applies hereinafter).
(J12) When "first fluctuation time <second fluctuation time" is set, the types of fluctuation patterns of the first fluctuation time or less are increased in the order of "time reduction mode A ⇒ time reduction mode B". The "variation pattern of the first fluctuation time or less" may be a normal fluctuation or a reach fluctuation (the same applies hereinafter).
(J13) When "first fluctuation time <second fluctuation time" is set, the time saving mode A has a fluctuation pattern of the second fluctuation time or more, and the time saving mode B has no fluctuation pattern of the second fluctuation time or more.
(J14) When "first fluctuation time <second fluctuation time", there is no fluctuation pattern of the first fluctuation time or less in the time saving mode A, and there is a fluctuation pattern of the first fluctuation time or less in the time saving mode B.
(J15) When "first fluctuation time <second fluctuation time" is set, the time reduction mode 1 and the time reduction mode 2 have a fluctuation pattern of the second fluctuation time or more, and the time reduction mode 3 has a fluctuation pattern of the second fluctuation time or more. There is no fluctuation pattern.
(J16) When "first fluctuation time <second fluctuation time" is set, there is no fluctuation pattern of the first fluctuation time or less in the time reduction mode 1 and the time reduction mode 2, and the first fluctuation time or less in the time reduction mode 3. There is a fluctuation pattern.
(J17) In the time saving mode A and the time saving mode B, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected when the operation holding ball at the start of fluctuation is 0 is set as the common (same or substantially the same) fluctuation time, and the operation holding ball is set. If it is other than 0, a fluctuation pattern having a different fluctuation time can be selected. For example, in the time saving modes 1 to 3, when the number of balls on hold is 0, only the normal fluctuation 8s type (in this example, the time saving medium normal fluctuation 8s, the time saving medium normal fluctuation 8s, the time saving medium normal fluctuation 8s) is available. It is configured to be selected, and when the operation holding ball is other than 0, a fluctuation pattern having a different fluctuation time can be selected. In this case, in the order of "time saving mode A ⇒ time saving mode B", the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that is likely to be selected when the operation holding ball is other than 0 is lengthened.
(J18)) The normal fluctuation is common to the time saving mode A and the time saving mode B, and the selection rate of the reach fluctuation is set to the low probability in the order of "time saving mode A ⇒ time saving mode B". For example, the normal fluctuations are common in the time saving modes 1 to 3, and the selection rate of the reach fluctuation is set to a low probability in the order of "time saving mode 1 ⇒ time saving mode 2 ⇒ time saving mode 3".
(J19) The normal fluctuation is common to the time saving mode A and the time saving mode B, and the selection rate of the reach fluctuation having a relatively long fluctuation time is set to the low probability in the order of "time saving mode A ⇒ time saving mode B". For example, the normal fluctuations are common in the time saving modes 1 to 3, and the selection rate of the reach fluctuation having a relatively long fluctuation time is set to a low probability in the order of "time saving mode 1 ⇒ time saving mode 2 ⇒ time saving mode 3".
(J20) When the time saving mode A and the time saving mode B are compared, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that can be selected in the case of loss does not change, but the fluctuation time that can be selected in the case of winning becomes relatively long. Further, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that can be selected in the case of winning does not change, but the fluctuation time that can be selected in the case of loss is relatively long. In addition, "winning" means "winning winning" and / or "supporting time saving winning".

In the present embodiment, the common time-saving medium reach A in the time-saving modes 1 to 3 and the common time-saving medium reach A and B in the time-saving mode 1 and the time-saving mode 2 can be selected. Not limited to, if there is a relationship of "time saving mode 1 (low speed fluctuation state) <time saving mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) <time saving mode 3 (high speed fluctuation state)" with respect to the average digestion time of the symbol fluctuation display game, the time saving In at least one time saving mode of modes 1 to 3, the reach variation different from the other time saving modes may be selected.

In the case of the present embodiment, after shifting to the time saving mode 3, the time saving mode 3 is not shifted to another game mode until the jackpot is won or the number of time saving times is exhausted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a predetermined number of games (variation number) is executed during the time saving mode 3, the game may be shifted to another game mode (time saving mode 1 or time saving mode 2). Since the time saving mode 3 is a "high-speed fluctuating state", the game digestion speed advances at a good tempo, but if the same game mode continues for a long period of time, the player may feel tired or the game may become monotonous. Resulting in. Therefore, when a predetermined number of games are executed during the time saving mode 3, it is preferable to shift to another time saving mode. The transition of the game mode is not limited to the transition mode of "time saving mode 3 ⇒ time saving mode 2 or time saving mode 1", but "time saving mode 3 (first fluctuation number digestion) ⇒ time saving mode 2 (second fluctuation number digestion) ⇒ time saving It may be "mode 1" or "time saving mode 3 (first fluctuation number digestion) ⇒ time saving mode 1 (second fluctuation number digestion) ⇒ time saving mode 2". When the first fluctuation number is G times and the second fluctuation number is H times, "G times" = "H times", "G times <H times", or "G times> H times" can be set. it can.

(7-3-2. About the production in the time saving mode)
In the present embodiment, as the time saving effect mode, the time saving effect modes 1 to 3 corresponding to the time saving mode 1 to 3 are provided. FIG. 7B shows an example of the effect in the time saving effect modes 1 to 3.

With reference to FIG. 7B, the time-saving effect mode 1 is the “underwater acoustic battle mode” that expresses the battle between submarines, and the time-saving effect mode 2 is the “water surface” that expresses the battle between the fleets. The "battle mode" and the time saving production mode 3 are "land battle modes" that express the appearance of tanks fighting each other. In other words, the time saving mode period is divided into three time saving modes 1 to 3 according to the number of times the game is executed during the time saving state, and which of these three categories stays in is the above-mentioned probability variation mode. Similarly, the player is notified mainly by the dynamic change of the fluctuation pattern (change of the fluctuation state of high speed, medium speed, low speed) and the accompanying effect (switching of background effect, notice effect, etc.).

Further, the production stage may be different depending on whether the mode is changed to the time saving mode due to the time saving big hit and the case where the time saving mode is changed due to the support time saving. In this case, while the time saving jackpot and the support time saving are in the same time saving mode (Tcode is the same), background production, decorative design, hold icon, launch guidance notification production (right-handed instruction production), various types according to each production stage. At least one of the effects such as the advance notice effect and the look-ahead advance notice (pre-reading notice during change and / or pending change notice) can be different production modes. As a result, it is possible to distinguish between the big hit time saving state and the support time saving state in a dramatic manner while shifting to the same time saving mode for the time saving big hit and the support time saving.

(About the notice production related to the support time reduction winning)
As already explained, the support time reduction includes "special electric operation type support time reduction" and "special electric non-operation type support time reduction", but in any case, the round game such as the jackpot game is not executed and is infinite. Although there are exceptions such as support time reduction that grants a high number of time reductions such as time reduction, basically, the degree of profit is lower than that of a big hit. For this reason, if a flashy fanning effect such as that at the time of winning a big hit is made to appear in a notice production during a winning symbol variation display game with a short support time, the player's expectation will be excessively fueled. Therefore, when the support time reduction is won, it is preferable not to show the "winning effect" that definitely notifies the big hit winning as a notice effect. For example, if it is a hold change notice, the rainbow-colored hold of premium hold will not appear (in the case of a gaming machine that does not execute premium hold, the hold change notice of the highest winning expectation at the time of big hit winning will not appear), fluctuation If it is a preview effect inside, a specific character or item indicating the correctness is not displayed. In other words, when the support time reduction is won, it is possible to make the high expectation notice effect appear at least except for the high expectation notice effect which shows the highest expectation at the time of the big hit winning. However, only the support time reduction (in the present embodiment, the support time reduction C) that gives the infinite time reduction that has the highest profit among the support time reductions may be configured so that the same accurate effect as the big hit can be executed. Further, when the support time reduction is won, the same winning effect as the big hit does not appear, but the winning effect for the support time saving may be executed.

In addition, in the look-ahead notice, if the operation hold ball protection of the support time reduction winning occurs, the look-ahead notice is prohibited for the predetermined number of games (for example, the maximum number of hold memories (4 times in the case of this embodiment)). May be good. Further, after the start of the time saving state due to the support time saving, the predetermined number of games (for example, the maximum number of reserved memories) and the look-ahead notice may be prohibited.

(About winning production related to the starting port)
When the "winning effect" is enabled to be executed when the upper starting port 34 and / or the lower starting port 35 are awarded, different winning effects are executed in the jackpot time saving state and the support time saving state. May be good. It should be noted that the winning effect may not be executed during the jackpot time saving state, and the winning effect may be executed during the support time saving state (or vice versa).

(Remaining time reduction notification production)
Further, in the time saving mode (time saving state), the "residual time saving number notification effect (for example, countdown display)" for notifying the remaining time saving number of times can be displayed. The residual time reduction number notification effect may be at least the same effect mode (the countdown display mode is the same) for the support time reduction A and the support time reduction B (support time reduction for granting a finite time reduction), or the time reduction jackpot and the support time reduction (support time reduction A and). / Or the same production mode as the support time reduction B) may be used. In addition, different production modes may be used depending on the type of support time reduction, or different production modes may be used for the time reduction jackpot and the support time reduction. In the former case of the same production mode, it is preferable to start the countdown display when the same division and the time saving residual number of times reach a predetermined number of times. For example, a countdown display is performed from the remaining 10 times to the final fluctuation. In the latter case of different production modes, the countdown display can be started at different delimiters. For example, in the case of a 4R time reduction jackpot, the countdown display can be started from the remaining 50 times, and in the case of support time reduction A (or support time reduction B), the countdown display can be started from the remaining 10 times.

In the case of a finite time reduction, it is preferable to configure the residual time reduction number of times notification effect to be executable. On the other hand, in the case of infinite time reduction, since the remaining number of times is infinite, there is little need to execute the residual time reduction number notification effect, and it is not necessary to execute the residual time reduction number notification effect. However, there are cases where it is appropriate to notify that the number of remaining times is infinite. Therefore, when executing the remaining number of times display effect related to the infinite time reduction, for example, in the case of the image display effect, "remaining ∞ times" or "continue until the next big hit" can be displayed.

(Concealed residual time reduction notification production)
In addition, the fact that any of the support time reductions has been won may be kept secret in a dramatic manner. For example, the production in the game (notice production, etc.) that was won in each support time reduction is made to appear in common production, and the production of the residual time reduction number notification production is also a common production mode, for example, "remaining number of times ???""Remaining number of times 〇〇 times (the same initial value is displayed and countdown is displayed regardless of which support time reduction is won)" or "0 times (initial value is started from zero and counts up is displayed)" can do. As a result, the number of time reductions is concealed, and it is possible to give a feeling of tension that it is unknown how many times it will continue (it is unknown when it will end).

In addition, when the above-mentioned "remaining number of times 〇〇 times" or the like is displayed and the countdown display is executed, it is preferable to perform the remaining time reduction number of times notification effect as described below. For example, when any of the support time reductions A to C is won, "100 times" with the smallest number of time reductions is displayed. When the count reaches zero, if you win the support time reduction B or the support time reduction C, which is given more than 100 times, additional display effects such as "+50 times!" And "+100!" Will be displayed. This is done, and it is notified that the time saving state will continue. On the other hand, in the case of the count-up display, regardless of which support time reduction is won, the count-up display is started from the zero display, and when the predetermined number of times is reached or each time the predetermined number of times is reached, "It will continue! "Remaining 50!" "Infinite time reduction confirmed!" And other additional display effects are performed to notify that the time reduction state will continue. In either case, it is preferable to perform an additional display effect after performing an effect of inciting whether or not the time is shortened, in order to arouse the tension of the player.

In addition, in the case of the time saving state due to the support time saving, the above-mentioned "residual time saving number notification effect" may not be executed, and in the case of the big hit time saving state, the above "residual time saving number of times notification effect may be executed. In the case of, the above-mentioned "residual time reduction number of times notification effect" may be performed, and in the case of the support time reduction state, the above-mentioned "residual time reduction number of times notification effect" may be performed.

(About the production related to the winning game (hit fluctuation pattern) with shorter support time)
In addition, in the normal mode (normal state), if the support time is shortened in this game, the "electric support state" will occur after the end of this game, and the winner will be notified of the support time reduction in the game. As an effect, for example, the "time saving rush notification effect 770" as shown in FIG. 6 (a) is made to appear. This time-saving rush notification effect is an aspect of the game state transition notification effect that notifies (suggests) that the game state (time-saving state) is more advantageous than the current game state (normal state). In the illustrated production example, a character image 778 saying "I will rush in a short time" is displayed as a time saving rush notification effect 770, a dedicated character image 777 is displayed as a background display of the decorative symbol 775, and the decorative symbol 775 is displayed. , Support time reduction The state where the winning symbol "" hour "," ☆ "," short "" is stopped and displayed (usually, for example, a number symbol) is shown. As a result, after the end of this game, the time is reduced. You will be notified in advance that you will rush.

The reason why such a "time saving rush notification effect" appears is as follows. In particular, if the winning support time reduction is "special electric non-actuated support time reduction", when this game ends (variation time ends), the time reduction state is entered after the extremely short fixed display time (500ms) has elapsed. (Refer to the process during the special symbol change (step S307) and the process during the special symbol confirmation time (step S308) in FIG. 10). To be precise, this game ends after the lapse of this fixed display time (500 ms). For this reason, it is for early notification that a state in which right-handedness is advantageous will occur, and it is possible to prevent the player from continuing "left-handedness" (at a disadvantage) during the time saving state. In addition, the launch guidance notification effect (right-handed instruction effect) may appear during the winning game with a short support time. However, in reality, until the confirmed display time elapses, it is in the "normal state" instead of the "time saving state". Therefore, if the player runs ahead and hits right, a launch guidance notification effect (left-handed instruction effect (warning notification)) for urging left-handed may be performed. In this case, it is preferable to preferentially display the left-handed instruction effect (higher display priority) than the right-handed instruction effect. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the player is hitting right during the normal state is determined by whether or not the entry (passage) of the game ball is detected in the normal symbol start opening 37.

On the other hand, in the case of the "special electric operation type support time reduction", the support time reduction opening / closing game (in the case of the small hit winning type support time reduction, the small hit game) is executed and then the time reduction state is entered. (For example, during the start INT), the launch guidance notification effect (right-handed instruction effect) may be displayed, and no particular problem occurs. In the case of the special electric operation type support time reduction, it is preferable that the period of the support time reduction opening / closing game is approximately several seconds or more.

(About the confirmed display time related to the winning game with shorter support time)
Further, in the winning game with a short support time, the fixed display time can be set different from the normal fixed display time (500 ms). Specifically, it can be longer than the normal definite display time (500 ms) (for example, about 1 second to 10 seconds). By utilizing this long fixed display time, there is an advantage that a sufficient margin production time width for executing the above-mentioned "time saving rush notification effect" can be secured. In addition, after the execution time (hit fluctuation time) of the winning game is completed, a longer fixed display time than usual intervenes, so there is a certain margin for the player to change from "left-handed" to "right-handed". There is also an advantage that the firing operation handle 15 can be operated. In addition, only in the winning game with a short support time, "right-handed notification" (for example, right-handed instruction image such as right-handed notification image 779) is given in advance by using a predetermined period during the winning game or at least the confirmed display time. You may do it.

<Examples of time-saving rush notification effect: FIGS. 59 and 60>
Next, an example of the time saving rush notification effect when the support time saving is "special electric non-actuating type support time saving" will be described. First, in order to facilitate the understanding of this production example, the transition of the production when the operation holding ball is zero after the end of the game will be described with reference to FIG. 58.

In the time chart of FIG. 58, after the game ends with "loss (big hit, small hit, and non-winning in support time reduction)", the operation hold ball is zero for a while (Special figure 1 operation hold ball and special figure). It shows the case where the state of 2 operation holding ball is zero) continues.

With reference to the time chart of FIG. 58, when the variation display of the special figure is completed (time T2), the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode according to the jackpot lottery result (here, the special symbol corresponding to the loss is displayed. Stop display), the game ends this time (time T3). At this time, if there is an operation holding ball, the next game (variation display of the special figure) is started immediately, but if the operation holding ball is zero (no operation holding ball), after the confirmation display time Tb elapses, Until the next game is started (until a new operation hold ball is generated), the production state is shifted to "waiting for customers (waiting for customers)" (time T3 to T5).

Specifically, when the operation holding ball is zero after the confirmation display time Tb elapses, the main control unit 20 transmits a "customer waiting command" to the effect control unit 24 (see S419 in FIG. 12 described later). ). When the effect control unit 24 receives this customer waiting command, it performs an effect process related to "waiting for customers (waiting for customers)" as an effect state.

Specifically, when the production control unit 24 receives the customer waiting command, it grasps that the game is stopped "waiting for customers (waiting for customers)", and a new operation hold ball is released from the reception of the customer waiting command. When a predetermined waiting time (for example, 120 seconds) has elapsed (for example, 120 seconds) without occurring (in the present embodiment, without receiving the winning command and / or the holding addition command transmitted when the operation holding ball is generated). When the illustrated time T4 arrives), that is, when the predetermined time elapses without starting the game with the operation holding ball becoming zero (when the customer waiting effect start condition is satisfied), the game machine 1 is involved. A "customer waiting effect (demo display)" with a demo movie for explaining the game and introducing the game machine (demonstration) is displayed. When an operation related to the game setting by the player such as the menu screen display operation described later is detected, the measurement of the waiting time (120 seconds) is cleared and 120 seconds is set again. It should be noted that the measurement of the waiting time (120 seconds) may be started after the game setting is completed and the process returns to the “pre-customer waiting effect” described later.

FIG. (C) shows an example of a customer waiting effect. The example in Fig. (C) shows a part of the demo movie as a customer waiting effect. Here, the name of the gaming machine ("CR Fujimaru-kun Senki") is displayed in large size in the center of the screen, and the upper right of the screen. A specific character (Fujimaru-kun) is displayed in the corner. During the customer waiting production period, a predetermined demo movie is repeatedly played and displayed to effectively appeal the appeal of the game console.

However, during the period until the customer waiting effect starts (until the predetermined time Td elapses), the "customer waiting effect (demo start waiting display)" is displayed (time T3 to T4). For example, the liquid crystal display device 36 is set to a display state including a background effect (background image) according to the game state and a decorative symbol (decorative stop symbol) stopped in this game, and a customer waiting effect is started (demo). This display state is maintained until the movie starts).

FIG. (A) shows an example of the production before waiting for customers. In the example of FIG. (A), the display state in which the loss-corresponding decorative symbol (loss-corresponding decorative stop symbol), which is the latest game result, is stopped during the normal effect mode (air combat mode) is shown. In the present embodiment, after the start of the pre-customer waiting effect (after receiving the customer waiting command) and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) (when the time Tm arrives), "Menu screen display →" is displayed at the bottom of the screen. A "menu displayable notification effect 811" including a character display and a button image (here, an image imitating the effect button 13) appears. The role of the menu displayable notification effect 811 is to notify that the menu screen (game setting screen) can be opened by operating the effect button 13, in other words, to notify that the menu can be operated. .. When the effect button 13 is pressed during the menu operation period, a "menu screen" as shown in the figure is displayed, and various game environments such as volume and light intensity can be set.

FIG. (B) shows an example of the menu screen. Here, a character image of the game machine name "CR Fujimaru-kun Senki" is displayed at the top of the menu screen 811a, a specific character 813 is displayed at the center on the right side of the screen, and "character selection" and "volume" are displayed as examples of menu items. Menu items such as "Adjustment", "Light intensity adjustment", "BGM selection", and "Back" are displayed. On the menu screen 811a, when the player operates the cursor 812 with the direction keys 75 to select a desired menu item and presses the effect button 13 with the cursor 812 pointing to the menu item, the menu item is determined. Corresponding game settings can be made.

For example, when "volume adjustment" is selected and determined as a menu item, the volume adjustment screen 811b as shown in FIG. (D) is displayed. On this volume adjustment screen, a desired volume level can be selected by the cross key 75, and can be determined by the effect button 13. When the volume level is determined, the screen returns to the screen of the effect before waiting for customers in FIG. (A). In the example of FIG. (D), it is possible to adjust in five stages from the reference volume value (MIN) to the predetermined maximum volume value (MAX).
Although not shown, even when "light intensity adjustment" is selected and decided, a light intensity adjustment screen similar to the volume adjustment screen is displayed, and this light intensity adjustment can also be adjusted in multiple steps (for example, 4 steps). It has become. In addition, when "character selection" is selected and determined, a related ally character or enemy character can be selected during the current effect mode. As a result, it is possible to make a favorite character appear in a notice effect (specific reach, etc.) or a hit effect. Further, when "BGM selection" is selected and determined, the BGM related to the current effect mode can be selected from a plurality of types of BGM.

In this example, four game settings of "character selection", "volume adjustment", "light amount adjustment", and "BGM selection" are possible, but at least as a gaming machine having a volume adjusting means capable of adjusting the volume. Good. For example, in the case of a gaming machine capable of only adjusting the volume, it is not necessary to display the menu screen (menu item) 811a as shown in FIG. The adjustment screen 811b) can be displayed. When displaying the adjustment screen 811b, for example, as in the adjustment screen 811c shown in FIG. (E), the adjustment screen 811c including the background image related to the current effect mode can be displayed in the background effect. In the illustrated example, a background image related to the normal effect mode is displayed, and a five-step volume adjustment screen is displayed with priority over the background image. Since the adjustment screen 811c is a game setting screen capable of notifying the current production mode, there is an advantage that the current game state (game mode) can be notified when adjusting the volume or the amount of light. .. Hereinafter, a mode in which the adjustment screen 811b or the adjustment screen 811c is displayed without displaying the menu screen 811a is referred to as a “adjustment screen direct display mode”.

The above "menu operation enable period" may be started immediately when a customer waiting command is received. For example, the menu operation period can be started after the confirmed display time has elapsed (time T3 has elapsed). Specifically, the menu operation period in this case is the “menu operation period A” shown in the figure.

Further, the above-mentioned "menu operation operable period" may be started after a predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the customer waiting command. For example, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fixed display time has elapsed (for example, when the time Tm at which the menu displayable notification effect 811 is started has arrived), the menu operable period can be started. Specifically, the menu operation period in this case is the “menu operation period B” shown in the figure.

The menu displayable notification effect 811 may appear at the start of the menu operable period (a case of notifying the start of the menu operable period), or may appear at a predetermined timing of the menu operable period. May be good.

<Production example: Fig. 59, Fig. 60>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 to 60, an example of production when the current game is a winning game of "special electric non-actuated support time reduction" will be described. FIGS. 59 to 60 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the transition of the production when the operation holding ball is zero for a while after the end of the game, and the production is different from that of the production example 1 in which the transition of the production is different. Example 2 is shown. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the above-mentioned FIG. 58 will also be referred to as appropriate.

(Production example 1: Fig. 59)
First, the effect example 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 59.

(1-1. Execution start timing of time saving rush notification effect)
In the case of the effect example 1 shown in FIG. 59, at a predetermined timing during the symbol change or at the end of the symbol change (reference numeral 801 indicates a decorative symbol (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol), for example, as shown in FIG. The time saving rush notification effect 871 is displayed. Specifically, when a predetermined timing (for example, time T1 in FIG. 58) arrives during the symbol change, or in the fixed display period (time T2 in FIG. 58). Upon arrival, the time-saving rush notification effect 871 is displayed. The time-saving rush notification effect 871 in this production example is the character "acoustic battle mode rush" that notifies (suggests) the transition to the time-saving mode (time-saving state). It is an effect image including an image 802, a character image 803, and the like. Further, in FIG. (β), three decorative symbols are displayed in a small retracted position in the right corner of the liquid crystal screen (illustrated decorative symbol 801a), and this time. An example is shown in which a decorative stop symbol (a symbol corresponding to the support time reduction winning) is displayed, which indicates the game result of the above. Here, an example in which the decorative symbol 801a is stopped and displayed at “3”, “5”, and “7” is shown. Although it is shown, it may be ““ hour ”,“ ☆ ”, or“ short ”” shown in FIG. 6 (a). It is not necessary to display the decorative symbol 801a after the final display time has elapsed.

(1-2. Display period of time saving rush notification effect)
The time saving rush notification effect 871 continues to appear for a predetermined period (predetermined time) even after the symbol variation is completed and the confirmed display time elapses (after the time T3 in FIG. 58) (FIG. (γ)). .. However, since the "time saving state" is entered after the confirmed display time has elapsed, the firing guidance notification effect (right-handed instruction effect) 851 is additionally displayed in the time saving rush notification effect 871 as shown in FIG. The time saving rush notification effect 872 is obtained. As a result, it is notified that the time has been shortened and that the situation has been favorable for right-handed strikes. The time saving rush notification effect 872 here will be displayed as a part of the effect before waiting for customers.

Then, after displaying the time-saving rush notification effect 872 shown in FIG. (γ) for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) (for example, when the time Tm arrives), the time-saving rush notification effect 872 is terminated and a normal customer waiting is performed. The pre-production 890 appears (Fig. (δ)). The normal pre-customer waiting effect 890 here is an effect mode related to the time saving mode (time saving state), and as shown in FIG. (δ), is related to the time saving effect mode as a background image according to the game state. A background image (for example, underwater acoustic battle mode: see FIG. 7B) is displayed (when a production mode dedicated to support time reduction is provided, a background image related to the production mode may be displayed), and decoration is stopped. As a symbol, the latest game result (“579” in the case of this production example: decoration stop symbol corresponding to support time reduction) is displayed. In addition, with regard to the right-handed instruction effect, due to the switch to the normal customer-waiting pre-production effect, "Right-handed instruction effect 851 related to the time-saving rush notification effect (1st right-handed notification: confirmed display time elapsed in the support time reduction winning game) After that, the "right-handed instruction effect (right-handed instruction effect) executed only for a predetermined time)" is completed, and the "right-handed instruction effect 852 (second right-handed notification) related to the electric support" in the display mode (effect mode) different from the right-handed instruction effect 851 : Right-handed instruction production for electric support) "appears.

The above-mentioned "right-handed instruction effect for electric support (second right-handed notification)" can be the following (instruction effect 1) to (instruction effect 7).
(Instruction effect 1) A common right-handed instruction effect (second right-handed notification) is used during the electric support, that is, during the time saving state (time saving state due to a big hit), during the probability change state, and during the support time saving state.
(Instruction effect 2) During the game state other than the support time reduction state (in this embodiment, the time reduction state and the probability change state), the "common right-handed instruction effect (second right-handed notification)" is set, and during the support time reduction state, what is it? Different right-handed instruction effects (right-handed instruction effect dedicated to support time reduction state: third right-handed notification).
(Instruction effect 3) At least in the time saving state and the support time saving state, a common right-handed instruction effect (second right-handed notification) is used.
(Instruction effect 4) During the time saving state and the support time saving state, a common right-handed instruction effect (time-saving right-handed notification: for example, the first right-handed notification for electric support (second right-handed notification)) is used, and the probability change state is A different right-handed instruction effect (right-handed notification for probability variation: for example, a second right-handed notification for electric support (third right-handed notification)) is used.
(Instruction effect 5) Different right-handed instruction effects are used in the time saving state, the probability change state, and the support time saving state.
(Instruction effect 6) The first right-handed instruction effect (the above-mentioned first right-handed notification) that is executed for a predetermined time after the confirmed display time in the support time reduction winning game has elapsed, and the second right-handed instruction effect during the support time reduction. At least, it is possible to execute a right-handed hit instruction effect during a big hit game by a time-saving big hit (a right-handed right-handed instruction effect executed during at least a part of the period during the big hit game), and the first right-handed instruction effect and the hit The production mode is different from that of the middle-right-handed instruction production. In this case, the right-handed instruction effect during the time saving state after the big hit game and the second right-handed instruction effect are common right-handed instruction effects.
(Instruction effect 7) The first right-handed instruction effect (the above-mentioned first right-handed notification) that is executed for a predetermined time after the lapse of the confirmed display time in the support time reduction winning game, and the second right-handed instruction effect during the support time reduction. At least, it is possible to execute a right-handed hitting instruction effect during a big hit game by a time-saving big hit (a right-handed right-handed instruction effect executed during at least a part of the period during the big hit game), and the first right-handed instruction effect and the hit The same production mode as the middle right-handed instruction production is used. In this case, the right-handed instruction effect during the time saving state after the big hit game and the second right-handed instruction effect are different right-handed instruction effects.

In addition, when a small hit (including a small hit winning type support time reduction) is provided, the following (instruction effect 8) can be applied.
(Instruction effect 8) The first right-handed instruction effect (the above-mentioned first right-handed notification) that is executed for a predetermined time after the confirmed display time in the support time reduction winning game has elapsed, and the second right-handed instruction effect during the support time reduction. It is possible to execute a hit-middle right-handed instruction effect (right-handed instruction effect executed during at least a part of the small-hit game) during the small-hit game, and at least the first right-handed instruction effect and the hit. The same production mode as the middle right-handed instruction production is used.

In the above, the special electric non-actuated type support time reduction was explained, but if the support time reduction is "special electric operation type support time reduction", the support time reduction opening / closing game is in progress (in the case of a small hit winning type support time reduction, the small hit). Right-handed instruction effect during the small hit game (during the small hit game) (right-handed instruction effect executed during at least a part of the support time shortening opening / closing game) and during the small hit game (here, the small hit game by the normal small hit) ), It is preferable that the right-handed instruction effect during the hit (the right-handed instruction effect executed during at least a part of the small hit game) is the same effect mode, but different effect modes may be used.

Returning to the description of FIG. 59 (δ), here, a menu displayable notification effect 811 for notifying that the menu operation period is in progress is also displayed. When the menu display operation is performed during the menu operation enable period, the menu screen shown in FIG. (η) and the adjustment screen 811c shown in FIG. (η-1) (here, the background image related to the time saving effect mode). (For example, an adjustment screen including an underwater acoustic battle mode: see FIG. 7B) or an adjustment screen 811b shown in FIG. (η-2) can be displayed.

(1-3. About the end timing of the right-handed instruction effect 851 (first right-handed notification))
In this production example, it has been explained that the end timing of the right-handed instruction effect 851 (first right-handed notification) is the timing at which the normal customer-waiting pre-production is switched to. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the following (Tim1) to (Tim4) may be used.
(Tim1) The first right-handed notification may be terminated before the menu displayable notification effect 811 is executed (appeared).
(Tim2) The first right-handed notification may be terminated before the menu operation period starts. Specifically, in the case where the menu operation period B is adopted, for example, the end is performed before the arrival of the time Tm (FIG. 58).
(Tim3) The first right-handed notification can be ended before the menu displayable notification effect 811 is executed (appeared) and during the menu operation operable period. For example, in the case where the menu displayable notification effect 811 is started after a predetermined time from the start of the menu operationable period, it can be ended before the menu displayable notification effect 811 is executed.
(Tim4) The first right-handed notification may be terminated when a menu operation (game setting operation) is performed. For example, it can be terminated when the operation means is operated for the menu operation. For example, when the menu screen 811a shown in FIG. (η), the adjustment screen 811b shown in FIG. (η-1), or the adjustment screen 811c shown in FIG. (η-2) is displayed, the first right-handed notification is terminated. be able to. Further, after the adjustment screen 811b or the adjustment screen 811c is displayed, the first right-handed notification may be terminated when the adjustment operation (game setting operation: for example, the operation of changing or determining the volume level) is performed. That is, the first right-handed notification can be ended when the adjustment operation is performed without ending the first right-handed notification when the adjustment screen 811b or the adjustment screen 811c is displayed.
When the first right-handed notification is completed (when the first right-handed notification is completed), the second right-handed notification is started.

(1-4. Waiting for customers (demo display))
Then, when the customer waiting effect start condition is satisfied, that is, after the time saving rush notification effect 872 is started (after receiving the customer waiting command) without the menu display operation being performed, a predetermined waiting time (120 seconds). ) Elapsed, or when an operation related to the game setting by the player is detected, if the waiting time (120 seconds) elapses after the detection (the waiting time after the game setting is completed and the effect before waiting for the customer is returned). (It may be the case that (120 seconds) has passed), the customer waiting effect appears (Fig. (Ε)). If an operation hold ball occurs during the customer waiting production or the customer waiting production (customer waiting standby (including the game setting screen display)), the symbol variation display game in the time saving mode (time saving effect mode) is executed. Will be done (Fig. (Ζ)).

(1-5. About the end timing of the right-handed instruction effect 851 (first right-handed notification) when there is an operation hold ball)
In the above, the end timing of the right-handed instruction effect 851 (first right-handed notification) when the operation holding ball is zero for a while after the winning game with the short support time has been described. In the following, if there is an operation hold ball during the support time reduction winning game, or after the support time reduction winning game, the operation hold ball is released within a short time (for example, before the normal customer waiting effect 890 is displayed). The end timing of the right-handed instruction effect 851 (first right-handed notification) when it occurs will be described. In this case, the right-handed instruction effect 851 (first right-handed notification) can be the following (Tim5) to (Tim12).
(Tim5) The first right-handed notification can be ended until the symbol change of the next game starts, or at the start of the symbol change of the next game. For example, it is a production transition of “figure (β) or figure (γ) → figure (ζ)”. If the operation hold ball exists during the winning game of the support time reduction, the next game is started immediately, but the time reduction rush notification effect 871 may be displayed across the next game. For example, it may be displayed for a predetermined time from the start of the next game, or may be displayed until the high-speed fluctuation of the decorative symbol of the next game (see FIG. 44 or the like described later for the high-speed fluctuation) is started. In this case, instead of displaying the time saving rush notification effect 871 as it is, only a part of the display, for example, the character image 802 or the character image 803 may be displayed.
(Tim6) The first right-handed notification can be terminated by the time the high-speed variation of at least one decorative symbol of each decorative symbol in the next game (see FIG. 44 and the like described later) starts.
(Tim7) The first right-handed notification can be terminated by the time the stop operation of at least one decorative symbol of each decorative symbol (see FIGS. 44 to 57 described later) in the next game is started.
(Tim8) The first right-handed notification can be terminated before at least one decorative symbol of each decorative symbol in the next game is stopped and displayed.
(Tim9) The first right-handed notification can be terminated after the stop display of at least one decorative symbol of each decorative symbol in the next game.
(Tim10) The first right-handed notification can be ended by the end of the fluctuation time (variation time elapses) of the special symbol (or decorative symbol) in the next game.
(Tim11) The first right-handed notification can be terminated at least after the variation time of the special symbol (or decorative symbol) in the next game ends (after the variation time elapses).
(Tim12) The first right-handed notification can be ended during the final display time in the next game. The first right-handed notification can be ended, for example, at the start, middle, or end of the fixed display time.
When the first right-handed notification is completed (when the first right-handed notification is completed), the second right-handed notification is started.

(Production example 2: Fig. 60)
Next, a modified example of the above-mentioned production example 1 (effect example 2) will be described with reference to FIG. 60. The difference between the effect example 1 of FIG. 59 and the effect example 2 of FIG. 60 is mainly that the display period of the time saving rush notification effect is different and the effect mode associated therewith is different.

In the case of the effect example 2 shown in FIG. 60, the time saving rush notification effect 871 is displayed until the next game is started or the customer waiting effect is started. Specifically, when a predetermined time elapses without starting the next game, the customer waiting effect appears without the customer waiting effect appearing.

The time saving rush notification effect 871 of this production example is a point and confirmation that the symbol variation is continuously displayed for a predetermined period (predetermined time) even after the confirmed display time has elapsed (after the time T3 in FIG. 58). The point that the time-saving rush notification effect 872 in which the launch guidance notification effect (right-handed instruction effect) 851 is additionally displayed after the display time has elapsed is substantially the same as the above-mentioned effect example 1 (FIG. 59). is there. However, in the case of this effect example, the normal pre-customer waiting effect 890 does not appear even after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, and the time saving rush notification effect 872 is continuously displayed as it is. This point is decisively different from the production example 1. Further, in this production example, after the time saving rush notification effect 872 appears for a predetermined time, the right-handed instruction effect is described from the right-handed instruction effect 851 (first right-handed notification) as shown in FIG. , Right-handed instruction effect 852 (second right-handed notification) is switched and displayed (time saving rush notification effect 873 in FIG. (δ)).

Further, in this effect example, the menu displayable notification effect 811 is displayed while the time saving rush notification effect 873 is appearing. At this time, the transmittance of at least a part of the effect display of the time saving rush notification effect 873 (here, at least one of the character image 802, the character image 803, the right-handed instruction effect 852, and the decorative symbol 801a) is set. It is preferable that the menu displayable notification effect 811 is higher than the menu displayable notification effect 811 (the menu displayable notification effect 811 is displayed with priority over the time saving rush notification effect 873). In particular, it is preferable to increase the transmittance of the effect display (here, the character image 803) superimposed on the menu displayable notification effect 811 to make the menu displayable notification effect 811 stand out. Further, in order to emphasize the right-handed advantageous state, it is preferable that at least the transmittance of the right-handed instruction effect 852 is not high (the same transmittance as that of the menu displayable notification effect 811).

When the menu display operation is performed during the menu operation enable period, the menu screen shown in FIG. (η), the adjustment screen 811c shown in FIG. (η-1), or the adjustment screen 811b shown in FIG. Is displayed. As shown in FIG. (η-1), the adjustment screen 811c including the background image related to the time saving effect mode may be used, but in the case of this production example, the time saving rush notification effect is continuously displayed and waiting for customers. Since the previous effect is not displayed, the adjustment screen 811c including the background image related to the time saving rush notification effect may be used. For example, instead of the submarine image, an image related to the time saving rush notification effect (for example, character image 803) or a specific image for the support time saving state may be displayed. Further, instead of the specific character 813 on the menu screen shown in FIG. (η), an image related to the time saving rush notification effect (for example, character image 803) or a specific image for the support time saving state may be displayed. As a result, even when the screen related to the game setting is being displayed, it is possible to notify that the support time is shortened.

The advantage of this production example is that the support time is shortened for a relatively long time because the "time saving rush notification production" appears until the next game is started or the customer waiting production is started. Is clearly notified.

(Production waiting for customers during the short support time)
In addition, in the production example 1 and the production example 2, the customer waiting effect (demo screen) in the time saving state (supporting time shortening state) due to the support time saving is changed to the customer waiting effect (customer waiting effect in a game state other than the support time saving state). ) May appear as a customer waiting effect (customer waiting effect for the support state). Preferably, at least a customer waiting effect different from the customer waiting effect in the normal state appears. For example, at least a part of the production modes by one or a plurality of production means used for the customer waiting production can be different production modes. As an example, for example, the display color of "CR Fujimaru-kun Senki" shown in Fig. (Ε) is different (at least part of the display content of the demo screen (demo movie) is different: part of the image display effect is different). , The light effect is different (a part of the light effect is different, etc. In this case, by displaying a customer waiting effect (demo screen) different from the usual one, the support time can be shortened even during the customer waiting effect. It can be notified.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example 2, the configuration in which the customer waiting effect can be displayed has been described, but the customer waiting effect itself may not be displayed. Specifically, the time saving rush notification effect is continued until the next game is started. The effect transition in this case excludes the customer waiting effect (demo display) of (ε) from (α) to (ζ) shown in FIG. 60.

(2. About irregular patterns)
(A) When the fluctuation time related to the support time reduction winning game ends, the main control unit 20 transmits a "fluctuation stop command" as an effect control command to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 receives the command. It is grasped that the fluctuation time has ended, and the decorative symbol during the fluctuation display is stopped and displayed (see step S452 in FIG. 13). However, if this fluctuation stop command is not correctly transmitted to the effect control unit 24 due to some problem (noise, etc.) (when the effect control unit 24 cannot correctly receive the fluctuation stop command), the decorative symbol is used for an error. The support time is shortened while the special fluctuation state (for example, so-called "sway fluctuation") remains. In other words, the decorative symbol remains swaying and fluctuating, but the electric support state due to the short support time is generated (the normal symbol fluctuation display game is executed as usual). In addition, when the customer waiting wait is in progress with the shaking fluctuation (when the effect control unit 24 receives the customer waiting command), the shaking fluctuation is terminated and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed stop display). ing. Specifically, the effect before waiting for customers will appear, and the decorative design will be stopped and displayed.

(Modified example of time saving mode transition)
Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving jackpot and the support time saving are first shifted to the common "time saving mode 1" (contributing to the reduction of the control burden), but they are different for the purpose of diversifying the playability and the production. You may shift to the time saving mode. For example, in the case of a time-saving jackpot, the time-saving mode 1 is shifted, and in the case of support time-saving, the time-saving mode 2 is shifted. In this case, the 4R time reduction jackpot and the support time reduction A, which give the same number of time reductions, can be shifted to different time reduction modes (variable states). In this case, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the final fluctuation of the time reduction jackpot and the final fluctuation of the support time reduction may be different. For example, the change time of the final fluctuation can be shortened by the support time reduction than by the 4R time reduction jackpot.
In addition, the time saving jackpot and the support time saving may be shifted to different time saving modes. For example, in the time saving state due to the 4R time saving jackpot, the game progresses under the low speed fluctuation state (for example, time saving mode 1), and in the case of the support time saving A, it is under the medium speed or high speed fluctuation state (for example, time saving mode 2 or time saving mode 3). ) To advance the game. In this case, the average digestion time (game digestion speed) related to the time reduction mode can be different between the jackpot time reduction state (normal time reduction state) and the time reduction state due to the support time reduction (support time reduction state) (normal variation). Fluctuation time or average fluctuation time is different). As a result, the playability and the degree of freedom of production are expanded, and these can be made various. In this case, the stop operation patterns of the decorative symbols described later may be the same, but it is preferable that they are different.

Further, when a specific support time reduction is won among a plurality of types of support time reductions, the mode may be shifted to a time reduction mode different from that when other support time reductions are won. For example, in the case of the support time reduction A and the support time reduction B that give a finite time reduction, the time reduction mode 1 (low speed fluctuation state) or the time reduction mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) is shifted, and the support time reduction C that gives an infinite time reduction is a time reduction. It shifts to mode 3 (high-speed fluctuation state), and so on. That is, it is possible to shift to a different time saving mode with a part or all of a plurality of types of support time saving. In this case, it is preferable to shift to a fluctuating state in which the average digestion time (game digestion speed) is relatively short as the support time reduction in which the number of time reductions to be given is relatively large is won. For example, in the case of support time reductions A, B, and C (time reduction times 100 times, 200 times, 65535 times), when the support time reduction A is won, the time reduction mode 1 (low-speed fluctuation state) and the support time reduction B are won. In, the mode shifts to the time saving mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state), and when the support time saving C is won, the time saving mode 3 (high speed fluctuation state) is shifted.

(Game mode related to latent state)
In addition, when providing the latent probability state, the data value different from Tcode and YJ (see FIG. 43) corresponding to other gaming states may be set. As a result, the "latent probability mode" and the "latent probability effect mode" may be provided as the game mode and the effect mode. The probabilistic mode according to the present embodiment has been described as a game mode corresponding to the "probability state", but the present invention is not limited to this, and all or part of the probabilistic mode is defined as a game mode corresponding to the "latent state". It can also be handled. In addition, the fluctuating state under the latent mode (latent state) is the same or substantially the same as the normal mode, or at least a fluctuating state slower than the time saving mode (a fluctuating state in which the average digestion time is relatively long). Is preferable.

<Processing on the main control unit side: FIGS. 8 to 15>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 15, the game operation processing on the main control unit 20 side of the present embodiment will be described. The processing on the main control unit 20 side is an infinite loop-shaped main processing (main control side main processing: FIG. 8) and a timer interrupt processing activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC (main control side timer interrupt processing: FIG. It is mainly composed of 9) and.

<12. Main control side main processing: Fig. 8>
The main process on the main control unit 20 side (main process on the main control side) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the details of the main processing on the main control side.

When the main control side starts the main process, the watchdog timer (WDT) function is exerted and the CPU is activated when a system reset occurs when recovering from a power failure or power failure, or when the control program runs out of control. May be forcibly reset (WDT reset). In any case, when the main control side main process is started, the main control unit 20 (CPU201) first executes the initial setting process necessary for starting the game operation as a part of the power-on process (step S011). ).

After completing the initial setting process in step S011, it is then determined whether or not the setting value can be changed in the setting change mode transition state (step S014). In the present embodiment, the setting key switch 94 (operated to the setting change mode side) and the RAM clear switch 98 are turned on when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned off and the door is opened (door open sensor 61 is ON (opening detection)). When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on while the operation is performed (both the setting key switch signal and the RAM clear signal are ON), the setting change mode transition condition is satisfied and the setting value can be changed. It is controlled to (setting change mode transition state).

In the setting change mode transition state (step S014: YES), the setting change process for managing the change operation of the set value (steps 1 to 6) is executed (step S023). In this setting change process, first, whether the set value Nc (set value data) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM in the area is an abnormal value (a value other than 00H to 05H corresponding to settings 1 to 6). Judge whether or not. If it is a normal game operation, the set value data (set value Nc) of any one of "00H to 05H (normal value)" is stored in the set value storage area corresponding to the settings 1 to 6. However, there is a possibility that the set value data is damaged due to some trouble and a value that does not correspond to any of the settings 1 to 6 is set (setting abnormality error). Therefore, if the set value Nc is not a normal value, the set value storage area is cleared to zero and returned to the initial value of 00H (here, setting 1).

If it is returned to the initial value or is a normal value, the current set value is displayed on the setting display 97. After that, the ON / OFF operation of the setting change switch 95 is monitored, and the current set value Nc is changed (updated) every time the setting change switch 95 is turned ON. As for the setting value during the setting change (during the setting change operation), as described above, each time the setting change switch 95 is operated, the setting changes in the range of settings 1 to 6 and the setting is changed to the setting display 97. The current setting value inside is displayed. Then, when the ON operation of the setting change completion switch 96 is confirmed, it is assumed that the set value is confirmed, and the current set value Nc (setting work value) is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 203. As a result, the setting change process is exited. Then, the processing state is shifted to the in-region RAM clear processing (step S031) described later.

The RAM clear switch 98 may function as the setting change switch 95 without providing the setting change switch 95. Each time the RAM clear switch 98 is pressed, any of the setting values 1 to 6 can be selected and configured. Further, the setting change completion switch 96 may be configured to function as the setting change completion switch 96 without providing the setting change completion switch 96. In this case, the setting change operation can be ended by turning off the setting key switch 94.

On the other hand, when it is not in the setting change mode transition state (step S014: NO), the contents of the RAM are checked to determine the presence or absence of the abnormality (step S015). Specifically, it checks whether the set value data (set value Nc) in the set value storage area is a normal value, whether the checksum value at the time of backup is a normal value, and the like. If there is an abnormality in the contents of the RAM (step S015: YES), the power re-on wait process (step S020) related to the RAM abnormality described later is executed.

When there is no abnormality in the contents of the RAM, that is, it is normal (step S015: NO), then it is determined whether or not the backup flag BF is in the ON state (5AH) (step S016). This backup flag BF is set to "5AH (normal value)" in the BF flag storage area of the RAM in the area when the backup process is normally executed in the process of the power supply abnormality check process (step S081 in FIG. 9) described later. Is set to. Therefore, under normal conditions, the backup flag BF should be 5AH. However, there may be a case where the backup flag BF is not a normal value (≠ 5AH) due to some trouble. Therefore, when the backup flag BF is not in the ON state (step S016: NO), the power re-on wait process is executed (step S020).

In the process of waiting for the power to be turned on again in step S020, the game is controlled to the game stop state in which the progress of the game process is forcibly stopped. Specifically, after sending the power supply re-on command and clearing the backup flag BF, the WDT clear process that clears the WDT and the confirmation of the ON state of the power supply abnormality signal (confirmation of the power failure) until a power failure occurs. The process (power supply error check process) is repeated. When a RAM error occurs, the WDT clear process is executed until a power failure is confirmed, and the WDT reset does not occur at the timing when the infinite loop process is repeated. In addition, when the effect control unit 24 receives the power re-on command, as a RAM error notification (power re-on instruction effect), the liquid crystal display device 36 is informed that "RAM error power is turned on again and the set value is set to 1. , Etc. are displayed, all the effect LEDs such as the decorative lamp 45 are turned off, and the speaker 46 is muted.

When the power re-turning wait process is executed and the game is stopped, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on again, and when the power is turned on again, the operation is set so that the setting change mode transition state is set. Unless the change process (step S023) is executed, the RAM error state currently occurring cannot be resolved. In the present embodiment, after the setting change process (step S023) is executed (after the set value storage area is cleared in the case of a setting error error), the in-area RAM clear process of step S031 described later is executed. As a result, substantially the entire area of the RAM 203 (however, the RAM area related to the performance display (outside the area RAM area) is excluded) is cleared, so that the RAM 203 returns to the initial state and the RAM error is eliminated. ing.

When the backup flag BF is in the ON state (step S016: YES), it is determined whether or not it is in the RAM clear mode transition state (step S025). In the present embodiment, in the state where the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the setting key switch 94 is turned off (not operated to the setting change mode side), and the RAM clear switch 98 is turned on (the setting key switch signal is turned off). , RAM clear signal ON) When the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, it is controlled to the RAM clear mode transition state on the assumption that the RAM clear transition condition is satisfied.

When the RAM clear mode transition state is set (step S025: YES), the in-region RAM clear process is executed (step S031). In this in-area RAM clearing process, at least the out-of-area RAM area related to the performance display and the in-area RAM area other than the set value storage area in the storage area of the RAM 203 are cleared. Therefore, the value of the backup flag BF and the checksum value set when the power is cut off are both cleared to zero in this process. Further, here, various commands necessary for clearing the RAM (for example, "RAM clear command" indicating that the RAM has been cleared, "customer waiting command", etc.) are transmitted to the effect control unit 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives the RAM clear command, the initialization notification effect for notifying the RAM clear is executed, and the effect mode is set to the "normal effect mode" as the effect mode in the initial state. That is, when the in-area RAM clear processing is executed, the game mode is set to the normal mode of the initial mode, and the effect mode is also the normal effect mode (for example, normal (normal A effect mode)) and simple (normal) related to the normal mode. It will be set to either B production mode) or premium mode (normal C production mode).

After completing the in-area RAM clearing process in step S031, the initial setting process (initial data setting process at power-on) at the time of clearing the RAM is then executed (step S032). In the initial data setting process at power-on, for example, 30000 ms is set in the timer for transmitting the RAM clear signal (one of the security signals), and the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b (special diagram 1 stop symbol, Special figure 2 Stop symbol) Loss symbol data is set as data. Then, the CTC setting process (step S036) described later is executed.

Returning to the description of step S025, when the RAM clear mode transition state is not performed (step S025: NO), it is then determined whether or not the current setting value can be confirmed in the setting confirmation mode transition state (setting confirmation allowable state). (Step S026). In the case of the present embodiment, in the state where the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the setting key switch 94 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 98 is turned OFF (setting key switch signal ON, RAM clear signal OFF). When the power is turned on to the machine 1, the setting confirmation mode transition state is controlled as if the setting confirmation mode transition condition is satisfied (see steps S014 to S026).

When the setting confirmation mode is in the transition state (step S026: YES), the setting confirmation process (step S027) for controlling the current setting value to the confirmable setting confirmation state is executed, and when the setting confirmation process is completed, the process continues. Then, the backup restoration process (step S028) for restoring the game process from the backup data backed up at the time of power failure is executed. In the setting confirmation process of step S027, a display process for displaying the current setting value (setting confirmation display) on the setting display 97 is performed. The display of the set value is terminated when the setting key switch is turned off. Then, after the setting key switch 94 is turned off, the backup restoration process is performed, and the CTC setting process (step S036) described later is executed.

On the other hand, when it is not in the setting confirmation mode transition state (step S026: NO), that is, when the power is simply turned on to the gaming machine 1, the backup restoration process (step S028) is performed, and the game at the time of backup is performed based on the backup data. Restore processing.

After executing any of the above-mentioned setting change processing (step S023), in-area RAM clear processing (step S031), setting confirmation processing (step S027), and backup restoration processing (step S028), the CTC setting The process is executed (step S036). Here, the CTC setting process for generating a timer interrupt is executed periodically every 4 ms. As a result, after that, the interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller is periodically output, and the main control side timer interrupt process (4 ms interrupt process) shown in FIG. 9 is executed.

Then, assuming that the game startable state is ready, the launch control signal (launch permission signal ES) that permits the launch operation of the launch device 32 is set from the OFF state (launch prohibition state) to the ON state (launch permission state), and the game is played. The start command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S037). As a result, the launching motion of the game ball from the launching device 32 is allowed. Further, when the effect control unit 24 receives the game start command, the initial operation (initialization operation) related to the movable body accessory is executed. However, during the initialization operation, the image display mode of the liquid crystal display device 36, the light emission mode of the decorative lamp 45, and the sound output from the speaker 46 do not change. The initialization operation here is exclusively an operation check at the time of turning on the power of the movable body accessory.

It should be noted that it is necessary to execute the operation of confirming whether or not the performance indicator 99 is operating normally in the step before executing the CTC setting process of step S036 after executing the backup restoration process of step S028. The "operation check setting process" may be configured to be executable. In the confirmation operation of the performance display 99, for example, the display modes of the four 7-segment displays 99a to 99d are periodically repeated "all blinking" for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Control in the "display (operation confirmation display)" mode (operation confirmation display processing). This makes it possible to check for defects such as missing segments. In this case, the display process related to the operation check is performed in the performance display monitor process (step S102: out-of-area program) during the main control side timer interrupt process described later. Since the display of the base value by the performance display 99 is executed in the performance display monitor process (step S102) during the main control side timer interrupt process after the CTC setting process in step S036, the setting change process (step S023). ) And the setting confirmation process (step S027), the display of the base value by the performance indicator 99 is not executed at this stage. Utilizing this point, at least one of the four segments 99a to 99d of the performance indicator 99 is configured to be usable as the setting indicator 97, and the performance indicator 99 is temporarily used as the setting indicator 97. It may be configured to function. In this case, since the setting display 97 can be replaced with the performance display 99, it is possible to contribute to reduction of control load and cost reduction.

When the series of power-on processing is completed, the infinite loop processing of steps S040 to S045 related to the normal game progress is executed. As a result, the game is controlled in a game startable state in which the game can proceed. When entering the loop process, first, various random number update processes are executed (step S041) with the CPU set to the interrupt disabled state (step S040). In this various random number update process, various software random numbers (random numbers circulating in a predetermined numerical range by increment processing) used in the special symbol variation display game and the normal symbol variation display game are updated. For example, a special symbol judgment random number used for a symbol lottery, a random number related to an auxiliary hit lottery (auxiliary hit judgment random number used for a winning lottery per auxiliary, and a normal symbol judgment used for a symbol lottery per auxiliary). Random numbers used to change the initial value (start value) of random numbers (random numbers) (initial value random numbers for special symbol judgment, initial value random numbers for auxiliary hit judgment, etc.), random numbers for fluctuation patterns used for selecting fluctuation patterns, etc. Update.

After completing the various random number update processes (step S041), the performance display monitor aggregation division process of the out-of-area program is then executed (step S043). In this performance display monitor aggregation division processing, processing necessary for calculating the base value to be displayed on the performance display 99 is executed.

When the performance display monitor aggregation division processing in step S043 is completed, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S045), the process returns to step S040, and the processes in steps S040 to S045 are repeatedly executed thereafter (main loop processing). .. The CPU 201 repeatedly executes various random number update processes and performance display monitor aggregation / division processes, except during the timer interrupt process that is intermittently executed.

<13. Main control side timer interrupt process: Fig. 9>
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process on the main control side. This main control side timer interrupt process is started by an interrupt from the CTC at regular time intervals (about 4 ms), and is interrupted and executed during the execution of the main control side main process.

In FIG. 9, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 immediately executes a power supply abnormality check process without saving the contents of the register (step S081). In this power supply abnormality check process, the power supply level supplied from a power supply board (not shown) is monitored, and if a power supply abnormality such as a power failure occurs, the backup flag BF is set (BF ← 5AH) and the checksum value. Checksum calculation (here, 8-bit addition calculation processing for the RAM in the area) for calculating the above, and backup processing including storage of the calculation result are performed. The power supply abnormality check process functions as a backup means for retaining data in a predetermined area of the RAM even after the power supply is cut off.

Next, the timer management process is executed (step S082). The timer values of various timers (time) used for the game operation control of the game machine 1 are updated here.

Next, the input management process is executed (step S083). In the input management process, various counters (for example, a winning counter for counting winning balls provided for each winning opening) are updated based on the input information (detection information) of various sensors and switches provided in the game machine 1. (Input data creation process). Further, here, input data is also created based on the input information of the status signal from the payout control board 29. If the status signal indicates an abnormality, a predetermined error processing according to the status abnormality is performed in the error management process (step S089) described later.

Next, the setting abnormality check process is executed (step S084). In the setting abnormality check process, it is determined whether the set value data is a normal value (value indicating settings 1 to 6), and if the value is not within the normal range, it is assumed that an abnormality has occurred in the set value data and a setting error occurs. Set the flag to the ON state (5AH). Then, the setting value abnormality command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 to exit the setting abnormality check process. When the effect control unit 24 receives the set value abnormality command, the effect control means is used to execute the setting error error notification (RAM error notification). If the setting error flag is ON when this setting error check process is executed again, the process is exited as it is without doing anything.

Next, the random number management process in the timer interrupt is executed (step S085). In the random number management process in the timer interrupt, the random number related to each variable display game is updated periodically. Specifically, in order to make the count value of the random number counter random, the random number is updated (+1 is added for each interrupt) for the special symbol judgment random number and the auxiliary hit judgment random number, and the random number counter goes around. Each time, the start value of the random number counter is changed. Since the internal lottery random number (big hit determination random number) is generated by the above random number generation circuit, it is not updated here.

Next, the error management process is executed (step S089). In this error management process, based on the detection information related to various switches and sensors, the status signal from the payout control board 29, etc., it is monitored whether or not an error (abnormality) has occurred in the game operation, and an error has occurred. In this case, an error command capable of specifying the error type is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and error processing according to the error type is executed. When the error is cleared, an error clearing command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 to execute the error clearing process.

Next, the prize ball management process is executed (step S090). In this prize ball management process, the winning counter is confirmed, and if there is a winning, a payout control command for specifying the number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 29. When the payout control board 29 receives the payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the game ball payout device 19 based on the prize ball number information included in the payout control command, and executes the payout operation of the designated prize ball number.

Next, the normal symbol management process is executed (step S091). In this normal symbol management process, the processing required for the normal symbol variation display game (normal symbol variation display operation) is executed. Here, whether or not a game ball is detected by the normal symbol start port sensor 37a is monitored, and if the game ball is detected, predetermined game information (random number for determining auxiliary hit, etc.) required for the auxiliary hit lottery is input. Acquire (Public figure random number acquisition process), and hold and store the game information as hold data (Public figure operation hold ball) up to the maximum number of hold storage numbers (4 in this case) (Public figure hold storage process). Then, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, an auxiliary hit lottery based on the normal symbol operation holding ball is performed, a variation pattern of the normal symbol is selected based on the auxiliary hit lottery result, and a stop display mode of the normal symbol (normal stop symbol). To decide. Further, here, in order to operate the normal symbol in a variable display operation, the LED display data for the variable display is created if it is changing, and the LED display data for the stop display is created if it is not changing (normally). Design display data update processing).

Next, the normal electric accessory management process is executed (step S092). In this ordinary electric accessory management process, the process necessary for executing the general electric opening game is executed based on the lottery result of the above-mentioned auxiliary hit lottery. Specifically, solenoid control data is generated and set for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c. Based on the data set here, in the solenoid management process of step S100 described later, an excitation signal based on the solenoid control data is output to the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c, and the operation pattern of the movable wing piece 47 is controlled. Will be done.

Next, the special symbol management process is executed (step S093). In this special symbol management process, the process required for the special symbol variation display game is executed. In this special symbol management process, mainly, the hold memory regarding the special figure operation holding ball, the look-ahead judgment, the determination of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern based on the look-ahead judgment result, the jackpot lottery, the determination of the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation based on the jackpot lottery, special Performs processing related to determining the stop symbol, controlling the variable display operation of the special symbol, setting the transition of the game state, and the like. The details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the special electric accessory management process is executed (step S095). In this special electric accessory management process, the process required for the hit game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed. The special electric accessory management process mainly performs processing related to execution control of the winning game based on the big hit lottery result, setting of the transition destination game state after the big hit game, and the like. The details of the special electric accessory management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the right-handed notification information management process is executed (step S097). In this right-handed notification information management process, the right-handed display device 39b is turned on when the game is in a "right-handed advantageous" gaming state (during a hit game, during an electric power support state (time saving state or probable change state)). LED data is created, and when the game is in a "left-handed advantageous" gaming state (normal state), LED data for turning off the right-handed display device 39b is created.

Next, the LED management process is executed (step S098). In this LED management process, output control of control signals (dynamic lighting data) for various LED display devices such as a normal symbol display device 39a, a special symbol display device 38a, 38b, and a right-handed display device 39b is executed. The control signal based on the LED display data created by the above-mentioned normal symbol management process (step S091), special symbol management process (step S093), right-handed notification information management process (step S097), etc. is output by this LED management process. Will be done.

Next, the external terminal management process is executed (step S099). In this external terminal management process, various outer end signals are created, and output control is executed for the external device through the external terminal board 21 for the frame.

Next, the solenoid management process is executed (step S100). In this solenoid management process, the solenoid control data set in the ordinary electric accessory management process (step S092) and the special electric accessory management process (step S094) is applied to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c and the large winning opening solenoid 52c. On the other hand, the output control of the excitation signal is executed. As a result, the movable wing piece 47 and the open door 52b are driven and controlled, and the lower starting port 35 and the large winning opening 50 are opened and closed.

Next, all the registers are saved (step S101), the performance display monitoring process belonging to the out-of-area program is executed (step S102), and then all the registers are restored (S103). In the performance display monitor processing, necessary processing related to calculation of the base value to be displayed on the performance display 99 and display control is executed. In addition, here, the type test signal is created and output processing is also performed.

Next, the count value of the WDT is cleared (step S104). As a result, the WDT is reset for each interrupt and the count value is returned to the initial value.

When the processing of steps S081 to S104 is completed, the timer interrupt processing is completed and the main processing on the main control side is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<8. Special symbol management process: Fig. 10>
Next, the special symbol management process (step S093) in FIG. 9 will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol management process.

In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first performs the “special figure 1 start port check process” regarding the special figure 1 side (upper start port 34 side) (step S301), and then the special figure 2 side (lower start port 35 side). "Special figure 2 start port check process" is executed (step S302). The details of the special figure 1 start port check process and the special figure 2 start port check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the start port check processing in steps S301 to S302 is completed, the state of the support time shortening opening / closing game flag is determined (step S303). This "support time reduction opening / closing game flag" is a flag for designating whether or not the support time reduction opening / closing game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (5AH), the support time reduction opening / closing game is in progress. When the flag is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the support time shortening opening / closing game is not in progress. In the case of the small hit winning type support time reduction, the support time reduction opening / closing game flag can function as a "small hit game flag" for designating whether or not the small hit game is in progress.

When the support time shortening opening / closing game flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S303: ≠ 5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S304). This "condition device operation flag" is a flag for designating whether or not a big hit game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (5AH), it indicates that the big hit game is in progress, and the flag When is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the jackpot game is not in progress.

During the support time reduction opening / closing game (step S303: = 5AH) or during the big hit game (step S304: = 5AH), the step is performed as it is without performing the processing related to the variation display operation of the special symbol in steps S306 to S308. Proceed to the special symbol display data update process of S309. Therefore, the variable display operation of the special symbol is not performed during either the support time shortening opening / closing game or the big hit game. That is, during the support time reduction opening / closing game or the hit game, the stop display mode of the special symbol is held as being fixedly displayed by the support time reduction symbol or the jackpot symbol.

On the other hand, in step S304, when the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S304: ≠ 5AH), that is, when neither the support time shortening opening / closing game nor the jackpot game is in progress (step S303: ≠ 5AH, and step S304). : ≠ 5AH), processing is performed according to the special symbol operation status (00H to 03H). The "special symbol operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol, and this status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of the RAM 203.

In the special symbol operation status branching process in step S305, it depends on which of the status values "waiting (00H, 01H)", "changing (02H)", and "confirming (03H)" the special symbol operation status is. The process according to any one of steps S306 to S308 is executed. Specifically, when the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H, 01H)", the special symbol change start process (step S306) is performed, and when the special symbol operation status is "changing (02H)", it is special. When the symbol changing process (step S307) is "confirming (03H)", the special symbol confirmation time process (step S308) is executed. Here, the above-mentioned "waiting" means that the behavior of the special symbol is in a standby state for the next fluctuation, and "changing" means that the behavior of the special symbol is changing (variation display). The above-mentioned "confirming" indicates that the special symbol has been changed and stopped (confirmed) is being displayed (during the special symbol confirmation time). By these processes, the fluctuation display operation of the special symbol (display operation in which the fluctuation start and fluctuation stop are set) is realized. Details of steps S306 to S308, which are closely related to the present invention, will be described later with reference to FIGS. 12, 13, and 14A to 14B, respectively.

When any of the processes of steps S306 to S308 is completed, the special symbol display data update process of step S309 described later is performed. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating, and if it is fluctuating, the data of the special symbol that repeats blinking at predetermined time intervals (data for 7-segment blinking display during fluctuation). ), And if the special symbol is not changing, the data for stop display (data for 7-segment blinking display during stop display) is created. The display data of the special symbol created here is output as LED data in the LED management process (step S098) of FIG. 9, and the variation display and stop display of the special symbol in the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are realized. .. As a result, the special symbol management process is exited, and the special electric accessory management process of step S095 of FIG. 9 is executed.

<9. Special figure 1 Starting port check process: Fig. 11>
A special figure 1 start port check process (step S301 in FIG. 10) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the details of the special drawing 1 start port check process. This special figure 1 start port check process serves as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and is mainly a process related to hold memory when a game ball wins a prize in the upper starting port 34. It is mainly composed of processing related to pre-reading judgment. It should be noted that the special figure 1 start port check process and the special figure 2 start port check process differ only in whether the processing content is related to the special figure 1 side or the special figure 2 side. The processing contents are substantially the same. Therefore, here, in order to avoid duplicate description, the special figure 1 start port check process will be focused on.

In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) is detected at the upper starting port 34 (step S311).

When the winning of the upper starting port 34 (starting port on the special drawing 1 side) is detected (step S311: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of balls held in special drawing 1 is 4 or more (step S312). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for operation in FIG. 1 is less than the maximum number of reserved balls (4 in this case). If the winning of the upper starting port 34 is not detected (step S311: NO), the special drawing 1 starting port check process is exited without doing anything.

Special Figure 1 When the number of pending balls is 4 or more, that is, when an over-winning exceeding the maximum number of reserved balls occurs (step S312: YES), an over-winning command for designating the over-winning (for example, in the special figure 1). In this case, B406H, in the case of special drawing 2, B506H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S324). On the other hand, when the number of balls held in special figure 1 is not 4 or more, that is, less than 4 (step S312: NO), 1 is added (+1) to the number of balls held in special figure 1 (step S313), and step S314 is performed. Proceed to the process of.

Proceeding to the process of step S314, various random numbers used in the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special figure 1 operation holding ball generated this time are acquired (step S314). Specifically, the current values of the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number are acquired from various random number counters, and the acquired random number values are stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM in the area. This hold storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information related to the symbol variation display game as an operation hold ball (hold data), and the above-mentioned various random values as hold data are specially illustrated in this hold storage area. Until the variable display operation of 1 is performed (until the special symbol variable display game 1 is executed), the start conditions are held and stored in the order of establishment (winning order). In the above-mentioned reserved storage area, the reserved storage area corresponding to the special figure 1 side and the special figure 2 side (the special figure 1 reserved storage area corresponding to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 reserved corresponding to the special figure 2). A storage area) is provided, and each can store hold data for the maximum number of hold balls.

Next, the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") for prohibiting the look-ahead determination is acquired in the command data (winning command 1) corresponding to the lower byte side (EVENT) of the winning command (step S315), and subsequently. It is determined whether or not the "look-ahead prohibition condition" is satisfied (step S316). This "pre-reading prohibition condition" is a condition for prohibiting pre-reading determination, specifically, a condition for prohibiting pre-reading notice. When the special figure 1 start port check process is in progress, the look-ahead prohibition condition for the special figure 1 operation hold ball is in effect, and when the special figure 2 start port check process is in progress, the look-ahead for the special figure 2 operation hold ball is in progress. Determine whether the prohibition condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, when the current game state is a game state accompanied by an electric support state (time saving state or probability change state), that is, a game state in which a special figure 2 operation holding ball is likely to occur,'special figure 1 look-ahead prohibited' In the case of "a game state with no electric support (normal state or latent state)", that is, in a game state in which a special figure 1 operation holding ball is likely to occur, it is regarded as "special figure 2 look-ahead prohibited". There is. Therefore, in the determination process of step S316, when the current gaming state is the time saving state or the probabilistic state, it is assumed that the special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition is being satisfied, and the determination result is “YES”. It should be noted that which of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is prohibited from pre-reading can be determined according to the internal gaming state (game state determination number YJ) and / or the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode).

When the above-mentioned special figure 1 read-ahead prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the setting error flag determination process (step S317) and the read-ahead determination process (steps S318 to S320) are skipped, and the process of step S321 described later is skipped. Proceed to. In this case, the look-ahead determination for the special figure 1 operation pending ball this time is not executed, and a winning command having the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") is created (starting opening winning, which will be described later). Time random number determination process (see step S320)). As a result, the execution of the look-ahead notice of the current operation hold ball is controlled to the prohibited state (the look-ahead notice for the current action hold ball is not executed).

Special Figure 1 When the pre-reading prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S316: NO), then it is determined whether or not the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S317). When the setting error flag is in the ON state (step S317: = 5AH), that is, when a RAM error (setting error error) has occurred, the process related to the look-ahead determination (steps S318 to S320) is skipped, and step S321 described later is performed. Proceed to processing. In this case as well, the look-ahead determination for the operation hold ball this time is not executed, and the winning command with the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") is created, so that the look-ahead notice is not executed. In other words, the read-ahead prohibition data (9FH) is data that specifies that the processes related to the look-ahead determination (steps S318 to S320) have not been executed.

When the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S317: ≠ 5AH), the setting value command is transmitted and the random number determination process is executed (step S318). This random number determination process is performed as a part of the'look-ahead determination'process, and here, the "winning lottery at the start of fluctuation (described later)" is executed when the operation holding ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation. Random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory (step S410 in FIG. 12) ”is determined in advance.

(Set value command)
The above "setting value command" is used when the effect control unit 24 side includes information that can specify the current set value and controls the appearance of the advance notice effect (setting suggestion effect described later) based on the set value. Will be done. This set value command is transmitted every time an operation hold ball is generated in the start port check process. As a result, the effect control unit 24 can control the appearance of the advance notice effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect related to the look-ahead advance notice effect) related to the operation holding ball based on the correct set value information.

In the random number determination process of step S318, first, the "hit random number determination table" is acquired, and then the big hit determination random number value is acquired. Then, based on the acquired random number value for jackpot determination and the winning random number determination table, the winning lottery (pre-reading winning determination) for the current operation pending ball is executed, and the lottery result (pre-reading winning result) is acquired.

(T-1. Random number judgment table: Fig. 20)
FIG. 20 shows an example of a hit random number determination table according to this embodiment. FIG. 20 (A) shows the case where the support time reduction is provided on the special figure 2 side, and FIG. 20 (B) shows the case where the support time reduction is not provided on the special figure 2 side (since the lottery probability is 0, it is substantially provided. It shows the hit random number judgment table (including the case equivalent to the one not given). In addition, the "support time reduction" of this embodiment is defined as the target of the winning lottery. From this point of view, the lottery form related to the shortened support time is referred to as the "winning lottery target lottery form".

The hit random number judgment table includes a hit random number judgment table (a hit random number judgment table for special figure 1) targeting a special figure 1 operation hold ball (special symbol variation display game 1) and a special figure 2 action hold ball (special). A hit random number determination table (a hit random number determination table for special figure 2) corresponding to the symbol variation display game 2) is provided. That is, the "random number determination table for special figure 1" is referred to during the special figure 1 start port check process, and the "random number determination table for special figure 2" is referred to during the special figure 2 start port check process. This hit random number determination table is also used when performing a winning lottery in the "random number determination process for determining the operation of a special electric accessory (step S410 in FIG. 12)" described later.

In these hit random number judgment tables, for each big hit lottery probability state (high probability and low probability), the winning type (big hit, support time reduction, loss (may include small hit)) is determined. The judgment area (judgment value) and the jackpot judgment random number value (size of the jackpot judgment random number: 65536) are defined in association with each other, and depending on which judgment value the jackpot judgment random number value belongs to. The winning type is decided.

In the case of the present embodiment, the hit random number determination table is provided with a hit determination table corresponding to each set value (settings 1 to 6) (a table in which at least the jackpot lottery probability differs depending on the settings 1 to 6). (In the figure, the determination values of settings 1, 3 and 6 are typically shown). Further, in the case of the present embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot lottery probability at the time of high probability to the jackpot lottery probability at the time of low probability (probability increase ratio: high probability / low probability) is the same at each set value, and the ratio is 10. It is set to a value that does not exceed. For example, setting 6 "low probability 1/180, high probability 1/45", setting 5 "low probability 1/184, high probability 1/46", ..., Setting 2 "low probability 1 / With 196, high probability 1/49 "and setting 1" low probability 1/200, high probability 1/50 ", the jackpot is won. The probability increase rate may be different for each set value.

FIG. 20B is a random number determination table for special figure 2 when the support time reduction is not provided on the special figure 2 side, but in the present embodiment, it corresponds to the determination value (65405 to 65535) of the support time reduction winning. All the data of the part to be processed is "00H". That is, even if the random value for jackpot determination belongs to "65405 to 65535", the winning result is forcibly "missed". In this way, if it is desired to provide a support time reduction on the special figure 2 side later, it is only necessary to change the data corresponding to the judgment value to "5AH", and the data structure is changed as a whole again. There is no need, and adjustments can be facilitated during new model development and design development stages.

After completing the random number determination process in step S318 described above, the special stop symbol data creation process is then executed (step S319). This special stop symbol data creation process is performed as a part of the'look-ahead determination'process, and here, the "symbol at the start of fluctuation" executed when the operation holding ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation. A'look-ahead symbol determination'for determining the lottery (step S411 in FIG. 10 described later) in advance is performed.

In the special stop symbol data creation process, a "symbol table" is selected according to the pre-reading winning result obtained in step S318 and the special symbol type (special figure 1 and special figure 2) to be processed this time. ..

(T-2. Design table selection table: Fig. 21)
The selection of the symbol table is determined based on the "symbol table selection table" shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the symbol table selection table includes the symbol table selection table corresponding to each of the special symbol variation display game 1 and the special symbol variation display game 2 (design table selection table for special figure 1, symbol table selection for special symbol 2). Table) is provided. For example, if the change this time is on the special figure 1 side and the result of the winning lottery is "support time reduction", "support time reduction symbol table 1" is selected. It should be noted that these symbol table selection tables are also used when selecting the symbol table at the start of fluctuation in the special stop symbol creation process (step S411 in FIG. 12) described later.

As shown in FIG. 21, the above-mentioned "design table" includes a "big hit symbol table", a "support time reduction symbol table", and a "loss symbol table" for determining a jackpot type, a support time reduction type, and a loss type. , Each symbol table is provided corresponding to a special symbol type. These symbol tables are also used when performing a symbol lottery at the start of fluctuation in the special stop symbol creation process (step S411 in FIG. 12) described later. In addition, in FIG. 21 (a) and (b), when the winning lottery target on the special figure 2 side has a support time reduction, in FIGS. 21 (b) and (c), there is no "support time reduction" in the winning lottery target on the special figure 2 side. The design table selection table of the case is shown. Further, in the present embodiment, since the small hit is not provided, the "small hit symbol table" is not provided.

Then, the special symbol determination random value obtained in step S314 is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the acquired special symbol determination random value, the symbol lottery (look-ahead) for the current operation pending ball is performed. Execute the symbol determination) and acquire the lottery result (look-ahead symbol result).

(T-3. Design table: FIGS. 22 to 24)
22 to 24 show the above-mentioned "big hit symbol table", "support time saving symbol table", and "missing symbol table". As shown in FIGS. 22 to 24, the symbol table has a determination area (judgment value) for determining a winning type (symbol type) and a special symbol determination random value (for example, a special symbol determination random value). Size: 200) is associated with it. Specifically, the winning type is determined according to a predetermined symbol lottery rate depending on which determination value the special symbol determination random value belongs to, and the special symbol determination data special stop symbol is used as data indicating the lottery result. The number and the offset value for selecting the fluctuation pattern (offset value in the figure) are acquired. In the present embodiment, according to a predetermined symbol lottery rate (for example, refer to the column of "symbol lottery rate" in FIG. 4), the winning type (winning type: jackpot type (10R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, 4R time reduction jackpot) ), Support time reduction type (support time reduction A, support time reduction B, support time reduction C) and loss type (loss A, loss B, loss C)) are determined.

The "special symbol determination data" is data for identifying the winning type, and specifically, the hit type (10R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, 4R time reduction jackpot) and the support time reduction type (support time reduction). This is data for identifying which of A, support time reduction B, support time reduction C) and loss type (loss A, loss B, loss C) was won. The special symbol determination data includes processing that requires winning type information (for example, game state transition preparation process (step S412) in FIG. 12, which will be described later, special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413), and execution of a jackpot game. It is used in control-related processing (special electric accessory management processing in FIG. 15) and the like.

Further, the above-mentioned "special stop symbol number" is data for designating a special stop symbol mode to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, and the stop symbol type of the special symbol on the main control unit 20 side ('7 in this embodiment). It is used when specifying the display mode of seg'. In the present embodiment, for example, even if the winning types are the same, the display mode of the special stop symbol displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b depending on the determination value (in the present embodiment, the display mode of '7 segment'). ) May be different. In this way, even if the winning types are the same, even if the special stop symbol displayed on the special symbol display device is viewed by determining a plurality of types of special stop symbol numbers according to the random value for determining the special symbol. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish what kind of jackpot or support time reduction the player has won. As for the normal symbol, the normal symbol determination data and the normal stop symbol number are provided in the same manner as the special symbol.

Further, the above-mentioned "offset value for selecting a fluctuation pattern" is data used for selecting a target fluctuation pattern distribution table.

In the figure, for convenience of explanation, the value of the special symbol determination data special stop symbol number and the offset value for variable pattern selection is described as "** H", but here, it is appropriate corresponding to each winning type. The value is set.

(About other big hit lottery forms)
In the present embodiment, one or a plurality of types of "support time saving (time saving symbol)" for giving a time saving state are provided to the target of the "winning lottery" using the big hit judgment random number, and the winning lottery result and the special symbol judgment are provided. It is a lottery form in which one "support time reduction" is drawn by a "design lottery" using a random number value (a lottery form for winning lottery). Specifically, this is a case where a predetermined determination area (winning area) related to the support time reduction is provided in the hit random number determination table, and the “support time reduction symbol table” shown in FIG. 23 is provided as the symbol table. In the case of the winning lottery target lottery form, since the big hit and the support time reduction are drawn independently, the lottery probability of the support time reduction does not change even if the lottery probability of the big hit fluctuates (see FIG. 20).

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other lottery forms can be used. Specifically, the following "hit type target lottery form (FIG. 25)" and "loss type target lottery form (FIG. 29)" may be used.

(“Lottery form for winning type”: Fig. 25)
As shown in FIG. 25, the "winning type target lottery form" is a lottery form in which a support time reduction is provided for the hit type (winning type belonging to a big hit or a small hit) and the support time reduction is treated as a winning type belonging to the "win". is there. Specifically, this is a case in which one or a plurality of types of determination areas related to support time reduction are provided in the big hit symbol table or the small hit symbol table (see FIG. 28). One or more types of support time reductions can be provided for the hit type on the special figure 1 side and / or the special figure 2 side. Here, in order to avoid duplicate description, the description will be focused on the special figure 1 side, and the description of the special figure 2 side will be omitted. In addition, the details of the winning lottery and the symbol lottery, which are substantially the same as the contents already explained, will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

In this winning type target lottery form, first, either "big hit" or "missing" is determined by the winning lottery. This winning lottery is performed based on the hit random number determination table shown in FIG. 26 and the big hit determination random number. As shown in the figure, the winning random number determination table of this example is not provided with a winning area for shortening the support time.

Next, the symbol table is selected based on the result of the winning lottery. In this example, the symbol table selection table shown in FIG. 27 is referred to, and the symbol table corresponding to the result of the winning lottery is selected. In this example, since the support time reduction is included in the hit type, the "support time reduction symbol table" as in the above embodiment is not provided, and the "big hit symbol tables 1 and 2" for the jackpot winning are lost. "Loss pattern tables 1 and 2" for time are provided.

Then, by the symbol lottery, the winning type belonging to the jackpot, for example, in the case of the special figure 1 side, one of the winning types (symbol type) from "10 probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, 4R time reduction jackpot, support time reduction A to C" ) Is determined. This symbol lottery is performed based on the symbol table and the random value for determining the special symbol. FIG. 28 shows a jackpot symbol table according to this example (the lost symbol table is the same as FIG. 24, so the illustration is omitted). Which winning type is determined is determined according to the "design lottery rate" shown in FIG. 28.

In the case of the winning type target lottery form, since the support time reduction belongs to the big hit type, the winning probability depends on the big hit lottery probability. That is, when the probability is high (for example, the probability change state), the lottery probability of the support time reduction also increases (support time reduction probability fluctuation state). For example, if the winning probability state of the big hit is a low probability state (normal state, time saving state), the lottery probability (settings 1 to 6) of the support time saving is about 1/1333 to 1/1200, but when the probability is high (normal state, time saving state). In the probabilistic state and latent state), the lottery probability of shortening the support time also increases, and becomes about 1/333 to 1/300 (the same increase as the jackpot lottery probability).

("Loss type target lottery form" (variation example 2 of the lottery form): FIG. 29)
Next, the "lost type target lottery form" will be described.

As shown in FIG. 29, the “loss type target lottery form” is a lottery form in which a support time reduction is provided for each loss type and the support time reduction is treated as a winning type belonging to “loss”. Specifically, this is a case in which one or a plurality of types of determination areas related to support time reduction are provided in the lost symbol table (see FIG. 30). One or more types of support time reductions can be provided for the hit type on the special figure 1 side and / or the special figure 2 side.

In this loss type target lottery form, the support time reduction is treated as one aspect of "loss", which is largely different from the case where the support time reduction is treated as one aspect of "hit" as in the above-mentioned "hit type target lottery form". different. However, the content of the lottery processing procedure itself is substantially the same.

In this loss type target lottery form, first, either "big hit" or "loss" is determined by the winning lottery. This winning lottery is performed based on the hit random number determination table shown in FIG. 26 and the big hit determination random number.

If "Loss" is drawn by the winning lottery, the winning type belonging to the loss, for example, "Loss A to C and Support Time Reduction A to C" for the special figure 1 side, is selected by the symbol lottery. (Symbol type) is decided. Which of the winning types is determined is determined according to the "design lottery rate" shown in FIG. 29. FIG. 30 shows a lost symbol table according to this example (the jackpot symbol table is omitted because it is the same as FIG. 22 of the above embodiment (winning lottery target lottery form)). Which winning type is determined is determined according to the "design lottery rate" shown in FIG. 29.

However, in the case of the lottery form for the loss type, when the size of the random number for special symbol determination (numerical range that the random number can take) is small, for example, the size of the random number for special symbol determination is 200 (0 to 199). In this case, the winning probability of the short support time can be reduced to only 1/200 of the winning probability of the loss, and the degree of freedom in adjusting the winning probability of the short support time is lacking.

Therefore, in this example, as shown in the figure, the size of the special symbol determination random number is set to 16384 (0 to 16383), and the adjustment range of the winning probability of the support time reduction is given a degree of freedom. Here, the relationship is "the size of the special symbol determination random number used for the jackpot symbol lottery (200) <the size of the special symbol determination random number used for the lost symbol lottery (5000)". Of course, depending on the playability, the special symbol determination random number used for the jackpot symbol lottery may also be used for the lost symbol lottery.

In the case of the above-mentioned lottery form for the loss type, since the support time reduction belongs to the loss type, the winning probability depends on the loss lottery probability. Therefore, when the jackpot lottery probability becomes high, the lottery probability of losing is lowered by that amount, and therefore, contrary to the case of the above-mentioned hit type target lottery form, the lottery probability of shortening the support time is lowered. For example, if the winning probability state of the jackpot is low, the lottery probability (settings 1 to 6) for shortening the support time is about 1/500, but if the probability is high, the lottery probability for shortening the support time decreases, and it is about. The probability is lower than 1/500.

The feature of the lottery form for the loss type is that the privilege can be obtained even though it is "loss". For example, as shown in FIG. 41, the loss variation pattern distribution table may include a variation pattern distribution table related to the support time reduction winning (a configuration in which the variation pattern related to the support time reduction winning can be selected). The part omitted by "..." has the same contents as the normal medium loss fluctuation pattern distribution table of FIG. 32 according to the present embodiment, and is omitted for convenience of explanation. .. Similarly, the other loss fluctuation pattern distribution tables (FIGS. 34, 36, 38, 40, etc.) can be configured so that the variation pattern related to the support time reduction winning can be selected.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, when the support time is shortened, the reach variation is selected as in the case of winning. However, for the fluctuation pattern specification command, the command data belonging to the loss is selected. This is because the support time reduction belongs to the loss. As a result, in terms of production, during the symbol variation display game, the same advance notice production (production according to the loss production scenario) as at the time of loss appears, but in the end, the effect of "winning in a short support time" is unexpected. Can be revealed. In addition, at the final stage of the reach effect, in the winning effect that notifies whether or not it is a hit, the same winning effect (successful effect) as at the time of winning the big hit may appear even though it is a loss. In addition, the production mode may be different from that at the time of winning the big hit.

Which of the "winning type target lottery form (FIG. 25)" and "missing type target lottery form (FIG. 29)" and the "winning lottery target lottery form (FIG. 4)" according to the above-described modification It is free to adopt the lottery form of the above, but it is preferable to adopt the “winning lottery target lottery form (FIG. 4)”, and more preferably the “loss type target lottery form (FIG. 29)”. The reason is that in the case of the "winning type target lottery form (Fig. 25)", the support time reduction is treated as belonging to the winning type, so if it belongs to the big hit type, "the big hit is won by the winning lottery". This becomes a condition for winning the support time reduction, and gives the player a sense of loss (for example, a disappointing feeling that "I won the support time reduction with a low profit margin even though I was drawing a big hit"). Is.

In any of the lottery forms, if there is only one type of support time reduction, it is not necessary to execute the symbol lottery. In addition, among the big hit lottery related to a plurality of special symbols (special figures 1 and 2), a time saving state is given based on the big hit lottery related to a specific special symbol (either special figure 1 or special figure 2). It may be configured as. For example, among the special figures 1 and 2, the "support time reduction" can be provided only for the lottery target of the big hit lottery on the special figure 1 side.

Further, although a common symbol table may be provided for all settings, a symbol table according to the set value may be provided. For example, it can be configured as follows (A) and (B).
(A) The symbol selection rate of one or a plurality of winning types is different in a part or all of each set value. For example, the symbol lottery rate for a specific probability variation jackpot (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot) can be set so that the higher the set value, the higher the probability.
(B) The probability variation inrush rate (at least the total symbol lottery rate of the jackpot with a high probability state (probability variation jackpot and / or latent probability jackpot)) is different in all or a part of each set value. In the case of this embodiment, the probability variation inrush rate is set to 65% common to all settings (see the symbol lottery probability of 10R probability variation jackpot and 4R probability variation jackpot in FIG. 4), but the probability variation inrush rate of settings 1 to 6 is set to, for example. It can be set so that the higher the set value, the higher the probability (easier to enter the probability change), such as "60%, 61%, 62%, 63%, 64%, 65%". The same applies to the time-saving rush rate (total symbol selection rate for time-saving jackpots).
In any case, as the set value becomes higher, the ball ejection performance (machine discount) may be determined to be more advantageous to the player.

Returning to the description of FIG. After completing the special stop symbol data creation process in step S319 described above, the start opening winning random number determination process is then executed (step S320). This start port winning random number determination process is also performed as part of the'look-ahead determination'process, and here, the "variation pattern at the start of fluctuation" when the operation hold ball is subjected to the variation display operation is described. Performs'look-ahead fluctuation pattern judgment'to be judged in advance. Specifically, the result of the "special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413)" shown in FIG. 12, which will be described later, is pre-read and determined.

Specifically, for the pre-reading symbol determination result (at least the winning lottery result obtained in the random number determination process (step S318)) obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process (step S319) and the variation pattern acquired in step S314. Using a random number (magnitude of random number value: 10000), the "variation pattern at the start of fluctuation" related to the operation hold ball this time is pre-read and determined. Since the look-ahead pattern judgment determines the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation in advance, a separately provided "look-ahead judgment table" having the same basic configuration as the fluctuation pattern distribution table used at the start of fluctuation. Refer to. However, in the case of this embodiment, in order to reduce the program capacity, a fluctuation pattern distribution table is provided as "at the time of winning (at the time of pre-reading judgment) and at the time of fluctuation start" (MODE1 in FIGS. 31 and 32, etc.). , MODE2, EVENT), at both the time of winning and the time of the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation is pre-read based on this fluctuation pattern distribution table and the random value for the fluctuation pattern acquired in the process of step S314. judge.

Then, "command data at the time of winning" is acquired as the look-ahead determination result. Here, as the command data constituting the winning command, the command data on the "MODE1 (1st byte (upper byte))" side that can specify the distinction between hit and loss, and the content of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern can be specified. "The command data on the EVENT (second byte (lower byte)) side is acquired. That is, the look-ahead fluctuation pattern (excluding the operation pending ball number information) is based on the command data determined in the start opening winning random number determination process. ) Will be specified.

Regarding the above-mentioned "starting port winning random number determination process (step S320)", in order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, the variation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 32 is typically used at the time of winning (look-ahead). Not only the content at the time of determination (at the time of determination), but also the content at the start of fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process of FIG. 12 (step S413)) will be described.

The start port winning random number determination process is configured to include the following processes (a) and (b) as a process for determining a "winning command" for designating a look-ahead variation pattern.
(A) Refer to the "variable pattern distribution table selection table (not shown)" for selecting the variable pattern distribution table, and determine the "variable pattern distribution table" to be referred to this time. Sorting table determination process ",
(B) With reference to the "variation pattern distribution table" determined in (a) above, the winning command data corresponding to the look-ahead variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern random value acquired in the process of step S314. It is configured to include "command data determination process at the time of winning (look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination process)".

(Variable pattern distribution table selection table (at the time of winning): not shown)
In the above "variable pattern distribution table selection table", there are a plurality of types of "variable pattern distribution tables" associated with the special symbol type, the winning type, the number of balls on hold, and the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode). It has been decided. The variable pattern distribution table selection table includes a plurality of types of variable pattern distribution tables (FH1 to 7) based on a special symbol type, a winning type, the number of balls on hold, and a variable pattern selection mode (Tcode). Any one of the "variable pattern distribution tables" can be determined.

This fluctuation pattern distribution table selection table is not only used when determining the "winning command" at the time of winning (at the time of pre-reading judgment), but also the processing related to the determination of the "variation pattern specification command" at the start of fluctuation ( It is also used in the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413) of FIG. 12, which will be described later, and serves as a variation pattern distribution table selection table that is shared (common) at the time of winning and at the start of variation. However, at the time of pre-reading determination (the above-mentioned "winning fluctuation pattern distribution table determination process"), the number of operation-holding balls is ignored (with the operation-holding balls set to zero), and the purpose is obtained from the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern distribution table selection table. The fluctuation pattern distribution table of is selected (this will be described later). On the other hand, at the start of fluctuation, a value obtained by subtracting the number of operation-holding balls used for the current fluctuation display operation from the existing operation-holding balls (number of operation-holding balls-1) is referred to as information on the number of operation-holding balls (FIG. 32). In the column of "Number of balls on hold" in the above, see steps S403 and S413 of the special symbol change start processing of FIG. 12 described later).

(Variable pattern distribution table (at the time of winning))
Next, the contents of the fluctuation pattern distribution table will be described. Here, for convenience of explanation, the fluctuation pattern distribution table according to the normal conditions of FIGS. 31 and 32 will be described as a representative example. FIG. 31 shows a "normal middle hit / support time reduction winning variation pattern distribution table" referred to at the time of big hit or support time reduction winning in the normal mode (normal state), and FIG. 32 shows a reference at the time of loss in the normal mode. "Normal medium loss fluctuation pattern distribution table" is shown.

With reference to FIGS. 31 and 32, the fluctuation pattern distribution tables related to the normal mode include the fluctuation pattern distribution table “FB1 to FB6” for winning and the fluctuation pattern distribution table “FH1 to FH7” for loss. And are included. These fluctuation pattern distribution tables are provided as tables for both pre-reading determination and fluctuation start. Therefore, the following data groups are defined in the fluctuation pattern distribution table.

(B) In the fluctuation pattern distribution table, the command data (“MODE1” in the figure) on the upper byte (first byte) side for configuring the “winning command” that specifies the look-ahead fluctuation pattern, and the lower byte (“MODE1” in the figure) The command data on the (second byte) side (“EVENT” in the figure) and the random value for the fluctuation pattern (magnitude of the random value for the fluctuation pattern: 10000) are defined in association with each other. The above-mentioned "MODE1" is command data that can specify the distinction between hit and loss, and "EVENT" is command data that can specify the content of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern. At the time of pre-reading judgment, this fluctuation pattern distribution table is referred to, and a winning command is configured depending on which judgment value the fluctuation pattern random value belongs to (lottery using the fluctuation pattern random value). Command data is determined. As a result, a winning command is created and the content of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is specified. When this winning command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, the effect control unit 24 side grasps the content of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern and uses it for the effect process related to the look-ahead notice.

(B) In addition, the fluctuation pattern distribution table also defines data related to the "variation pattern specification command" that specifies the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation. Specifically, in the variation pattern distribution table, the command data (“MODE2” on the upper byte (first byte) side) for configuring the variation pattern specification command and the lower byte (second byte) side. The command data (“EVENT” in the figure) and the random value for the fluctuation pattern are defined in association with each other. The above-mentioned "MODE2" is command data that can specify the distinction between hit and loss, and "EVENT" is command data that can specify the content of the fluctuation pattern. This fluctuation pattern distribution table is also referred to at the start of fluctuation (see the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process (step S413) of FIG. 12 described later), and the fluctuation pattern specification command is configured by lottery using the random value for the fluctuation pattern. The command data to be used is determined. As a result, a fluctuation pattern specification command (upper byte MODE2 + lower byte EVENT) is created, and the content of the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation is specified. The "variation pattern specification command" is composed of 2-byte control data consisting of "MODE2" and "EVENT", like the winning command, and when this variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, , The effect control unit 24 side grasps the variation pattern at the start of the variation, and is used for the effect processing related to the effect during the symbol variation.

Although the "selectivity" is shown here in the figure, in reality, the judgment area (judgment value: 0 to 0) for determining the winning command data or the fluctuation pattern specification command according to the random value for the fluctuation pattern. The range of 9999) is defined, and these command data are determined depending on which determination value the random value for the fluctuation pattern belongs to.

The relationship between the random value for the fluctuation pattern and the judgment value is as follows. For example, if the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table “FH1” shown in FIG. 32 is described as a representative example, the judgment value is referred to from the place where the judgment value is first described when viewed from the front of the drawing in the column direction from the top to the bottom. Although it is described in the order of "10", "8990", and "1000", the content is that the random value for the fluctuation pattern (BRND = 0 to 9999) is in the range of the determination value 0 to 9 (in the above "10"). If it belongs to the description column), the command data that specifies "normal variation 13s" is selected, and if it belongs to the range of judgment values 10 to 8999 (corresponding to the description column of "8990" above), "normal variation 16s". The command data that specifies "N reach 1" is selected when the command data that specifies "N reach 1" is selected and belongs to the range of the judgment value 9000 to 9999 (corresponding to the description field of "1000" above). .. In the case of the present embodiment, the blank portion in the figure, that is, the address where the determination value is stored, does not mean that the determination value data is not stored, but "0" is stored as the determination value. This is to facilitate the adjustment of the selectivity when developing a new model or at the design development stage.

To explain this by taking a simple example, for example, in the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1", the determination values are distributed to the normal fluctuation 13s, the normal fluctuation 16s, and the N reach 1, but tentatively, the normal fluctuation is assumed. If it is desired to additionally select 8s, it becomes necessary to change the data structure as a whole again, which may result in a situation where the design is restarted from scratch. Further, although not shown, when a fluctuation pattern distribution table for each set value is provided, it may be necessary to change the data structure of all these tables. Generally, when developing a new model, various judgment values are set, and the design is performed while adjusting the judgment values in consideration of the balance of fluctuation time (suppression of fluctuation slump) and the balance of production such as reach production. I will go. Therefore, the design may be designed based on the initially set judgment value, or may need to be changed.

Therefore, "0 (zero)" is provisionally set as the judgment value data for the address of the storage destination of the judgment value of the fluctuation pattern considered to be out of the selection target at the design stage, and if a change occurs, that value is appropriately set. Is changed so that it can be easily included in the fluctuation pattern to be selected. For example, in the judgment value data of the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1", the normal fluctuation 4s "0", the normal fluctuation 8s "0", the normal fluctuation 13s "10", the normal fluctuation 16s "8990", Data including zeros (blank parts in the figure) such as normal fluctuation 16s "0" for pre-reading notice, N reach 1 "0" for pre-reading notice, and N reach 1 "1000" are stored.

In the case of this embodiment, when the loss A is won, as shown in the figure, N reach 2 and later are defined as fluctuation patterns that are not to be selected. Therefore, in each of "FH1" to "FH4", normal fluctuations 4s to N Judgment value data including "0" is stored within the address range related to reach 1 (consecutive addresses in this case) (of course, the selection target may be the fluctuation pattern after N reach 2). Even when the judgment value is "0", the lottery process (the process of determining the look-ahead variation pattern and the process of determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation) is executed, but the variation pattern with the determination value of zero is actually selected. Since it is not performed, it can be registered as a "variation pattern that is not used". This "judgment value zero" part can be changed from "unused fluctuation pattern" to "selection target fluctuation pattern" by setting a value other than zero as appropriate when adjustment is required at the design stage or the like. , Easy to change. In this way, for fluctuation patterns that are not used, if the judgment value is left at zero and the same address allocation as the address allocation at the development stage is used when developing a new model, the table data structure can be changed one by one. There is no need to change, and design changes are extremely easy. The same applies to other fluctuation pattern distribution tables.

As described above, in the fluctuation pattern distribution table, the command data constituting the "winning command" is determined at the time of winning depending on which judgment value the random value for the fluctuation pattern belongs to, and at the time of the start of fluctuation. The command data that composes the "variation pattern specification command" is determined.

Here, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the target fluctuation pattern distribution table is selected by ignoring the number of operation-holding balls (assuming the operation-holding balls are zero) at the time of pre-reading determination, and the reason will be described below. It's a street.

The fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 32 is a table that can be used both at the time of winning and at the start of fluctuation (the same applies to other fluctuation pattern distribution tables), but in reality, the number of balls on hold at the time of winning and the start of fluctuation It does not always match the number of pending operations. Therefore, at the time of pre-reading determination (at the time of winning), the operation holding ball is set to zero, and the target fluctuation pattern distribution table is selected. For example, referring to FIG. 32, when the current game state is normal (Tcode = 00H), the operation holding ball to be read ahead this time is the special figure 1 side, and the winning type is the loss A (special). The variable pattern distribution table "FH1" is selected regardless of the number of balls on hold at the time of winning) and the number of balls on hold at the time of winning.

However, even if the number of operation-holding balls at the time of pre-reading determination and the number of operation-holding balls at the start of fluctuation do not match, the look-ahead variation pattern is determined by ignoring the number of operation-holding balls in the dark clouds. There is a possibility that there will be a big difference between the content of and the content of the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation. More specifically, at the time of winning, the main control unit 20 sends a "winning command" including the look-ahead fluctuation pattern information to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 receiving the "winning command" is based on the hold addition command. , Performs production control related to pre-reading notice production. On the other hand, at the start of fluctuation, the main control unit 20 sends a "variation pattern specification command" including the fluctuation pattern information at the start of fluctuation to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 that receives the command sends the fluctuation pattern specification command. Based on the above, the effect control including the variation display operation effect of the decorative symbol (decorative symbol variation display effect (decorative symbol effect described later)) and the advance notice effect (notice effect during change) in the decorative symbol variation display game is performed. Due to such a relationship, if there is a large difference between the content of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern and the content of the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation, the relationship between the content of the look-ahead notice and the content of the notice during change is broken, and the reliability of the notice production is increased. There is a risk that the fun will be reduced and the player's willingness to play will be diminished. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the look-ahead determination is provided with the following characteristic element (first characteristic element).

(First characteristic element)
For example, when the current game state is normal, the operation holding ball to be read ahead this time is the special figure 1 side, and the winning type is the loss A (special figure 1 side loss A), as described above. At the time of pre-reading determination, the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1" is selected regardless of the number of balls on hold. On the other hand, at the start of fluctuation, one of the fluctuation pattern distribution tables "FH1 to FH4" is selected according to the number of balls on hold (the column of "00H (normal), special figure 1, loss A" in FIG. 32). reference).

Here, referring to FIG. 32, in the fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH3 to FH4", "normal fluctuation 4s, normal fluctuation 8s, normal fluctuation 13s" and the like belonging to the normal fluctuation (normal fluctuation pattern) type can be selected (normal fluctuation 4s, normal fluctuation 8s, normal fluctuation 13s) and the like (normal fluctuation pattern). (Determinable), but these are defined as "variable pattern types for non-look-ahead notice" in which the look-ahead notice is not executed. This non-look-ahead notice variation pattern is specifically a look-ahead fluctuation pattern of "not subject to the look-ahead notice lottery" or "a target of the look-ahead notice lottery, but the winning probability is zero (pre-reading notice is not executed)". is there. In the case of this embodiment, among the normal fluctuation types, the target of the look-ahead notice is only the "normal change for look-ahead notice 16s" that can be selected in the case of the loss B (see FH5).

Further, in the fluctuation pattern distribution tables "FH1" and "FH2", in addition to "normal fluctuation 13s and normal fluctuation 16s" belonging to the normal fluctuation type, N reach 1 belonging to the N reach type can be selected. Here, the mere "N reach 1" is different from the pre-reading advance notice N reach 1 and belongs to the non-look-ahead advance notice variation pattern. Therefore, when the special figure 1 side loss A in the normal state is won, the fluctuation pattern (look-ahead fluctuation pattern) that is the target of the look-ahead notice is set at the time of winning (“FH1” is selected at the time of pre-reading judgment). Never selected. That is, there is a case where a variation pattern of a different system is determined at the time of winning and at the start of variation, for example, a case where it is determined to be N reach 1 at the time of pre-reading determination and a case where it is determined to be normal variation at the start of variation. However, in the case of the special figure 1 side loss A in the normal case, since the pre-reading notice does not appear, no particular problem occurs. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to make the pre-reading notice not appear at all, and a problem arises if the pre-reading notice rarely appears when the normal fluctuation 13s, the normal fluctuation 16s or the N reach 1 is selected. It is considered that there is no such thing. For example, at least one of the fluctuation patterns of the normal fluctuation 13s, the normal fluctuation 16s, and the N reach 1 can be used as the look-ahead advance notice fluctuation pattern. Preferably, the selectivity is "normal variation 13s" and / or "N reach" with a relatively low probability, and more preferably, "normal variation 13s" having the lowest selectivity. However, in this case, in order to prevent the look-ahead notice from appearing excessively, the appearance rate of the look-ahead notice (probability of winning the look-ahead lottery) is higher than that of "normal fluctuation 16s for look-ahead notice" and / or "N reach 1 for look-ahead notice". Is preferably set to a low probability.

Further, as shown in FIG. 32, in the normal case, when the special figure 1 side loss B (normal medium special figure 1 side loss B) is won, or the special figure 1 side loss C (normal medium special figure 1 side loss C). ), Or if you win the loss A on the special figure 2 side (normally the loss on the special figure 2 side), both at the time of winning and at the start of fluctuation are common regardless of the number of balls on hold. The loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH5", "FH6", and "FH7 (common to all losses)" are selected. That is, in the case of pre-reading judgment at the time of winning the normal medium special figure 1 side loss B, the normal medium special figure 1 side loss C, and the special figure 2 side loss A, the number of balls on hold for each operation at the time of winning and at the start of fluctuation. Since the common fluctuation pattern distribution table is referred to, the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation can be accurately pre-read and determined.

(About the second characteristic element)
Generally, even in the state without electric support, the number of balls on hold for operation can change by about 1 or 2 in a relatively short time. If this is used to enable selection of a variation pattern according to the number of pending balls, the effect time (execution time of the symbol variation display game) will change for each symbol variation display game, resulting in a variety of effects. Can be generated. In particular, if the average execution time (symbol variation time) of one symbol variation display game at the time of loss is set to a short time (for example, about several seconds), the so-called "variable slump (symbol variation display game is not executed)". The rate of occurrence of "period)" increases, and it becomes easier for the player to feel that "it does not turn or is not interesting", the interest in the game declines, and the repeat rate of the game decreases. Therefore, if the average execution time of one symbol variation display game is lengthened, it is considered that the operation holding balls can be easily accumulated and the occurrence rate of the variation slump can be reduced.

However, if the execution time of the symbol variation display game is set to an unreasonably long time, the progress speed of the game slows down, the production during the fluctuation of the angle becomes a sloppy production, and the tension for winning the big hit due to the advance notice production is interrupted. This gives the player a feeling of boredom and dissatisfaction. In addition, if the execution time of the symbol variation display game is unnecessarily long, overflow of the operation hold ball (starting prize exceeding the maximum hold memory number (4 pieces)) is likely to occur, that is, the execution right of the game is granted. There is a risk that much will be lost and the player's willingness to play will decline. Therefore, it is necessary to devise a way to generate a well-balanced pattern variation display game execution time. For example, a fluctuation pattern selection technique that takes into consideration the number of pending balls at the start of fluctuation and the game state is important. In particular, in the progress of the game, it is important to have a variation pattern selection technique that focuses on the loss that many players encounter.

In view of such a problem, in the present embodiment, the “loss variation pattern distribution table” of FIG. 32 has a characteristic configuration. Hereinafter, the details will be described with a focus on the “loss variation pattern distribution table“ FH1 to FH7 ”” selected when the loss is won.

<A. Characteristics of the fluctuation pattern distribution table related to the normal loss during winning>
In the present embodiment, the loss types include a plurality of types of losses A to C, and the lottery rates for these symbols are 95% for loss A, 4% for loss B, and 1% for loss C. (See Fig. 4 Remarks column). Here, as shown in FIG. 32, when the special figure 1 side loss A is won, one of the fluctuation pattern distribution tables "FH1 to FH4" is selected according to the number of balls on hold. However, if the special figure 1 side loss B is won, the common fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH5" is selected regardless of the number of operation hold balls, and even if the special figure 1 side loss C is won, the number of operation hold balls Regardless, the common fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH6" is selected. In addition, the common fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH7" is selected regardless of the number of balls on hold even when the loss on the special figure 2 side is won.

These fluctuation pattern distribution tables (FH1 to FH7) related to the normal middle loss winning have the following characteristics (α) to (Δ). Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the fluctuation pattern distribution table selected regardless of the number of pending balls is also referred to as a “common fluctuation pattern distribution table”.

(A-1. Fluctuation pattern distribution table (variation pattern distribution table according to the number of pending numbers) "FH1 to FH4") related to the special figure 1 side normal middle loss A winning
(Α) Loss fluctuation pattern Each of the distribution tables "FH1 to FH4" has at least "a plurality of types of normal fluctuations can be selected". Specifically, when "FH1" is selected, there is a possibility that normal fluctuation 13s, normal fluctuation 16s, or N reach 1 (variation time 26s) is selected, and when "FH2" is selected. May be selected for normal variation 13s, normal variation 16s, or N reach 1. Further, when "FH3" is selected, normal fluctuation 8s or normal fluctuation 13s may be selected, and when "FH4" is selected, normal fluctuation 4s or normal fluctuation 8s is selected. There is a possibility. The normal fluctuation 16s belongs to the "longest normal fluctuation (longest normal fluctuation pattern) type" having the longest fluctuation time among the normal fluctuation types, and the normal fluctuation 4s has the shortest fluctuation time among the normal fluctuation types "shortest normal fluctuation (shortest)". It belongs to "normal fluctuation pattern) type". In the present embodiment, the "normal fluctuation 16s" in which at least the fluctuation time of the "normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice" is set to be substantially the same as the fluctuation time of the "normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice" is determined according to the number of operation hold balls (holding memory number), but with different selectivity. It has a structure that can be selected (determined).
It should be noted that (Z1) the present invention can include a loss variation pattern distribution table in which the longest normal variation and / or the shortest normal variation can be selected with different selectivity depending on the number of pending balls. (Z2) Further, the present invention has a first specific fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation 16s) and a shortened fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation 4s) whose fluctuation time is shorter than that of the first specific fluctuation pattern, depending on the number of balls on hold. , Normal fluctuation 8s or normal fluctuation 13s), and the first loss fluctuation pattern distribution table, and the fluctuation time substantially the same as the fluctuation time of the first specific fluctuation pattern regardless of the number of pending balls. A second loss variation pattern distribution table capable of determining a second specific variation pattern (for example, normal variation 16s for pre-reading notice) can be included. (Z3) Further, the present invention also includes a first loss fluctuation pattern distribution table capable of determining a first specific fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation 16s) with different selectivity according to the number of pending spheres, and the number of reserved spheres. A second loss fluctuation pattern distribution table capable of determining a second specific fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice) having a fluctuation time substantially the same as the fluctuation time of the first specific fluctuation pattern regardless of Can include. In this case, the selectivity of the first specific variation pattern (normal variation 16s) can be configured to be different for each number of operation-holding balls.

Therefore, paying attention to the overall image of the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4", when the loss (in this embodiment, the loss A) that many players encounter in the progress of the game is won, the operation holding ball is relatively large. When there are many (when the number of holdings is 2 to 3), it is easy to select a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time, and when there are relatively few operating holding balls (when the number of holdings is 0 to 1), the fluctuation time is easy to select. Relatively long fluctuation patterns are more likely to be selected. As a result, an appropriate speed is exerted during the fluctuation time, which can contribute to a decrease in the occurrence rate of the fluctuation slump, and the player feels that the operation holding balls are accumulated and spinning. Further, in the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4", the normal fluctuation is selected with a high probability, and the smaller the number of balls on hold for operation, the higher the probability of the reach fluctuation selection rate. The reach variation of the selection target is "N reach (reach variation with a relatively short fluctuation time)" belonging to the low expectation reach. As a result, the expectation of winning will not be insulted at the time of loss. According to the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4" according to the present embodiment, it is well-balanced that it contributes to the reduction of the occurrence rate of the fluctuation slump and does not instinctively incite the winning expectation at the time of loss. You will be able to create a symbol variation display game.

In addition, the configuration in which "reach fluctuation (reach fluctuation)" can be selected in the loss fluctuation pattern distribution tables "FH1" and "FH2", in other words, the reach fluctuation is selected when the number of pending balls is relatively small. Although the configuration is possible, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the reach variation may be selected only in the fluctuation pattern distribution table “FH1”, that is, the reach variation may be selected only when the number of pending balls is the smallest. Further, in the fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4", only the normal fluctuation may be selected.

In the present embodiment, when the normal fluctuation type is distinguished by the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern of 10 seconds or more such as the normal fluctuation 16s type and the normal fluctuation 13s type is treated as a "long fluctuation pattern" having a relatively long fluctuation time. .. On the other hand, fluctuation patterns of less than 10 seconds, such as normal fluctuation 4s type and normal fluctuation 8s type, are treated as "short fluctuation patterns" in which the fluctuation time is relatively short. The reason for this distinction is that in a general ball-and-ball game machine, if the game ball is continuously fired for about 10 seconds, it is considered that an operation-holding ball can be generated with a high probability. In the case of the present embodiment, those belonging to the short variation pattern include normal variation 4s and normal variation 8s that can be selected during normal variation, and normal variation that can be selected during probability variation (normal variation 2s in Korenso, Koren). There are normal fluctuations such as 8s in the villa: see Fig. 34) and normal fluctuations that can be selected during the time saving (normal fluctuations in the time saving 4s, normal fluctuations in the time saving 8s, etc .: see Fig. 40). , It is easy to be selected when the number of existing operation-holding balls is large, or in a gaming state accompanied by an "electric support state" in which operation-holding balls are likely to occur.

(Β) Loss fluctuation pattern In the distribution table "FH1 to FH4", the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern (high frequency fluctuation pattern) having the highest selectivity among the fluctuation patterns defined by each is defined to be different (). The fluctuation time of the high frequency fluctuation pattern differs depending on the number of balls on hold). Specifically, regarding the fluctuation time of the high frequency fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time is long in this order of "FH4 (hold 3), FH3 (hold 2), FH2 (hold 1), FH1 (hold 0)". It is stipulated to be. That is, it is defined that the fluctuation time of the high frequency fluctuation pattern becomes relatively long as the number of pending balls decreases. In the case of the present embodiment, the high-frequency fluctuation pattern is "normal fluctuation (normal fluctuation pattern)" (high-frequency normal fluctuation pattern), and specifically, as shown in FIG. 32, the fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1". In the case of "normal fluctuation 16s", in the case of "FH2", it is "normal fluctuation 13s", in the case of "FH3", it is "normal fluctuation 8s", and in the case of "FH4", it is "normal fluctuation 4s". Further, the average fluctuation time (average execution time of one symbol fluctuation display game) when the fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4" is selected is "FH4 (hold 3), FH3 (hold 2), FH2". In this order of (hold 1) and FH1 (hold 0), the average fluctuation time is set to be long. In other words, the smaller the number of balls on hold, the longer the average fluctuation time is set.

(A-2. Normal Medium Special Figure 1 Side Loss B Common Fluctuation Pattern Distribution Table at the Time of Winning: "FH5")
(Γ) In the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH5", a fluctuation pattern type having a winning expectation of "less than SPSP reach type (highest expectation reach type)" can be selected. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, in addition to the N reach type and the SP reach type, the "longest normal fluctuation type" having the longest fluctuation time among the normal fluctuation types can be selected. Specifically, the "SPSP reach type (developed SPSP reach, direct hit type SPSP reach)", which has a higher expectation of winning than the "SP reach type" (the fluctuation time is longer than the SP reach type), is not selected. The average fluctuation time when the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH5" is selected is relatively longer than that of the above-mentioned loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4".

(A-3. Normal medium special figure 1 side loss C common fluctuation pattern distribution table at the time of winning: "FH6")
(Δ) In the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH6", at least "SPSP reach type" can be selected, that is, the highest expectation reach fluctuation type can be selected. In other words, it can be said that the table configuration selects the reach variation with the longest variation time among the reach variation. In the case of this embodiment, as shown in the figure, only the SPSP reach type (developed SPSP reach, direct hit type SPSP reach) can be selected. Therefore, the average fluctuation time when the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH6" is selected is longer than the fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH5" related to other normal medium loss winnings (the longest average fluctuation time). ).

(Special figure 2 side normal middle loss common fluctuation pattern distribution table at the time of winning: "FH7")
(Ε) Loss fluctuation pattern distribution table “FH7” is a fluctuation pattern distribution table at the time of winning the special figure 2 side loss. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, only the normal variation type (here, the normal variation 16s) is selected. That is, if a reach occurs during the special symbol change display game 2 during normal operation (during special figure 2 change), the winning confirmation is notified at that time. The reason why the number of types of fluctuation patterns at the time of winning the loss on the special figure 2 side is smaller than that on the special figure 1 side is as described below. Normally, there is no electric support, there is almost no prize in the lower starting port 35, and it is rare that a special figure 2 operation holding ball is generated. Therefore, there is no need to make it possible to select a wide variety of fluctuation patterns, and providing a wide variety of fluctuation patterns indiscriminately leads to an increase in the control load.

By the above-mentioned "variation pattern distribution table related to the loss winning", the following effects can be obtained.

(A) Loss types include multiple types of losses A to C, and the lottery rate for these symbols is 95% for loss A, 4% for loss B, and 1% for loss C (the probability of lottery is high or low). The relationship is "Loss A> Loss B> Loss C") (see the remarks column in Fig. 4). In the present embodiment, by utilizing the relationship of the symbol lottery rate, a plurality of short fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times are selected when the loss A is won and the number of pending balls is relatively large. This facilitates the selection of a plurality of long fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times when the number of holding balls is relatively small. Further, when the loss A is won, the reach fluctuation is selected with a lower probability than when the loss B or the loss C is won. As a result, the symbol fluctuation with a long fluctuation time does not occur frequently, that is, the fluctuation time is moderately slowed down, which not only contributes to the reduction of the occurrence rate of the fluctuation slump, but also accumulates the operation holding balls and rotates. It is possible to generate a well-balanced pattern variation display game execution time such that the player feels as if (for example, see (α) to (δ) above).
(Β) In addition, when the loss A is won during normal times, the smaller the number of balls on hold for operation, the longer the average fluctuation time (the average execution time of one symbol fluctuation display game). In other words, as the number of pending balls increases, the average fluctuation time is shortened (see, for example, (α) and (β) above). As a result, the execution time of the symbol variation display game is not unnecessarily prolonged, the occurrence rate of the fluctuation slump can be suppressed, and the overflow occurrence rate of the operation holding ball can also be suppressed. Execution time can be generated. In particular, it is suitable for "normal" in which the period of stay can be long in terms of game progress.
(Γ) Also, if you win the loss A during normal, the normal fluctuation is selected with a higher probability than the reach fluctuation, and if you win the loss B, the low expectation reach type (N reach or SP reach) has a high probability. If the player wins the loss C, a high expectation reach type (developed SPSP reach, direct hit SPSP reach) is selected with a high probability (see, for example, (α) to (δ) above). That is, in most cases of loss, an effect related to normal fluctuation (normal variation effect) appears, and the reach effect can be displayed at an appropriate frequency. As a result, the player is not expected to win the prize excessively. In addition, the rarely appearing high-expectation reach production can greatly enhance the game entertainment (expectation of winning).
(Δ) During the probability change or the time reduction, a common fluctuation pattern distribution table is selected regardless of the type of loss and the number of balls on hold (see (ζ) above). As a result, the program capacity is reduced, and the control load can be significantly reduced.

(Third characteristic element)
Further, in the present embodiment, as already described, "normal variation 16s for pre-reading notice" and "N reach 1 for pre-reading notice" are provided. These fluctuation patterns are defined as fluctuation patterns for pre-reading notice, and have the following features.
(A) As shown in FIG. 32, the fluctuation time of the "normal fluctuation 16s for the look-ahead notice" is substantially the same as the fluctuation time of the "normal fluctuation 16s" belonging to the non-look-ahead notice fluctuation pattern type, and is "N for the look-ahead notice". The fluctuation time of "reach 1" is substantially the same as the fluctuation time of "N reach 1" belonging to the variation pattern type for non-look-ahead advance notice. These fluctuation patterns belong to the long fluctuation pattern. In the case of the present embodiment, "normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice" and "normal fluctuation 16s" are defined as the longest fluctuation time among the normal fluctuation types (belonging to the longest normal fluctuation type).
(B) Further, as shown in FIG. 32, the “normal variation 16s for pre-reading notice” and the “normal variation 16s” have the same system of variation patterns, but the values of the winning commands are different from each other. Further, "N reach 1" for pre-reading notice and "N reach 1" are also fluctuation patterns of the same system, but the value of the command at the time of winning is different from each other.
(C) "Normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice" and "normal fluctuation 16s" are fluctuation patterns belonging to low expectation fluctuation patterns (normal fluctuation type, N reach type), and their winning expectations are substantially the same. is there. Similarly, "N reach 1 for pre-reading notice" and "N reach 1" are fluctuation patterns belonging to the low expectation fluctuation pattern, and the winning expectation is substantially the same.

The functions of the "normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice" and "N reach 1 for pre-reading notice" as described above will be explained using the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table of FIG. 32 while touching the relationship with the appearance control of the pre-reading notice. To do.

With reference to FIG. 32, when the loss A is won during normal operation, at the start of the fluctuation, the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table “FH1 to FH4” (variation pattern distribution table according to the number of reservations) according to the number of balls on hold. Is selected, and normal variation 16s or N reach 1 can be selected. In rare cases, the loss B (design lottery rate 4%) is won, but at this time, it is selected in the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH5" (common fluctuation pattern distribution table), and the normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice ". Alternatively, "N reach 1 for pre-reading notice" may be selected. Here, the game situation in which the player has the highest probability of encountering in the “normal” period in which the stay period can be long in the progress of the game is the winning of the loss A (design lottery rate 95%).

Therefore, as the first effect, when the fluctuation pattern of the low expectation degree is selected, the pre-reading notice does not appear excessively, and the player's expectation of winning is not unnecessarily fueled.
Further, as a second effect, when the operation holding ball related to the look-ahead notice is used in the symbol variation display game, the winning expectation due to the look-ahead notice can be maintained for a long time. More specifically, when a pre-reading notice related to a short fluctuation pattern such as a normal fluctuation 4s or a normal fluctuation 8s is generated, the execution time of the symbol variation display game related to the operation holding ball targeted for the pre-reading notice is short, so that it is large. The notice production that was done does not appear and ends easily. In addition, when the execution time of the symbol variation display game is short, a white blinking hold icon (suggests a step-up hold change notice) is displayed, or a step-up hold change notice using the game running hold K is suggested. It ends easily without raising expectations. In such a case, the player is confused, such as "What was the meaning of that look-ahead notice?" However, in the case of the present embodiment, the "pre-reading notice normal fluctuation 16s" and the "look-ahead notice N reach 1" belong to the long fluctuation pattern (in the case of the present embodiment, the longest normal fluctuation). It is possible to prevent various problems from occurring.

Although there is a difference between "normal variation 16s for pre-reading notice" and "normal variation 16s" whether or not they are subject to pre-reading notice, the same effect can be executed during both symbol variation display games. Preferred (the same applies to the relationship between "N reach 1 for pre-reading notice" and "N reach 1"). That is, the "normal fluctuation 16s" for non-pre-reading notice and the "normal fluctuation 16s" for pre-reading notice in which the fluctuation time substantially the same (including the same) is defined, the same production mode is used for the effect during the symbol change. Regardless of which variation pattern is selected, the player is made to recognize that the same variation pattern is selected in terms of production. In this way, by distinguishing fluctuation patterns that are the same in content but have different selection rates into those for non-pre-reading notice and those for pre-reading notice, the pre-reading notice appears appropriately at the time of loss and excessive pre-reading is performed. It is possible to prevent the advance notice from being executed and to moderately fuel the player's expectation of winning (to prevent the player from feeling stress due to the appearance of excessive pre-reading advance notice). Can be done). It should be noted that the “same effect” referred to here preferably means that at least the variation display of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect described later) and the advance notice effect are the same, but the “variation display of the decorative pattern” and / Or the "notice effect" may be the same. However, in order to make the effect look similar in terms of effect, it is preferable that the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is different, but the other effects are the same. Further, only one or more look-ahead normal variation types having the same function as the "look-ahead notice normal variation 16s" may be provided, or only the look-ahead N reach type having the same function as the "look-ahead notice N reach 1". May be provided one or more.

Further, as described above, "normal variation 16s" and / or "N reach 1" may be defined as a pre-reading advance notice variation pattern. In this case, the appearance rate of the look-ahead notice is set to a lower probability than the "normal fluctuation 16s for the look-ahead notice" and / or "N reach 1 for the look-ahead notice". For example, regarding the appearance rate (execution rate) of the look-ahead notice, the relationship satisfies "normal variation 16s <normal variation 16s for look-ahead notice" and "N reach 1 <N reach 1 for look-ahead notice".

Although not shown, the fluctuation pattern distribution table is provided with a fluctuation pattern distribution table corresponding to the set values (settings 1 to 6). That is, the probability that one or a plurality of specific fluctuation patterns will be drawn may differ depending on the set value. For example, a setting guessing element is given depending on the difference in the appearance rate of the effect related to the specific fluctuation pattern. Can be done.

Returning to the description of FIG. 11 again, when the start opening winning random number determination process is completed in step S320, a “winning command” is created based on the command data determined in the starting opening winning random number determination process, and this is produced and controlled. It is transmitted to the unit 24 (step S321). If the look-ahead is prohibited or an abnormality occurs in the set value data, the look-ahead prohibition data "9FH" is maintained as it is, and a winning command having the "look-ahead prohibition data" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. It will be. In this case, an appropriate value, for example, "B3H" is acquired as the value on the high-order byte (MODE1) side, and a pre-reading prohibition winning command (B39FH) is transmitted.

Next, a "hold addition command" for designating the number of operation hold balls at the time of pre-reading determination is created (step S322), and this is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S323). This "hold addition command" is composed of 2 bytes, and the upper byte (MODE) side that specifies whether the operation hold ball targeted for pre-reading this time is the special figure 1 side or the special figure 2 side, and at the time of winning. It is composed of a lower byte (EVENT) side that specifies the number of balls on hold. The hold addition command is used when the effect control unit 24 side notifies information about the current number of operation hold balls to the hold display areas 76 and 77 when an operation hold ball is generated, or when a look-ahead advance notice effect is executed. Is also used when issuing a look-ahead notice regarding the hold subject to the notice.

When the winning command and the hold addition command are transmitted from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 that receives the command notifies the pre-reading notice if the information contained in the command is "other than the pre-reading prohibition designation". A lottery (pre-reading notice lottery) regarding whether or not execution is possible is performed, and if this is won, a pre-reading notice production scenario is created, and based on that scenario, the pre-reading notice for the current operation pending ball is executed and controlled. .. On the other hand, in the case of "pre-reading prohibition designation", the pre-reading notice lottery is not executed, or the pre-reading notice lottery is executed, but the lottery result is forcibly processed as a loss (without executing the notice effect), and the pre-reading notice is given. Prohibit the occurrence of. In this embodiment, the command at the time of winning of the pre-reading prohibition designation is transmitted in both the case where the pre-reading is prohibited or the setting abnormality error occurs, and the reason is as follows. ..

In the case of the present embodiment, the game operation is not forcibly stopped and controlled even if a setting abnormality error occurs. The first reason is that the resolution of the setting abnormality error can be resolved by performing the setting change operation as described above, but the setting change operation during business is a matter that inspires gambling from the viewpoint of legal request. There is a high possibility that it falls under the prohibited items. Secondly, if the game operation process is forcibly stopped immediately when a setting abnormality error occurs, the player feels distrust at the sudden stop of the game. For example, when the symbol variation display game in process is executed during normal operation, or when a big hit game is in progress, a setting error error occurs by chance, and the game is controlled so that the game cannot be played immediately. If this happens, the profit that the player should originally obtain will be lost, causing the player to feel distrust. In consideration of such circumstances, when a setting abnormality error occurs, the error notification is stopped, and the game progress itself is conditional, but the game progresses as it is. The reason for expressing "conditionally" is that when a setting abnormality error occurs, the look-ahead notice is prohibited or the result of the symbol variation display game is forcibly lost (Fig. 11). Refer to the processing route of step S317 (= 5AH) and step S409 (= 5AH) of FIG. 12 described later).

As a result, the special figure 1 start port check process is exited, and then the special figure 2 start port check process (step S302) is executed.

<12. Special symbol change start processing: Fig. 12>
Next, the special symbol variation start processing (step S306) in FIG. 10 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start processing.

In FIG. 12, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the number of balls on hold in FIG. 2 is zero (step S401), and if the number of balls on hold in FIG. 2 is not zero (step S401: NO), FIG. 2 The processing (steps S403 to S416) at the start of the fluctuation targeting the number of pending balls is executed. On the other hand, when the number of balls on hold in FIG. 2 is zero (step S401: YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not the number of balls on hold in special figure 1 is zero (step S402), and the number of balls on hold in special figure 1 is zero. If the number is not zero (step S402: NO), the processing at the start of fluctuation (steps S403 to S416) for the number of balls on hold in FIG. 1 is executed. By the processing of steps S401 and S402, "priority" of which of the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially subjected to the variable display operation (which operation holding ball is digested). "Fluctuation order" is decided. In the present embodiment, when the operation holding ball is present in both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball, the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially digested.

When the number of operation-holding balls in both the special figure 2 operation-holding ball number and the special figure 1 operation-holding ball number is zero (step S401: YES and step S402: YES), the state of "no operation-holding ball". It becomes. This "no operation hold ball" state is a state in which a special symbol is waiting and there is no hold memory. Therefore, when "no operation hold ball" is set, the process proceeds to step S417, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H)" indicating the state of the above "no operation hold ball" ((00H)". Step S417).

If the special symbol operation status when the above "no operation hold ball" state is "waiting (01H)" (step S417: NO) (process during the special symbol confirmation time of FIG. 14A described later). In step S472), the special symbol operation status is switched to "waiting (00H)" (step S418). Then, as the effect control command, a customer waiting command (BA04H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S419), and the special symbol change start process is exited. When the effect control unit 24 receives the customer waiting command, the customer waiting effect is displayed, and then the “customer waiting effect (demo display)” is displayed.

Further, the effect control unit 24 ends the customer waiting effect and shifts to the "power saving mode" when a predetermined transition condition (power saving mode transition condition) is satisfied after the start of the customer waiting effect (demo display). In the case of this embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) elapses after the start of the customer waiting effect (demo screen) without generating the operation hold ball and switching to the menu screen (game setting screen). , The effect mode is changed to the power saving mode, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays a power saving screen (for example, the character display of "power saving is in progress" on the liquid crystal screen), and a part of the decorative lamp 45 or other effect LEDs or Control to turn off everything (power saving control).

If the number of balls on hold in FIG. 1 or the number of balls on hold in FIG. 2 is not zero (steps S401: NO or S402: NO), steps S403 to S416 are sequentially executed. Regarding the processing method of steps S403 to S416 described below, the content is substantially different only in the difference between the target of the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the target of the special figure 2 operation holding ball. Is the same. Therefore, in order to avoid duplicate description, unless there is a particular need, the process will be described without distinguishing which operation holding ball is targeted.

Proceeding to step S403, the number of operation-holding balls on the special drawing side to be used for the current fluctuation display operation is subtracted by 1 (step S403), and a "holding / subtraction command" including information on the number of operation-holding balls after the subtraction is issued to the effect control unit 24. (Step S404).

Next, the special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S405). This special symbol operation confirmation data is data for specifying the special symbol type on the fluctuation start side this time, and if the special figure 1 is the fluctuation start side, "01H", and the special figure 2 is the fluctuation start side. If there is, "02H" is stored in the special symbol operation confirmation data.

Next, the hold data stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processing of steps S406 to S407, the reserved data stored in the reserved storage area (reserved 1 storage area) corresponding to the number of reserved storages n = 1 is read and stored in the determination random number storage area of the RAM in the area. , Hold data stored in the hold storage area corresponding to the hold n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the hold storage area corresponding to'n-1'(step S406), and hold. 4 Clear the storage area and provide a free area (step S407). As a result, the start order of the special symbol variation display game matches the order of the number of operation hold balls n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and the operation hold balls acquired at the time of winning the start opening are stored in any hold. While it is specified whether it corresponds to the area, it is possible to hold and store a new operation holding ball.

Next, the game state information transmission process is executed (step S408). In the game state information transmission process, a "game state designation command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The game state designation command here includes game state information that can specify the game state at the start of the game. When the production control unit 24 receives this game state designation command, the current game state is grasped based on the information contained therein, and the production mode is maintained in a form that is consistent with the game state managed by the main control unit 20 side. To manage. The game state information included in the game state specification command may be the minimum information necessary for performing the target game process, and is, for example, "internal game state (game state determination number YJ)" and / or "variation pattern". The information can include a "selection mode (Tcode)". In addition, as a game state specification command, an "internal game information command" that can specify the game state determination number YJ and / or a "distribution mode specification command" that can specify the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) can be transmitted. May be good. The game state information transmission process for transmitting such a game state designation command includes step S482, step S487, and step S492, which are being processed during the special symbol confirmation time of FIG. 14B, which will be described later.

In addition, here, if necessary, a "time reduction command (information about a special symbol time reduction counter)" that can specify the remaining time reduction number is transmitted if the time reduction state is in progress, and the remaining ST number is displayed in the probability change state. A identifiable "ST count command (information about a special symbol probability variation counter)" is transmitted. The effect control unit 24 presents a "residual number display effect" that grasps the remaining time reduction number and the remaining ST number based on the information included in these commands, and informs the remaining time reduction number or the remaining ST number in an effectful manner. (In the case of the present embodiment, the above-mentioned residual time reduction number of times notification effect is displayed). When the time saving state or the probability change state continues until the next big hit (including the case where it continues until the next big hit (infinite system)), the time saving number command and the ST number command need not be transmitted.

(Processing route when the set value is normal: Processing route following S410)
Next, it is determined whether or not the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S409). When the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S409: ≠ 5AH), the setting value command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and then the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is executed (step S410). In this special electric accessory operation determination random number determination process, the jackpot determination random number value is used to execute a "winning lottery at the start of fluctuation" for the operation holding ball used for the current variation display operation. Since the basic processing procedure of this processing is the same processing procedure as the random number determination processing of step S318 of FIG. 11 already described, the description will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

In the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory in step S410, first. Based on the special symbol operation confirmation data (special symbol type information on the fluctuation start side this time), the "hit random number determination table (FIG. 20)" corresponding to the processing target side this time is acquired. For example, if the fluctuation this time is on the special figure 1 side, the "random number table for special figure 1" is acquired, and if it is on the special figure 2 side, the "random number table for special figure 2" is acquired. Next, the jackpot determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired, and a "winning lottery" is performed based on the jackpot determination random number value and the acquired hit random number determination table. Then, if the winning lottery result is "big hit", the big hit determination flag is set to "5AH", and if it is not a big hit, that is, "missing", the big hit determination flag is set to "00H". Further, in the present embodiment, since the support time reduction is also subject to the winning lottery (the winning lottery target lottery form), if the winning lottery result is "support time reduction" winning, "5AH" is set in the support time reduction determination flag (FIG. 20). reference).

Next, the special stop symbol creation process is executed (step S411). In this special stop symbol creation process, the "design lottery at the start of fluctuation" is executed by using the winning lottery result in step S410 and the random value for determining the special symbol. Since the basic processing procedure of this processing is the same processing procedure as the special stop symbol data creation processing (step S319) shown in FIG. 11 already described, the description will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

In the special stop symbol creation process in step S411, first, the symbol table (big hit symbol table, lost symbol table) is based on the special symbol operation confirmation data (special symbol type information on the variable side this time) and the winning lottery result in step S410. , Support time reduction symbol table: see FIGS. 21, 22 to 24). For example, when the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H and the jackpot judgment flag is 5AH, that is, when the fluctuation start side of this time is'special figure 1 side'and the winning lottery result is'big hit', "special figure". "Big hit symbol table for 1" is selected. Then, the special symbol determination random number value stored in the above-mentioned determination random number storage area is acquired, a symbol lottery based on the selected symbol table and the special symbol determination random number value is executed, and the special symbol determination which is the lottery result is executed. The data and the special stop symbol number are stored in the corresponding areas of the RAM in the area, respectively.

(Counter for the number of consecutive villas)
Further, in the special stop symbol creation process, the count process of the number of consecutive villas related to the above-mentioned probability variation mode is also performed based on the result of the symbol lottery. Here, when the winning type (for example, probabilistic jackpot: see FIG. 5E (a)) for which the number of consecutive villas is counted is won, the number of consecutive villas is incremented by +1. This makes it possible to manage how many consecutive villas the jackpot game executed after this winning game will be. However, if all jackpots are to be counted for the number of consecutive villas, counting processing can also be performed based on the result of the winning lottery. In this case, for example, it can be performed by the random number determination process (winning lottery process) for determining the operation of the special electric accessory in step S410. Specifically, in the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory, that is, in the winning lottery, when the winning type to be counted is won, the number of consecutive villas may be increased by +1.

It should be noted that the count-up method of adding +1 to the number of consecutive villas counter may be used instead of counting the number of consecutive villas this time, but a countdown method of decrementing from the initial value to grasp the number of consecutive villas. Specifically, "07H" is set as an initial value in the consecutive villa count counter at the time of transition to the normal state or when the RAM is cleared. Then, each time the winning type to be counted is won, the number of consecutive villas is subtracted by 1 until the counter becomes zero. In this case, if the value of the number of consecutive villas counter is "06H", it indicates the first hit (1st consecutive villa), and if it is "05H" to "00H", it means the 2nd to 7th consecutive villas. Is shown. Therefore, in the case of the countdown method, if the value of the consecutive villa count counter is "06H" to "04H" (1st to 3rd consecutive villas) in the game state transition preparation process in step S412 described later, the probability change mode 1 is set. The data for migration is buffer-set, and if it is "03H" to "01H" (4th to 6th consecutive villas), the data for transitioning to the probability variation mode 2 is buffer-set, and if it is "00H", it is. The data for shifting to the probabilistic mode 3 is buffer-set (see the remarks column in FIG. 42).

After completing the special stop symbol creation process in step S411, the game state transition preparation process is then executed (step S412). In this game state transition preparation process, when a big hit or a short support time is won, necessary setting processing is performed to specify the game state of the transition destination.

Specifically, FIG. 42 shows FIG. 42 in which a data group for designating the game state of the migration destination is defined according to the winning type (special symbol determination data) determined by the symbol lottery and the game state determination number (YJ). Acquire the "game state transition table" and store various data in the corresponding state buffer.

The game state transition table shown in FIG. 42 is provided with JTTBL-1, JTTBL-4 to JTTBL-6 in order to specify each game state (game mode). As shown in the drawings, JTTBL-1, JTTBL-4 to JTTBL-6 are defined with data for designating the internal gaming state and data for shifting to the probability variation modes 1 to 3 and the time saving modes 1 to 3. In the present embodiment, "JTTBL1" in the case of 10R and 4R probability variation jackpot, "JTTBL-4" in the case of 4R time reduction jackpot, "JTTBL-4" in the case of support time reduction A, and support time reduction C Is referred to as "JTTBL-5", and in the case of support time reduction C, "JTTBL-6" is referred to. As a result, the game state after the big hit game and the game state after the support time shortening opening / closing game are specified.

Note that JTTBL-1 is data for shifting to the probabilistic state (probability change mode 1), but as shown in the remarks column in the figure, the fluctuation pattern swings according to the number of consecutive villas (value of the number of consecutive villas counter). "01H" to "03H" are appropriately set in the minute designation number buffer.

In the case of a big hit, the value stored in the state buffer is read out in the big hit end process (step S509) shown in FIG. 15 described later, and in the case of a support time reduction, the support time reduction special electric combination shown in FIG. 15 described later. It is read out in the object operation process (step S504) and stored in a predetermined storage area (flag storage area and counter storage area corresponding to each state buffer) of the RAM 203. As a result, the game state (the transition destination game state of FIGS. 4, 29, and 42) after the big hit game or after the support time shortening opening / closing game is designated.

The roles of the various state buffers are as follows.
(Α) "Public accessory open extension transition state buffer, normal symbol time saving transition state buffer, normal symbol probability change transition state buffer, special symbol time saving state transition state buffer, special symbol probability change transition state buffer"
ON (operating) / OFF (non-operating) designation data of each function for designating the internal gaming state is set. Specifically, the normal symbol open extension state flag that specifies the operating state of the open extension function, the normal symbol time saving state flag that specifies the operating state of the normal symbol time saving function, and the normal symbol that specifies the operating state of the normal symbol probability change function. Data for the symbol probability change state flag, the special symbol time reduction state flag that specifies the operating state of the special symbol time saving function, and the special symbol probability change state flag that specifies the operating state of the special symbol probability change function are set.
(Β) "Special symbol time reduction counter buffer"
Data for designating the number of time reductions (number of times of electric support) (data for a special symbol time reduction counter) is set (see steps S478 to S481 of FIGS. 14A to 14B). The special symbol time reduction counter functions as a residual time reduction counting means for counting the remaining time reduction.
(Γ) "Special symbol probability variation counter buffer"
Data for designating the number of STs (data for a special symbol probability variation counter) is set (see steps S483 to S486 in FIG. 14B). The special symbol probability variation counter functions as a residual ST number counting means for counting the remaining ST number.
(Δ) "Special symbol fluctuation count counters 1 to 3 buffers"
Data for designating the number of continuations of the specific fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) (data for the special symbol fluctuation count counter) is set.
(Ε) "Fluctuating pattern distribution designation numbers 1 to 3 buffers"
When a predetermined update condition is satisfied, data (data for the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode)) that specifies the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) to be the update destination is set. The update conditions include, for example, when the jackpot is won (step S475 in FIG. 14A), when the time reduction ends (step S481 in FIG. 14B), when the probability change ends (step S486 in FIG. 14B), and the special symbol fluctuation count counter becomes zero. There are times (step S490 in FIG. 14B), the end of the jackpot game (S509 in FIG. 15), the time when the support time is shortened (step S476 in FIG. 14B, step S504 in FIG. 15), and the like.

Next, the special symbol variation pattern creation process is executed (step S413). In the special symbol variation pattern creation process, the symbol lottery result (result of the special stop symbol creation process in step S411), the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode), the set value information (acquired as necessary), and the operation hold ball. Acquire the fluctuation pattern distribution table corresponding to the number (0 to 3 existing operation-holding balls excluding the operation-holding balls used for the current fluctuation display operation: see step S403).

Then, with reference to the fluctuation pattern distribution table, based on the fluctuation pattern lottery based on the fluctuation pattern random number (obtained in the process of step S314 of FIG. 10), the operation holding ball to be used for the current fluctuation display operation was targeted. Determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. Next, a "variation pattern designation command" capable of specifying the determined fluctuation pattern content is created, and this is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 side. Since the basic processing procedure of this processing is the same processing procedure as the random number determination processing at the time of winning the start opening in step S320 of FIG. 11 described above, the description will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

The special symbol variation pattern creation process in step S413 includes the following processes (A) to (F).

(A) "Fluctuation pattern distribution table determination process at the start of fluctuation" that selects (determines) the "variation pattern distribution table" to be referred to this time,
(B) With reference to the "variation pattern distribution table" determined in (A) above, "variation pattern determination processing" for determining the variation pattern according to the random value for the variation pattern, and
(C) The fluctuation time (including the addition time required for the pseudo-ream) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determination process is determined, and the timer management area of the RAM in the area is the "special symbol accessory operation timer". "Fluctuating time setting process" to be set to "
(D) It is configured to include a "command transmission process" for transmitting a "variation pattern designation command" capable of specifying the content of the variation pattern acquired in (B) above to the effect control unit 24. The variation pattern determination process (B) is a process of acquiring command data of a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation pattern.

At the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern distribution table can be selected in consideration of the number of reserved balls at the start of fluctuation (the number of reserved balls at the start of fluctuation in step S403), unlike the time of winning a prize (at the time of pre-reading determination). When the fluctuation pattern is determined, the command data on the upper byte side (MODE2: specify the type of hit loss) and the lower byte side (EVENT: fluctuation pattern information) for constructing the "variation pattern specification command" are determined. .. As a result, the fluctuation pattern specification command is determined, and the content of the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation is specified.

With the determination of the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is determined. Note that this fluctuation time is the game time (variation display time of the decorative symbol (effect time)) of the decorative symbol variation display game executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display game.

The information regarding the variation pattern determined in this way includes at least the winning lottery result (in the case of this embodiment, the detailed symbol lottery result information is included in the decorative symbol designation command), the current game state, and the variation time. Information, execution designation information of a specific notice effect (presence or absence of reach effect and its type, pseudo-continuous designation information, etc.) are included. The main control unit 20 transmits a "variation pattern specification command" capable of specifying the contents to the effect control unit 24, and the information included in the variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 side in this game. It is used when determining the relevant production scenario (variable display of decorative patterns, various notice productions, etc.).

After completing the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process in step S413, the changing flag corresponding to the current fluctuation start side is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S414). The above-mentioned "changing flag" is a flag indicating which of the special symbols 1 and 2 is changing, and when the flag is in the ON state (5AH), it indicates that the special symbol is changing. When the flag is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the special symbol is stopped. In this embodiment, the "special symbol 1 changing flag" corresponding to the special figure 1 and the "special symbol 2 changing flag" corresponding to the special figure 2 are dealt with. For example, if the special symbol 1 side is the processing target (variation start side) this time, the special symbol 1 changing flag is set to ON, and the special symbol 2 changing flag is set to OFF.

Next, a decorative symbol designation command capable of specifying the symbol lottery result information obtained in the special stop symbol creation process in step S411 is acquired, and this is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S415). The decorative symbol designation command includes information on the special symbol type on the variable side and the winning type (symbol lottery result). This decorative symbol designation command mainly includes a combination of decorative symbols when forming a reach state (a symbol type whose component is a reach symbol), a combination of decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop symbol), and a combination of decorative symbols. It is used when determining the advance notice effect corresponding to the winning type in the symbol variation display game. When the effect control unit 24 receives the variation pattern specification command and the decorative symbol specification command, the effect control unit 24 determines the effect to be executed during the symbol variation display game (effect during variation) based on the information contained in these commands. Start the decorative pattern variation display game.

Then, as the setting process at the start of fluctuation, the special symbol operation status is switched to "changing (02H)" (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H is stored in the random number storage area for determination (zero clear) (step S416). ).

(About the case where a setting error occurs: Processing route from S409 to S411)
Returning to the description of the determination process in step S409, in step S409, when the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH), that is, when a setting error error is occurring (step S409: = 5AH), the special electric combination in step S410. The random number determination process (winning lottery) for determining the object operation is skipped, and the special stop symbol creation process in step S411 is executed. That is, when a setting abnormality error occurs, the winning lottery at the start of fluctuation is not executed, and the winning lottery result this time is always processed as "loss" (forced loss control). In the case of a setting abnormality error, it is preferable to provide a fluctuation pattern dedicated to the error and select it, but it may be configured so that a specific existing fluctuation pattern is selected. When selecting an existing fluctuation pattern, consider that a serious error called "setting error" has occurred, and do not select the reach fluctuation type that fuels the expectation of winning, but only the normal fluctuation pattern type. It is preferable to select. In the situation of forced loss, it no longer makes sense for the game, so it is preferable to select the long variation pattern type, and more preferably, the longest normal variation pattern (normal variation 16s in this embodiment). Select only. Further, in the case of a setting abnormality error, it may be configured so that the symbol variation display game itself is not started (the symbol variation is not started) as "the game cannot be continued". In this case, the error notification is continued until the power of the gaming machine is turned off. In the present embodiment, the error notification is continued even if the power is turned on again until the setting change process (step S023) shown in FIG. 8 is executed and the setting abnormality error is cleared.

As described above, when the special symbol variation start processing is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 10 is performed, and thus the variation display of the special symbol is started. As a result, the process goes through the special symbol management process (step S093) and proceeds to the special electric accessory management process (step S095) of FIG.

<13. Processing during special symbol change: Fig. 13>
Next, the process during special symbol change (step S307) shown in FIG. 10 will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol changing process (step S307) of FIG.

In FIG. 13, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed (step S451). If the special symbol accessory operation timer is not zero (step S451: NO), the change time of the special symbol has not yet elapsed, that is, the special symbol is changing, so this special symbol change processing is performed without doing anything. Exit.

When the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S451: YES), a "fluctuation stop command" indicating that the special symbol has been changed is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S451: YES). S452). By this fluctuation stop command, the effect control unit 24 grasps that the special symbol variation display game has ended after the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, and stops the decorative symbol currently being displayed in the variation display (confirmed display). As a result, the special symbol variation display game is terminated, and the decorative symbol variation display game is also terminated.

Next, as a setting process when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the special symbol confirmation signal output time (for example, 100 ms) is stored in the special symbol confirmation timer of the RAM 203, and the confirmation display time (for example, 500 ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. ) Is stored, the special symbol operation status is switched to "confirming (03H)" (03H is stored in the special symbol operation status), 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special symbol changing flag (step S453), and this is performed. Exit the processing during special symbol change. The above-mentioned "special symbol confirmation signal output time" is a margin time for securing the output time of the special symbol confirmation signal for notifying the hall computer HC from the frame external terminal board 21 that the special symbol has been confirmed and displayed. Is. Further, the "fixed display time" is a time (stop display time) for holding the stop display when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed. During this fixed display time, the decorative symbol is also fixedly displayed (mainly stopped) (for example, the fixed display period CT in FIG. 44).

When the above special symbol changing process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 10 is performed, the special symbol management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process of step S095 of FIG.

<13. Special symbol confirmation time processing (processing when fluctuation stops): Fig. 14A and Fig. 14B>
Next, the processing during the special symbol confirmation time (step S308) will be described. 14A and 14B are flowcharts showing the details of the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) of FIG.

In FIGS. 14A and 14B, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S471). A “fixed display time” is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here (see step S453 in FIG. 13). Until the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S471: NO), the process is exited during this special symbol confirmation time without doing anything.

If the special symbol operation timer becomes zero (step S471: YES), the special symbol operation status is switched to "waiting (01H)" as the special symbol variation display game has ended (special symbol operation). 01H is stored in the status) (step S472), and the game status number YJ is stored (step S473).

Next, the jackpot determination flag is acquired, and the state of the jackpot determination flag is determined (step S474).

(When the jackpot judgment flag is ON)
In the determination in step S474, when the jackpot determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S474: = 5AH), various setting processes are performed when the jackpot symbol is stopped (step S475). Here, as shown in the figure, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the jackpot judgment flag, the condition device operation flag is set to the ON state (5AH), and other low probability, no electric support state is set, and the game is played. 00H is stored in the game status notification LED output number for designating the lighting / extinguishing of the status notification LED (not shown), and the process is exited during this special symbol confirmation time.

The above-mentioned "game status notification LED" is provided at an appropriate position in the gaming machine (for example, it may be provided as one of the display functions of the composite display device 38c, or a dedicated LED may be separately provided). It is a state notification means for notifying the current game state information. The game state notification LED of the present embodiment is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and whether or not it is in a time saving state (special symbol time saving state), whether or not it is in a support time saving state, and a time saving state due to the ceiling time saving described later (hereinafter, It is used to notify whether or not it is in the "ceiling time reduction state"). The CPU 201 changes the notification mode of the game state notification LED according to the game state notification LED output number, and can notify the current game state information. The notification mode by the game state notification LED can be defined as follows.
(I-8) During the support time reduction state, the game status notification LED for the support time reduction is turned on. The right-handed notification LED (right-handed display device 39b) that is turned on during the jackpot time saving state can be turned on or off.
(Italy 93) The ceiling / support time reduction LED (combined LED) is turned on during the ceiling time reduction state and the support time reduction state. In this case, the right-handed notification LED (right-handed display device 39b) that is turned on during the jackpot time saving state can be turned on or off. It becomes easy to identify whether the current game state is in the ceiling time saving state, the support time saving state, or the jackpot time saving state. In particular, the hall side can immediately grasp whether the game state at the time of recovery from the power failure is the ceiling time reduction state, the support time reduction state, or the jackpot time reduction state.
(Italy 94) The ceiling time reduction LED is turned on during the ceiling time reduction state, and the support time reduction LED is turned on during the support time reduction state. In this case, the right-handed notification LED that is turned on during the jackpot time saving state can be turned on or off. It becomes easy to identify whether the current game state is the ceiling time saving state, the support time saving state, or the jackpot time saving state. In particular, the hall side can immediately grasp whether the game state at the time of recovery from the power failure is the ceiling time reduction state, the support time reduction state, or the jackpot time reduction state.
(Italy 95) If the support time reduction state is won during the ceiling time reduction state, the ceiling time reduction LED is turned off and the support time reduction LED is turned on. Even if the support time is shortened during the ceiling time reduction state, it becomes easy to distinguish whether the current game state is the ceiling time reduction state or the support time reduction state.
(Italy 96) If the support time reduction state is won during the ceiling time reduction state, the support time reduction LED is turned on. Even if the support time is shortened during the ceiling time reduction state, it is easy to identify whether the current game state is the ceiling time reduction state or the support time reduction state.
(I 28) The ceiling time reduction LED is turned on during the ceiling time reduction state. In this case, the right-handed notification LED that is turned on during the jackpot time saving state can be turned on or off. It becomes easy to identify whether or not the current gaming state is in the ceiling time reduction state.

(When the jackpot judgment flag is OFF)
In the determination in step S474, when the jackpot determination flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S474: ≠ 5AH), then the state of the support time reduction determination flag is determined (step S476). When the support time reduction determination flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S476: ≠ 5AH), the process proceeds to step S478. When the support time reduction determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S476: = 5AH), various setting processes are performed when the support time reduction symbol is stopped (step S477). Here, as various setting processes (process before starting the support time reduction) when the support time reduction symbol is stopped, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the support time reduction determination flag, and the support time reduction start for designating the execution start of the support time reduction opening / closing game is specified. Store 5AH (ON state) in the previous flag. When the various setting processes at the time of stopping the support time saving symbol are completed, the process proceeds to step S478.

Proceeding to the process of step S478, it is determined whether or not the special symbol time reduction counter (remaining time reduction counter) is zero (step S478). When the special symbol time reduction counter is zero (step S478: YES), the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything.

On the other hand, when the special symbol time reduction counter is not zero (step S478: NO), the special symbol time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 (step S479) as the digestion of the fluctuation number this time, and the special symbol time reduction counter after subtraction It is determined whether or not it is zero (step S480).

If the special symbol time reduction counter after subtraction is not zero (step S480: NO), the number of end times of the special symbol time reduction state has not been reached, so the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol time reduction counter after subtraction is zero (step S480: YES), the setting process at the end of the time reduction is performed (step S481). Here, as the setting process at the end of the time reduction, as shown in the figure, the electric chew support function is set to the OFF state, the Tcode is set to "00H (normal)", the ceiling activation flag, the support time reduction medium flag, and the continuous are set. Performs transition setting processing from the time saving state to the normal state, such as clearing the villa count counter (00H). As a result, in the next special symbol variation display game, the variation pattern of the special symbol related to the "normal mode" will be selected.

After completing the setting process at the end of the time reduction in step S481, the game state information transmission process is then executed (step S482). Here, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The game state specification command here includes information for designating the end of the time saving state. When the effect control unit 24 receives this game state designation command, it grasps that the time saving state has ended in this game, and shifts the effect mode to the normal effect mode. In addition, the game state specification command can include information that can identify the completed time saving state type (big hit time saving state, support time saving state, etc.).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation counter (remaining ST count) is zero (step S483). If the special symbol probability variation counter is zero (step S483: YES), the process proceeds to step S488. On the other hand, when the special symbol probability variation counter is not zero (step S483: NO), the special symbol probability variation counter is subtracted by 1 (step S484) as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time, and the special symbol probability variation after the subtraction is performed. It is determined whether or not the number of times counter is zero (step S485).

If the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero (step S485: NO), the number of STs has not ended, so the process proceeds to step S488 without doing anything.

When the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is zero (step S485: YES), it is assumed that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol has reached the specified ST number (65535 in this embodiment), and the setting process at the end of probability variation is performed. Execute (step S486). Here, as the setting process at the end of the probability change, as shown in the figure, the function related to the probability change state is set to the OFF state, the Tcode is set to "00H (normal)", and the counter for the number of consecutive villas is cleared (00H). Etc., execute the transition setting process from the probabilistic state to the normal state. As a result, in the next special symbol variation display game, the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the "normal state" is selected. When the latent state is provided, the number of STs is monitored in steps S483 to S485, and the end timing of the latent state is managed in the setting process at the end of the probability change. In addition, as a big hit, after finishing the probability change state, that is, after finishing the number of STs, the time saving state (the number of time saving may be 100 times or less, or the number of time saving exceeding 100 times (150 times, 200 times). Etc.), and it is possible to provide a "probability variation time reduction jackpot" such as shifting to). When providing such a probability variation time reduction jackpot, it is preferable that the number of STs is a finite probability variation type (ST number 100 times, 50 times, etc.). The above-mentioned probability variation time-saving jackpot is a jackpot that gives "a predetermined number of probability variation states + a predetermined number of time reductions", and is a "pure probability variation jackpot (a jackpot that gives only probability variation: 10R probability variation jackpot or 4R probability variation". Although it is not a "big hit", in this specification, it is treated as belonging to a "probable change big hit" in that it first shifts to a probable change state. The probability variation jackpot may include one or more "probability variation jackpots" that do not impart a time reduction state and / or "probability variation time reduction jackpots" that may impart a time reduction state.

After completing the setting process at the end of the probability change in step S486, the game state information transmission process is then executed (step S487). Here, as in step S482, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, but the game state designation command here specifies that the high probability state (probability change state or latent state) has ended. Contains information to do. When the effect control unit 24 receives this game state designation command, it grasps that the probability change state (or latent state) has ended in this game, and shifts the effect mode to the normal effect mode.

When the game state information transmission process in step S487 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the special symbol change number counter is zero (step S488). Here, the change timing of the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) based on the number of game executions (number of fluctuations) is monitored.

When the special symbol change count counter is zero (step S488: YES), the process is exited during the special symbol confirmation time without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol variation counter is not zero (step S488: NO), the special symbol variation counter is subtracted by 1 (step S489) as the digestion of the current variation, and the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is subtracted. Is zero (step S490).

If the special symbol variation counter after subtraction is not zero (step S490: NO), it is assumed that the update timing (update game) of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is not set, and the process is exited during this special symbol confirmation time without doing anything.

When the special symbol change count counter after subtraction is zero (step S489: YES), it is assumed that the update timing of the change pattern selection mode (Tcode) has arrived, and the game state update process (variation pattern distribution designation number update process) is executed. (Step S491). For example, when infinite time reduction is given, that is, when shifting to "time reduction mode 1 ⇒ time reduction mode 2 ⇒ time reduction mode 3", the current time reduction mode is first "time reduction mode 1" and a special symbol is used. When the fluctuation count counter becomes zero, "Tcode = 04H (variation pattern distribution designation number 1)" that specifies the current time saving mode 1 to "Tcode = 05H (variation pattern distribution designation number 1)" that specifies the time saving mode 2. 2) ”is updated, and 100 times is set in the special symbol fluctuation count counter. Then, when the current time saving mode is "time saving mode 2" and the special symbol fluctuation number counter becomes zero, "Tcode = 05H (variation pattern distribution designation number 2)" that specifies the current time saving mode 2 Update to "Tcode = 06H (variation pattern distribution designation number 2)" that specifies the time saving mode 3 and set 65335 times in the special symbol fluctuation count counter. Similarly for the other game modes, when the update timing of the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) arrives, the game state update process for shifting to the target game mode is performed, and FIGS. 6 and 7A to 7A to FIG. 7B and the game mode transition control shown in FIGS. 61A to 61B, which will be described later, are realized.

The process of step S491 described above works as a variation pattern mode update means for updating (changing) the selection condition of the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the establishment of the predetermined modification condition.

After completing the game state update process in step S491, the game state information transmission process is then executed (step S492). Here, as in step S482, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, but the information included in the game state designation command here can specify the updated variation pattern selection mode (Tcode). Contains information. When the effect control unit 24 receives this game state designation command, it grasps the updated variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) and shifts the effect mode to the effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode).

As described above, when the special symbol change start process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 8 is performed, the special symbol management process (step S093) is exited, and the special electric accessory management process of FIG. 15 is performed. (Step S095).

<14. Special electric accessory management process: Fig. 15>
Next, the special electric accessory management process (step S095) in FIG. 9 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the details of the special electric accessory management process in step S095.

In FIG. 15, the CPU 201 first determines the ON / OFF state of the flag before the start of the support time reduction (step S501). When the support time reduction start flag is ON (step S501: = 5AH), that is, when the support time reduction is won, the support time reduction special electric accessory operation process is executed (step S504). Here, first, at the start of the support time reduction opening / closing game, the “support time reduction opening / closing game in progress flag” is set to the ON state (5AH), and the setting processing necessary for executing the support time reduction opening / closing game is performed. Then, when the support time shortening opening / closing game is completed, each value of the state buffer set in the above-mentioned "game state transition preparation process (step S412 in FIG. 12)" is set to the flag area and the counter corresponding to the state buffer, respectively. Set the "support time reduction medium flag" that specifies that the support time reduction state is in the ON state (5AH), and clear the support time reduction start pre-start flag and the support time reduction opening / closing game flag. As a result, the game state (transition to the time reduction state, the number of time reductions) after the support time reduction opening / closing game is specified. At the start of the support time reduction opening / closing game, the "support time reduction opening / closing game start command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and at the end of the support time reduction opening / closing game, the "support time reduction opening / closing game end command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. These commands display the effect during the support time shortening opening / closing game (opening effect (starting INT during effect), opening / closing operation during the game, ending effect (end INT during effect, etc.)) on the effect control unit 24 side. Here, in the case of the special electric operation type support time reduction, the support time reduction opening / closing game (small hit game in the case of the small hit winning type support time reduction) is executed first, and then the time reduction state is given. The question is whether or not the support time reduction state is the period including the support time reduction opening / closing game. In this case, although it depends on the game playability, the period including the support time reduction opening / closing game is regarded as the support time reduction opening / closing state. At the start of the game, the support time reduction / medium flag may be turned on, or the period excluding the support time reduction / opening / closing game may be set to the support time reduction state, and the support time reduction / opening / closing flag may be turned on at the end of the support time reduction / opening / closing game. Good.

When the support time reduction start flag is in the OFF state (step S501: ≠ 5AH), then the ON / OFF state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S502). When the condition device operation flag is OFF (step S502: ≠ 5AH), that is, when neither the support time shortening opening / closing game nor the big hit game is in progress, the special electric accessory management process is exited without doing anything.

When the condition device operation flag is ON (step S501: = 5AH), processing is performed according to the special electric accessory operation status (00H to 04H) (step S502: special electric accessory status branch processing). The "special electric accessory operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special variable winning device 52, and this status value is changed according to the processing state, and the special electric accessory operation status storage area of the RAM in the area is stored. Stored in. The special electric accessory operation status includes "start processing (00H)" that specifies that it is in a standby state before the start of a big hit game, and "in operation start processing (00H)" that specifies that it is in a standby state before the start of a round game. 01H) ”,“ Operating (02H) ”which specifies that the round game is being executed, and“ Continuing judgment (03H) ”which specifies that it is being determined whether or not to continue the next round game. , "Big hit end processing (04H)" for designating that the end processing at the end of the big hit game is in progress is included.

In the special electric accessory operation status branch processing in step S502, the special electric accessory operation status values are "start processing (00H)", "operation start processing (01H)", "operating (02H)", and "continuation determination (continuation determination). One of the processes of steps S505 to S509 is executed depending on which of the status values of "03H)" and "Big hit end processing (04H)". These processes are processes for executing and controlling the jackpot game, and the hit games corresponding to various hits are realized through the processes of steps S505 to S509. The processing contents of steps S505 to S509 will be described below.

<Big hit game control process (steps S505 to S509)>
(9-1. Big hit start processing)
The “big hit start process” in step S505 will be described. At the start of the jackpot game, the special electric accessory operation status is set to the initial value of "start processing (00H)". Therefore, when it becomes a "big hit", this "big hit start process" is first executed.

When entering the jackpot start process, the CPU 201 first sets the accessory continuous operation device operation flag to the ON state as the setting process (setting process at the start) required when starting the jackpot game. As a result, the continuous operation (round game) of the special electric accessory becomes an allowable state. Then, the operation status of the special electric accessory is updated to "operation start processing (01H)", and 01H for designating the first 1R is set in the "continuous number counter" for counting the number of rounds. Next, according to the winning type (special symbol judgment data) won this time, the "maximum number of rounds" corresponding to this big hit is set in the corresponding area of the RAM in the area, and the "start interval time" is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer. To set. The "start interval time (start INT)" means that after the confirmation display time of the special symbol has elapsed (see step S471 in FIG. 14A) and the big hit is confirmed, until the special variation winning device 52 is activated (1R round). It is an interval section (until the game starts), and refers to the time width that defines the opening production section.

Next, the "big hit start command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the big hit start process is exited. The "big hit start command" includes information that can identify the type of the big hit this time and the game state at the time of winning the big hit. When the effect control unit 24 receives this jackpot start command, a series of hit effects (opening effect, during the round, etc.) that are developed during the current jackpot game (during the start INT, during the round game, during the round game, during the end INT, etc.) The production, the interval production between rounds, the end production of the round, the ending production, etc.) are decided, and the opening production is started. Thus, the jackpot game is started.

(9-2. Special electric accessory operation start processing)
Next, the “special electric accessory operation start process” in step S506 will be described.

Upon entering the special electric accessory operation start process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. In the special symbol accessory operation timer here, the interval time before the start of the round is set. As this interval time, in the first round (1st round), the "start interval time (start INT)" set in the above "big hit start processing (step S505)" is monitored, but the main processing is performed after the 2nd round. When passing through (step S506), the "interval time before opening", specifically, the interval time between rounds (int between Rs) from the end of this round game to the start of the next round game is set. Be monitored. Until this special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, this round game has not ended, so the special electric accessory operation start process is exited without doing anything.

On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, the interval time before opening (in the case of the 1st round, the start interval time) has elapsed, the jackpot type (special symbol judgment data) and the current number of rounds (continuous count counter) The opening / closing operation pattern of the large winning opening 50 is set according to the value) (large winning opening opening / closing operation setting process). Here, the large winning opening opening / closing operation time (maximum opening time) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the solenoid control data for controlling the large winning opening solenoid 52c (large executed according to the number of rounds). Set the winning opening opening / closing operation pattern data).

Further, along with the operation of starting the opening of the large winning opening, a command for opening the large winning opening is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. This "large winning opening opening command" includes information on the current number of rounds, and is used when the effect control unit 24 displays an effect during a round corresponding to the number of rounds. Then, the operation status of the special electric accessory is switched to "operating (02H)", and the special electric accessory management process is exited. As a result, the large winning opening 50 is opened up to the opening / closing operation time of the large winning opening, and this round game is started.

(9-3. Processing during operation of special electric accessory)
Next, the “processing during operation of the special electric accessory” in step S507 will be described.

When the special electric accessory is in operation, the CPU 201 first monitors whether or not the number of winning balls in the large winning opening 50 has reached the maximum winning number, and if the maximum winning number is reached, the special symbol combination Clear the object operation timer to zero. As a result, the timer value set in the above-mentioned "special electric accessory operation start processing (step S506)" is forcibly set to zero, and the maximum number of winnings is reached. Will be closed. Further, here, every time there is a prize in the large prize opening 50, a "large winning opening winning command" is transmitted to the production control unit 24. This grand prize opening winning command includes information on the occurrence of winning in the large winning opening and information on the number of winning balls (the setting value information may also be included), and a prize is notified that the large winning opening 50 has been won. In addition to being used for production, it is also used for controlling the appearance of setting suggestion effects using prize-winning effects. For example, when there is an over-winning that exceeds the maximum number of winnings, a special over-winning effect is displayed instead of the normal over-winning effect according to the appearance rate determined according to the set value.

In addition, do nothing until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, that is, until the large winning opening opening operation time (maximum opening time) elapses or the maximum winning number is reached. As it is, exit the processing during operation of the special electric accessory.

If the maximum number of prizes is reached or the maximum opening time has elapsed and the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero, it is assumed that this round game has ended, and the special electric accessory operation status is set to "Continuing judgment". (03H) ”, and the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. This "remaining ball discharge time" refers to a margin time for discharging the remaining balls inside the large winning opening after the large winning opening is closed. Further, with the closing of the large winning opening (end of the round game), an interval command between rounds is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. This "inter-round interval command" includes information on the end of the round game and information on the current number of rounds, and is used when the effect control unit 24 displays the inter-round INT effect during the inter-round INT. As a result of the above, the processing during operation of this special electric accessory is exited.

(9-4. Special electric accessory operation continuation judgment processing)
Next, the “special electric accessory operation continuation determination process” in step S508 will be described.

When entering the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Since the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) after the big winning opening is closed is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here (see step S507), it is determined whether or not the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed. Will be done. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is exited without doing anything.

When the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed), the value of the continuous number counter is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the current number of rounds has reached the maximum number of rounds. If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached, 1 is added (+1) to the continuous number counter as processing when the round game is continued, and the "interval time before opening" is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the special electric combination The object operation status is switched to "operation start processing (01H)".

On the other hand, when the current number of rounds reaches the maximum number of rounds, "end INT (end interval time)" is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer as a setting process at the end of the final round, and the special electric accessory operation status. Is switched to "End processing (04H)". The above-mentioned "end INT" is an interval section from the end of the round game of the final round to the end of the jackpot game after the remaining ball discharge time elapses, and refers to a time width in which the ending effect section is defined.

Then, a "big hit end command" instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 to exit the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process. As a result, the round game of the maximum number of rounds is completed. The jackpot end command includes information on the current jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning, that is, information capable of identifying the game state after the jackpot game ends, and the effect control unit 24 performs the jackpot game after the jackpot game. It is also used when determining the production mode.

(9-5. Big hit end processing)
Next, the “big hit end process” in step S509 will be described.

When entering the jackpot end process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Since the end interval time (end INT) is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here, it is determined here whether or not this end interval time has elapsed. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, the jackpot end process is exited without doing anything.

When the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (the end interval time has elapsed), each value of the state buffer set in the game state transition preparation process (step S412 in FIG. 10) corresponds to the state buffer. Set in the flag area and counter respectively. In this process, the initial value of the ceiling counter that counts the number of ceiling games described later is also set. As a result, the game state after the big hit game is specified.

Next, as various setting processes at the end of the jackpot, various data used during the jackpot game control process (for example, flags and counter values used in steps S505 to S509) are cleared, and the game status notification LED output number is updated. , The operation status of the special electric accessory is switched to "start processing (00H)".

When the above-mentioned jackpot end process is completed, a series of control processes related to the jackpot game is completed, and the current jackpot game is terminated.

As described above, the preferred embodiments of the first embodiment can be summarized as the following configuration examples 1A to 9A.

[Configuration Example 1A]
An acquisition means (S314 in FIG. 11) for acquiring a plurality of types of random values including at least a first random value and a second random value based on the establishment of a start condition.
A winning determination means (main control unit 20, S410 in FIG. 12) that executes a winning determination regarding a predetermined winning based on the first random value.
A symbol determination means (main control unit 20, S411 in FIG. 12) for determining the type of winning based on the result of the winning determination and the second random number value, and
A symbol display means (special symbol display devices 38a, 38b, liquid crystal display device 36) capable of performing a variable display operation of a symbol and stopping and displaying the symbol in a display mode according to a determination result of the symbol determination means.
A special electric accessory (special variable winning device 52) configured to open or expand the entrance of the big winning opening,
The accessory continuous operation means (main control unit 20 (accessory continuous operation device), FIG. 15) capable of continuously operating the special electric accessory, and
Game state control means (main control unit 20, FIG. 4, S412 in FIG. 12, S509 in FIG. 15) capable of controlling a game state control means (main control unit 20, FIG. 4, S412 in FIG. 12, S509 in FIG. A gaming machine including FIGS. 42 and 43).
The target of the winning judgment by the winning judgment means is
A big hit that triggers the operation of the accessory continuous operation means (for example, a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 4R probability variation jackpot: FIG. 4) and a special time reduction that does not trigger the operation of the accessory continuous operation means (support time reduction A, Support time reduction B, support time reduction C: Fig. 4, Fig. 25, Fig. 29) are included at least.
The game state control means
When the special time reduction is won, the gaming machine is controlled to the time reduction state (FIGS. 4, 25, 29, 42).

[Configuration Example 2A]
An acquisition means (main control unit 20, S314 in FIG. 11) for acquiring a plurality of types of random values including at least a first random value and a second random value based on the establishment of a start condition.
A winning determination means (main control unit 20, S410 in FIG. 12) that executes a winning determination regarding a predetermined winning based on the first random value.
Based on the result of the winning determination and the second random number value, the symbol determination means main control unit 20 for determining the type of winning, S411 in FIG. 12), and
A symbol display means (special symbol display devices 38a, 38b, liquid crystal display device 36) capable of performing a variable display operation of a symbol and stopping and displaying the symbol in a display mode according to a determination result of the symbol determination means.
A special electric accessory (special variable winning device 52) configured to open or expand the entrance of the big winning opening,
The accessory continuous operation means (main control unit 20 (accessory continuous operation device), FIG. 15) capable of continuously operating the special electric accessory, and
Game state control means (main control unit 20, FIG. 4, S412 in FIG. 12, S509 in FIG. 15) capable of controlling a game state control means (main control unit 20, FIG. 4, S412 in FIG. 12, S509 in FIG. A gaming machine including FIGS. 42 and 43).
The target of the winning judgment by the winning judgment means is
A big hit that triggers the operation of the accessory continuous operation means (for example, a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 4R probability variation jackpot: FIG. 4) and a special time reduction that does not trigger the operation of the accessory continuous operation means (support time reduction A, Support time reduction B, support time reduction C: Fig. 4, Fig. 25, Fig. 29) are included at least.
The game state control means
When the special time reduction is won, the time reduction state is controlled until the number of times the symbol changes are displayed reaches a predetermined upper limit.
The special time reduction includes a plurality of types of special time reductions (support time reduction A, support time reduction B, support time reduction C: FIG. 4, FIG. 25, FIG. 29) having different upper limit times.
The symbol determination means is
When the result of the winning determination is the winning of the special time saving, one of the plurality of types of the special time saving is determined as the winning type (FIGS. 4 and 23).

[Configuration Example 3A]
An acquisition means (main control unit 20, S314 in FIG. 11) for acquiring a plurality of types of random values including a first random value and a second random value based on the establishment of a start condition.
A winning determination means (main control unit 20, S410 in FIG. 12) that executes a winning determination regarding a hit based on the first random value, and
When the result of the hit / fail determination is a hit, a symbol determination means (main control unit 20, S411 in FIG. 12) capable of determining the type of the hit based on the second random number value, and
A symbol display means capable of performing a variable display operation of a symbol and stopping and displaying the symbol in a display mode according to a determination result of the symbol determination means.
A gaming machine including a gaming state control means capable of controlling a time-saving state in which a rate of executing the fluctuation display operation of the symbol is high in a variation time shorter than that of a normal state.
The symbol determination means is
When the result of the winning determination by the winning determination means is a loss, a lottery regarding whether or not to give the time saving state is executed using the second random number value (FIGS. 25 to 28). , A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Configuration Example 4A]
Lottery means to execute lottery about winning,
A symbol display means capable of performing a variable display operation of a symbol and stopping and displaying the symbol in a display mode according to the lottery result by the lottery means.
It is provided with a game state control means capable of controlling a time saving state in which the ratio of executing the fluctuation display operation of the symbol is high in a fluctuation time shorter than the normal state.
A gaming machine capable of controlling the time saving state until the number of times the symbol changes are displayed reaches a predetermined upper limit.
The upper limit number of times controlled to the time saving state when the lottery result is a hit (the number of time savings given by the time saving big hit) and the upper limit number of times controlled to the time saving state when the lottery result is lost (support) The number of times is different from the number of time reductions given by the time reduction (4R time reduction jackpot time reduction performance (time reduction number 100 times) ≠ support time reduction time reduction performance (support time reduction B 200 times or support time reduction C infinite time reduction ( A gaming machine characterized in that the number of time reductions is 65535 times)).
In addition, the case where "the lottery result is lost" means that in the case of the lottery target lottery form (Figs. 4 and 20), the "big hit" was not won in the winning lottery, and here, support is provided. It can include cases where the time saving is won. Further, in the case of the lottery form for the loss type (FIGS. 29 and 30), it is the case that the "loss" is won in the winning lottery.

[Structure Example 5A]
Lottery means to execute lottery about winning,
A symbol display means capable of performing a variable display operation of a symbol and stopping and displaying the symbol in a display mode according to the lottery result by the lottery means.
It is provided with a game state control means capable of controlling a time saving state in which the ratio of executing the fluctuation display operation of the symbol is high in a fluctuation time shorter than the normal state.
A gaming machine capable of controlling the time saving state until the number of times the symbol changes are displayed reaches a predetermined upper limit.
It is configured to be controllable in the time saving state depending on whether the lottery result is a win or a loss.
The upper limit number of times controlled to the time saving state when the lottery result is a hit (the number of time savings given by the time saving big hit) and the upper limit number of times controlled to the time saving state when the lottery result is lost (support) A game characterized in that it is the same as the time reduction performance given by the time reduction (4R time reduction jackpot time reduction performance (time reduction number 100 times) = support time reduction time reduction performance (time reduction number 100 times by support time reduction A)). Machine.
In addition, the case where "the lottery result is lost" means that in the case of the lottery target lottery form (Figs. 4 and 20), the "big hit" was not won in the winning lottery, and here, support is provided. It can include cases where the time saving is won. Further, in the case of the lottery form for the loss type (FIGS. 29 and 30), it is the case that the "loss" is won in the winning lottery.

[Configuration Example 6A]
Lottery means to execute lottery about winning,
A symbol display means capable of performing a variable display operation of a symbol and stopping and displaying the symbol in a display mode according to the lottery result by the lottery means.
A variation pattern determining means for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns including a reach variation pattern based on the lottery result by the lottery means.
Based on the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means, the symbol display control means for controlling the fluctuation display operation of the symbol in the symbol display means, and the symbol display control means.
A gaming machine provided with a means for counting the number of consecutive villas in a specific game period, provided that the player has won the prize.
The reach variation pattern includes a plurality of reach variation patterns having different variation times.
A gaming machine characterized in that the selection rate of a reach fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time is higher after the number of consecutive villas exceeds a predetermined number of times than before (FIG. 34).

[Configuration Example 7A]
Lottery means to execute lottery about winning,
A symbol display means capable of performing a variable display operation of a symbol and stopping and displaying the symbol in a display mode according to the lottery result by the lottery means.
A variation pattern determining means for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the lottery result by the lottery means.
Based on the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means, the symbol display control means for controlling the fluctuation display operation of the symbol in the symbol display means, and the symbol display control means.
A gaming machine provided with a means for counting the number of consecutive villas in a specific game period, provided that the player has won the prize.
The plurality of types of fluctuation patterns include a plurality of normal fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times.
A gaming machine characterized in that the selection rate of a normal fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time is higher after the number of consecutive villas exceeds a predetermined number of times than before (FIG. 34).

[Configuration Example 8A]
Lottery means to execute lottery about winning,
A symbol display means capable of performing a variable display operation of a symbol and stopping and displaying the symbol in a display mode according to the lottery result by the lottery means.
A variation pattern determining means for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the lottery result by the lottery means.
Based on the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means, the symbol display control means for controlling the fluctuation display operation of the symbol in the symbol display means, and the symbol display control means.
A gaming machine provided with a means for counting the number of consecutive villas in a specific game period, provided that the player has won the prize.
The plurality of types of fluctuation patterns include a plurality of normal fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times.
When the number of consecutive villas exceeds the predetermined number of times, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern to be selected becomes relatively longer when the lottery result is lost, while the lottery result is a hit. A gaming machine characterized in that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern to be selected does not change (the configuration of (T27) above, a modified example of FIG. 33).

[Configuration Example 9A]
Lottery means to execute lottery about winning,
A symbol display means capable of performing a variable display operation of a symbol and stopping and displaying the symbol in a display mode according to the lottery result by the lottery means.
A variation pattern determining means for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the lottery result by the lottery means.
Based on the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means, the symbol display control means for controlling the fluctuation display operation of the symbol in the symbol display means, and the symbol display control means.
A gaming machine provided with a means for counting the number of consecutive villas in a specific game period, provided that the player has won the prize.
The plurality of types of fluctuation patterns include a plurality of normal fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times.
When the number of consecutive villas exceeds the predetermined number of times, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern to be selected when the lottery result is a hit is relatively longer, while the lottery result is lost. A gaming machine characterized in that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern to be selected does not change (the configuration of (T26) above, a modified example of FIG. 34).

<Variable display operation effect of decorative pattern: FIGS. 44 to 57>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 57, a variable display effect of the decorative symbol will be described. The decorative symbol variation display effect is a series of symbol variation display operation modes (decorative symbol variation pattern) from the start of variation of the decorative symbol to the stop display (particularly, the final display). Here, the left symbol shown in FIG. 4 is displayed. , The middle symbol and the right symbol are dealt with in the symbol variation display mode of the three decorative symbols. The variable display effect of the decorative symbol is used as a part of the effect in the pattern variable display game. Unless otherwise required, the variable display effect of the decorative pattern is abbreviated as "decorative pattern effect".

The decorative design effect is used for notifying the reach state (reach effect), the occurrence of pseudo-ream, the final game result (big hit lottery result), and for enlivening the notice effect (notice during change), as well as for the game. It functions as important identification information for notifying the start and end, and can be said to be the core of the decorative pattern variation display game. In other words, the decorative design effect not only enriches the variation of the effect by the display operation, but also makes it difficult to feel stress when the game result ends with a loss, and makes it difficult to feel the occurrence of fluctuating slump. It is considered to be an important production. Therefore, it is an object of the present embodiment to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the directing effect of the decorative pattern production.

In the present embodiment, attention is paid to the time when a lot of players encounter a loss in the progress of the game, and in order to enrich the production variation during the symbol fluctuation and improve the player's hitting comfort, the "decorative symbol" executed at the end of the game is executed. The "stop operation pattern (stop operation mode of the decorative pattern)" has been devised.

(Outline of decorative design production)
In order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, first, an outline of the decorative design effect will be described. Here, first, with reference to FIG. 44, an outline of a series of variable display operations of decorative symbols will be described. The "stop operation pattern of the decorative symbol", which is closely related to the present invention, will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

FIG. 44 is a timing chart showing an example of a decorative symbol effect (decorative symbol variation pattern) related to the normal variation 13s.

In the decorative symbol production, for example, as shown in "Stop operation long" in FIG. 44 (a), first, three decorative symbols start variable display all at once or separately from the stop display state (confirmed display state), and each of them starts variable display. The decorative symbol starts a "high-speed fluctuation state (hereinafter referred to as" high-speed fluctuation ")" (at 0.5 seconds). During this high-speed fluctuation, each decorative symbol is in a display state that is difficult to identify or cannot be identified, and the transmittance of the decorative symbol is higher than that at the time of stop display. For example, the background image corresponding to the current effect mode is displayed at high speed. It becomes identifiable through the changing decorative pattern. Note that FIG. 44 shows a state in which the three decorative symbols start the variable display all at once from the stopped display state, but as described above, the three decorative symbols start the variable display separately and fluctuate at high speed. May be started. For example, the left symbol may be displayed in 0.5 seconds, the middle symbol in 0.7 seconds, and the right symbol in 0.9 seconds. In this case, all the symbols enter the high-speed fluctuation state after 0.9 seconds.

The above-mentioned "transmittance" means the degree to which other images existing on the back surface of the image can be seen through or the ratio thereof with respect to the image to which the transmittance is set. Specifically, when the transmittance of a certain image is set to 0%, the other images superimposed on the back surface of the image are completely invisible (indistinguishable state), but the transmittance is set to 100%. If so, it becomes completely transparent and only the other image can be seen. Therefore, if the transmittance is set to an appropriate value, the image is displayed as a translucent image according to the transmittance (0% <transmittance A <99%). The transmittance of the decorative symbol during the high-speed fluctuation may be at least higher than the transmittance during the low-speed fluctuation described later (transmittance α% during the low-speed fluctuation <transmittance β% during the high-speed fluctuation). , It is preferable that the other image (background image) superimposed on the back side of the decorative pattern is in a display state having sufficiently distinguishable transparency. In addition, various notice effects are also executed when the decorative pattern starts to change.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 44 again, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, the stop operation is performed at 9 seconds, 10.5 seconds, and 12 seconds from the start of the fluctuation in the order of "left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol", respectively. After starting, each symbol sequentially starts decelerating from high-speed fluctuation and enters a period of "low-speed fluctuation state (hereinafter referred to as" low-speed fluctuation ")". The period of this low-speed fluctuation is the "slow-down display period (deceleration period)" in which the symbol stops while gradually slowing down, and the transmittance is confirmed and displayed immediately after the start of the stop operation (timing of the start of the stop operation). It is reduced to almost the same (meaning that it includes the same; the same applies hereinafter), and the decorative design is redisplayed in an identifiable state. Therefore, during the low-speed fluctuation period, the transmittance of the decorative symbol is always lower than that during the high-speed fluctuation (transmittance α% during low-speed fluctuation <transmittance β% during high-speed fluctuation). It may be configured so that the transmittance gradually decreases with the progress of.

When the period of the above "slow fluctuation (slow down display)" has elapsed, the period of the "temporary stop state (hereinafter referred to as" temporary stop ")" is entered. In this example, the temporary stop period is sequentially entered at the time points of 10.5 seconds, 11.5 seconds, and 12.5 seconds for each symbol. During this temporary suspension period, the design will "sway". The "temporary stop state" here is different from the temporary stop state of the decorative symbol related to the "pseudo-ream" (temporary stop state before the re-variation display operation of the decorative symbol). The transmittance during the temporary stop is substantially the same as the transmittance during the confirmed display (transmittance during the confirmed display γ% = transmittance δ% during the temporary stop period = approximately 0%), and the design is sufficient. Displayed in an identifiable state. Therefore, the player can clearly grasp what kind of symbol has stopped.

Then, when the temporary stop period elapses (at the time of 13 seconds), the fluctuation time (variation time of the special symbol) ends, and the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed (confirmed display period), whereby a series of decorative symbol effects is produced. The end, that is, the decorative pattern variation display game this time is ended. The fixed display period is a time width provided corresponding to the "fixed display time (500 ms: see step S453 in FIG. 13)" set when the special symbol finishes the fluctuation time, and is the final. It is used as a definite display time for definitively notifying the combination of decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed. The next decorative pattern variation display game will start after this fixed display period.

Although not shown, to be precise, the speed of the decorative symbol becomes zero at the end of the low-speed fluctuation, and after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, 0.3 second stop display: pause period). ), Temporary stop is started. That is, the flow of the basic variation display operation of the decorative symbol in one symbol variation display game is, to be exact, "high-speed variation-> low-speed variation-> pause-> temporary stop-> all symbol confirmation display". Therefore, when referred to as "the symbol that stops first", it means the symbol that ends the low-speed fluctuation first or the symbol that temporarily stops first. In the present specification, in order to simplify the explanation, "the symbol that stops first", "the symbol that stops second", and "the symbol that stops last" are respectively "the symbol that temporarily stops first". , "The symbol that temporarily stops second" and "The symbol that temporarily stops last".

In the following, for convenience of explanation, the above "low speed fluctuation period (slow down display period)" is the "period from the start of the stop operation to the temporary stop", and the low speed fluctuation period is referred to as "stop operation". Sometimes referred to as "period". In addition, the effect during the stop operation period may be referred to as "stop operation effect".

(About the stop operation pattern of the decorative pattern: Fig. 45)
The outline of a series of variable display operations of decorative patterns has been described above. Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a stop operation pattern of the decorative symbol according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 45 is a timing chart focusing on the stop operation pattern (display mode related to the stop operation period) of the decorative symbol. Details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, three stop operation patterns of "stop operation short", "stop operation middle", and "stop operation long" shown in FIGS. 45 (a) to 45 (c) are dealt with. Note that FIG. 45 shows the temporal transition of each symbol in the stop operation pattern of each symbol, with the time point t at which the first stop (near-death) symbol starts the stop operation as 0 seconds. The relational expressions connected by have almost the same meaning). Further, for convenience of explanation, each period related to the decorative symbol effect (variable display operation of the decorative symbol) in FIG. 45 is described as follows.
(B) The period during the stop operation of the left symbol is "LMT during the period during the left stop operation".
(B) The period during the stop operation of the right symbol is "RMT during the right stop operation period".
(C) The period during the stop operation of the middle symbol is "CMT during the middle stop operation".
(D) The temporary suspension period of the left symbol is "Left temporary suspension period LPT".
(E) The temporary suspension period for the right symbol is "Right temporary suspension period RPT".
(F) The temporary suspension period of the middle symbol is "Left temporary suspension period CPT".
(G) The fixed display period (common to all decorative patterns) is set to "fixed display period CT".
(H) The stop operation period (LMT + LPT) of the left symbol is set to "Left stop operation period LST".
(I) The stop operation period (RMT + RPT) of the right symbol is set to "Right stop operation period RST".
(N) The stop operation period (CMT + CPT) of the middle symbol is set to "Middle stop operation period CST".

In the present embodiment, regarding the stop operation pattern, the stop operation period from the time when at least one symbol first starts the stop operation to the time when all the symbols stop (confirmed display) (here, "left stop operation period LST"). A plurality of stop operation patterns having different (corresponding) are provided. The plurality of stop operation patterns are provided with at least stop operation patterns of a first period, a second period, and a third period having different stop operation periods (stop operation times), and the first period, the second period, and the first period are provided. The stop operation period becomes longer in this order of three periods. Of these, the stop operation pattern of the first period is called "stop operation short", the stop operation pattern of the second period whose stop operation period is longer than the first period is called "stop operation middle", and the stop operation period is The stop operation pattern of the third period, which is longer than the second period, is referred to as "stop operation long". For example, in relation to the stop operation patterns shown in FIGS. 45 (a) to (c), the stop operation pattern having the shortest stop operation period (shortest time) is "stop operation short", and the stop operation period is the longest. The stop operation pattern for the period (maximum time) is "stop operation long", and the stop operation pattern for the stop operation period longer than the stop operation short and shorter than the stop operation long is "stop operation middle".

(Specific example of stop operation short circuit: FIG. 45 (a))
“Stop operation short circuit” will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (a).

As shown in the figure, the "stop operation short" according to the present embodiment starts the stop operation (slow down display) at substantially the same timing for all the symbols on the left, right, and middle (at 0 seconds). After a low-speed fluctuation period of 0.5 seconds (during the stop operation period), all the symbols are temporarily stopped (paused) at substantially the same timing. After that, after a temporary stop (sway fluctuation) for 0.5 seconds, all the symbols are confirmed and displayed (at the time of 1 second). In the case of this stop operation short, all the symbols perform the stop operation all at once, and the confirmation is displayed only after 1 second, so that it seems that the operation is stopped quickly.

(Specific example of stop operation middle: FIG. 45 (b))
Next, the “stop operation middle” will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (b).

The "stop operation middle" according to the present embodiment is different from the above stop operation short, and the stop operation order of each symbol is different. Specifically, as shown in the figure, the stop operation (slow down display) is started in the order of "left symbol-> right symbol-> middle symbol". In the case of the present embodiment, after the left symbol that is stopped (temporarily stopped) first enters the stop operation, the right symbol and the middle symbol sequentially enter the stop operation in the middle of the stop operation of the left symbol (0.5 seconds). (1 second time point), each symbol sequentially enters a near-death in the order in which the stop operation is started (see the time points of 1.5 seconds, 2 seconds, and 2.5 seconds in the figure). Then, when 0.5 seconds have passed from the last temporarily stopped middle symbol, all the symbols are confirmed and displayed (at the time of 3 seconds). Therefore, in the case of the stop operation middle, it seems that the stop operation period (3 seconds) longer than the stop operation short (1 second), that is, each symbol stops more slowly than the stop operation short. However, in the case of the stop operation middle, each symbol stops at a good tempo because of the stop operation that "in the middle of the stop operation of the symbol that stops first, the other symbols stop in sequence". It is easy to get a feeling of near-death. As shown in FIG. 56 (a modified example of the stop operation pattern) described later, each symbol also has a stop operation mode in which the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped at the same time (left and right simultaneous stop), and then the middle symbol is stopped. Is easy to get the feeling that it stops at a good tempo.

(Specific example of long stop operation: FIG. 45 (c))
Next, the above-mentioned "stop operation long" will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (c).

In the "stop operation long" according to the present embodiment, the stop operation (slow down display) is started in the order of "left symbol-> right symbol-> middle symbol" in the order of the stop operation of each symbol as in the stop operation middle. It is the same in that it does. However, it differs in the following points. In the case of a long stop operation, the left symbol first enters the stop operation, and then temporarily stops at 1.5 seconds. On the other hand, the right symbol enters the stop operation at 1.5 seconds when the left symbol enters the temporary stop, and then enters the temporary stop at 3 seconds. Further, the middle symbol enters the stop operation at 3 seconds when the right symbol enters the temporary stop, and enters the temporary stop at 3.5 seconds. That is, every time the symbol that started the stop operation first in chronological order enters the near-death, the remaining symbols enter the near-death, and 0.5 seconds after the last temporarily stopped symbol, that is, the left symbol. All symbols are confirmed and displayed 4 seconds after the start of the stop operation of. Therefore, when the stop motion long is applied, each symbol appears to stop more slowly than the stop motion middle. Although details will be described later, in the case of a long stop operation, the symbol that is stopped (temporarily stopped) at the end is characterized in that it stops in a shorter time than other symbols.

Regarding each of the above-mentioned stop operation patterns (stop operation short, stop operation middle, stop operation long), the relationship when focusing on each period (period LMT, RMT, CMT, LPT, RPT, CPT, LST, RST, CST, etc.) Is as shown in FIG. 45, and items that can be derived from this (for example, the relationship between the length of the high-speed fluctuation period, the relationship between the length during the stop operation, the relationship between the high and low transmittances, and the relationship between the lengths of the stop operation periods). Etc.) are self-evident matters and are included in the scope of the technical idea of the present invention.

As described above, the stop operation short, the stop operation middle, and the stop operation long have different stop operation modes (during stop operation effect modes) of the decorative symbols, and thus can give different impressions in terms of effect.

(Application example of stop operation pattern 1: FIG. 44)
Next, an application example of each stop operation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 shows an example in which each stop operation pattern (stop operation short, stop operation middle, stop operation long) is executed in the predetermined fluctuation display of the predetermined fluctuation time. Specifically, it is an example in which each stop operation pattern is applied to the decorative symbol effect in a specific normal variation pattern, and here, the decorative symbol effect related to the "normal variation 13s" is typically shown.

Since the stop operation period becomes longer in this order for the stop operation short, stop operation middle, and stop operation long, when applied to the fluctuation pattern of the same fluctuation time, as shown in the figure, the high-speed fluctuation period is the stop operation long and stop. The length increases in the order of operation middle and stop operation short. Further, in the case of the stop short in this example, each symbol starts the stop operation at substantially the same timing, temporarily stops at substantially the same timing, and then is fixedly displayed. Therefore, each symbol has a high-speed fluctuation period. , The stop operation period MT (low-speed fluctuation period: LMT, RMT, CMT) and the near-death period (LPT, RPT, CPT) are substantially the same period.

On the other hand, in the case of the stop operation middle, the right symbol starts the stop operation in the middle of the stop operation of the left symbol that stops first, and the middle symbol that stops last in the middle of the stop operation between the left symbol and the right symbol. Starts the stop operation, so during the period during the left stop operation, the middle symbol is fluctuating at high speed (maintaining translucency with high transmittance), but only the left symbol and the right symbol are slow. There may be overlapping periods that show down display (maintaining semi-transparency with low transmittance), or overlapping periods that show slow-down display for all symbols.

In the case of a long stop operation, the right symbol starts the stop operation at the timing when the left symbol temporarily stops (approximately the same timing), and the middle symbol stops at the timing when the right symbol temporarily stops (approximately the same timing). In order to start the operation, during the left stop operation period LMT, the middle symbol and the right symbol are fluctuating at high speed (maintaining translucency with high transmittance), and during the right stop operation period RMT, only the middle symbol is moving. During high-speed fluctuation (maintaining translucency with high transmittance) (see Fig. (B)). Also, in the case of a long stop operation, the deceleration rate of the middle symbol that stops last is stronger than that of the left symbol or the right symbol, and the middle symbol stops most quickly. The deceleration rate is almost the same, and it stops more slowly than the middle symbol. Therefore, in terms of production, it seems that the middle symbol, which is temporarily stopped last, is quickly temporarily stopped while the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped. For example, "Ta-n ♪ (temporary stop of the left symbol)-> Ta-n ♪ (temporary stop of the right symbol)-> Tan! (Temporary stop of the middle symbol)". Such a "short stop operation (short-time stop operation) of the final stop symbol" is suitable in a situation where a loss is known, for example, "at the time of non-tempai (non-reach)". The reason is as follows. If the last stopped symbol is slowly stopped when it is not in the reach state, the temporary stop may be unnecessarily long and may give the player a feeling of frustration, and such a stop operation occurs frequently. This is because the game entertainment will be reduced. Therefore, when the game is not in the reach state, the short stop operation of the final stop symbol is executed to give the player a feeling that the game is progressing at a good tempo. As a result, even if the player sees the stopping motion, he / she is less likely to feel excessive stress, and it is possible to produce a decorative pattern that is comfortable for the player to hit.

In FIG. 44, as a specific normal fluctuation pattern, the decorative symbol effect related to the "normal fluctuation 13s" is typically described, but the specific normal fluctuation pattern may be one or a plurality of types. Further, it can be appropriately determined whether to apply one or a plurality of stop operation patterns among the stop operation patterns. For example, in the case of a short variation pattern (for example, normal variation 4s), only one stop operation pattern (for example, stop operation short) is applied, and for the long variation pattern, a plurality of stop operation patterns (for example, stop operation short) are applied. , At least two of stop operation middle and stop operation long) can be applied.

As described above, when each stop operation pattern (stop operation short, stop operation middle, stop operation long) is applied to the same fluctuation pattern, the high-speed fluctuation period may be different depending on the stop operation pattern. The stop operation period can be different. That is, even if the variation pattern is the same, it is possible to make the stop operation mode (effect during the stop operation) of the decorative symbol different, and it is possible to give a different impression in terms of effect. Taking advantage of such a directing merit, even if the fluctuation pattern is the same, if the stop operation pattern is different according to the directing executed (appearing) during the symbol variation display game, the directing is free. It is possible to improve the degree and variation of the production. This will be described with reference to FIG.

(Example of application of stop operation pattern according to the effect to be executed (effect during stop operation): FIG. 46)
FIG. 46 is a timing chart typically exemplifying the decorative symbol effect related to the normal variation 13s, as in FIG. 44, but here, depending on the effect to be executed (for example, a notice effect), FIG. It is a timing chart which exemplifies the case where the stop operation pattern of a decorative pattern effect is different. FIG. 46 (a) shows the case where the “effect A” is executed, FIG. 46 (b) shows the case where the “effect B” is executed, and FIG. 46 (c) shows either the effect A or the effect B. Is not executed (when other effects are executed).

The "Direction A", "Direction B", and "Direction C" in the figure have different production contents, and the execution time (effect time) of the production is also different. The relationship between the length of the production time is "Production A> Production B> Production C".

As shown in FIGS. 46 (a) to 46 (c), regarding the decorative symbol effect, when the effect A is executed, the "stop operation short" is executed, and when the effect B is executed, the "stop operation middle" is executed. "Is executed, and when the effect A and the effect B are not executed (in this example, it is assumed that the effect C is executed), the" stop operation long "is executed. As described above, the reason why the stop operation pattern is changed according to the effect time (execution time of the effect) is as follows.

The execution time of the decorative symbol variation display game substantially corresponds to the variation time of the special symbol, and the variation time is used to, for example, a notice effect suggesting the winning expectation, a setting suggestion effect, or a mere game. A wide variety of productions are performed, such as productions that do not suggest winning expectations (non-notice productions) such as motifs such as explanations and copyrights (character introduction). However, there are cases where the variable time cannot always be used well due to the production time of the effect to be executed. Further, if the fluctuation patterns are provided according to all the effects, the types of fluctuation patterns become enormous, which leads to an increase in the control load. Therefore, in the present invention, a plurality of stop operation patterns (effects during stop operation) can be executed with one fluctuation pattern, thereby improving the degree of freedom of the effects and realizing various effects, and also reducing the control burden. It can also contribute to mitigation. In particular, it is a major feature that various effects can be produced by using the stop operation pattern even if the fluctuation pattern is relatively short. This will be described in detail below.

As shown in FIG. 46A, when the "effect A" having a relatively long effect time is executed, the effect A may end immediately before the end of the fluctuation time. In this example, the case where the effect A ends at 12 seconds is illustrated. In the case of this example, if the game result (decoration stop symbol) is notified at substantially the same timing as the end of the effect A, there is no sense of discomfort at the end of the effect A, and the sense of discomfort at the end of this game is reduced. However, if the stop operation of the decorative symbol is started during the execution of the effect A, the effect of the effect A being executed and the stop operation of the symbol (effect during the stop operation) are mixed and the effect is diminished, or the game is played. There is a risk of causing confusion. When the stop operation middle or the stop operation long is applied to the effect A, as can be seen from FIGS. 46 (b) and 46 (c), the execution period of the effect A and the stop operation period of the symbol overlap with each other. It leads to the problems mentioned above. Therefore, when the effect A (effect time length) is executed, the "stop operation short", which has the shortest stop operation period, is used among the stop operation patterns.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), when the effect B having a relatively short execution time is executed, the fluctuation time may end with a certain margin (about several seconds) from the end. .. In this example, the case where the effect B ends at 10 seconds is illustrated.

In the case of FIG. 46 (b), the end timing of the effect B ends about 3 seconds before the end of the fluctuation time, and the 3 seconds are the "effect free time" in which the advance notice effect is not executed, that is, the "effect slump". "(The time width SRT shown in the figure corresponds to the time width of this effect slump). If the stop operation short is used, there is a risk that the player will feel stress (increased frustration, etc.) due to the state in which the temporary stop state of all the symbols continues for a while, that is, the production slump occurs. ..

Therefore, when the above-mentioned problem occurs, it is preferable to fill the above-mentioned effect slump time SRT by utilizing the effect during the stop operation. In the case of this example, it is preferable to use "stop operation middle" or "stop operation long", which has a relatively long stop operation period. However, it can be said that it is more preferable to use the stop operation middle as shown in the figure in order to avoid the overlap between the execution period of the effect B and the stop operation period of the symbol. In the case of this example, the stop operation of the decorative symbol is started at substantially the same timing as the end of the effect B, and each symbol is sequentially stopped at a good tempo during the effect slump time SRT (stop operation middle). Is executed, there is no sense of discomfort at the end of the effect B, the effect slump is less likely to be felt, and the player is less likely to feel stress.

The case of FIG. 46C illustrates a case in which the effect C is executed with a shorter effect time than the effect A and the effect B as a case in which the effect A and the effect B are not executed. In this case, in consideration of the problems described in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b) (the problem that the execution period of the effect and the stop operation period of the symbol overlap, the problem of the effect slump, etc.), the "stop operation long" is selected. It is preferable to use it. In the stop operation long, the stop operation period (left stop operation period LST: see FIG. 45 (c)) is longer than that in the stop operation middle, so that the high-speed fluctuation period is shorter. Therefore, it is preferable to use the long stop operation in the case of executing "effect C" which is less than the execution time of effect B (the case of "execution time of effect C <execution time of effect B <execution time of effect A"). Is.

As described above, the feature of this example is that even if the fluctuation pattern is the same, the stop operation pattern is different depending on the type of effect to be executed (effect time) and the presence or absence of the effect to be executed. It can be said that it is characterized in that the stop operation pattern is different depending on the timing at which the production ends. For example, in FIGS. 46A and 46B, the effect B (first effect) that ends at the first end timing during the predetermined fluctuation time and the second end timing that is later than the first end timing are ended. There is an effect A (second effect), and it is preferable to execute the stop operation short in the case of the effect A and the stop operation middle in the case of the effect B.

(Modification example 1)
In the example of FIG. 46, an example in which the stop operation patterns are different when the effects with different effect times are executed has been described, but even when the same effect is executed, depending on the timing at which the effect ends. Therefore, the stop operation pattern can be changed. For example, in the case of executing a predetermined effect (referred to as "effect K" here) for a certain effect time (for example, 6 seconds), the predetermined variation time of the predetermined variation pattern (here, the normal time 13s is taken as an example). If the start timing of the effect K in the inside is different, the end timing will also be different. Explaining this with reference to FIG. 46, for example, the following cases (I) to (III) can occur.
(I) When the effect K is started from the time point of 6 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, the end timing is 12 seconds (the case where the effect K ends at the same timing as the end timing of the effect A in FIG. 46 (a)). ,
(II) When the effect K is started from the time of 4 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, the end timing is 10 seconds (the case where the effect K ends at the same timing as the end timing of the effect B in FIG. 46 (b)). ,
(III) When the effect K is started from the time point of 3 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, the end timing is the time point of 9 seconds (the case where the effect ends at the same timing as the end timing of the effect C in FIG. 46 (c)). ).
In such a case, as in FIG. 46, it is preferable to make the stop operation pattern different according to the end timing of the effect K. Specifically, the stop operation short is applied in the case (I), the stop operation middle is applied in the case (II), and the stop operation long is applied in the case (III). In this way, even when the same effect is executed, if the end timing of the effect is different, the stop operation pattern can be changed according to the end timing.

(Modification 2)
Further, in the example of FIG. 46, when an effect having a different effect time is executed, an example in which a stop operation pattern in which the stop operation period is shorter is applied to the effect in which the effect time is relatively long has been described. However, even when an effect having a relatively short effect time is executed, the end timing may be later than the effect having a long effect time. For example, during the predetermined fluctuation time of the predetermined fluctuation pattern (here, the normal time 13s is taken as an example), the “effect K” with the production time of 6 seconds and the “effect M” with the production time of 7 seconds can be executed. In the case of, for example, the following cases (IV) and (V) can occur.
(IV) When the effect K is started from the time point of 6 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, the end timing is the time point of 12 seconds (the case where the effect K ends at the same timing as the end timing of the effect A in FIG. 46 (a)). ,
(V) When the effect M is started from the time point of 3 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, the end timing is the time point of 10 seconds (the case where the effect ends at the same timing as the end timing of the effect B in FIG. 46 (b)). ). In this case, the stop operation short is applied in the case of (IV) above, and the stop operation middle is applied in the case of (V) above, that is, the stop operation middle is applied when the effect M having an early end timing is executed. When the effect K whose end timing is late is executed, the stop operation middle can be applied. Therefore, the stop operation short can be applied even if the effect K has a relatively short effect time, and the stop operation middle can be applied even if the effect M has a relatively long effect time. In this way, when different effects are executed, the stop operation pattern can be changed according to the timing at which each effect ends.

Regarding the "point at which the stop operation pattern is different depending on the timing at which the effect ends" described in FIG. 46, the modification example 1, the modification example 2, and the like, the reach stop operation pattern (see, for example, FIG. 52) described later. The same can be said for. That is, the reach stop operation pattern can be changed according to the timing at which the effect ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the fluctuation pattern is the same, the stop operation pattern is different depending on the type (effect time) of the effect to be executed. This makes it possible to deal with many effects (effect scenarios) with one variation pattern (variation time). As a result, it is possible to greatly contribute to the improvement of the degree of freedom of the production, the improvement of the production variation, and the reduction of the control load. It should be noted that the following configurations (δ1) to (δ4) can be used.

(Δ1) The effect A, the effect B, and the effect C may be regarded as an effect scenario including one or a plurality of types of effects. Further, any of the effects A, B, and C may be any effect as long as it is executed during the symbol change. Can be adopted.

(Δ2) Each of the effect A, the effect B, and the effect C can be one or a plurality of types of effects. For example, "Direction A is" Production α + Production β ", Production B is" Production γ + Production δ ", and Production C is" Production ε + Production ζ ". ) ”And“ Production A is “Direction α + Production β + Production γ”, Production B is “Production δ + Production ε”, and Production C is “Production ζ”. For example, the effect A can be "effect α + effect β", the effect B can be "effect α + effect γ", and the effect C can be "effect α + effect δ" (each). In the productions A to C, at least one production is the same production, but the effects are different as a whole). For example, there is a case where the effect α is a pseudo-ream and the effect β to the effect δ are different effects. Further, for example, the effect A, the effect B, and the effect C can be regarded as a "step-up effect" including the effect steps of a plurality of stages (for example, the effects SU1 to SU3). Specifically, directing A is "directing SU1 + directing SU2 + directing SU3" (developed to the final stage), directing B is "directing SU1 + directing SU2" (developing to the second stage), and directing C is "directing SU1" (developing to the first stage). Ends with).

(Δ3) The effects A, B, and C have been described on the premise of satisfying the relationship of "execution time of effect C <execution time of effect B <execution time of effect A", but they are simply stopped according to the effect type. The operation pattern may be different. In any case, the degree of freedom and variation of the production can be improved.

(Δ4) The “effect B” or “effect C” whose production time is relatively short is preferably a “player-participation type production”. The player participation type production uses operation means (effect button 13 and cross key 75), and it is easy to leave a lingering sound of the production during operation, and it is possible to make it difficult to feel the presence of the production slump. The reason is that even if this occurs, it can be dealt with by the stop operation middle or the stop operation long.
The above (δ1) to (δ5) are the same in FIGS. 47 to 57, which will be described later.

(When the same effect is executed with fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times: FIGS. 47 and 48)
Further, as shown in FIG. 47 or 32, when the same effect is executed in the fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times, the stop operation pattern can be set according to each fluctuation pattern.

In this example, when the same effect (one or more effects are the same) is executed in a plurality of variation patterns having different variation times, in the case of a variation pattern in which the variation time is relatively long (for example, the variation time is 16s). , A decorative symbol effect with a stop operation pattern (for example, long stop operation) with a relatively long stop operation period is executed, and in the case of a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, fluctuation time 13s), It is possible to execute a decorative symbol effect accompanied by a stop operation pattern (for example, stop operation short or stop operation middle) in which the period during the stop operation is relatively short. Specific examples of this example are shown in FIGS. 47 and 48.

FIG. 47 shows that when the effect A is executed, the longest normal fluctuation “normal fluctuation 16s” is set to “stop operation long”, the fluctuation time is shorter than the longest normal fluctuation, and the shortest normal fluctuation is the normal fluctuation 4s. The "normal fluctuation 13s", which has a longer fluctuation time than the above, indicates a case in which the "stop operation middle" or the "stop operation short" is set.

That is, when the same effect is executed in a plurality of fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times, in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is relatively long (here, the fluctuation time is 16s), the stop operation has the longest stop operation period. A decorative pattern effect accompanied by a pattern (long stop operation) can be executed, and in the case of a fluctuation pattern (here, the fluctuation time 13s) in which the fluctuation time is relatively short, the stop operation during the stop operation is relatively short. It is a configuration in which a decorative pattern effect accompanied by a pattern (for example, a stop operation short and / or a stop operation middle) can be executed.

Further, in FIG. 48, when the effect A is executed, in the case of the "normal fluctuation 16s" of the longest normal fluctuation, it is set as "stop operation long" or "stop operation middle", and the fluctuation time is shorter than the longest normal fluctuation. In addition, in the case of "normal fluctuation 13s" in which the fluctuation time is longer than the normal fluctuation 4s of the shortest normal fluctuation, the case of "stop operation short" is shown.

That is, when the same effect is executed in a plurality of fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times, in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is relatively long (here, the fluctuation time is 16s), the period during the stop operation is relatively long. A decorative symbol effect with a stop motion pattern (for example, stop motion long and / or stop motion middle) can be executed, and in the case of a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time (here, fluctuation time 13s), stop. It is a configuration that can execute a decorative pattern effect with a stop operation pattern (stop operation short) with the shortest operation period.

Note that the examples of FIGS. 47 and 48 show a case where the effect slump time (time width SRT in the figure) occurs on the side of the normal variation 16s, which has a long variation time, when the effect A is executed. In such a case, in view of the problems described in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b) (the problem that the execution period of the effect and the stop operation period of the symbol overlap, the problem of the effect slump, etc.), FIG. 47 ( As shown in a) (c) or FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (c), it is preferable to use "stop operation long" in the case of normal fluctuation 16s and "stop operation short" in the case of normal fluctuation 13s. It can be said that. In this way, even if the same effect is executed for the fluctuation patterns of different fluctuation times, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, the degree of freedom of production can be increased. It should be noted that FIG. 49 shows a summary of the decorative design effects shown in FIGS. 46, 47 and 48 for easy comparison.

(Other application example A: FIG. 50)
In FIG. 46 described above, a configuration capable of executing different stop operation patterns (stop operation short, stop operation middle, stop operation long) has been described depending on the type of effect to be executed and the presence or absence thereof. On the premise of the configuration shown in FIG. 46, it is preferable to use the configuration shown in FIG. 50 according to the type of effect to be executed and the presence or absence thereof.

With reference to FIG. 50, in this example, in the case of the first fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation time 13s) in which the fluctuation time is relatively long, the “stop operation pattern of type number A (for example,“ stop operation short ”” “ Of the decorative symbol effects with "stop motion middle" and "stop motion long"), any of the decorative symbol effects can be executed (see FIGS. 50 (a) to (c) and FIG. 46).
In the case of the second fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation time 4s) in which the fluctuation time is relatively short, "stop operation pattern of type number B less than type number A (for example," stop operation short "and" stop operation middle "). Of the decorative symbol effects accompanied by "two types of") ", an embodiment in which any of the decorative symbol effects can be executed is shown (see FIGS. 50 (d) and 50 (e)).

The number of types B may satisfy the relationship of "number of types B <number of types A", and it is free to adopt any of the stop operation short, the stop operation middle, and the stop operation long. However, in the case of the second variation pattern, it is preferable that the decorative symbol effect is executed excluding the stop operation pattern having the longest stop operation period among the decorative symbol effects executed in the first variation pattern. For example, in the case of normal fluctuation 13s, when any one of "stop operation short, stop operation middle, stop operation long" is executed, in the case of normal fluctuation 4s, "stop operation short, stop operation middle excluding stop operation long" is executed. It is a configuration that can execute any of. When the second fluctuation pattern is an "extremely short fluctuation pattern" such as "normal fluctuation 4s", the period during the stop operation is the shortest in order to give the player the feeling that the game is progressing at a good tempo. It is preferable to execute only the stop operation short of.

(Example in which the stop operation pattern differs depending on the production stage: FIG. 51)
Further, in FIG. 46 described above, even if the fluctuation patterns are the same, different stop operation patterns (stop operation short, stop operation middle, etc.) are different depending on the type of effect executed during the symbol variation and whether or not the effect is executed. The configuration that can execute the stop operation long) was explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and different stop operation patterns can be configured to be executable depending on the effect stage. This will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 51 shows a case where different stop operation patterns are executed depending on the effect stage even if the fluctuation patterns are the same.

FIG. 51 is a timing chart typically showing a decorative symbol effect related to the normal variation 13s, and shows a case where different stop operation patterns are executed according to the effect stage. FIG. 51 shows a stop operation pattern executed in the effect stages A to C. Specifically, FIG. 51 (a) shows a decorative symbol effect accompanied by a "stop operation short" when the effect stage A is set, and FIG. 51 (b) shows a decorative symbol accompanied by a "stop operation middle" when the effect stage B is used. The effect, FIG. 51 (c) shows a case where a decorative pattern effect accompanied by a “long stop operation” is executed in the case of the effect stage C.

First, in order to facilitate the understanding of this example, the outline of the "directing stage" will be described. The "production stage" is different from the production state ("normal production mode", "probability variation production mode", "time saving production mode", etc.) in which the transition is performed along with the transition of the game state managed by the main control unit 20 side. , It is an effect state in which the transition is controlled by the effect process on the effect control unit 24 side, and may continue over one or a plurality of games. Therefore, even if the effect stage is changed, the game state itself managed by the main control unit 20 is not changed, and the selection target of the variation pattern is the same. That is, the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is not updated, and the "variation pattern distribution table" referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is not changed. For example, when the current game state is the "normal mode (normal state)", even if the effect stages are different (in the case of this example, the effect stages A to C), the variable pattern distribution table may be shown in FIG. 31 or The fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern distribution table of FIG. 32 during normal operation.

However, it is possible to display the effects related to each of the effect stages A to C by the effect control on the effect control unit 24 side. For example, even if the change is made from "effect stage A to effect stage B", the selection target of the variation pattern is the same and the exact same variation pattern can be selected, but different effects can be executed depending on the effect stage. Is. For example, when the normal variation 13s is selected, the effect stage A executes the “effect A”, but the effect stage B executes another effect (for example, the effect B) without executing the “effect A”. Is. In this example, the effect patterns A to C are all the same in the variation pattern to be selected (the point that the exact same variation pattern can be selected), and the effect can be executed according to each effect stage. Focusing on this, we are trying to increase the degree of freedom and variation of the production by making the stop operation pattern of the decorative design different according to the production stage.

A typical production stage is, for example, a "customization function" that allows a player to switch to a desired production stage by operating an operation means (effect button 13 or direction key 75) while waiting for a customer. is there. For example, when the current gaming state is the "normal state", the normal production modes are "normal mode (production stage A)", "simple mode (production stage B)", and "premium mode (production stage C)". This is a function that allows one of three types of production stages (player-selectable production stages) to be selected. What should not be confused is that these effect stages are in the effect state under the same variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), and the player can freely switch the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) itself. It's not a thing. Therefore, depending on the difference between normal, simple, and premium modes, some or all of the effects that appear may differ, but the selection target of the variation pattern of the special symbol does not change internally.

For example, "normal mode" is the default effect state, and "simple mode" is an effect state in which the appearance rate of a specific notice effect is lower than that of the normal mode or does not appear at all (specific notice effect appearance rate). Change mode). In the "simple mode", for example, the appearance rate at the time of losing a specific high expectation notice effect (for example, the winning expectation of 30% in the normal mode) with a relatively high winning expectation is lower than that in the normal mode. , When the specific high expectation notice appears, the winning expectation is greatly increased, and the appearance rate of the player participation type production is lower than that in the normal mode. Also, in the "premium mode", the appearance rate of winning productions (for example, productions with a winning expectation of 90% or a big hit winning confirmation) is higher than in normal mode and simple mode, and one or more types of specific low The appearance rate of the expectation notice is low (including 0%). Therefore, even if the fluctuation pattern is the same, the type of effect (preliminary effect, non-advanced effect, pre-reading notice during change, setting suggestion effect, etc.) to be executed during the symbol change and whether or not the effect is executed according to the effect stage , It is possible to make different types of pending change notices and whether or not they are executed.

In addition, in each of the normal, simple, and premium production stages, a unique background display corresponding to each production stage appears in order to be able to identify which stage is being performed. For example, "normal mode (directing stage A)" has a background image reminiscent of "morning", "simple mode" has a background image reminiscent of "day", and "premium mode" has a background image reminiscent of "night". is there. For example, if the current state is normal, the background display of the base will be the seasonal "spring" background display in the normal production mode, and "spring morning background" and "spring daytime background" will be displayed according to each production stage of normal, simple, and premium. , It is changed to the background display expressing "spring night background".

Further, the production stage may be configured so that the transition (change) can be controlled by the above-mentioned customization function, or a plurality of types of production stages may be configured to be transition controllable by another transition trigger (change trigger). .. For example, a specific symbol variation display game may be executed. Specifically, after a predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, after a big hit game, after turning on the power, or after clearing the RAM (including setting change)), a predetermined number of symbol variation display games and a predetermined number of symbols For example, every time a variable display game is executed. In this case, it may be decided whether or not to shift to the production stage by a predetermined lottery. Further, a predetermined transition lottery may be executed for each symbol variation display game, and the production stage may be shifted when the game is won. Further, the production stage may be shifted when a specific production is executed. For example, when a stage change effect is executed, a specific reach effect (for example, a high-expectation reach effect (developed SPSP reach or a direct hit type SPSP reach, etc.)) causes a loss. In addition, the production stage of the transition destination may be shifted according to a predetermined order, or may be determined by a predetermined lottery. Regarding the transition opportunity of the production stage, one or more conditions are adopted, and when the transition opportunity arrives (when the transition stage transition condition is satisfied), the transition from one production stage to another production stage is performed. Can be (changed). Such shift control of the effect stage is performed by an effect process (effect stage transition means) independently performed by the effect control unit 24 side.

FIG. 51 shows an example in which the stop operation pattern differs depending on the effect stage even if the fluctuation pattern is the same, but when the stop operation pattern is determined according to the effect stage, it differs depending on the effect stage. It is preferable to determine the stop operation pattern by paying attention to the point that the effect can be executed. Here, in order to simplify the explanation, typically, “Direction A, Production B, Production C (Relationship of production time =“ Production C <Production B <Production A ”)” described with reference to FIG. This will be explained using three types of effects. For example, in the production stage A, "production A (long production time)" is likely to be executed, in the production stage B, "production B (medium production time)" is likely to be executed, and in the production stage C, "production C (production time)" is easily executed. If there is a relationship between the production stages that "is short)" is easy to be executed (neither the production A nor the production B is executed), in short, the production A, the production B, and the production C depend on the production stage. The execution probabilities (including zero) are different from each other, and for example, there is a case where one or a plurality of effects having a relatively long effect time are easily executed in the order of effect stages A, B, and C. In such a case, it is preferable to determine the stop operation pattern according to the effect mode (effect time of the effect that is easy to be executed) that is easily executed under each effect stage. In this case, it is preferable that the stop operation is short in the case of the effect stage A, the stop operation is middle in the case of the effect stage B, and the stop operation is long in the case of the effect stage C (FIG. 53, which will be described later). The same applies to the reach stop operation of.

The stop operation pattern may be fixed according to the effect stage, but the stop operation pattern may be variable according to the effect stage. For example, the execution probability of each stop operation pattern may be different depending on the effect stage. Specifically, when determining the decorative pattern effect (variable pattern of the decorative pattern), one of stop operation short, stop operation middle, and stop operation long is determined according to a predetermined selection rate according to the current effect stage. To do. For example, the selection rate of "stop operation short, stop operation middle, stop operation long" is "60%, 30%, 10%" in the case of production stage A, and "20%, 50%" in the case of production stage B. "30%", in the case of production stage C, "10%, 30%, 60%" and the like.

Further, although the stop operation pattern related to the effect stage has been described above, different stop operation patterns may be executed depending on the effect mode. For example, regarding the probabilistic mode, the relationship of the average digestion time (game digestion speed) related to the probabilistic mode is "probability change mode 3 (low speed fluctuation state) <probability change mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) <probability change mode 1 (high speed fluctuation state)". Is. Therefore, the near-death mode 1 (high-speed fluctuation state) should be set to "stop operation short", the near-death mode 2 (medium-speed fluctuation state) should be set to "stop operation middle", and the near-death mode 3 (low-speed fluctuation state) should be set to "stop operation long". Can be done. The same applies to the time saving mode. The relationship between the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game related to the time saving mode is "time saving mode 1 (low speed fluctuation state) <time saving mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) <time saving mode 3 (high speed fluctuation state)". Therefore, the time saving mode 3 (high speed fluctuation state) can be set to the stop operation short, the time saving mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) can be set to the stop operation middle, and the time saving mode 1 (low speed fluctuation state) can be set to the "stop operation long". Further, as for the effect mode, as in the case of the effect stage described above, the stop operation pattern may be fixed according to the effect mode, or the stop operation pattern may be variable according to the effect mode. (The execution probability of each stop operation pattern may be different depending on the effect mode). In this case as well, as in the case of the above-mentioned effect stage, when determining the decorative pattern effect (decorative pattern variation pattern), either stop operation short, stop operation middle, or stop operation long is performed according to the current effect mode. Can be determined according to a predetermined selectivity. For example, the selection rate of "stop operation short, stop operation middle, stop operation long" is "60%, 30%, 10%" in the case of probabilistic mode 3 or time saving mode 1, and in the case of probabilistic mode 2 or time saving mode 2. Is "20%, 50%, 30%", and in the case of the near-death mode 1 or the time saving mode 3, "10%, 30%, 60%" and the like.

(About the stop operation pattern in reach fluctuation: Fig. 52)
In FIGS. 44 to 51, the stop operation pattern of the decorative symbol has been described mainly focusing on the normal fluctuation pattern. In the following, the stop operation pattern of the decorative symbol in the reach variation will be described.

FIG. 52 shows an example in which, in the same reach variation, the stop operation pattern of the decorative symbol before the reach state is formed differs depending on the type of effect executed during the symbol variation and whether or not the effect is executed. It is a timing chart. However, since the stop operation pattern dealt with here is a stop operation pattern related to the reach variation, it is a stop operation pattern focusing on "a stop operation pattern of a symbol other than the last stopped symbol". That is, the stop operation pattern of the left symbol and the right symbol (reach configuration symbol) forming the reach state (tempai state) is dealt with. Hereinafter, unless otherwise required, the stop operation pattern of the symbol used when forming the reach state is referred to as a "reach stop operation pattern". Regarding the reach stop operation patterns, the reach stop operation patterns corresponding to the stop operation short, the stop operation middle, and the stop operation long are referred to as "reach stop operation short", "reach stop operation middle", and "reach stop operation long", respectively. ..

FIG. 52 shows an example in which each reach stop operation pattern (stop operation short, stop operation middle, stop operation long) is executed in a predetermined variation display of a predetermined variation time (variation display of a decorative symbol related to a specific reach variation). Is shown. Specifically, it is a timing chart showing a part of the decorative symbol effect related to a specific reach variation, and shows a case where different reach stop operation patterns are executed according to the type of effect executed during the symbol variation. It is a thing. FIG. 52 (a) shows a case where "effect D" is executed, FIG. 52 (b) shows a case where "effect E" is executed, and FIG. 52 (c) shows either effect D or effect E. Also indicates a case where it is not executed (when another effect is executed).

In addition, "Direction D", "Direction E", and "Direction F" in the figure have different production contents, and the execution time (production time) of the production is also different. .. The relationship between the length of the production time is "Production D> Production E> Production F". To put it simply, the relationship between the production D and the production F corresponds to the relationship between the production A and the production C in FIG. 46. Further, as an example of a specific reach variation, a variation pattern belonging to "reach variation specified by SP reach" (in the figure, it is expressed as "reach variation A" for simplicity of explanation) is shown. .. The specific reach variation may be another reach variation (N reach, advanced SPSP reach, direct SPSP reach, etc.), or may be one or more types of reach variation.

First, an outline of a series of effects during change (variation pattern of decorative symbol + notice effect scenario) due to reach variation A shown in FIG. 52 will be described. A predetermined effect (effects D to E in FIG. 52) is executed during the high-speed fluctuation period, and after the left symbol and the right symbol perform a predetermined stop operation, a reach (tempai) state is formed (time t (variation)). Elapsed time from the start) = 15 seconds). At this time, the "tempai effect" for notifying the reach is executed (t = 15 seconds to 16.5 seconds). The content and production time of this tempai production differ depending on the reach type, and since an example of SP reach type reach is explained here, for example, a title notice related to this SP reach and an SP that fuels SP reach development A fanning effect is performed. Then, after finishing the tempai effect, a predetermined SP reach effect (16.5 seconds or later (not shown)) corresponding to the reach variation A is executed, and when the variation time ends, a predetermined stop according to the game result is executed. All decorative symbols are confirmed and displayed in the display mode.

As shown in FIGS. 52 (a) to 52 (c), when the effect D is executed, the “reach stop operation short” is executed, and when the effect E is executed, the “reach stop operation middle”, the effect D and the effect. When E is not executed (in this example, it is assumed that the effect F is executed), the "reach stop operation long" is executed. As described above, the reason for executing the different reach stop operation patterns according to the type of the effect to be executed is basically the same as the content already described with reference to FIG.

That is, as shown in FIG. 52A, when the effect D having a relatively long execution time is executed, the effect D may end immediately before the reach. In this example, the case where the effect D ends at 14.5 seconds is illustrated. In this case, if the reach state is notified at substantially the same timing as the end of the production D, the player can enjoy the game while expecting a high-expectation reach such as SP reach without feeling the production slump. .. In particular, in the reach stop operation short, when the reach state is formed, the "left and right simultaneous tempai" in which the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped (temporarily stopped) at substantially the same timing is executed. This left and right simultaneous tempai has a stronger impact than the "left and right extraordinary tempai" in which the left and right symbols stop in sequence to form a reach state, and is also used as a warning effect suggesting that the winning expectation is high.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 52B, when the effect E having a relatively short execution time is executed, there is a certain amount of margin time (about 1 to 2 seconds) than the reach timing (tempai timing). There are cases where it ends. In this example, the case where the effect E ends at 13 seconds is illustrated. In this case, the end timing of the effect E ends about 2 seconds before the tempai timing, and a “effect slump” of 2 seconds can occur (time width SRT in the figure). In particular, in the high-expectation reach production of the SP reach system, the advance notice production with a higher expectation of winning than in the case of normal fluctuation is executed with a high probability by the tempai timing, and therefore, the game "will take reach". In many cases, the expectation of winning a person is fueled. Under such circumstances, if the "near-death stop operation short" shown in FIG. 52 (a) is used, the period (effect slump time) for which the temporary stop state of all the symbols continues will be long. As a result, the player may feel that there is a waiting time until the start of the tempai production, which may cause stress.

Therefore, it is preferable to fill the effect slump time by using the stop operation mode (effect during stop operation) of "reach stop operation middle" or "reach stop operation long" for which the period during stop operation is relatively long. In this embodiment, in order to avoid overlapping the execution period of the effect E and the stop operation period of the symbol, the “reach stop operation middle” is used as shown in the figure. In the case of this example, the stop operation of the decorative symbols is started at substantially the same timing as the end of the effect E, and during the effect slump time SRT, each symbol forms a reach state while sequentially stopping at a good tempo, so that all the symbols The number of states in which the temporary stop state of the game continues for a while is reduced, and the player is less likely to feel stress.

The case of FIG. 52C illustrates a case in which the effect F is executed with a shorter effect time than the effect D and the effect E as a case in which the effect D and the effect E are not executed. In this case, in consideration of the problems described in FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b) (the problem that the execution period of the effect and the stop operation period of the symbol overlap, the problem of the effect slump, etc.), the "stop operation long" is set. It is preferable to use it. In the reach stop operation long, the period during the stop operation is longer than that in the reach stop operation middle, so that the high-speed fluctuation period is shorter. Therefore, it is preferable to use the reach stop operation long in the case of executing "effect F" which is less than the execution time of effect E.

In addition, as can be seen from the illustration, the characteristic point of this example is that the tempai timings of the reach stop operation short, the reach stop operation middle, and the reach stop operation long are the same (substantially the same) timing. (The same applies to FIG. 53 described later). Here, the end of the stop operation period (at the end of the slowdown display) of the second stopped symbol (right symbol) is the tempai timing (t = 15 seconds) (in FIG. (A), the left and right simultaneous tempais are used. There are left and right symbols that stop first). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any timing during the above-mentioned "pause period (not shown)" may be used as the tempai timing. For example, at the end of the stop operation period (at the start of the pause period), at the end of the pause period (at the time of a temporary stop of the second stopped symbol (right symbol)), and the like (the same applies to FIG. 53 described later). ).

In this example, even if the reach variation is the same, the reach stop operation pattern can be different depending on the type (effect time) of the effect executed before the reach. Further, even if the execution time of the effect executed before the reach is different, the tempai timing can be set to the same timing in each reach stop operation pattern. This makes it possible to handle many pre-reach productions with one reach variation, and it is easy to adjust the production width of post-reach productions (tempai production, reach production, etc.), old model and new model. It can greatly contribute to the improvement of design compatibility between the two, excellent convenience, reduction of the control load, improvement of the degree of freedom of production, or improvement of production variation.

When the reach effect is executed, a high-expectation notice effect (including a look-ahead notice) and a low-expectation notice effect (including a look-ahead notice) can be executed according to the winning expectation. Therefore, the reach stop operation pattern can be different depending on whether the high-expectation notice effect is executed or the low-expectation notice effect is executed. When a high-expectation notice effect is executed, the liveliness and agitation of the effect become stronger (for example, multiple notice effects occur in combination, and the execution time of the notice effect often becomes long. ), For example, perform a decorative symbol effect with a reach stop motion pattern other than at least a reach stop motion long (for example, apply a reach stop motion middle or a reach stop motion short). On the other hand, when the low-expectation notice effect is executed, paying attention to the fact that the liveliness and the degree of fanning of the effect are relatively weaker than when the above-mentioned high-expectation notice effect is executed, at least the reach is stopped. Execute a decorative symbol effect (for example, apply a reach stop operation middle or a reach stop operation long) with a stop operation pattern other than the operation short. Of course, it is up to you what kind of reach stop operation pattern to apply according to the degree of expectation of winning the notice effect. In any case, the reach stop operation pattern can be different depending on the winning expectation of the notice effect to be executed.

(Example in which the reach stop operation pattern differs depending on the production stage: FIG. 53)
In FIG. 52 described above, a configuration has been described in which different reach stop operation patterns can be executed depending on the type of effect executed during the symbol variation and whether or not the effect is executed even if the reach variation is the same. Here, a configuration example capable of executing different reach stop operation patterns according to the effect stage will be described.

FIG. 53 shows a case where different reach stop operation patterns are executed depending on the effect stage even if the reach variation is the same. FIG. 53 (a) shows a decorative symbol effect accompanied by a “reach stop operation short” when the effect stage A is displayed, and FIG. 53 (c) shows a case where a decorative symbol effect accompanied by a “long reach stop operation” is executed in the case of the effect stage C. The production stages A to C in FIG. 53 are the same as the production stages A to C in FIG. 51.

As shown in the figure, the characteristic point of this example is that even if the reach fluctuation is the same, the reach stop operation pattern differs depending on the production stage, but the tempai timing of each stop operation pattern is the same (substantially the same) timing. (Refer to the time point when the elapsed time from the start of fluctuation = 15 seconds). This "tempai timing is the same regardless of the reach stop operation pattern" is the same as the example described in FIG. 52.

The difference between FIG. 53 and FIG. 52 is that the reach stop operation pattern differs depending on the effect stage, and other contents (matters related to the tempai effect, etc.) are substantially the same. In this example, even if the reach variation is the same, the reach stop operation pattern can be different depending on the production stage. Further, the tempai timing of each reach stop operation pattern can be set to the same timing regardless of the production stage. As a result, it is possible to greatly contribute to the improvement of the degree of freedom of the production related to the production stage and the improvement of the production variation.

(Modification example of stop operation pattern: FIGS. 54 to 57)
In the above embodiment, the stop operation pattern shown in FIG. 45 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop operation pattern shown in FIGS. 54 to 57 may be adopted. In FIGS. 54 to 57, the maximum stop operation period of the stop operation pattern (the period from when the first stopped symbol starts the stop operation until the last stopped symbol stops and is confirmed and displayed), that is, , Left stop operation period It is divided as follows according to the time width of LST.
(Τ1) Stop operation short: 0 ≤ LST <2 seconds (τ2) Stop operation middle: 2 seconds ≤ LST <4 seconds (τ3) Stop operation long: 4 seconds ≤ LST

In the present embodiment, the stop operation pattern types are classified as described in (τ1) to (τ3) above, but when there are a plurality of stop operation pattern types belonging to the same stop operation pattern type, for example, the stop operation middle type is used. If there is a first stop operation middle and a second stop operation middle to which it belongs, the one with a relatively short left stop operation period LST is treated as a "stop operation short", and the left stop operation period LST is relatively. The longer one can be treated as "stop operation middle". Specifically, in the stop operation middle B (LST = 3.0s) of FIG. 54, the stop operation middle D (LST = 3.5s) of FIG. 55, and the stop operation middle E (LST = 2.5s) of FIG. 56. If so, the stop operation middle E can be treated as a "stop operation short", the stop operation middle D can be treated as a "stop operation middle", and the stop operation middle B can be treated as a "stop operation long".

Hereinafter, each stop operation pattern shown in FIGS. 54 to 57 will be described.

In the stop operation short B shown in FIG. 54 (a), the stop operation period of each symbol is zero (LMT = RMT = CMT = 0 (substantially zero)), there is no low-speed fluctuation period, and the high-speed fluctuation period ends. Immediately after that, each symbol is temporarily stopped. Therefore, it seems that the three decorative symbols are suddenly stopped and displayed at substantially the same time after the three decorative symbols fluctuate at high speed for a while. For example, "Don! (Temporary stop of all symbols)". In particular, this stop operation short B has a shorter stop operation period than other stop operation patterns (stop operation patterns shown in FIGS. 45, 54 (b) (c) and 55 to 41, which will be described later) (this). In the example, it ends in LST = 0.5 seconds), and when applied to the same fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), the biggest feature is that the longest high-speed fluctuation period can be created among all operation patterns. is there. Such a stop operation pattern is preferably used for an effect having a relatively long effect time (for example, an effect having a longer effect time than the effect A in FIG. 46 and the effect D in FIG. 52). In addition, since the stop operation period is extremely short, when starting the next game at a good tempo in a short time, for example, a game state (time saving state, which is accompanied by an electric support state in which an operation holding ball is likely to occur in a short time). It is preferable to use it for the normal fluctuation pattern of the probabilistic state).

The stop operation middle B and the stop operation middle C shown in FIGS. 54 (b) and 54 (c) differ in the stop operation of the middle symbol in the stop operation middle shown in FIG. 45, and the middle symbol stops quickly (short stop of the final stop symbol). It is characterized by (performing operations). The point that the middle symbol performs this "short stop operation of the final stop symbol" is the same as the stop operation long shown in FIG. 45. Therefore, it is suitable for starting the next game at a good tempo (when there is at least one operation hold ball) in a situation where a loss is known, such as "non-tempo time (non-reach time)". is there.

The stop operation middle D shown in FIG. 55 (a) and the stop operation long B shown in FIG. 55 (b) are characterized in that the period during the stop operation of each symbol is different (in this example, "left stop". Operating period LMT> Right stop Operating period RMT> Medium stop Operating period CMT "). In these stop motion patterns, it seems that after the left symbol enters the stop motion, the right symbol and the middle symbol are sequentially stopped with good rhythm. For example, "Ta-n ♪ (temporary stop of the left symbol)-> Tan ♪ (temporary stop of the right symbol)-> Tan! (Temporary stop of the middle symbol)". Further, the stop operation middle D or the stop operation long B starts the next game at a good tempo in a situation where a loss such as "non-tempo time (non-reach time)" is known, as in the stop operation long in FIG. It is suitable for making.

As shown in the figure, the stop operation middle E and the stop operation middle F shown in FIGS. 56 (a) and 56 (b) are characterized in that "left and right simultaneous stop" is possible. In the case of the stop operation middle E, the middle symbol starts the stop operation while the left and right symbols are in the stop operation. Therefore, in terms of production, the left symbol and the right symbol appear on the screen at the same time, and the middle symbol seems to stop in the middle. On the other hand, in the case of the stop operation middle F, the middle symbol seems to stop slowly at the timing when the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped at the same time. For example, "Tan ♪ (temporary stop on the left and right) → Ta-n ♪ (temporary stop on the right design)". Since the stop operation middle E and the stop operation middle F perform a near-death temporary stop on the left and right, in addition to the case of stopping a lost eye (for example, a loose eye), the reach stop operation of FIGS. 52 (a) and 53 (a). It is suitable for forming a reach state by using it for a reach stop operation pattern such as a short circuit.

As shown in the figure, the stop operation middle E and the stop operation middle F shown in FIGS. 56 (a) and 56 (b) are characterized in that "left and right simultaneous stop" is possible. In the case of the stop operation middle E, the middle symbol starts the stop operation while the left and right symbols are in the stop operation. Therefore, in terms of production, the left symbol and the right symbol appear on the screen at the same time, and the middle symbol seems to stop in the middle. On the other hand, in the case of the stop operation middle F, the middle symbol starts the stop operation at substantially the same timing as the timing when the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped at the same time. Therefore, in terms of production, it seems that the middle symbol slowly stops at the timing when the left symbol and the right symbol temporarily stop at the same time. For example, "Tan ♪ (temporary stop on the left and right) → Ta-n ♪ (temporary stop on the right design)". Since the stop operation middle E and the stop operation middle F perform a near-death temporary stop on the left and right, in addition to the case of stopping a lost eye (for example, a loose eye), the reach stop operation of FIGS. 52 (a) and 53 (a). It is suitable for forming a reach state by using it for a reach stop operation pattern such as a short circuit.

Regarding each of the above-mentioned stop operation patterns, the relationship (period LMT, RMT, CMT, LPT, RPT, CPT, LST, RST, CST, etc.) when focusing on each period is as shown in FIGS. 54 to 57. Matters that can be derived from this (for example, the relationship between the length of the high-speed fluctuation period, the relationship between the length of the stop operation period, the relationship between the high and low transmittance, the relationship between the length of the stop operation period, etc.) are self-evident. It is included in the scope of the technical idea of the invention. Needless to say, any of the stop operation patterns shown in FIGS. 54 to 57 can be used as the reach stop operation pattern.

<Processing on the production control unit side: FIGS. 16 to 19>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19, the effect control process on the effect control unit 24 side of the present embodiment will be described. The processing on the effect control unit 24 side is mainly a predetermined main process (effect control side main process: FIG. 16) and a timer interrupt process activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC (effect control side timer interrupt process: It is mainly composed of FIG. 17).

<16. Production control side main processing: Fig. 16>
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a main process on the effect control unit side (main process on the effect control side). When the power is turned on from the outside to the gaming machine main body, the effect control unit 24 starts the main process on the effect control side shown in FIG.

In the main process on the effect control side, the effect control unit 24 (CPU241) first performs the necessary initial setting process before the start of the game operation (step S1001). Here, as the initial setting processing, for example, command reception interrupt setting, starting point return processing of the movable body accessory, CTC initial setting, timer interrupt permission, initial setting of the register value inside the CPU including each part of the microcomputer, etc. I do.

When the above initial setting process is completed, the main loop process of steps S1003 to S1012 is performed at predetermined time intervals (16 ms) as the process during normal operation, and the effect software random number update process of step S1013 is repeated otherwise.

In the process of step S1002, the CPU 241 refers to the main loop update counter and determines whether or not the main loop update cycle (counter value> 15) that triggers the execution of the main loop process has arrived (step S1002). The main loop update counter is a counter that is incremented during the effect control side timer interrupt process, which is executed every 1 ms (see step S1057 in FIG. 17). In the present embodiment, the main loop process is performed every about 16 ms. In the determination process of step S1002, the main loop update counter value is determined, and when the value is larger than "15" (step). S1002: YES), assuming that the execution timing of the main loop process has arrived, the processes of steps S1003 to S1011 are executed, and in other cases, the decorative symbol is executed until the main loop update cycle is reached (step S1002: NO). The random numbers for various production lottery used for lottery such as advance notice production during the variable display game are updated (step S1012).

When the main loop update cycle has arrived (step S1002: YES), the main loop update counter is cleared to zero (step S1003), and then error processing is executed (step S1004). Here, the setting of the effect scenario for error notification during an error and the error cancellation process when the error is cleared are executed. In addition, errors related to the effect means (movable body accessory error, voice IC error, etc.) are monitored here.

Next, the demo / power saving mode process is executed (step S1005). In this demo / power saving mode process, the customer waiting effect (demo start waiting display), the customer waiting effect (demo display), and the setting process required for the power saving mode are executed.

Next, the effect switch input process is executed (step S1006). In this effect switch input process, the operation state of the operation means (effect button 13, direction key 75) is monitored, and when an operation is detected, the effect control process corresponding to the operation is executed. The input state of the operating means is monitored by the button input state update process (step S1052) in FIG. 17 described later.

Next, command analysis processing is performed (step S1007). In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer, and if the effect control command is stored, this command is read and the effect process corresponding to the read effect control command is executed. To do. When an interrupt based on the strobe signal from the main control unit 20 side occurs, a command reception interrupt process (not shown) is executed. By this command reception interrupt processing, the effect control command is acquired, and the data is stored in the command reception buffer of the RAM 243.

For example, when at least the variation pattern specification command is received and stored in the reception buffer (in the present embodiment, the variation pattern specification command and the decorative symbol specification command are received and stored in the reception buffer. In the case), in the command analysis process, one or a plurality of types of effect patterns are determined based on the information (variation pattern information and winning information (or winning type information)) included in the command. The production pattern determined here works as a "parts production" as an element constituting the production scenario. Next, a time schedule is determined as to when and how long the production time width should be used to display the above-determined production pattern (parts production), thereby constructing a production scenario. The production scenario data is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243. By developing various production patterns (parts production) incorporated in this production scenario one after another or at the same time, a "production scenario" in a broad sense is realized.

After completing the command analysis process, the scenario update process is then executed (step S1008). In this scenario update process, the contents of the timer required to execute the effect scenario are updated, and the process of advancing the effect scenario is executed based on the timer value. A typical timer is an effect scenario timer that manages a time schedule related to the occurrence timing of the effect. For example, within the fluctuation period (special symbol fluctuation period) in which the special symbol is variablely displayed, and within the fluctuation period (decorative symbol fluctuation period) in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, that time. This timer manages a temporal schedule of what kind of effect pattern is to appear on the axis, how much time width, and what kind of effect means. Such an effect scenario timer is also used in the LED drive data update process (step S1010) and the effect accessory operation update process (step S1053), which will be described later. Here, this effect scenario timer is monitored, and when a certain effect occurs, sound data for the speaker 46 and a liquid crystal command for image display control are created and stored in a designated area of the RAM 243. .. The LED data for the optical display device is created in the LED drive data update process (step S1010) described later, and the motor control data for the movable body accessory is created in the effect accessory operation update process (step S1053) described later. To.

Next, sound output processing is performed (step S1009). In this sound output process, the sound data created in the scenario update process of step S1009 is acquired, and if there is sound data to be reproduced, a phrase, volume, etc. are created based on the sound data set for each sound channel. The data is output to the sound control unit (sound source LSI), and the sound effect is displayed from the speaker 46 through the sound control unit. As a result, the sound production according to the production scenario is realized.

Next, the LED drive data update process is executed (step S1010). In this LED drive data update process, LED data for an optical display device such as a decorative lamp 13 and various effect LEDs is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer.

Next, the LED output process is executed (step S1011). In this LED output process, the LED data created by the LED drive data update process is output to the light display control unit, and the light emitting means such as the decorative lamp unit 45 and the effect LED is lit and blinked through the light display control unit. As a result, a light effect that matches the effect scenario is realized.

As described above, when the main loop process is completed, the effect software random number update process of step S1013 is performed until the next main loop update cycle arrives.

<17. Effect control side timer interrupt processing: Fig. 17>
Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the timer interrupt processing on the effect control side will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the effect control side timer interrupt process. This effect control side timer interrupt process is activated by an interrupt from the CTC at regular time intervals (1 ms), and is interrupted and executed during the effect control side main process execution.

In FIG. 17, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 saves the contents of the register in the stack area (step S1051) and then executes the button input state update process (step S1052). In this button input state update process, when the input state of the operation detection signal from the operation means (effect button 13, direction key 75) is monitored and it is confirmed that the operation detection signal has been received, the detection information is set to the predetermined value of the RAM 243. Store in the area. This operation detection information is used in the scenario update process (step S1009) of FIG. 16 when displaying information related to a player participation type effect, a menu screen, or a menu item. In the present embodiment, it is possible to detect a single press, a long press, a continuous hit, and the like.

Next, the effect update operation update process is executed (step S1053). In this effect accessory operation update process, a process of creating motor control data for a movable accessory object is performed based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer.

Next, SOL / MOT output processing is performed (step S1054). In this SOL / MOT output process, the control data for the movable body accessory created by the effect accessory operation update process is output to the drive control unit. The drive control unit outputs a control signal based on the control data to the movable body accessory motor of the movable body accessory to be operated, and controls the operation. As a result, the movable body production by the movable body accessory (clock-shaped accessory 80, flower-shaped accessory 90, etc.) according to the effect scenario is realized.

Next, the liquid crystal command transmission process is performed (step S1055). In this liquid crystal command transmission process, if there is a liquid crystal command created in the scenario update process (step S1009) of FIG. 16, the liquid crystal command is transmitted to the display control unit (liquid crystal control CPU), and the image for the liquid crystal display device 36 is displayed. Execute display control. As a result, the image production according to the production scenario is realized.

Next, the RTC information acquisition process is executed (step S1056). In this RTC information acquisition process, date and time information (RTC information) timed by the RTC is acquired. This RTC information is used when displaying an effect based on the RTC information.

Then, the main loop update counter is incremented (step S1057). This main loop update counter is reset in step S1003 during the main processing on the effect control side described above, and is incremented in this processing. Therefore, when step S1057 is executed, the main loop update counter value is any of 0 to 15.

When the process of step S1057 is completed, the contents of the saved register are restored (step S1058), the timer interrupt process is terminated, and the effect control side main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<18. Contents of received command analysis processing: FIG. 18, FIG. 19>
18 and 19 show processes that are closely related to the present invention among the processes executed in the received command analysis process (step S1007 of FIG. 16). Hereinafter, the cases where the "hold addition command" and the "decorative symbol specification command" are received will be described.

(Hold addition command reception process: FIG. 18)
In FIG. 18, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) first executes a command reception confirmation process at the time of winning (step S2201). When the effect control unit 24 receives the winning command, it first analyzes the content of the winning command, acquires the look-ahead determination result information (pre-reading fluctuation pattern information, and stores the acquired information in the look-ahead information storage area of the RAM 243. The winning command reception process (not shown) to be stored is performed. Here, the reception confirmation processing for correctly receiving the winning command and confirming that the information has been acquired is performed. In the look-ahead information storage area. Similar to the hold storage area of the RAM 203 on the main control side, a look-ahead information storage area corresponding to each of the special figure 1 side and the special figure 2 side is provided. Further, these look-ahead information storage areas are operated. Hold 1 look-ahead information storage area to hold n look-ahead information storage area (n = 4 in this embodiment) corresponding to the number of hold balls are provided, and each of them can store look-ahead determination result information for the maximum number of hold balls. It has become.

Next, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead determination result information is read-ahead prohibited (step S2203). When the read-ahead prohibition period is set (step S2203: YES), the hold addition command reception process is exited without doing anything.

If the look-ahead is not prohibited (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2204, and it is determined whether or not the "continuous notice counter" is zero (step S2204). This "continuous notice counter" is a counter for determining a prohibition period for prohibiting the occurrence of duplicate pre-reading notice effects. Specifically, when the current operation hold ball is targeted for execution of the look-ahead notice effect by the look-ahead notice lottery in step S2205 described below, before the current action hold ball is used for the symbol variation display game. , It is a counter for preventing the newly generated operation holding ball from being the execution target of the look-ahead effect. For the reason described above, the "continuous notice counter" stores the current value of the number of pending balls N (see step S2208 described later).

If the continuous notice counter is not zero (step S2204: NO), it is assumed that the look-ahead notice lottery is prohibited, and the hold addition command reception process is exited without doing anything. When the value of the continuous notice counter is zero (step 2204: YES), it is assumed that the look-ahead notice lottery is permitted, and the look-ahead notice lottery process is performed (step S2205). This look-ahead effect lottery process performs a lottery as to whether or not to perform a look-ahead advance notice effect based on the look-ahead fluctuation pattern information specified by the winning command as a result of pre-reading the fluctuation pattern to be determined at the start of the fluctuation. It is a thing. The "winning command" and the "hold addition command" in the present embodiment are in the form of including information on each of the look-ahead variation pattern and the special symbol type. Therefore, this information is used for the look-ahead notice lottery.

There are two types of pre-reading notices according to this embodiment. One is mainly a pre-reading notice (pending change notice) of the winning time system that occurs when the game ball wins a prize at the starting opening and the starting condition is satisfied (that is, when the winning or the starting condition is satisfied). The other one is a look-ahead notice (pre-reading notice during change) of the symbol change middle system that occurs during the symbol change display game that is executed first in time series. Therefore, the pre-reading notice lottery includes a lottery as to whether or not to give a pending change notice and a lottery as to whether or not to give a pre-reading notice during fluctuation, and both are performed independently here.

In the pre-reading effect lottery process, the pre-reading notice is drawn by using the pre-reading variation pattern information specified by the winning command and the pre-reading effect lottery table (not shown) (step S2205), and the result of the pre-reading effect lottery is obtained. Based on the effect information (information about the look-ahead effect lottery result) is set (step 2206). This effect information is used when the pre-reading notice is displayed. The effect information set here includes (i) information for designating the hold change notice, for example, an effect scenario related to the hold change notice such as hold color and hold change timing specification information, and (ii) look-ahead notice during change. Information to be specified, for example, a production scenario related to a look-ahead notice during fluctuations such as a notice image type (thundercloud image, rain image, lightning bolt image) and execution count information, (iii) look-ahead effect lottery non-winning (loss) information (look-ahead notice) Information that is not executed) is included. In the case of this example, since the lottery for whether or not to give a notice of pending change and the lottery for whether or not to give a pre-reading notice during fluctuation are independently performed, only the pending change notice is executed. , Only the variable look-ahead notice may be executed, or both the pending change notice and the changing look-ahead notice may be executed, and both the pending change notice and the changing look-ahead notice may be executed. Has a higher expectation of winning than when the look-ahead notice is executed alone.

When the effect control unit 24 executes the look-ahead notice of (i) and (ii), the hold change notice and / or change based on the effect information (effect scenario related to the look-ahead notice) based on the result of the look-ahead effect lottery. The effect control process required for the middle notice is performed, and thereby, for example, the look-ahead notice shown in FIG. 5B is realized. On the other hand, in the case of the above-mentioned (iii) pre-reading effect lottery non-winning, the pre-reading notice is not executed, and the white hold of the normal hold display (normal hold display mode) is the corresponding hold display unit (a1 to d1 and a2 in FIG. 4). It will be displayed in ~ d2).

As a result of the pre-reading effect lottery process, when the pre-reading notice is executed, the value of the current number of pending balls is stored in the continuous notice counter (step S2208). As a result, the look-ahead notice lottery for new operation-holding balls is prohibited for a certain period of time. It should be noted that this counter value is subtracted by 1 each time the old operation holding ball generated earlier is digested in the decorative symbol designation command reception process of FIG. 19 described later (step S2306 described later). reference). By setting the value of the number of operating hold balls that exist when the pre-reading effect lottery is won as described above in the "continuous notice counter", a new operation hold is performed during the number of symbol fluctuations corresponding to the number of operation hold balls. Even if a ball is generated, the lottery for the pre-reading notice effect is prohibited (step S2204: route of NO). For example, when the current number of reserved balls is three, the look-ahead notice lottery is prohibited during the three symbol changes corresponding to the number of held balls, thereby preventing the occurrence of the look-ahead notice. The above-mentioned "continuous notice counter" can also be used as information regarding the pre-reading notice winning. In other words, if the "continuous notice counter" is zero, it is determined that the look-ahead notice has not been won (pre-reading notice not executed state), and if the value is other than zero, it is determined that the look-ahead notice has been won (pre-reading notice execution state). it can.

(Decorative pattern specification command reception process: Fig. 19)
With reference to FIG. 19, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) first executes the variation pattern designation command reception confirmation process (step S2301). When the effect control unit 24 receives the fluctuation pattern designation command, it first analyzes the content of the command, acquires fluctuation pattern information (variation pattern information at the start of fluctuation), and stores the acquired information in the look-ahead information storage area of the RAM 243. The variable pattern specification command reception process (not shown) to be stored in is performed. Here, it is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern specification command is correctly received and the information is acquired.

Next, the content of the decorative symbol designation command is analyzed, and symbol information regarding the special symbol type and the winning type (symbol lottery result) is acquired (step S2302).

Next, the production scenario type lottery is executed (step S2303). Here, based on the current production mode (or the current production stage if a production stage is provided) and the fluctuation pattern information, one of the multiple types of production scenarios will be selected for the production scenario during the current symbol change. Determined by. The production scenario includes various production scenarios related to the advance notice production to be executed during the current symbol change. When the production scenario is determined, the specific type of advance notice effect belonging to the determined advance notice effect type is further determined. For example, there are production scenarios A to C, production scenario A is a production scenario related to a step-up production type, production scenario B is a production scenario related to a player participation type production type, and production scenario C is related to a background change notice. In the case of a production scenario, it is assumed that the production scenario A is determined by the production scenario type lottery. Since this production scenario A is a production scenario related to a step-up effect type (for example, a step-up effect C that ends in one stage, a step-up effect B that develops to two stages, and a step-up effect A that develops to the final stage). , Which of the step-up effects A to C belonging to the step-up effect type is to be executed is determined by a predetermined advance notice effect type lottery. In these step-up effects A to C, the lottery probability is determined according to the fluctuation pattern, and the higher the expectation of winning the fluctuation pattern, the easier it is for the step-up effect C having a relatively high expectation of winning to be drawn. ing. Further, here, other effects (setting suggestion effect and non-notice effect) to be executed in association with the execution of the step-up effect are also determined.

Then, when a specific advance notice effect (here, any of step-up effects A to C) is determined, a variation pattern of the decorative pattern related to the current effect scenario is determined. The effect execution time of the step-up effects A to C is predetermined according to the content of the effect. For example, the step-up effect C for the first stage is 9 seconds, and the step-up effect B for the second stage is 10 seconds. The step-up effect A that develops to the final stage (3 stages) is set to 12 seconds. Therefore, when the step-up effect C (effect execution time is 9 seconds) is determined by this notice type lottery, the decorative symbol effect with a long stop operation is determined as the decorative symbol effect, and the step-up effect B (effect execution time is 9 seconds) When the effect execution time is determined (10 seconds), the decorative symbol effect accompanied by the stop operation middle is determined as the decorative symbol effect, and when the step-up effect A (effect execution time is 12 seconds) is determined, the effect is determined. As a decorative pattern effect, a decorative pattern effect accompanied by a short stop operation is determined. As a result, the decorative design effect shown in FIGS. 46 to 53 is realized. More specifically, when the variation pattern this time is the normal variation 13s, the decorative pattern effect as shown in FIG. 46 is realized.

Regarding another example (FIGS. 47 to 53), when the variation pattern this time is the normal variation 16s and the step-up effect A is determined and the stop operation long is determined, it is shown in FIG. 47. It is possible to realize such a decorative pattern production. Further, when the fluctuation pattern this time is the normal fluctuation 16s and the step-up effect A is determined, the stop operation long or the stop operation middle can be selected, and in the case of the normal fluctuation 13s, the stop operation short can be selected. For example, it is possible to realize a decorative pattern effect as shown in FIG. 48. Further, if the stop operation pattern can be selected according to the step-up effects A to C for the normal fluctuation 16s, the normal fluctuation 13s, and the normal fluctuation 4s, a decorative design effect as shown in FIGS. 49 to 50 can be realized. can do. Further, if the stop operation pattern can be selected according to the effect stages A to C, the decorative pattern effect as shown in FIG. 51 can be realized. Further, when the variation pattern this time is the reach variation, the decorative pattern effect as shown in FIGS. 52 to 53 can be realized according to the type of the effect to be executed and the current effect stage.

Next, a decorative symbol stop symbol lottery process is performed (step S2304). In this decorative symbol stop symbol lottery process, a temporary stop symbol and a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol (combination of decorative symbol stop symbols) to be finally stopped are determined by lottery based on the production scenario and the symbol information. For example, if the content of the fluctuation pattern is a hit fluctuation pattern specified by the reach effect and the winning type information is a 10R probability variation jackpot, the left symbol is first determined by lottery in order to determine the combination of decorative symbols related to the jackpot. Then, the decorative symbol that can form the reach state with the left symbol is determined as the right symbol, and the decorative symbol sequence related to the 10R probability variation jackpot is finally stopped based on the determined left symbol and right symbol. Determine the middle design as follows. Further, if the fluctuation pattern is a normal fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation 13s), the combination of decorative symbols to be finally stopped is determined so that the lost stitch is stopped and displayed. As a result, the combination of the decorative symbols when the current decorative symbol variation display game is completed is determined, and a series of variable effects (preliminary effect scenario, decorative symbol effect scenario (decorative symbol variation pattern) to be executed during the current symbol variation are determined. Production scenario)) is decided. Then, the scenario data regarding the determined changing effect is set (step S2305).

Next, the continuous advance notice effect management process is executed (step S2306). Here, the effect processing related to the pre-reading notice during fluctuation is performed. For example, the effect processing required for executing the variable look-ahead notice is performed, such as subtraction of the continuous notice counter due to the execution of this game and display processing of the notice image related to the variable look-ahead notice.

Then, when the continuous advance notice effect management process in step S2306 is completed, various setting processes (step S2307) at the start of the decorative symbol variation are performed to exit the decorative symbol designation command reception process. After that, a decorative pattern variation display game based on the above-mentioned production scenario will be started.

The following configuration examples 1B to 8B can be summarized as preferable embodiments of the decorative symbol effect (stopping operation pattern of the decorative symbol) described above.

[Configuration Example 1B]
(1) A symbol display that variablely displays a plurality of symbols (for example, a plurality of decorative symbols such as a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol: FIGS. 5A and 5B) according to the lottery result of whether or not to generate a profit state. Means (liquid crystal display device 36) and
In a gaming machine provided with an effect executing means (effect control unit 24) capable of executing an effect while the symbol is changed by the symbol display means.
In the predetermined variation display of the predetermined variation time (for example, the variation display of the decorative symbol according to the normal variation 13s in FIG. 46),
The first variation display in which the stop operation period from the time when at least one symbol first starts the stop operation to the stop of all the symbols is the first period (for example, the variation display for executing the stop operation short: FIG. 45 (a). ), FIG. 46 (a)), or a second variation display in which the stop operation period is a second period longer than the first period (for example, a variation display for executing the stop operation middle: FIG. 45 (b), FIG. 46 (b)) may be executed,
The effect includes a first effect that ends at the first end timing during the predetermined fluctuation time, and a second effect that ends at a second end timing that is later than the first end timing (for example, FIG. 46). The difference between the end timing of production A and the end timing of production B),
When the first effect is executed, the first variation display is executed (FIG. 46 (a)).
When the second effect is executed, the second variation display is executed (FIG. 46 (b)).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
(2) In this configuration example 1, the first effect is terminated before at least the first stop symbol in the first variation display starts the stop operation (for example, the effect A shown in FIG. 46 (a)). ,
The second effect is characterized in that at least the first stop symbol in the second variation display is terminated before the stop operation is started (for example, effect B shown in FIG. 46 (b)).
(3) Further, in the above (1) or (2) of the configuration example 1, in the fluctuation display of the predetermined fluctuation time, the third fluctuation display in which the stop operation period is a third period longer than the second period (3) For example, the variable display for executing the stop operation long: FIGS. 45 (c) and 46 (c) may be executed, and neither the first effect nor the second effect is executed (for example, FIG. When the effect C of 46 is executed), the third variation display can be executed.

[Configuration Example 2B]
A symbol display means that fluctuates and displays a plurality of symbols according to the lottery result of whether or not to generate a profit state,
In a gaming machine provided with an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect while the symbol is changed by the symbol display means.
For the symbol variation display,
The first variation display in which the stop operation period from the time when at least one symbol first starts the stop operation to the stop of all the symbols is the first period (for example, the variation display for executing the stop operation short: FIG. 47 (c). ))When,
A second variation display (for example, a variation display for executing the stop operation middle: FIG. 47 (b)), which is a second period in which the stop operation period is longer than the first period,
There is a third variation display (for example, a variation display for executing a long stop operation: FIG. 47 (a)), which is a third period in which the stop operation period is longer than the second period.
When the predetermined effect is executed when the fluctuation time is the first fluctuation time, the first fluctuation display is executed (for example, when the fluctuation time is 13s, the stop operation short: FIG. 47 (c)).
When the predetermined effect is executed when the fluctuation time is the second fluctuation time longer than the first fluctuation time, the third fluctuation display is executed (for example, when the fluctuation time is 16s, the stop operation is long: FIG. 47 (Fig. 47). a)), a gaming machine characterized by the above.

[Configuration Example 3B]
(1) A symbol display means for variablely displaying a plurality of symbols according to the lottery result of whether or not to generate a profit state, and
An effect executing means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects while the symbol is changed by the symbol display means,
In a gaming machine equipped with
For the symbol variation display,
There is a first predetermined fluctuation display of the first fluctuation time (for example, normal fluctuation 13s) and a second predetermined fluctuation display (for example, normal fluctuation 4s) whose fluctuation time is shorter than the first fluctuation time.
In the first predetermined variation display, among a plurality of types of variation displays in which the stop operation period from the first start of the stop operation of at least one symbol to the stop of all the symbols differs depending on the effect to be executed. (For example, FIGS. 50A to 50C), and the variation display of any of the above is executed.
In the second predetermined variation display, of the plurality of types of variation display, the variation display of a smaller number of types than the number of types of the variation display in which the first predetermined variation display can be executed is executed (for example, FIG. 50 (d)). (E)), a gaming machine characterized by this.
(2) In the third configuration example 3, in the second predetermined variation display, one specific variation display among the plurality of types of variation displays in which the first predetermined variation display can be executed can be executed (for example). , Only the variable display with a stop operation short is executed: FIG. 50 (d) :).

[Configuration Example 4B]
A symbol display means that fluctuates and displays a plurality of symbols according to the lottery result of whether or not to generate a profit state,
In a gaming machine provided with an effect executing means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects while the symbol is changed by the symbol display means.
For the symbol variation display,
There is a first predetermined fluctuation display of the first fluctuation time and a second predetermined fluctuation display in which the fluctuation time is shorter than the first fluctuation time.
In the first predetermined variation display, among a plurality of types of variation displays in which the stop operation period from the first start of the stop operation of at least one symbol to the stop of all the symbols differs depending on the effect to be executed. Execute one of the variable displays (for example, FIGS. 50 (a) to 50 (c)),
In the second predetermined variation display,
Among the fluctuation displays in which the first predetermined fluctuation display can be executed, the fluctuation display other than the fluctuation display of the longest stop operation period (for example, the fluctuation display of the stop operation (stop operation middle or stop operation short) other than the stop operation long). : A gaming machine characterized by executing FIGS. 50 (d) and 50 (e).

[Configuration Example 5B]
(1) A symbol display means for variablely displaying a plurality of symbols according to the lottery result of whether or not to generate a profit state, and
In a gaming machine provided with an effect executing means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects while the symbol is changed by the symbol display means.
In the predetermined fluctuation display of the predetermined fluctuation time,
Depending on the effect executed by the effect executing means, at least one of the plurality of symbols (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol) constituting the reach state first starts the stop operation, and then the plurality of symbols are used. One of a plurality of types of reach variation displays having different reach configuration operation periods until the reach state is configured is executed (for example, FIGS. 52 (a) to 52 (c)).
Regardless of which reach variation display is executed, the timing at which the reach state is reached (for example, the timing at which both the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped (temporarily stopped) to form the reach state: FIG. 52 (a). )-(C)) are substantially the same.
(2) Further, in the configuration example 5, the effect executing means can execute a specific effect (tempai effect) when the reach state is reached, and any of the plurality of types of reach variation display is executed. Even if there is, the specific effect can be executed (for example, the tempai effect after the reach of FIG. 52).

[Configuration Example 6B]
(1) A symbol display means for variablely displaying a plurality of symbols according to the lottery result of whether or not to generate a profit state, and
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect while the symbol is changed by the symbol display means,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The effect executing means can execute an effect corresponding to an effect stage set from a plurality of types of effect stages (for example, effect stages A to C: FIGS. 51 and 53).
In the predetermined fluctuation display of the predetermined fluctuation time,
Depending on the effect stage, the reach configuration operation period from when at least one symbol of the plurality of symbols constituting the reach state first starts the stop operation to when the reach state by the plurality of symbols is configured is different. Execute one of the multiple types of reach variation display,
Regardless of which reach variation display is executed, the timing at which the reach state is reached (for example, the timing at which both the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped (temporarily stopped) to form the reach state: FIG. 53 (a). ) To (c)) are substantially the same.
(2) In the configuration example 6, the effect executing means can execute a specific effect (tempai effect) when the reach state is reached, and any of the plurality of types of reach variation display is executed. Even if there is, the specific effect can be executed (for example, the tempai effect after the reach of FIG. 53).

[Configuration Example 7B]
(1) A symbol display means for displaying a plurality of symbols in a variable manner according to a lottery result as to whether or not to generate a profit state, temporarily stopping and then displaying a combination of symbols according to the lottery result, and then confirming a stop display.
In a gaming machine equipped with
The predetermined fluctuation display of the predetermined fluctuation time is
Let LMT (seconds) be the time during the first stop operation from the time when the symbol that is temporarily stopped first starts the stop operation to the time when the symbol is temporarily stopped.
The following relational expression (1) is satisfied when the time during the second stop operation from the time when the last temporarily stopped symbol starts the stop operation to the time when the symbol temporarily stops is CMT (seconds) (for example, FIG. 44 (a), FIG. 45 (c): Description of the relationship between the left stop operation period LMT of the stop operation long and the middle stop operation period CMT).
LMT> CMT (1)
(2) Further, in the configuration example 7, the symbol display means has a high-speed fluctuation display in which the symbol is displayed at the first transmittance and a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance as the variation display of the symbol. It is possible to execute the slow fluctuation display displayed in
In the predetermined fluctuation display of the predetermined fluctuation time, during the first stop operation, the second and subsequent temporarily stopped symbols are in the high-speed fluctuation display (for example, FIGS. 44 (a) and 45 (c): While the left symbol is in the stop operation, the right symbol and the middle symbol are described during high-speed fluctuation).

[Configuration Example 8B]
(1) A symbol display means for displaying a plurality of symbols in a variable manner according to a lottery result as to whether or not to generate a profit state, temporarily stopping and then displaying a combination of symbols according to the lottery result, and then confirming a stop display.
In a gaming machine equipped with
The predetermined fluctuation display of the predetermined fluctuation time is
The time during the first stop operation from the time when the second temporarily stopped symbol starts the stop operation to the time when the symbol temporarily stops is defined as RMT (seconds).
When the time during the second stop operation from the time when the last temporarily stopped symbol starts the stop operation to the time when the symbol temporarily stops is CMT (seconds), the following relational expression (1) is satisfied (for example, 44 (a), 45 (c): A description of the relationship between the right stop operation period RMT of the stop operation long and the middle stop operation period CMT).
RMT> CMT (1)
(2) Further, in the configuration example 8, the symbol display means has a high-speed fluctuation display in which the symbol is displayed at the first transmittance and a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance as the variation display of the symbol. It is possible to execute the slow fluctuation display displayed in
In the predetermined fluctuation display of the predetermined fluctuation time, the symbol that is temporarily stopped last is in the high-speed fluctuation display during the second stop operation (for example, FIG. 44 (a), FIG. 45 (c): right symbol. During the stop operation of, the middle symbol is the description during high-speed fluctuation).

[Second Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, the description mainly focuses on the gaming machine provided with the “support time reduction”. In the second embodiment described below, an embodiment provided with a "ceiling function" for giving a predetermined profit state will be described as a relief function when a person is addicted to the situation. The components (including processing) substantially the same as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the components substantially the same as those of the first embodiment will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description, and the description will be focused on the points different from those of the first embodiment.

(About ceiling function)
In order to facilitate the understanding of this embodiment, first, the above-mentioned "ceiling function" will be described.

In conventional gaming machines, the transition to a time-saving state or a probabilistic state is limited to the case where a big hit is won, and the game tends to be monotonous. In particular, if a large hit (for example, even if the number of games played is twice or more the number of games of the jackpot probability denominator is played, the jackpot is not won) is encountered before the jackpot is won, the player's willingness to play is significantly reduced. Therefore, there is a demand for a gaming machine that can shift from an opportunity different from the jackpot winning opportunity to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as a relief function when a big addiction occurs, a gaming machine having a "ceiling function" that gives a predetermined profit state is provided. As a result, it is possible to shift from an opportunity different from the big hit winning opportunity to a game state that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being significantly reduced even if he / she gets hooked.

The above "ceiling function" is a player when a predetermined number of games (predetermined number of fluctuations) is reached (digested) (in other words, when a predetermined number of games are executed) without winning a big hit. It is a function to give a predetermined profit state (ceiling privilege) in order to relieve. The ceiling privilege is at least more advantageous than the normal state from the viewpoint of the Hamari relief function.

Since the ceiling function has a strong meaning of a hamari relief function, basically, a big hit is made during a time saving state or a normal state, preferably, a normal state (normal mode) accompanied by a game state in which the jackpot lottery probability is a low probability state. It is preferable to activate it when a predetermined number of games are executed without winning (when the number of ceiling games is reached). However, in this embodiment, in addition to the big hit, a "support time reduction" that gives a time saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state is provided (see FIG. 4), so that at least the big hit and the support time reduction are won during the normal state. When the number of ceiling games is reached without any problems, the ceiling function is activated (ceiling benefits are given).

(About ceiling benefits)
The types of the above "ceiling benefits" will be described. The types of ceiling benefits are, for example, "infinite time reduction", "finite time reduction", "infinite probability change", "finite probability change", and "infinite probability change", as shown in the list of "examples of ceiling benefits" in Remark 2 of FIG. 61B. There are "infinite latency", "finite latency", "forced hit" and so on. These benefits can be broadly divided into "infinite time reduction" and "finite time reduction" as "ceiling time reduction type", "infinite probability variation" and "finite probability variation" as "ceiling probability variation type", and "infinite latency" and "finite latency". "Certain" is a ceiling privilege that belongs to "Ceiling latent type", and "Forced hit" is a ceiling privilege that belongs to "Ceiling hit type". Hereinafter, these ceiling privilege types will be described one by one.

(Infinite time reduction)
(A) "Infinite time reduction" is a privilege that grants a time reduction state until the next big hit. In the case of infinite time reduction, the number of time reductions is "no limit on the number of times (infinite)", but the number of time reductions until the next big hit, for example, 10000 times or 65535 times due to the big hit lottery probability. As such, when there is no possibility of ending the time saving state due to the arrival of the time saving number (when it can be considered as 0%), or when the indigestible time saving number is given during the business hours of the pachinko hall ( For example, 65535 times) can also be treated as belonging to the infinite time saving in the present invention. The same applies to "infinite time reduction" related to support time reduction.

(Limited time reduction)
(B) The "finite time reduction" is to give a time reduction state up to a predetermined number of time reductions so as to obtain an appropriate jackpot winning rate. This point is different from the above-mentioned infinite time reduction, which has no limit on the number of times. A typical example of the number of time reductions given is 100 times, which is the same as the time reduction jackpot (4R time reduction jackpot). However, the number of time reductions is not limited to the same as the time reduction jackpot, and the number of time reductions is different. You may. For example, if the number of time reductions due to the time reduction jackpot is M times (for example, 100 times for the 4R time reduction jackpot) and the finite number of time reductions due to the ceiling privilege is N times, "time reduction number N <time reduction number M" (M = 100 times, N). = 50 times, 75 times, etc.) or the number of times (M = 100 times, N = 200 times, 400 times, etc.) satisfying "time reduction number N> time reduction number M" can be given. It should be noted that even when the number of time reductions that is "substantially until the next big hit" in the above "infinite time reduction" is given, it can be said that it belongs to this finite time reduction in that the number of times is limited. Then, it can be treated as belonging to infinite time saving. The same applies to the "finite time reduction" related to the support time reduction.

(Specific example when giving a finite time reduction)
Here, in the case of granting a finite time reduction by the ceiling privilege, the following grant forms (1) to (5) can be used. In addition, although the description mainly describes the form of granting the finite time saving, it is not a concept of completely excluding the granting of the infinite time saving.

(Limited time reduction grant form 1)
(1) If there are multiple types (number of types A) of the number of time reductions due to the jackpot (the number of time reductions given due to the jackpot winning (time reduction state)), the type of time reduction number (time reduction state) due to the ceiling privilege is larger than that. Defined in a small number of types (number of types B). Specifically, it is configured to satisfy the relationship of "number of types B <number of types A". For example, if two types (number of types A) of 100 times (time reduction number A) and 50 times (time reduction number B) are provided as the number of time reductions due to the jackpot, one type (for example, the number of time reductions due to the ceiling privilege (finite time reduction)) is provided. , Only 100 times of time saving (time saving number A)) are given. If the relationship of "number of types B <number of types A" is satisfied, the number of time reductions (for example, 150 times) different from the number of time reductions due to the big hit may be given. In addition, when two or more types of time reduction times (time reduction state) due to ceiling benefits are provided (when "2 ≤ number of types B <number of types A"), one of the time reduction times (time reduction state) is performed by a predetermined lottery. ) Can be configured to be decidable. Further, the above-mentioned "number of types A" may be used as the number of types of the number of time reductions (finite time reduction) due to the support time reduction. As an exception to this embodiment, an infinite time reduction may be included as long as it satisfies the relationship of "number of types B <number of types A".

(Limited time reduction grant form 2)
(2) When there are a plurality of types of time reduction times (time reduction state) due to the ceiling privilege, one of the time reduction times (time reduction state) can be determined by a predetermined lottery (ceiling privilege lottery).
For example, if there are multiple types of time reductions due to big hits, for example, if there are 50 times reductions and 100 times reductions, in the ceiling privilege lottery, the same number of time reductions (50 times and 100 times) as the number of times reductions due to big hits will be drawn. Can be targeted. In this case, as a ceiling privilege, the same number of time reductions as a big hit can be given. Of course, a plurality of time reduction times (for example, 100 times, 75 times, and 25 times) including a time reduction number different from the time reduction number due to the big hit may be the target of the ceiling privilege lottery. In this case, since the number of time reductions different from the jackpot is given, it does not become an excessive ceiling privilege. Of course, the number of time reductions to be drawn can be appropriately determined according to the playability. (Italy 49) For example, the number of time reductions is 100, 200, infinite, etc., which is larger than the existing time reduction jackpots. It can also include the number of time reductions and exceptionally infinite time reductions. In addition, the ceiling privilege lottery may be provided with a "loss" that does not grant the ceiling privilege. When a loss is provided, it is suitable for lowering the ceiling privilege grant rate so as not to grant an excessive ceiling privilege in the case of a ceiling privilege including an infinite time reduction or a high time reduction number (for example, 1000 times). ..

Such a ceiling privilege lottery function can improve the playability in that a fixed ceiling privilege is not given each time the ceiling is reached.

The lottery probabilities (selection rates) of the ceiling privilege types (here, a plurality of time reductions) that are subject to the ceiling privilege lottery may be the same or substantially the same, or even if all or part of them are different. Good. In addition, the lottery target may include a "ceiling privilege loss" that does not grant the ceiling privilege. If the ceiling privilege loss is included, the ceiling privilege is not necessarily given even if the ceiling game is reached, but in this case, "execution of the ceiling privilege lottery" will play a role as a hamari relief function.

Further, the lottery probability according to the "set value" may be determined, and the number of time reductions (time reduction state) may be determined by a predetermined lottery (ceiling privilege lottery according to the set value). For example, as the set value becomes higher, a relatively large number of time saving times (time saving state) is easily selected. In other words, as the set value increases, benefits with a relatively high degree of profit are likely to be given (the same applies to other ceiling benefits described later). Specifically, when "100 times, 75 times, 50 times" is set as the type of time saving number, and "25%, 35%, 40%", "setting" when these lottery probabilities are "setting 1". In the case of "6", it is "45%, 30%, 25%" or the like. However, on the contrary, considering that the lower the set value is, the easier it is to make a big hit, it may be configured so that a relatively large number of time reductions can be easily selected as the set value becomes lower. In other words, as the set value becomes lower, it is easy to give benefits with a relatively high degree of profit (the same applies to other ceiling benefits described later). Further, the configuration may be such that "when a specific ceiling privilege is given, a specific set value is fixed". For example, when 25 times of time reduction is given, "setting 6 is confirmed", when 75 times is given, "setting 4 or more is confirmed" and the like. As described above, the method of determining the ceiling privilege related to the set value can give the player useful information such as the setting guessing element, and is useful for improving the player's motivation to play when he / she encounters the hamari.

(Limited time reduction grant form 3)
(3) When the average number of time reductions due to the jackpot is N and the average number of time reductions due to the ceiling privilege is M, it can be configured to satisfy the following relationships (Equation 1) to (Equation 3).
(Equation 1) It is configured to satisfy the relationship of "average number of time reductions N <average number of time reductions M". For example, when the number of time reductions due to the big hit is 100 times and 75 times, the average number of time reductions N is 75 times, so the average number of time reductions M due to the ceiling privilege is set to be a larger number of time reductions. In the case of this example, the ceiling privilege has a relatively higher profit margin than the normal jackpot winning, so it is a nice privilege for the player who has a big hit and the motivation to play is significantly reduced. The average number of time reductions M may be an infinite number. When the average number of time reductions M is set to an infinite number of times, it is equivalent to the case where the above "infinite time reduction" is given.
(Equation 2) It is configured to satisfy the relationship of "average number of time reductions N = average number of time reductions M". In this case, the profit degree by the big hit (the number of time reductions) and the profit degree by the ceiling privilege are the same.
(Equation 3) It is configured so as to satisfy the relationship of "average time reduction number N> average time reduction number M". In this case, the profit degree by the jackpot is relatively lower than the profit degree by the ceiling privilege, and it is possible to prevent excessive privilege grant.

(Limited time reduction grant form 4)
(4) Similar to the above (Equation 3), paying attention to the point that an excessive privilege is not given, the number of time reductions that satisfies at least the relationship of "the number of time reductions due to the ceiling privilege ≤ the maximum number of time reductions due to the big hit" is set. For example, when the number of time reductions due to the big hit is 100 times and 75 times, the maximum number of time reductions is 100 times, so the number of time reductions due to the ceiling privilege is set to, for example, 100 times or 90 times. Further, paying attention to the minimum number of time reductions due to the big hit, the number of time reductions that satisfies the relationship of "minimum time reduction number due to the big hit ≤ time reduction number due to the ceiling privilege <maximum time reduction number due to the big hit" may be satisfied. For example, when the number of time reductions due to a big hit is 100 times and 75 times, the number of time reductions satisfying the relationship of "75 times ≤ number of time reductions due to ceiling privilege <100 times" is set.
(Limited time reduction grant form 5)
There is no particular limitation on the number of time reductions for a finite time reduction, but it is preferable to determine the number of time reductions that satisfy the following relationship.
(5) When the number of time reductions of the finite time reduction is "Z" and the denominator "M" of the jackpot lottery probability (1 / M) at the time of low probability is "0.4M ≤ Z ≤ 3.8M to 4.0M". It is preferable to satisfy the relational expression of. For example, if the maximum number of time reductions is about four times the probability denominator M, the possibility of winning a big hit within that number of time reductions is very high (the incidence of non-winning is about 2%), and the ceiling game. It can be said that it is appropriate as a privilege for players who have continued to play up to a number. The value of M may be based on any of the jackpot lottery probabilities set in 1 to 6. It is preferably based on the middle setting 3, more preferably the jackpot lottery probability of the lowest setting 1 or the highest setting 6.

(Infinite probability change)
(C) "Infinite probability change" is a privilege to give a probability change state until the next big hit. In the case of infinite probability change, the number of STs is "no limit on the number of times (infinite)", but as in the same event as the above "infinite time reduction", the number of STs until the next big hit (for example, 10,000 times) And 65536 times) may be given.

(Limited probability change)
(D) The "finite probability variation" is different from the above-mentioned infinite probability variation, in which a probability variation state is given up to a predetermined number of STs so as to obtain an appropriate jackpot winning rate. In addition, even when the number of STs that is "substantially until the next big hit" in the above "infinite probability change" is given, it can be said that it belongs to this finite probability change in that there is a limit on the number of times, but it is the same as the above "infinite time reduction". Like an elephant, it may be treated as belonging to infinite probability variation, or may be treated as belonging to infinite probability variation (the same applies to infinite latency variation described later).

(Specific example when giving finite probability variation)
Here, when granting a finite probability variation, the following ceiling privilege granting forms (finite probability variation granting forms) 1 to the same phenomenon as those described in the finite time saving granting forms 1 to 5 of the above "finite time saving". It can be 4. In the following finite probability variation giving forms 1 to 5, the "time saving number" described in the above "finite time saving giving form 1 to 4" is appropriately read as "ST number", "time saving state" is read as "probability changing state", and the like. Since it is substantially the same as the content (concept), for convenience of explanation, the content will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

(Limited probability variation imparting form 1)
(1) The number of STs due to a big hit (the number of STs given due to winning a big hit (probability change state) is multiple types (number of types A), but the number of STs due to a ceiling privilege (probability change state) is less than that (type The number of types is B). That is, the configuration is such that the relationship of "number of types B <number of types A" is satisfied.

In the case of the present embodiment, the number of STs (probability change state) given to the probability change jackpot due to winning is one type of infinite number of times (65535 times). Therefore, here, for convenience of explanation, the number of STs is 100 times. It will be described as assuming that there is a probability variation jackpot that imparts three types (number of types B) of (probability variation A), 75 times (probability variation B), and 25 times (probability variation C). In this case, for example, in the ceiling privilege, only one type of ST number of 100 times (probability variation A) is given.

(Limited probability variation imparting form 2)
(2) When there are a plurality of types of ST times (probability change state) due to the ceiling privilege, one of the ST times (probability change state) is determined by a predetermined lottery (ceiling privilege lottery). This point is substantially the same as the content in which the "time reduction number" explained in "(finite time reduction granting form 2)" in the above finite time reduction is appropriately read as "ST number" and "time reduction state" is appropriately read as "probability change state". Is.

(Limited probability variation imparting form 3)
(3) When the average number of STs due to the probability variation jackpot is N and the average number of STs due to the ceiling privilege is M, it can be configured to satisfy the following relationships (Equation 4) to (Equation 6). Regarding these (Equation 4) to (Equation 6), the wording and the like of "Time reduction number" of (Equation 1) to (Equation 3) explained in "(Limited time reduction granting form 3)" in the above finite time reduction is "ST number of times". It is substantially the same as the content replaced with the wording of ".
(Equation 4) It is configured to satisfy the relationship of "average number of STs N <average number of STs M". The average number of STs M may be an infinite number. When the average number of STs M is infinite, it is equivalent to the case where the above "infinite probability variation" is given.
(Equation 5) It is configured to satisfy the relationship of "average number of STs N = average number of STs M".
(Equation 6) It is configured to satisfy the relationship of "average number of STs N> average number of STs M".

(Limited probability variation imparting form 4)
(4) Focusing on the point that excessive privilege is not given, the number of STs is set to satisfy at least the relationship of "the number of STs due to the ceiling privilege ≤ the maximum number of STs due to the big hit". For example, when there are three types of ST times due to a big hit, 100 times (probability change A), 75 times (probability change B), and 25 times (probability change C), the maximum number of ST times is 100 times (probability change A) or less, for example, 100 times. It can be set to 90 times or the like. Further, paying attention to the minimum number of STs, the number of STs that satisfies the relationship of "minimum number of STs due to big hit ≤ number of STs due to ceiling privilege <maximum number of STs due to big hit" may be satisfied. For example, the number of time reductions that satisfies the relationship "25 times ≤ ST number of times due to ceiling privilege <100 times" is set.

(Infinite latency)
(E) "Infinite latency" is a privilege that grants the latency state until the next big hit. In the case of infinite latency, the number of STs is "no limit on the number of times (infinite)", but as with the above infinite time reduction and infinite probability variation, even if the number of STs that will be the next big hit is given. Good.

(Limited latency)
(F) The "finite latent probability" is different from the above-mentioned infinite latent probability, and the latent probability state is given up to a predetermined number of STs so as to have an appropriate winning rate. In the present embodiment, the latent probability jackpot that triggers the transition to the latent probability state is not provided, but if a part of the probability variation jackpot is a latent probability jackpot, the finite probability variation imparting embodiment 1 described in the finite probability variation The same configuration as in ~ 4 (configuration related to the assignment of the number of STs) can be used. Since this point is substantially the same as the finite probability change (content in which the wording of "probability change state" is appropriately read as the wording of "latent state"), detailed explanation is omitted to avoid duplicate description. ..

(Forced hit)
(G) “Forced hit” means that a big hit is forcibly given regardless of the big hit lottery. "Unrelated to the big hit lottery" means that the big hit lottery itself is not executed, or even if the big hit lottery is executed, the result is treated as invalid, and the big hit lottery is completely irrelevant. Not limited to meaning.

The type of jackpot by forced hit is either probabilistic jackpot (finite probability variable jackpot, infinite probability variable jackpot), time-saving jackpot (finite time-short jackpot, infinite time-short jackpot), or latent jackpot (finite latent jackpot, infinite latent jackpot). There may be. In addition, the maximum number of rounds or the round game mode can be appropriately determined. In addition, the transition destination game state after the forced hit can be appropriately determined. For example, it may be in the same transition destination gaming state as when the probability variation jackpot or the time saving jackpot shown in FIG. 4 is won, and the finite time saving granting forms 1 to 5 and the finite probability variation granting forms 1 to 4 described in the above ceiling privilege may be used. The game state may be shifted to the same gaming state (time reduction number, ST number).

However, it is preferable to use one of the big hit lottery targets as the compulsory hit so as not to give an excessive privilege. More preferably, the profit margin is not higher than the total jackpot. The profit referred to here means "profit from the jackpot game" or "profit including the jackpot game and the transition destination game state". In the present embodiment, it is preferable to satisfy at least the relationship of "profit due to forced hit ≤ profit due to 10R probability variable jackpot (the jackpot with the highest degree of profit among all jackpots)".

The ceiling privilege described above is useful as a hamari relief function because it is possible to give a profit equal to or different from the profit degree given by the jackpot lottery result.

In addition, although various ceiling benefits have been described above, it is up to you to decide which ceiling benefit to use. In addition, ceiling benefits may include multiple types of benefits with different personalities (for example, finite time reduction and finite probability variation), or benefits with the same personality but different advantages (profit status) (for example, finite number of time reductions of 100 times). A plurality of types of time saving A and a finite time saving B having 50 times of time saving can be provided. In this case, what kind of plurality of types of ceiling benefits (two or more ceiling benefits) should be provided can be appropriately determined. For example, a finite time reduction and a finite probability variation can be provided, and which ceiling privilege is to be given can be determined by a predetermined lottery. In this case, the lottery probability may be the same regardless of the set value, but it is preferable to set the lottery probability according to the set value as in the above-mentioned "ceiling privilege lottery". Specifically, as the set value becomes higher, a privilege with a relatively high degree of profit (for example, the "finite probability change" side in the case of drawing a finite time reduction and a finite probability change) is likely to be given, or conversely, As the set value becomes higher, a privilege having a relatively low profit degree (for example, the "finite time reduction" side in the case of drawing a finite time reduction and a finite probability variation) can be easily given. In the case of a hit, the above-mentioned case of "providing multiple types of benefits with different personalities" includes, for example, a case of "providing at least two of a time-saving jackpot, a probabilistic jackpot, and a latent jackpot", and "having the same personality". However, in the case of "providing multiple types of benefits with different advantages (profit status)", for example, "a case of providing multiple jackpots with different time reduction times (time reduction jackpots)" and "multiple jackpots with different ST times (probability variation jackpots)" Or there is a case of "providing a latent jackpot".

In addition, after the ceiling privilege is granted, the game state (game mode) related to the ceiling privilege is entered until the ceiling privilege is exhausted, or at least until the jackpot (in this embodiment, the jackpot or the support time is shortened) is won. Be controlled. Specifically, if it is a "finite system privilege" such as finite time reduction, finite probability variation, or finite latency, the specified time reduction number or ST number is completed without winning the big hit, or the big hit (book) In the case of the embodiment, when the jackpot or the support time is shortened), the ceiling privilege is not given until the privilege state is terminated and the ceiling activation opportunity (ceiling game) arrives again. On the other hand, if it is an "infinite system privilege" such as infinite time reduction, infinite probability change, or infinite latency, the privilege state will continue until the next big hit, and the big hit will be won (in the case of this embodiment, the big hit or support time reduction). The privilege status will be terminated.

When the ceiling privilege is a finite probability variation, it may be a "finite probability variation time reduction type" ceiling privilege that shifts to a time reduction state (finite time reduction or infinite time reduction) when the specified number of STs is completed. The "finite probability variation time saving type" includes the following types (A) to (Ding).
(A) A "finite probability variation / finite time reduction" type ceiling privilege that shifts to a finite time reduction (for example, 100 time reductions) when the specified number of STs (for example, 75 times) is completed.
(B) A "finite probability change / infinite time reduction" type ceiling privilege that shifts to infinite time reduction when the specified number of STs is completed.
(丙) When the first specified number of STs (for example, 75 times) is completed, only the electric support state ends, and the second specified number of STs (for example, 100 times) shifts to the finite latent probability. "Type ceiling privilege (the first specified ST number and the second specified ST number may be the same number or different times).
(Ding) When the specified number of STs (for example, 75 times) is completed, only the electric support state ends, and the ceiling privilege of the "finite probability change / infinite probability" type that shifts to infinite latency.

(About the number of ceiling games)
Next, the number of ceiling games will be described. The number of ceiling games according to this embodiment is the number of games (number of ceiling games) in consideration of the jackpot lottery probability at the time of low probability of settings 1 to 6, and the number of games is 1000 in the normal state (the game mode belonging to the normal mode may be used). It is the game item (for example, the number of addictive games about 5 times the denominator of the jackpot lottery probability at the low probability of setting 1). That is, in the normal state, if 1000 games are lost continuously, the ceiling function is activated and the ceiling privilege is given.

The value for setting the number of ceiling games can be set as appropriate, but it is preferable to set the number of ceiling games as shown below.
(Heaven 1) When the number of ceiling games is "H" and the denominator "M" of the jackpot lottery probability (1 / M) at the time of low probability is set, the relational expression of "2.5M ≤ H ≤ 3.0M" is satisfied. Is preferable. The reason for doing this is that if the number of ceiling games is within 2.5 to 3 times the probability denominator, the addiction probability is about 8% to 5%, and many players make a big hit by the time the number of ceiling games is reached. This is because it is possible to win the prize, and it is possible to suppress the player from playing the game aiming at the number of ceiling games in the dark clouds (suppressing the gambling spirit). The value of M may be based on any of the jackpot lottery probabilities set in 1 to 6. It is preferably based on the jackpot lottery probability of the middle setting 3, more preferably the lowest setting 1 or the highest setting 6 (I 45). In the case of the present embodiment, based on "1/200" of the jackpot lottery probability at the low probability of setting 1, M = 200, so "500 (2.5 x 200) ≤ H ≤ 600 (3). It can be said that it is preferable to adopt the number of ceiling games that satisfy the relationship of ".0 x 200)".
(Ten 2) In the present embodiment, the number of ceiling games is the same regardless of the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ceiling game may be different in all or part of each set value. it can. For example, the number of ceiling games may be different for settings 1 to 6 (for example, 1100 games to 1050 games: the higher the setting value, the smaller the number of ceiling games), or the high setting area (settings 4 to 6) may increase the number of ceiling games to 1000. As a game, the medium / low setting areas (settings 1 to 3) can be set to 1032 games, or only a specific setting value (for example, setting 6 of the highest setting) can be set to a number of ceiling games different from other setting values. In this way, when the number of ceiling games is determined according to the set value, it becomes possible to give the player a setting estimation element based on the number of ceiling games. If you get hooked until you reach the ceiling, the player will be discouraged and the game will be less enjoyable. It is possible to prevent a person's playing interest from being lowered.

(About game mode, variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode (variable pattern selection mode): FIG. 74)
In the case of this embodiment, since the ceiling function is provided, unlike the first embodiment, a game mode and a variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) as shown in FIG. 74 are provided. As shown in FIG. 74, the type of the internal gaming state includes a normal state, a probability variation state, a time saving state, and the like, which is the same as that of the first embodiment (see the column of “YJ” in FIG. 74). On the other hand, the types of game states (game modes) related to the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) include "general mode", "precursor mode", "probability change mode 1 to 3", "time saving mode 1 to 3", "ceiling mode", and "ceiling mode". "Heaven mode" and the like are included (see the "Tcode" column in FIG. 74). Although the details will be described later, the "general mode" and the "precursor mode" are game modes belonging to the normal mode, and the general mode is a game mode corresponding to the "normal mode" in the first embodiment. Further, the "ceiling mode" is a game mode that occurs in the ceiling game (1000th rotation), and the "heaven mode" is a game mode related to the ceiling privilege. The "probability variation modes 1 to 3" and the "time saving modes 1 to 3" are substantially the same game modes as those in the first embodiment.

Regarding the variation pattern distribution table related to each of the above game modes, FIG. 70 shows a “hit / support time reduction winning variation pattern distribution table (general, for precursors)” referred to at the time of jackpot in general mode, precursor mode, or support time reduction winning. ) ”, And FIG. 71 shows the“ hit / support time reduction winning variation pattern distribution table (for ceiling, heaven) ”referred to when the jackpot or support time reduction is won in the ceiling mode or heaven mode (heaven time reduction). FIG. 72 shows a “loss variation pattern distribution table (for general use)” referred to when losing in the general mode, and FIG. 73 shows “losing variation” referred to when losing in the precursor mode, ceiling mode, and heaven mode. Pattern distribution table (for precursors, ceilings, heaven time reduction) "is shown. The "loss variation pattern distribution table (general use)" shown in FIG. 72 has substantially the same table configuration as the "normal medium loss variation pattern distribution table" shown in FIG. 32 of the first embodiment. ..

<30. Game mode transition form: FIG. 61A, FIG. 61B>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 61A and 61B, the content of the "game mode" related to the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) and the transition control between the game modes (between the game states) according to the present embodiment. , The effect mode related to the game mode will be described. 61A and 61B are game flows showing an outline of each game mode and related effect modes. Since the probability variation mode and the time saving mode are the same as those in the first embodiment, these descriptions will be omitted as appropriate in order to avoid duplicate description.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61A and 61B, they are roughly classified into "normal mode (" general mode "," precursor mode ")", "ceiling mode", "heaven mode", "time saving mode", and "probability change". A plurality of types of game modes such as "mode" are provided, and the progress of the game is controlled under these game modes. In the following, it is explained that the player follows an advantageous striking method according to the gaming state, and unless otherwise specified, in the case of a left striking advantage (normal state), "design variation display game 1 on the special figure 1 side". Is executed, and in the case of right-handed advantage (probability change state, time saving state), it is assumed that the "design variation display game 2 on the special figure 2 side" is executed.

(30-1. About "normal mode")
The normal mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is related to the normal state (YJ = 00H), and this normal mode is the initial start when the RAM in the area is cleared by the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation. It is in the game mode of.

The normal mode of the present embodiment includes a "general mode" in which the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is "00H" and a "precursor mode" in which the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is "08H". In this respect, it is significantly different from the first embodiment without the precursor mode. Of the normal modes, the "general mode" is the game mode in which the player can stay for the longest time while the game is in progress. It is possible to shift to another game mode (probability change mode or time saving mode) with the grant of ceiling benefits.

(30-1A. About general mode)
During the above-mentioned "general mode", the player stays in the "normal production mode (air combat mode: FIG. 7B (b) (c))" that produces an effect related to the normal mode (general mode). This point is the same as that of the first embodiment.

(30-1A-1. Special production in general mode)
(I51) Information regarding the existence of the "ceiling function" is given in the normal mode, especially in the general mode. This information notice does not belong to any of the notice effect for notifying the winning expectation and the setting suggestion effect. The content of the production by the information notice is to inform the game beginners and first-time players that the machine is equipped with a ceiling function (relief function). For example, this information notice notifies that the ceiling function is installed, information on the number of games until reaching the ceiling (number of ceiling games), information on the number of remaining games until reaching the ceiling (number of remaining ceiling games), and the like. .. In addition, the information notice may appear as a part of the hit production related to the big hit game, or it may appear during the waiting for customers (at least a part of the production before waiting for customers and the production waiting for customers), or the game setting. It can be made to appear on the screen, or it can be made to appear as an effect during the symbol variation display game. In any case, the information notice is not a production that suggests the winning expectation or the setting, so it may appear at an appropriate timing.

(30-1B. About precursor mode)
The above-mentioned "precursor mode" is a game mode in which the ceiling game is almost reached. For example, it is provided as a game mode for executing a "precursor effect" that notifies that the ceiling is about to be reached. In the present embodiment, the game is shifted when a predetermined number of games (predetermined number of fluctuations) is reached without winning a big hit or a short support time in the general mode. Specifically, if 989 games are addicted (continue to lose) during the general mode, the game shifts to the precursor mode from the 990th game (the block frame of the "normal mode" in FIG. 61A and the block frame of the "precursor mode" in FIG. 61B. See (α)).

(30-1B-1. About the production in the precursor mode)
During the precursor mode, the mode shifts to the "precursor effect mode" that performs the effect related to the precursor mode (precursor effect). During the precursory effect mode, a background image different from the normal effect mode related to the general mode (for example, from a "day background image (background image for general mode)" in which the sun shines in the normal effect mode to a "night background image" in which stars shine ( The background image for the precursor mode) ") is switched and displayed, and it is notified that the precursor mode is in progress. In the case of the present embodiment, the normal effect mode and the precursor effect mode differ only in the background image color, and basically, the effect related to the "air combat mode" shown in FIGS. 7B (b) and 7B (c) appears. It is supposed to be done.

Further, during the precursory effect mode, for example, "countdown display" is executed as an effect (remaining ceiling number display effect) that can identify the number of remaining games (number of remaining ceilings) until reaching the ceiling (precursor mode in FIG. 61B). See block frame (δ) in. This residual ceiling number display effect may appear during a part of the precursor mode, and for example, the residual ceiling number display effect may be started (countdown display start) from the 996th game near the ceiling. Specifically, the countdown display (for example, suggesting a count of zero in the ceiling game) can be performed between 996 games and 999 games or between 995 to 1000 games including the ceiling game in consideration of the maximum number of reserved memories of 4. it can. If the number of games up to the ceiling is known, there is a dramatic merit that the player can prevent wasteful hitting until the ceiling arrives when there is an operation holding ball.

Further, in the precursor effect mode, at least a hold display mode (hold icon) different from the general mode appears. For example, in the normal effect mode, the hold display mode is based on the simple "round icon" shown in FIG. 5, but in the precursor effect mode, the hold display mode is based on the "character icon". (See the block frame (ε) in the precursor mode of FIG. 61B, FIG. 62 described later). In the general mode, one or more hold displays existing immediately before the transition to the precursor mode (989th game) are all changed to the dedicated hold display (character icon) after the transition to the precursor mode (990th game). Alternatively, only the hold display to be digested may be changed to the dedicated hold display during the precursor mode. To specifically explain the latter configuration, for example, in the case where there are three operation hold balls during the execution of the 988 game, the hold display related to the 989th game to the 991th game is displayed as a "'round icon (in general mode). Digestion target hold: 989th game) "" Character icon (digestion target hold in precursor mode: 990th game) "" Character icon (digestion target hold in precursor mode: 991th game) "". In addition, from the start of the precursor effect mode until the predetermined number of games is exhausted, the hold display (round icon) is the same as in the normal effect mode, and the ceiling is about to be reached (for example, 996 in consideration of the maximum number of reserved memories of 4). (Between games and 999 games), the display may be switched to the hold display (character icon) dedicated to the precursor. Further, during the precursor effect mode, the above-mentioned "residual ceiling number display effect" and / or "hold display dedicated to precursors" may be displayed.

(About the fluctuation pattern related to the precursor mode)
Focusing on the "precursor mode (column of" precursor ")" of the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 73, in the case of this embodiment, the high speed in which the fluctuation state is the fastest among the normal modes during the precursor mode. It is set to a fluctuating state (a game mode in which the average digestion time is the fastest in the normal mode). This takes into account the player's feelings. It is thought that many players will become more motivated to "get to the ceiling quickly when they come to this point" and "to get the ceiling benefits quickly" when they are close to the ceiling. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the average digestion time in the precursor mode is increased. Further, in the case of this embodiment, when the big hit is won in the precursor mode, as shown in FIG. 70, the hit fluctuation pattern distribution tables FB1 to FB6 common to the general mode are adopted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a hit variation pattern distribution table dedicated to the precursor mode may be provided. For example, a "precursor per variability" can be provided as a dedicated hit variability during the precursor mode (see Remark 4 "precursor per variability" in FIG. 70).

(30-2. About ceiling mode)
Next, the "ceiling mode" will be described with reference to FIG. 61B. In the present embodiment, as already described, a "ceiling function" is provided as a relief function in the case of a large hit. The number of ceiling games of this embodiment is the 1000th game of Hamari in the normal mode (normal state), and the ceiling mode is a game mode that occurs in the 1000th game, and is limited to one game (one rotation only). It is in the game mode of.

The ceiling mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is related to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the ceiling privilege. Here, as a ceiling privilege, a finite time reduction of 100 times is typically performed. It will be described as giving the same time saving performance as the 4R time saving jackpot). Hereinafter, the ceiling privilege according to the present embodiment will be referred to as "ceiling time reduction".

(About the activation timing of ceiling benefits)
"" Ceiling game start type "and" Ceiling game end type ""
Here, when the ceiling game is reached (the 1000th game of addiction), the ceiling time is activated when the ceiling game starts (“ceiling game start activation type” which grants the ceiling privilege when the game starts), or the ceiling. Whether to activate the time reduction when the ceiling game ends (the end of the variable time or the end of the confirmed display time) (“the end of the ceiling game” that grants the ceiling privilege when the game ends) can be determined as appropriate. .. When the former type activated at the start of the ceiling game is adopted, the ceiling mode becomes the game mode (ceiling mode α) related to the time saving state (YJ = 02H), and in the case of the latter type activated at the end of the ceiling game, the ceiling mode is set to the game mode (ceiling mode α). The game mode (ceiling mode β) related to the normal state (YJ = 00H) is set. Regardless of which one is adopted, when the ceiling game is reached, the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated to the dedicated "09H" in order to select the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the ceiling, thereby changing the game mode to "09H". It shifts to the "ceiling mode" (see Remark 3 in FIG. 61B, ceiling mode α and ceiling mode β in the column of Tcode in FIG. 74). If the ceiling time reduction is activated at the end of the fluctuation time, the time reduction state will occur before the confirmation display time elapses. Therefore, strictly speaking, the time is shortened from the middle of the game, but since the ceiling time is actually activated at the end stage of the game, in the present embodiment, it belongs to the above-mentioned "initiated at the end of the ceiling game". Treat as.

(Italy 87) The above-mentioned "Ceiling game end activation type" is the same as "Special electric non-operation type support time reduction" in that a time saving state (ceiling time reduction) occurs when the end of this game (ceiling game) occurs. Is. As already explained, the special electric non-actuated support time reduction is caused by the end of this game (support time reduction winning game). On the other hand, the activation type at the start of the ceiling game is significantly different from the special electric non-actuated support time reduction in that a time reduction state occurs when the start of this game (ceiling game) occurs. Therefore, the appropriate start timing when executing the time-saving rush notification effect for notifying that the time-saving state has been entered is as follows.
"Special electric non-actuated support time reduction" is notified at the end timing of the game (notified at the symbol stop display timing).
"Special electric operation type support time reduction" is notified at the end timing of the game (notification at the symbol stop display timing), or at a predetermined timing of the support time reduction opening / closing game start-end period. Preferably, it is executed at the start of the support time shortening opening / closing game).
"Activated at the end of the ceiling game" is notified at the end of the game (notified at the symbol stop display timing).
"Activated at the start of the ceiling game" is notified at the start of the game.
Will be.
(Italy 89) In addition, the appropriate execution timing of the right-handed instruction effect is as follows.
"Special electric non-actuated support time reduction" is executed at the end timing of the game (executed at the symbol stop display timing).
"Special electric operation type support time reduction" is executed at the end timing of the game (notified at the symbol stop display timing), or is executed at a predetermined timing during the period from the start to the end of the support time reduction opening / closing game. Preferably, it is executed at the start of the support time shortening opening / closing game).
"Activated at the end of the ceiling game" is executed at the end of the game (executed at the timing of the symbol stop display)
"Activate type at the start of the ceiling game" is executed at the start timing of the game.
Will be.
(Italy 90-1) In summary, the execution timing of the right-handed instruction effect can be the same for the "triggered at the end of the ceiling game" and the "support time reduction". The right-handed instruction effect may be the same effect mode or may be a different effect mode.
(Italy 90-2) The "triggered type at the start of the ceiling game" and the "support time reduction" can be set to different timings for executing the right-handed instruction effect. The right-handed instruction effect may be the same effect mode or may be a different effect mode.

(About performance information)
(I46) As described above, the internal gaming state during the ceiling game is different between the "triggered type at the start of the ceiling game" and the "activated type at the end of the ceiling game". Regarding the performance information, in the case of the activation type at the start of the ceiling game, it is measured as a normal state until the symbol variation display game in the ceiling game is started. On the other hand, in the case of the activation type at the end of the ceiling game, the ceiling time shortening state occurs when the symbol variation display game in the ceiling game ends, so that the measurement is interrupted at the timing when the variation time elapses or the confirmed display time elapses.

(About the jackpot lottery in the ceiling game)
The jackpot lottery is executed as usual in the ceiling game (1000th game). Therefore, in the ceiling game, when a big hit or a short support time is won, the question is whether to give priority to the ceiling privilege (or to give priority to the winning result. In this embodiment, at least when the big hit is won, the problem is. The activation of the ceiling function is prohibited (restricted) (the condition for prohibiting the activation of the ceiling is established), and the processing of the jackpot winning is prioritized. On the other hand, between the support time reduction and the ceiling privilege, the one that is advantageous to the player is prioritized. In the case of the present embodiment, the support time reduction is won in consideration of the fact that the ceiling privilege is "a finite time reduction of 100 times of time reduction", that is, a profit state of support time reduction A to C or less is given. In that case, the activation of the ceiling function is prohibited (restricted), and the processing of the support time reduction winning is prioritized. Specifically, it is as follows.
(I-71) If the jackpot is won, the jackpot winning process is executed without giving the ceiling time reduction (ceiling privilege), and the jackpot game is started after the ceiling game is completed.
(I 72) If the support time reduction is won, the support time reduction winning process is executed without giving the ceiling time reduction. If the winning support time reduction is "special electric operation type support time reduction", the support time reduction opening / closing game is executed after the ceiling game is completed, and after the support time reduction opening / closing game is completed, the time reduction state due to the support time reduction is started. If the winning support time reduction is "special electric non-actuated support time reduction", the time reduction state due to the support time reduction is started after the ceiling game is completed.

(A variant of the jackpot lottery in the ceiling game)
(I73) If the ceiling privilege is more profitable than the support time reduction, the granting of the ceiling privilege can be prioritized. In other words, even if the support time is shortened, the activation of the ceiling function is not prohibited (allowed). In the present embodiment, the support time reductions A to C are provided, but if only the support time reduction D (time reduction number 50 times) is provided, the ceiling time reduction (time reduction number 100 times) is provided. The degree of profit is high. In such a case, in order to give the player an advantageous profit state, even if the support time reduction D is won in the ceiling game, this is invalidated, the ceiling function is allowed to be activated, and the ceiling time reduction, which is a ceiling privilege, is set. Give. Here, the profit margins of the support time reduction and the ceiling time reduction were compared by the number of time reductions, but the normal power opening game mode during the support time reduction state and the normal power opening game mode during the ceiling time reduction state (time reduction state due to the ceiling time reduction). If they are different (for example, if the opening / closing operation pattern of the lower start port 35 is different), the activation of the ceiling function is prohibited / allowed in consideration of the normal electric opening game mode, instead of comparing only by the number of time reductions. It is preferable to determine.
(I74) In addition, when the profit degree related to the support time reduction differs between the special figure 1 side and the special figure 2 side, the special figure side with a high degree of advantage gives priority to the processing of the support time reduction winning, and the special figure with a low profit degree. The side can give priority to the provision of ceiling time reduction. The degree of profit related to the support time reduction of the present embodiment is higher on the special figure 2 side than on the special figure 1 side (see the support time reduction winning type in FIG. 4 and the symbol lottery rate). Therefore, if the support time reduction (support time reduction B or support time reduction C: see Fig. 4) on the special figure 2 side is won, the activation of the ceiling function is prohibited and the processing of the support time reduction winning process is prioritized. If the support time reduction on the 1st side (support time reductions A to C: see FIG. 4) is won, the ceiling function can be activated and the ceiling time reduction can be given priority.

As described above, for the 1000th game, which is a ceiling game, the activation of the ceiling function is prohibited (restricted) at least when a big hit is won (in this embodiment, when a big hit or a short support time is won). (See step S920 during the ceiling activation management process of FIG. 65, which will be described later). Therefore, the case where the ceiling privilege is always given is the case where the ceiling game is "missing". If a normal small hit is provided, even if the normal small hit is won in the ceiling game, the ceiling privilege will be given in the same way as the loss. This is because the small hit usually does not control the transition of the internal gaming state. This point is not limited to the case where the ceiling privilege is a finite time reduction, and the same applies to the case of an infinite time reduction, an infinite probability variation, a finite probability variation, an infinite latency, or a finite latency. However, if the support time is shortened, it is preferable to decide which one to prioritize in consideration of the ceiling privilege and the profit degree of the support time (details of this will be explained later).

If the ceiling privilege is "forced hit", the jackpot winning state is forcibly controlled, so the jackpot lottery itself for the 1000th game is not executed, or the result is invalid even if the jackpot lottery is executed. It should be treated as if the jackpot for the ceiling was won. Therefore, when the ceiling privilege is "forced hit", the jackpot game (forced jackpot game) related to the jackpot for the ceiling is started after the end of the 1000th game, as in the case where the normal jackpot is won. It becomes. The hitting effect during the forced jackpot game may be the same as the normal jackpot, or the hitting effect dedicated to the forced jackpot may appear.

(About the end condition of the ceiling time reduction state)
(I 52) The end condition of the ceiling time reduction state according to the present embodiment is when the number of time reductions is exhausted or when a big hit is won (including the case where the support time reduction is provided when the support time reduction is provided). It is supposed to be terminated. However, other termination conditions may be adopted. For example, when the normal open game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), when the normal small hit is won a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) (when the small hit game by a normal small hit is executed a predetermined number of times). , One of the special figures (one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2) fluctuates a predetermined number of times, and a case where a specific support time reduction is won among a plurality of support time reductions can be adopted. In addition, (I 55) end condition may be set one or more. As a result, the conditions for ending the ceiling time reduction state can be varied, the range of game playability can be expanded, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(Timing of setting the end condition for shortening the ceiling time)
(I 53-1) After the jackpot game is over, the end condition for shortening the ceiling time can be set. For example, in the case where a plurality of jackpots 1 to 4 are provided, if the jackpot 1 is won, the ceiling time is reduced by 100 times, and if the jackpot 2 is won, the ceiling time is reduced by 200 times. If you win, the ceiling time is reduced by 1200 times, and if you win the jackpot 4, the ceiling time is reduced by 0 times (substantially, there is no ceiling privilege). The feature of this configuration is that the end condition of the ceiling time reduction can be changed according to the jackpot type, and the degree of advantage of the ceiling privilege (relief content when reaching the ceiling) can be changed. As a result, the range of playability due to the ceiling function is greatly expanded, and the fun of the game can be improved.
(I 53-2) The end condition of the ceiling time reduction can be set when the ceiling time reduction is activated. For example, when the ceiling time reduction is "triggered at the start of the ceiling game", the end condition of the ceiling time reduction can be set when the ceiling game starts. When the ceiling time reduction is "activated at the end of the ceiling game", the end condition of the ceiling time reduction can be set when the ceiling game ends. In this case, when setting the end condition of the ceiling time reduction, it is possible to determine what kind of end condition the ceiling time reduction is to be given by the above-mentioned "ceiling privilege lottery". For example, one of the ceiling time reduction of 100 times, the ceiling time reduction of 200 times, the ceiling time reduction of 1200 times, and the ceiling time reduction of 0 times can be determined by lottery. .. The feature of this configuration is that the end condition of the ceiling time reduction is changed when the ceiling function is activated (in other words, when the ceiling privilege is granted), and the degree of advantage of the ceiling privilege can be changed. There is a point that can be done. As a result, the range of playability due to the ceiling function is greatly expanded, and the fun of the game can be improved.
(I 53-3) The end condition for shortening the ceiling time can be set when the RAM is cleared. In this case as well, as in (I 53-2) above, one of the multiple ceiling time reductions (at least one of which has different time reduction performance) is assumed to be one of the ceiling time reductions triggered by the RAM clear. Can be decided by lottery. The feature of this configuration is that the end condition of the ceiling time reduction can be changed when the RAM is cleared, and the degree of advantage of the ceiling privilege can be changed. As a result, the range of playability due to the ceiling function is greatly expanded, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(Variation patterns related to ceiling mode: FIGS. 71 and 73)
When the ceiling mode (1000th rotation) is lost, a specific fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time (ceiling fluctuation pattern: "ceiling fluctuation" in FIG. 73) is used to secure the production time width of the "ceiling effect" described later. Is now selected. As the fluctuation pattern for the ceiling, a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time longer than N reach is defined is selected, but there is no particular limitation as long as the production time width of the “ceiling effect” can be secured. For example, it may be a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of SP reach or more (at least SP reach without pseudo-linkage) in the normal mode.

Further, in the ceiling mode, in the case of loss, a common ceiling variation pattern (ceiling variation) is selected at least regardless of the "special figure type and the number of balls on hold" (“ceiling variation” in FIG. 73). See the column). In the case of the present embodiment, since there are a plurality of types of loss, "ceiling fluctuation" is selected regardless of "type of special figure, number of balls on hold, and type of loss". The reason for doing this is, firstly, since it is important to notify that the ceiling privilege will be given when the ceiling is reached, a common ceiling effect is executed regardless of the special symbol type or the operation hold ball. It is preferable to do so. Secondly, for one game of the ceiling game (one rotation only), it is possible to prepare multiple variable pattern distribution tables according to the special symbol type and the operation hold ball, and perform various effects based on this. This is because the control burden is unnecessarily increased, which is not preferable from the viewpoint of the control burden. Also, in the case of hitting, the common "in-ceiling winning variation" is selected from the viewpoint of directing and reducing the control burden, as in the case of "loss" described above ("Ceiling winning variation" in FIG. 73). See the "Ceiling" column).

(Italy 103) In addition, in the changing production (production that can appear during the game) related to the winning fluctuation when the support time reduction is won, after once notifying the loss via reach (reach loss), the support time reduction There is a "support time reduction winning effect" that informs the winner of the event, but there is no effect such as giving a ceiling privilege (rushing into the ceiling time reduction) after the reach loss in the changing effect related to the ceiling change. This is because the ceiling privilege is not the concept of "winning" by the big hit lottery, but the privilege is given according to the number of games. However, when the above-mentioned "ceiling privilege lottery" is executed, the "ceiling privilege winning effect" that notifies that the ceiling privilege lottery has been won after the reach loss may be enabled for the effect related to the ceiling fluctuation. ..

(Ceiling fluctuations, support time reduction winning fluctuations)
The ceiling time reduction and the support time reduction give the same time reduction state, but the ceiling time reduction is a profit state that is activated when the number of ceiling games is reached, and the support time reduction is a profit state that is activated and rubbed after a big hit lottery. different. Therefore, the definite display time related to the ceiling fluctuation and the definite display time related to the support time reduction winning fluctuation can be determined as follows.
(Italy 84) The final display time differs depending on the ceiling fluctuation and the support time reduction winning fluctuation.
(Italy 85) Shorter support time The final display time for ceiling fluctuations is longer than the final display time for winning fluctuations.
(Italy 86) Support time reduction The final display time for winning fluctuations is longer than the final display time for ceiling fluctuations.
According to the above (I 84) to (I 86), the type of time saving state (ceiling time saving state, support time saving state) is used when notifying that the time saving state is entered by using each symbol stop period. ), An appropriate notification effect can be executed.

(Modification example related to fluctuation pattern selection processing: Fluctuation pattern forced overwrite processing)
(I 42) Also in the ceiling game, the fluctuation pattern is selected by the usual processing with reference to the fluctuation pattern distribution table (FIGS. 70, 72 to 73) related to the general mode or the precursor mode. The configuration may be such that the variable pattern specification command is forcibly overwritten according to the winning type. For example, if the jackpot lottery result in the ceiling game is lost, refer to the variation pattern distribution table related to the precursor mode (general mode may be used) shown in FIG. 73 (the game immediately before the ceiling game is in the precursor mode). Therefore, here, even in the ceiling game, refer to the fluctuation pattern distribution table related to the precursor mode as it is: refer to any of FH70 to FH73 depending on the lottery result, the number of pending balls, etc.), and one fluctuation pattern ( The fluctuation pattern specification command) is selected, but in the ceiling game, the fluctuation pattern is forcibly updated to a specific fluctuation pattern, for example, the fluctuation pattern specification command "A014H" (ceiling fluctuation), and the fluctuation corresponding to this is selected. Try to set the time. Even in this way, it is possible to determine a specific fluctuation pattern in the ceiling game. In this case, it is possible to select the ceiling variation and execute the effect related to this without changing the program as much as possible.
(I 43) In the case of a big hit or a short support time (including a normal small hit if a normal small hit is provided), similarly, after performing the usual fluctuation pattern selection process, a specific is forcibly specified. The hit variation pattern (specific variation pattern specification command) may be overwritten.

(30-2-1. About the production in the ceiling mode)
During the ceiling mode, the mode shifts to the "ceiling effect mode", which produces an effect for notifying the arrival of the ceiling. This ceiling effect mode is an effect mode dedicated to the ceiling (1000th game), and in the case of the present embodiment, it is an effect mode for one game only (one rotation only). As an example of the effect in the ceiling effect mode, for example, "Ceiling rush effect 781" shown in Remark 1 of FIG. 61B. As the ceiling rush effect 781, for example, a decorative symbol at the time of the ceiling (decorative symbol for the ceiling) is displayed, which is at least different from the normal mode (number symbols 1 to 9). The reason for choosing "at least a decorative pattern different from the normal mode" is that the ceiling is reached when a large hamari is encountered in the normal mode (normal state), and it is different from the decorative pattern that has appeared in the normal mode for a long time. This is because it is appropriate to make different decorative patterns appear and notify the arrival of the ceiling.

Specifically, the decorative design for the ceiling is a dedicated design (decorative design for the ceiling) displaying a special character, item, or character, and is preferably a design having a strong impact in terms of effect. For example, FIG. 61B. It is a decorative pattern 785 (decorative pattern of "heaven", "☆", and "well") shown in Remark 1. The usual decorative symbol rows are the right symbol, the middle symbol, and the left symbol (see FIG. 61B), but the ceiling decorative symbol row does not necessarily have to be the three symbol rows. For example, it can be four symbol rows of "heaven", "well", "arrival", and "tatsu", or two symbol rows of "heaven" and "well". Further, in order to emphasize that it reaches the ceiling, a huge decorative symbol having a larger display area than a normal decorative symbol or a symbol with a predetermined effect image may be used. In addition, regarding the decorative symbols related to the ceiling game, normal decorative symbols are used during variable display (all or part of the decorative symbols are the same), and only the decorative symbols that are finally stopped (decorative stop symbols) are used as the decorative symbols for the ceiling. May be good. In addition, a dedicated character image 777 appears as a background display of the decorative pattern. This character image 777 shows the same character image (see FIG. 6 (a)) that the support time reduction was won, but even if it is a dedicated character image (special effect) that appears only in the ceiling game. Good.

Further, in the figure, the same character image 778 as when the support time reduction is won is displayed, which means that the ceiling time reduction (ceiling privilege) is activated at the end of the above-mentioned "ceiling game end type". In consideration of the case of ", it is notified during the ceiling game that a time saving state will occur after the ceiling game ends (the same applies when infinite time saving, finite probability change, or infinite probability change is given as a ceiling privilege). The ceiling rushing effect 781 can be said to be one aspect of the above-mentioned "time saving rushing notification effect" in that it notifies that the ceiling is rushing in a short time.

On the other hand, when the ceiling time reduction is the above-mentioned "invocation type at the start of the ceiling game", the time reduction state occurs when the ceiling game (1000th game) starts, so that the player is not disadvantaged. Therefore, it is preferable to display a "right-handed instruction effect (launch guidance notification effect)" that encourages right-handed hitting (immediately notify that right-handedness is advantageous at the start of the game) at the start of the game (ceiling). The same applies when infinite time reduction, finite probability change, or infinite probability change is given as a privilege).

In addition, as a ceiling privilege, when a game state accompanied by an electric support state is given (especially when the activation type at the start of the ceiling game is adopted), at least a part of the period during the precursor mode (for example, immediately before the ceiling game). In the game (the final round of the precursor mode (999th rotation)), it is preferable to display the "pre-launch guidance notification effect" that notifies in advance that the game will soon shift to the "right-handed advantageous gaming state". In order to bring out the "pre-launch guidance notification effect", when the final game in the precursor mode is "missing", a specific fluctuation pattern (precursor final variation) can be selected (FIG. 73). Remark 1 See “Precursor Final Fluctuation”).

The above-mentioned "pre-launch guidance notification effect" is an effect of instructing "how to hit" in the game before the arrival of the game in which the electric support state occurs. In this respect, the conventional launch guidance notification effect such as instructing "right-handed" when the electric support state occurs, or instructing "left-handed" when the electric support state occurs. In other words, the character is different from the notification effect that instructs how to hit when the presence or absence of electric support actually occurs. In this respect, the pre-launch guidance notification effect is an effect peculiar to a gaming machine equipped with a ceiling function.

The above-mentioned "pre-launch guidance notification effect" is unique as an effect peculiar to a gaming machine equipped with a ceiling function, but in addition, the following peculiar effects can be produced.
(I35) After the ceiling change (see the "ceiling" column in Fig. 73) is completed (after the symbol confirmation display), if there is no operation hold ball, "waiting effect after reaching the ceiling" is used as the effect before waiting for customers. It can be made to appear. This "waiting effect after reaching the ceiling" is an effect of reaching the ceiling and notifying that the heaven time is shortened, and is an aspect of the effect before waiting for customers. In addition, the waiting effect after reaching the ceiling can be duplicated during the customer waiting effect (demo display).
(I 36) After the ceiling change is completed (after the symbol confirmation is displayed), the right-handed instruction effect is continuously displayed even when there is no operation holding ball. This right-handed instruction effect can continue to appear even during the customer waiting effect (demo display). It should be noted that this right-handed instruction effect can continue to appear at least between the customer waiting effect and the customer waiting effect. In this case, it can be a dedicated right-handed instruction effect (right-handed instruction effect while waiting for customers) that appears while waiting for customers and is different from other right-handed instruction effects.

Further, in the case of "missing" in the symbol variation display game of the ceiling game (1000th game), it is preferable not to display a specific advance notice effect. For example, at least one of the high-expectation notice effects does not appear, or at least one of the pseudo-ream, reach effect, and player participation type effect does not appear. The reason is that there is no need for a voluminous notice production that fuels the expectation of winning a big hit at the ceiling. However, this does not apply when a pseudo-ream, reach effect, player participation type effect, or the like is provided as a notice effect dedicated to the ceiling mode (ceiling game). However, in any case, in the ceiling game, it is preferable not to show a notice effect that instinctively arouses the expectation of winning, and when a notice effect such as a pseudo-ream, a reach effect, or a player participation type effect is displayed. Is preferably a ceiling-only production mode that is different from the production mode that appears in other production modes.

In addition, as a privilege of reaching the ceiling, a setting suggestion effect may appear. For example, a setting suggestion effect dedicated to the ceiling can be displayed. This is because giving the player useful information such as a setting guessing factor is useful for improving the player's motivation to play when he / she encounters Hamari. When the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the ceiling, the appearance rate may be 100%, or the setting suggestion effect may be displayed with a predetermined lottery probability. Further, what kind of setting suggestion effect is to appear can be appropriately determined, but it is preferable that the appearance rate is at least higher than that in the normal mode (general mode, precursor mode). Further, it is preferable to display a setting suggestion effect having a high setting estimation element (for example, a setting suggestion effect such as setting 4 or more confirmed, setting 6 confirmed, setting 1 negated, etc.).

(I-44) On the other hand, in the ceiling game (1000th game), if a big hit (including support time reduction) is won by chance, the production related to the ceiling production mode is not displayed, but in the normal production mode (in the normal production mode). For example, it may be configured to display the notice effect when the big hit is won in the general mode or the precursor mode). Specifically, with reference to the "win / support time reduction winning fluctuation pattern distribution table (general, precursor mode)" shown in FIG. 70, the same fluctuation pattern as the normal mode (general, precursor mode) can be selected. It may be good (see the note in remarks column 5 of FIG. 71). This is because even if a big hit is made in a ceiling game, if the effect for the ceiling is made to appear, it becomes unclear whether it is a big hit or a ceiling privilege is given, and the player is confused.

(I 63) In addition, if a big hit (including support time reduction) is accidentally won in the ceiling game (1000th game), the ceiling rush effect 781 (see Remark 1 in FIG. 61B) or the time reduction rush notification effect (for example). , FIG. 61A (a), FIG. 6 (a), etc.), since there is a contradiction that the time saving rush is notified even though it is a big hit, it is preferable to perform the winning effect without showing such an effect. However, if you want to create a so-called "revival effect" type effect that once pretends to be lost and then notifies you of the winning, for example, the ceiling rush effect 781 (time saving rush notification effect) that is common to the time of loss is displayed. After issuing, the winning production can be made to appear.

In the case of the present embodiment, a variation pattern dedicated to winning (a variation in winning in the ceiling) can be selected (see the column of "ceiling" in FIG. 71), and an effect dedicated to the ceiling per hour related to the variation pattern is displayed. It is designed to be put out. If a support time reduction is provided, different fluctuation patterns may be selectable between when the jackpot is won and when the support time is shortened (see “Ceiling support time reduction winning variation” in Remark 5 of FIG. 71). ). Further, in order to reduce the control burden, a common fluctuation pattern (in-ceiling winning fluctuation) may be selected between the big hit winning and the support time shortening winning. In this case, in order to notify the winning type, it is preferable to display different production contents. The winning type can be grasped by the decorative pattern designation command, and different effects can be executed even if a common variation pattern is selected.

(30-3. About heaven mode)
The heaven mode is a game mode in which the game shifts to the ceiling game (after the 1000th rotation) or the next game of the ceiling game (1001st game), and the internal game state is shortened or changed depending on the ceiling privilege. Although it is a game mode related to such as, here, since an example in which "ceiling time reduction (time reduction number of times 100 times)" is given as a ceiling privilege is described, the ceiling mode according to the present embodiment is in a time reduction state (YJ). = 01H) is the related game mode. In addition, when shifting to this heaven mode, it is the case of ceiling benefits other than "forced hit" (finite time reduction, infinite time reduction, infinite probability variation, finite probability variation, infinite latency, or finite latency, etc.).

In addition, during the heaven mode, the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated to the dedicated "0AH" in order to select the fluctuation pattern dedicated to heaven (here, the fluctuation pattern selection mode dedicated to the time saving state due to the ceiling time reduction). (Updated to Tcode)).

The heaven mode is terminated at least when the jackpot is won, or when the specified number of time reductions or STs is completed without winning the jackpot if it is the above-mentioned limited ceiling privilege. Here, since the ceiling privilege is explained as "finite time reduction (time reduction 100 times)", the heaven mode is either when the time reduction 100 times is completed (shift to the general mode (normal state)) or the time reduction. It will be terminated if a big hit is won during the number of times digestion. Then, when the heaven mode ends, the mode shifts to the normal mode. If the ceiling privilege is finite probability variation or finite latency, it will end when the number of STs ends or if a big hit is won within that number of STs, and infinite time reduction, infinite probability variation and infinite latency In that case, it will be terminated when the big hit is won.

(Direction without heaven mode)
(I-64) In the present embodiment, as a ceiling privilege, a ceiling time reduction in which the number of time reductions is relatively small is given to the jackpot winning probability. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the number of time reductions of 100 due to the ceiling time reduction will be exhausted without winning the jackpot (for example, with setting 1, the probability of winning the jackpot within the number of time reductions of 100 is about 39%). On the other hand, if the number of time reductions for the ceiling time is 1000 rotations, the probability of winning a big hit is about 99%, but in any case, if the ceiling time reduction state is exited, the player is very addicted. In addition, if the ceiling time was not shortened, the feeling of disappointment became stronger. Therefore, for the final fluctuation related to the ceiling time shortening state, it is possible to select, for example, the normal fluctuation of the shortest fluctuation time at the time of loss, without showing a flashy effect and without making a long fluctuation pattern indiscriminately ( The selectivity may be 100%), and it is preferable that it slips out.

(About the lottery process of support time reduction during the time reduction state due to ceiling time reduction)
Here, when the support time reduction is provided as in the present embodiment, whether or not it is possible to shift to the time reduction state due to the support time reduction during the time reduction state due to the ceiling time reduction (hereinafter, also referred to as “ceiling time reduction state”). More specifically, the question is whether or not the support time reduction is the target of the lottery during the ceiling time reduction state, or whether the support time reduction is the target of the lottery but the winning is valid or invalid. Therefore, the following lottery forms (Italy 76) to (Italy 80) can be adopted depending on the playability.
(Italy 76) During the ceiling time reduction state, the support time reduction is excluded from the lottery. Specifically, by executing a big hit lottery that excludes the support time reduction from the lottery target, the support time reduction is treated as invalid and the support time reduction state is not given. In this case, since the support time reduction state is not given during the ceiling time reduction state, for example, when the support time reduction is lower in the profit state (advantage) than the ceiling time reduction state, a fall transition occurs due to the support time reduction winning. It is suitable when you want to avoid it (the same applies to (Italy 77) described later).
(I77) During the ceiling time reduction state, a big hit lottery including the support time reduction is included in the lottery target, but even if the support time reduction is won, the winning is treated as invalid and the support time reduction state is not given. In this case, the winning of the support time reduction can be processed in the same manner as when the loss is won (when multiple types of loss are provided, the same process as when any of the losses is won can be performed. it can).
(Italy 78) A big hit lottery will be held that includes the support time reduction as a lottery target even during the ceiling time reduction state, and if the support time reduction is won, this will be treated effectively and the time reduction state will be shifted to the support time reduction state. In this case, contrary to the above-mentioned (I 77) and (I 78), it is possible to give the support time reduction state during the ceiling time reduction state. For example, the support time reduction is more profitable (advantageous degree) than the ceiling time reduction. If it is high, it is suitable when you want to make a promotion transition by winning a short support time.
(Italy 79) A big hit lottery that includes the support time reduction as a lottery target is performed during the ceiling time reduction state, and the number of time reductions given by the winning support time reduction is more than the number of time reductions given by the ceiling time reduction or the remaining time reduction number in the ceiling time reduction state. If there are many cases, the time will be shortened due to the winning support time reduction. In this case, only in the situation where "the number of remaining time reductions in the ceiling time reduction state <the number of time reductions due to the support time reduction", the number of times of the winning support time reduction is updated (overwritten) to the number of remaining time reductions in the current ceiling time reduction state. It is possible to give the player an advantageous number of time reductions.
(Italy 80) There are one or more types of support time reductions for the big hit lottery target on the special figure 1 side, but there is no support time reduction type for the big hit lottery target on the special figure 2 side, and the support time reduction is won even during the ceiling time reduction state. Is treated as valid. As in this embodiment, left-handed advantage when there is no electric support (it is advantageous for the player to receive the lottery on the special figure 1 side), and right-handed advantage when there is no electric support (special figure 2 side). It is possible to make it difficult to win in the support time reduction during the ceiling time reduction state in which the right-handed advantage is achieved in the gaming machine in which it is advantageous for the player to receive the lottery. During the ceiling time reduction discharge, the main game is to receive a big hit lottery on the special figure 2 side where the support time reduction is not subject to the lottery, so unless there is a special figure 1 operation pending ball due to irregular winning etc., support Don't win in a short time. In this case, the special figure 1 side performs a big hit lottery targeting the support time reduction and its winning process (giving the support time reduction state), and in the normal state (left-handed advantage), the support time reduction acts as an addictive relief function. On the other hand, in the ceiling time reduction state (right-handed advantage), it is suitable when it is desired to prevent the time reduction state from being substantially extended by the support time reduction winning or the ceiling time reduction from ending by the support time reduction winning.

In addition, when the winning of the support time reduction is effectively treated during the ceiling time reduction state, that is, when it is possible to grant the support time reduction state by the support time reduction state during the ceiling time reduction state, the following (Italy 81) to (Italy) It can have the configuration of 83).
(Italy 81-1) If the support time reduction is won during the ceiling time reduction state, the support time reduction number of times is added to the above-mentioned "special symbol time reduction counter (residual time reduction count means)". In this case, since the time saving state can be extended, the degree of freedom in game playability can be expanded, and a situation advantageous for the player can be generated.
(Italy 81-2) If the support time reduction is won during the ceiling time reduction state, the counting (subtraction) of the remaining time reduction number in the ceiling time reduction state is interrupted, and the time reduction number due to the support time reduction is preferentially digested. When the number of time reductions due to the support time reduction is exhausted (when the support time reduction state ends due to the support time reduction), the remaining time reduction count of the suspended ceiling time reduction state can be restarted. In this case, a first counting means for counting the number of remaining time reductions in the ceiling time reduction state (ceiling time reduction residual number counter) and a second counting means for counting the remaining time reduction number in the support time reduction state (support time reduction residual number counter) are provided. Just do it. According to this configuration, it is possible to substantially extend the time saving state by preferentially digesting the number of time saving of the support time saving. In addition, since the number of remaining time reductions in the ceiling time reduction state is not updated to the number of time reductions due to the support time reduction due to the support time reduction winning, both the benefits of the ceiling time reduction and the benefits of the support time reduction winning can be given to the player. ..
(Italy 82) If the support time reduction is won during the ceiling time reduction state, the time reduction number due to the support time reduction is put on hold (stock state), and the time reduction number due to the ceiling time reduction is preferentially digested (the above ceiling). Priority is given to counting (digesting) the time-saving residual count counter). When the number of time reductions due to the ceiling time reduction is exhausted (when the ceiling time reduction state ends due to the time reduction number digestion), the time reduction number due to the support time reduction that was in the pending state is exhausted (counting by the support time reduction residual number counter is started). According to this configuration, even if the player exits the ceiling time reduction state without winning any big hit, if the support time reduction is won during the ceiling time reduction state, the time reduction state due to the support time reduction is completed after the ceiling time reduction is completed. Is started, so the time saving state can be substantially extended. In addition, since the number of remaining time reductions in the ceiling time reduction state is not updated to the number of time reductions due to the support time reduction due to the support time reduction winning, both the benefits of the ceiling time reduction and the benefits of the support time reduction winning can be given to the player. .. In addition, since the ceiling time reduction state and the support time reduction state are not executed alternately, it is possible to determine whether the current time reduction state is given by the ceiling time reduction or the support time reduction. It will be easy.
(Italy 83) If the support time is shortened during the ceiling time reduction state, the support time reduction residual number counter is also consumed in parallel with the ceiling time reduction residual number counter. In this case, if the value of the support time reduction residual number counter is larger than the value of the ceiling time reduction residual number counter, the time reduction state is substantially extended, and the value of the support time reduction residual number counter is smaller than the value of the ceiling time reduction residual number counter. For example, the ceiling time reduction state can be terminated as usual. According to this configuration, if the support time is shortened in a timely manner without impairing the benefits of the ceiling time reduction, the time reduction state is substantially extended, so that the fun of the game can be improved.

(About the ceiling time saving game and the big hit normal power opening game) The ceiling time saving state and the big hit time saving state are the same time saving state, but the operation mode of the normal power opening game related to the ceiling time saving state (hereinafter, "ceiling time saving") The relationship between the "Public Opening Game") and the big hit Public Opening Game can be configured as follows.
(I-24) At least the ceiling time-shortening general-purpose open game and the big hit general-purpose open game are common. It should be noted that the ceiling time-saving public power opening game and the jackpot public power opening game and the support time-saving public power opening game may be common or different. By standardizing the ceiling time-shortening normal power opening game and the big hit public power opening game, it is possible to reduce the number of programs related to the public power opening game. In addition, at the development stage, it becomes easy to calculate the ball output rate during the electric support state. Further, depending on how the production is shown, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the ceiling time is shortened or the jackpot time is shortened.
(I-25) At least the ceiling time saving general public opening game and the big hit general public opening game are different. In this case, the degree of advantage (profit state) may be lower or higher in the jackpot normal electric open game than in the ceiling time shortened public electric open game. From the viewpoint of the big addiction relief function, it is preferable that the ceiling time shortening normal power opening game has a higher degree of advantage (the ball output rate is high) than the big hit normal power opening game. In the case of this configuration, even in the same time saving state, the winning rate can be made different between the ceiling time saving state and the big hit time saving state, so that the game playability is improved. The jackpot open game, the ceiling time short open game, and the support time short open game may be different from each other. In addition, either the jackpot open game, the ceiling time shortened normal open game, or the support time shortened public open game may be common.

(About the ceiling time-saving public power opening game and the support time-saving public power opening game)
The ceiling time reduction state and the support time reduction state are the same time reduction state, but the relationship between the ceiling time reduction normal power opening game and the support time reduction public power opening game can be configured as follows.
(Italy 91) At least, the ceiling time-saving public power opening game and the support time-saving public power opening game are common. It should be noted that the ceiling time-shortening normal power opening game, the support time-saving public power opening game, and the jackpot public power opening game may be common or different. By standardizing the ceiling time-saving public power opening game and the support time-saving public power opening game, it is possible to reduce the number of programs related to the public power opening game. In addition, at the development stage, it becomes easy to calculate the ball output rate during the electric support state. Further, depending on how the production is shown, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the ceiling time is shortened or the support time is shortened.
(Italy 92) At least the ceiling time-saving public power opening game and the support time-saving public power opening game are different. In this case, the degree of advantage (profit state) may be lower or higher in the support time-saving public power opening game than in the ceiling time-saving public power opening game. From the viewpoint of the large addiction relief function, it is preferable that the ceiling time-saving public power opening game has a higher degree of advantage than the support time-saving public power opening game. In the case of this configuration, even if the time is the same, the winning rate can be different between the ceiling time reduction state and the support time reduction state, so that the playability is improved. The jackpot open game, the ceiling time short open game, and the support time short open game may be different from each other. In addition, either the jackpot open game, the ceiling time shortened normal open game, or the support time shortened public open game may be common.

(About decorative patterns during shortened ceiling time)
The display mode of the decorative symbol in the support time saving state can be configured as follows.
(I 28) At least decorative symbols in the ceiling time reduction state (for example, arithmetic numerals) and decorative symbols in the normal state (for example, Chinese numerals) or jackpot time reduction state (for example, Roman numerals or Chinese numerals). Is a different decorative pattern. In this case, since the decorative design differs depending on the game state, the production becomes diverse. In addition, it becomes easier for the player to grasp that the ceiling time is shortened. In addition, since the decorative design can be displayed while waiting for customers (for example, the effect before waiting for customers), when the player selects the game table, it is easy for the player to simply check the display screen to shorten the ceiling time. Can be identified.
(I-29) At least the decorative design in the ceiling time reduction state (for example, arithmetic numerals) and the decorative design in the normal state (for example, Chinese numerals) are different. It should be noted that the decorative symbol in the jackpot time saving state, one of the decorative symbol in the ceiling time saving state and the decorative symbol in the normal state may be common, or different decorative symbols (for example, in the jackpot time saving state). The decorative pattern of may be Roman numerals). In this case, since the decorative design differs depending on the game state, the production becomes diverse. In addition, since the decorative design can be displayed while waiting for customers (for example, the effect before waiting for customers), when the player selects the game table, he or she only needs to check the display screen to see if the ceiling time is shortened. Can be easily identified.
(I-30) At least, the stop display mark of the decorative symbol after the power failure is restored in the ceiling time reduction state and the stop display mark of the decorative symbol after the power failure recovery in the normal state are different. When a player or a person involved in the hall grasps the state of the first game table in the morning, it is possible to easily grasp whether the ceiling time is shortened or the normal state. It should be noted that either the stop display mark of the decorative symbol after the power failure recovery in the ceiling time reduction state or the stop display mark of the decorative symbol after the power failure recovery in the normal state is after the power failure recovery in the support time reduction state. It may be the same stop display as the stop display and / or the stop display after the power failure is restored during the jackpot time reduction state, or it may be a different stop display. According to this configuration, when a player or a person involved in a hall grasps the state of the game table in the morning, it is possible to easily grasp whether the ceiling time is shortened or the normal state. It should be noted that either the stop display mark of the decorative symbol after the power failure recovery in the ceiling time reduction state or the stop display mark of the decorative symbol after the power failure recovery in the normal state is after the power failure recovery in the support time reduction state. It may be the same stop display as the stop display and / or the stop display after the power failure is restored during the jackpot time reduction state, or it may be a different stop display.

(Regarding the decorative design during the ceiling time reduction state and the decorative design during the support time reduction state)
The ceiling time reduction state and the support time reduction state are the same time reduction state, but the display mode of the decorative pattern can be configured as follows.
(Italy 97) The decorative design in the ceiling time reduction state (for example, arithmetic numbers) and the decoration design in the support time reduction state are used as a common decorative design. The decorative symbol in the jackpot time saving state may be a common decorative symbol or a different decorative symbol (for example, Roman numerals). In this case, even if the support time is shortened during the ceiling time reduction state, it is not necessary to change the decorative design each time, and the common decorative design can be used, so that the player feels uncomfortable or uncomfortable. It can make it difficult to give pleasure. It also contributes to reducing the control burden.
(Italy 98) At least the decorative symbols (for example, arithmetic numerals) in the ceiling time reduction state and the decorative symbols (for example, Chinese numerals) in the support time reduction state are different. It should be noted that either the decorative symbol in the jackpot time saving state, the decorative symbol in the ceiling time saving state, or the decorative symbol in the support time saving state may be common, or different decorative symbols (for example, the jackpot time saving state) may be shared. The decorative pattern inside may be Roman numerals). In this case, since the decorative design differs depending on the game state, the production becomes diverse. In addition, since the decorative design can be displayed while waiting for customers (for example, the effect before waiting for customers), when the player selects the game table, the time saving state type (at least during the ceiling time saving state) can be displayed simply by checking the display screen. And which one is in the support time reduction state) can be easily identified.
(Italy 99) At least, the stop display item of the decorative symbol after the power failure is restored during the ceiling time reduction state and the stop display item of the decorative symbol after the power failure recovery state during the support time reduction state are common stop display items. In this case, if the ceiling time reduction state and the support time reduction state are the same production mode, when the player selects the game table in the morning, the ceiling time reduction state or the support time reduction state can be achieved simply by checking the display screen. Since it cannot be identified inside, it is necessary to actually play the game, which can contribute to the utilization rate of the hall. In addition, the stop display mark of the decorative symbol after the power failure recovery in the ceiling time reduction state is the same as the stop display mark in the normal state after the power failure recovery and / or the stop display mark in the jackpot time reduction state after the power failure recovery. It may be a display eye, or it may be a different stop display eye.
(Italy 100) At least, the stop display eyes of the decorative symbol after the power failure is restored during the ceiling time reduction state and the stop display eyes of the decorative symbol after the power failure recovery during the support time reduction state are different. According to this configuration, when the player or the person involved in the hall grasps the state of the game table in the morning, it is possible to easily grasp whether the ceiling time is shortened or the support time is shortened. It should be noted that either one of the stop display mark of the decorative symbol after the power failure recovery in the ceiling time reduction state and the stop display mark of the decorative symbol after the power failure recovery in the support time reduction state are after the power failure recovery in the normal state. It may be the same stop display as the stop display and / or the stop display after the power failure is restored during the jackpot time reduction state, or it may be a different stop display.
Further, in this configuration, in the case where the jackpot time saving state and the ceiling time saving state are the common stop display eyes and the common time saving effect mode is used, at least whether or not the support time saving state is in the support time saving state can be identified. is there. Further, when the jackpot time reduction state and the support time reduction state have a common stop display and a common effect mode, it is possible to identify at least whether or not the ceiling time reduction state is in effect.
Since the normal state is the "normal effect mode", it is possible to identify that the normal state is in progress even if the stop display eyes are the same by looking at the background image or the like. Of course, when each time saving state has a different time saving effect mode, it is possible to grasp which time saving state is in the background image or the like related to the effect mode.

(About the hold display mode during the ceiling time reduction state and the hold display mode during the support time reduction state)
The ceiling time reduction state and the support time reduction state are the same time reduction state, but the hold display mode (hold icon) can be configured as follows.
(Italy 101) At least, the hold display mode during the ceiling time reduction state and the hold display mode during the support time reduction state are different. In this case, since the hold display can be different depending on the game state between the ceiling time reduction and the support time reduction, the variation of the production becomes diverse. In addition, since the hold display changes between the ceiling time reduction state and the support time reduction state, it becomes easier for the player to identify which time reduction state the player is in.
(Italy 102) At least, the hold display mode during the ceiling time reduction state and the hold display mode during the support time reduction state are common. Even if the support time is shortened and the support time is changed during the ceiling time reduction state, it is not necessary to change the hold display each time, which leads to a reduction in the control burden.

(About the look-ahead notice during the ceiling time reduction state and the look-ahead notice during the support time reduction state)
The ceiling time reduction state and the support time reduction state are the same time reduction state, but the look-ahead notice can be configured as follows.
(I-66) A look-ahead notice that suggests the expected degree of winning of the support time reduction, and a look-ahead notice effect that notifies in advance that a ceiling privilege (in this embodiment, the ceiling time reduction) will be given to the operation-holding ball of the number of ceiling games. It is a different production mode from. The reason for using different production modes is that while it is known that ceiling benefits will be given in a predetermined number of games, the support time reduction will be decided through a big hit lottery, and the games will be decided in advance. This is because it is not given by number. It should be noted that the pre-reading notice that suggests the winning expectation of the short support time and the pre-reading notice that suggests the winning expectation of the big hit may be a common production mode or a different production mode.
(Italy 104) A common look-ahead notice can be executed between the ceiling time reduction state and the support time reduction state. Since a common look-ahead notice can be executed during the ceiling time reduction state and the support time reduction state, the control burden can be reduced. When emphasizing the diversification and diversification of the production, different pre-reading notices may be executed between the ceiling time reduction state and the support time reduction state. The look-ahead notice during the ceiling time saving state and / or the support time saving state and the look-ahead notice during the jackpot time saving state may be common or different.
(Italy 105) The first predetermined number of games (corresponding to the pre-reading notice in a part of the precursor mode) before entering the ceiling mode (before reaching the ceiling game: before 1000 games) and the winning operation pending ball with a short support time occur. The second predetermined number of games after the game can be set as a look-ahead notice prohibition section that prohibits execution of the look-ahead notice. In this case, "the first predetermined number of games = the second predetermined number of games" (for example, the same four times as the maximum reserved memory number) may be used, or a different number of games (for example, the first predetermined number of games is one time). The second predetermined number of games may be 4 times, etc.).
(Italy 106) The first predetermined number of games before entering the ceiling mode (corresponding to the look-ahead notice in a part of the precursor mode) prohibits the execution of the look-ahead notice (see, for example, Fig. 62 below), and the support time is shortened. Such operation hold ball does not prohibit pre-reading notice.
(Italy 107) The operation-holding ball related to the ceiling change prohibits the execution of the look-ahead notice (see FIG. 62 described later), and the operation-holding ball related to the support time reduction winning does not prohibit the look-ahead notice.

(About the setting suggestion effect during the ceiling time reduction state)
(I26) It is possible to execute a plurality of setting suggestion effects, and the execution of a part or all of the plurality of setting suggestion effects is prohibited (restricted) during the ceiling time reduction state. Alternatively, the execution probability can be different from that of other gaming states. These include the following (I 26-1) to (I 26-4).
(I 26-1) During the ceiling time reduction state, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect can be made lower than that in the normal state. In this case, the execution probability of one or more specific setting suggestion effects can be lowered.
(I 26-2) During the ceiling time reduction state, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect can be higher than that in the normal state. In this case, the appearance rate of one or more specific setting suggestion effects can be increased.
(I 26-2) During the ceiling time reduction state, the execution of one or more specific setting suggestion effects can be prohibited (restricted). The specific setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but for example, when the setting suggestion effect as shown in (a) to (shi) above can be executed, the execution of at least one setting suggestion effect may be prohibited. it can. Specifically, during the ceiling time reduction state, the execution of the setting suggestion effect having a low usefulness as a setting guessing element, for example, the even number setting suggestion effect of the above (g) and the odd number setting suggestion effect of the above (yu) is prohibited. Is preferable.
(I 26-3) There is one or more setting suggestion effects that appear only during the ceiling time reduction state. For example, only in the state of shortening the ceiling time, the setting N final effect of the above (me), which is highly useful as a setting estimation element, can appear.
According to this configuration, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion notice can be changed according to the game state. In addition, a specific setting suggestion effect can be made to appear only in a specific game state (ceiling time reduction state). As a result, the production can be made diverse and the fun of the game can be improved.

(About the hold display area related to the ceiling time reduction state)
(I 31) The ceiling game ends (here, at the end of the fluctuation time of the symbol related to the ceiling fluctuation (see FIG. 67), during the final display time of the symbol, or when the final display time of the symbol has elapsed (FIGS. 68A to 68B). (See))) can be used as an opportunity to display the hold display area 77 (hold display area on the special figure 2 side) in the above-mentioned emphasis (priority). When the hold display area 77 is to be emphasized, it can be displayed. As described above, the hold display area 77 may be displayed preferentially, the hold display area 77 may be displayed larger, the hold display area 76 side may be hidden, and the like.
When the support time is shortened in the symbol variation display game 1 on the special figure 1 side, it is preferable to change the priority of the hold display from the special figure 1 side to the special figure 2 side at the timing when the winning game ends (). During the support time reduction state, it is advantageous to hit right, and the symbol variation display game on the special figure 2 side is the main). By changing the priority of the hold display at the timing when the game on the special figure 1 side ends, before the first special figure 2 side symbol variation display game in the support time reduction state is started, The hold display of the special figure 2 can be preferentially displayed.

(About the production mode during the ceiling time reduction state and the production mode during the support time reduction state)
The ceiling time reduction state and the support time reduction state are the same time reduction state, but the effect mode can be configured as follows.
(Italy 108) The effect mode related to the ceiling time reduction state and the effect mode related to the support time reduction state can be set as a common effect mode. For example, both can be set to the heaven effect mode, or both can be set to the time saving effect mode. When the time saving effect mode is set, any of the time saving effect modes 1 to 4 may be used, starting from the time saving effect mode 1 and according to the number of games, the time saving effect mode 1 ⇒ time saving effect mode 2 ⇒ time saving effect mode 3 ". It may be migrated (see FIG. 7B). By using the same production mode, the control burden can be reduced.
(Italy 109) The effect mode related to the ceiling time reduction state and the effect mode related to the support time reduction state can be set to different effect modes. For example, the effect mode related to the ceiling time reduction state may be the heaven effect mode, and the effect mode related to the support time reduction state may be any of the time reduction effect modes 1 to 4, starting from the time reduction effect mode 1 and playing the game. Depending on the number, the time saving effect mode 1 ⇒ time saving effect mode 2 ⇒ time saving effect mode 3 ”may be shifted (see FIG. 7B). By setting different production modes, it is possible to produce various effects.

(Regarding the management form of the ceiling time reduction state and the jackpot time reduction state)
The ceiling time saving state and the jackpot time saving state are the same time saving state, but the internal gaming state can be configured as follows.
(I 32) As the internal gaming state managed by the main control unit 20, at least the ceiling time saving state and the jackpot time saving state can be managed as one winning easy state (electric support state). In this case, the flag indicating that the ceiling time is shortened and the flag indicating that the jackpot time is shortened may be managed by the "common flag (second specific time shortened flag)". By using a common flag for both, it will lead to a reduction in RAM capacity. Further, the data to the effect control unit 24 and the transmission processing thereof can be easily shared, and the program capacity and the data capacity can be reduced.
(I 33) As the internal gaming state managed by the main control unit 20, at least the ceiling time saving state and the jackpot time saving state can be managed as different winning easy states. For example, the game state determination number YJ related to the ceiling time reduction state is 04H, the game state determination number YJ related to the jackpot time reduction state is 07H, and the like, and they can be managed as different internal game states. According to this configuration, since the ceiling time saving state and the jackpot time saving state can be managed by individual flags, each gaming state can be easily grasped on the main control unit 20 side. In addition, it becomes easy to execute the process according to the game state according to the game situation. For example, different information can be transmitted to the effect control unit 24 regarding the ceiling time reduction state and the jackpot time reduction state. As a result, on the effect control unit 24 side, it is possible to shift to different effect modes in the ceiling time reduction state and the jackpot time reduction state, and to easily execute different effects.
(I 61) As the internal gaming state managed by the main control unit 20, the ceiling time reduction state is configured to be manageable as different from other internal gaming states. Specifically, when the gaming machine 1 is capable of executing a probability variation state, a latent probability state, a time reduction state, and a normal state (4 states) as internal gaming states other than the ceiling time reduction state, all of these four states are available. Manage the ceiling time reduction state as a different internal gaming state. That is, the ceiling time reduction state is managed as the fifth internal gaming state. That is, when the gaming machine 1 can execute one or a plurality of internal gaming states other than the ceiling time saving state, the ceiling time saving state is configured to be manageable as an internal gaming state different from any of them. In this case, there are the following advantages.
(A) Based on winning a big hit during the ceiling time saving state, for example, the start INT and / or the ending INT during the big hit game is defined as another time saving state (for example, a big hit time saving state or a support time saving state). You can perform jackpot games with different time widths. In particular, the jackpot during the ceiling time reduction state is treated as the "first hit" in the same way as when the jackpot is won during the normal state, so the ceiling time reduction state is managed as an internal gaming state different from other internal gaming states. This is because it is preferable to be able to do it. The reason is that, for example, if the ceiling time saving state is treated in the same line as other time saving states (for example, big hit time saving state), it will be judged as a big hit during the time saving state, and it is actually a "first hit". This is because there is a problem that it is treated as a consecutive villa. In addition, when counting the number of consecutive villas and when displaying the result effect, it is necessary to distinguish the big hit in the ceiling time saving state from the big hit time saving state. In addition, the time saving state includes a big hit time saving state due to a time saving big hit, a time saving state after exiting the probability change state due to a probability change time saving big hit (the time saving state after the number of STs is digested), a support time saving state, etc. There is a big advantage when you want to treat as a time saving state different from these time saving states.

(Regarding the management form of the ceiling time reduction state and the support time reduction state)
The ceiling time reduction state and the support time reduction state are the same time reduction state, but the internal game state can be configured as follows.
(Italy 110) As the internal gaming state managed by the main control unit 20, at least the ceiling time saving state and the support time saving state can be configured to be manageable as one winning easy state (electric support state). In this case, the flag indicating that the ceiling time is shortened and the flag indicating that the support time is shortened may be managed by the "common flag (third specific time shortened flag)". By using a common flag for both, it will lead to a reduction in RAM capacity. Further, the data to the effect control unit 24 and the transmission processing thereof can be easily shared, and the program capacity and the data capacity can be reduced.
(Italy 111) As the internal gaming state managed by the main control unit 20, at least the ceiling time saving state and the support time saving state can be managed as different easy-to-win states. For example, the game state determination number YJ related to the ceiling time reduction state is 04H, the game state determination number YJ related to the support time reduction state is 05H, and the like, and they can be managed as different internal game states. According to this configuration, since the ceiling time reduction state and the support time reduction state can be managed by individual flags, each game state can be easily grasped on the main control unit 20 side. In addition, it becomes easy to execute the process according to the game state according to the game situation. For example, different information can be transmitted to the effect control unit 24 regarding the ceiling time reduction state and the support time reduction state. As a result, on the effect control unit 24 side, it is possible to shift to different effect modes between the ceiling time reduction state and the support time reduction state, and to easily execute different effects.
(Italy 112) As the internal gaming state managed by the main control unit 20, either the ceiling time saving state or the support time saving state can be managed as a winning easy state common to the jackpot time saving state. In this case, similarly to the above (Italy 111), the ceiling time reduction state and the support time reduction state are managed as different winning easy states (internal gaming state), and therefore have the same advantages as the above (Italy 111).

(About the production after the power failure is restored)
(Other 1) If the gaming machine is turned off and then restored before reaching the ceiling game (before entering heaven mode) (the number of remaining ceiling games is not cleared by mere power cut, but is cleared by RAM clear processing. ), It is possible to execute an effect (notification effect when the power is restored) according to the number of residual ceiling games. For example, even if the production mode is the same when the power is cut off and when the power is restored, it is possible to execute a notification effect when the power is cut off (for example, a production with a different background effect) according to the number of residual ceiling games. Can be configured. Specifically, the number of residual ceiling games corresponds to 1 to 300 (first residual ceiling game number section), 301 to 600 (second residual ceiling game number section), 601-999 (third residual ceiling game number section). The notification effect is executed when the power is restored. The number of residual ceiling games can be determined as appropriate. According to this configuration, when a player selects a game table in the morning, it is possible to provide a situation advantageous to the player side that a table close to the ceiling game can be selected. On the other hand, since it is easy to see the platform close to the ceiling game on the hall side, the profit of the hall is adjusted by clearing the game table near the ceiling in RAM (clearing the number of remaining ceiling games) or leaving it as it is. Will be possible.

(Other 2) The notification effect when the power is restored may be executed only for a predetermined period after the power is restored (for example, until the customer waiting effect (demo display) is executed and a predetermined time elapses). Further, the above-mentioned "game state notification LED" may be different depending on the number of residual ceiling games (a game state notification LED dedicated to notification of the number of residual ceiling games may be provided).

(Other 3) Further, at least in the first game (first rotation) after the power is restored, a notification effect at the time of power failure restoration may be executed according to the number of remaining ceiling games. In this case, it is possible to give an estimation factor of the number of residual ceiling games to the player who first started the game on the game table. Since it is not preferable to give an estimation factor of the number of residual ceiling games indiscriminately, it is appropriate to execute the notification effect at the time of power failure recovery only in the first game after the power is restored.

(7-5-1. Fluctuation state related to heaven mode)
Here, during the heaven mode, any of the above-mentioned high-speed fluctuation states, medium-speed fluctuation states, low-speed fluctuation states, and other fluctuation states can be adopted. However, it is preferable to determine the fluctuation state in the heaven mode according to the ceiling privilege type. For example, when the ceiling privilege is finite time reduction or infinite time reduction, it is preferable to position it as a game mode that emphasizes playability such as "enjoying the production" as in the time reduction mode. However, in the case of infinite time reduction, considering that there is no limit to the number of time reductions, it is set as a dedicated high-speed fluctuation state (for example, a fluctuation state equal to or faster than the time reduction mode 3 or probability variation mode 1). May be good. In this embodiment, in consideration of the fact that the heaven time reduction is a finite time reduction, the same fluctuation pattern as in the time reduction mode 2 can be selected, and it is defined that the fluctuation states are substantially the same (“Heaven (” in FIG. 73). Time reduction) ”column, refer to the distribution rate of fluctuation patterns). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be the fastest fluctuation state in all game modes. Further, it may be the same as any of the time saving modes 1 to 4.

On the other hand, in the case of finite probability variation or infinite probability variation, the jackpot lottery probability is high in addition to the electric support state, so it is the same as the fastest fluctuation state in all game modes or the high speed fluctuation state in probability variation mode 1. Alternatively, it is preferable that the fluctuation states are substantially the same. On the other hand, in the case of infinite latency or finite latency grant, the jackpot lottery probability is high, but it is controlled under the state without electric support, so it is difficult for the operation holding ball to occur as in the normal state. .. In consideration of this point, in the case of infinite latency or finite latency grant, the fluctuation state is the same as or substantially the same as the normal mode, or at least the fluctuation state slower than the time reduction mode 3 (time reduction medium high speed fluctuation state) (average digestion). It is preferable to set the time to a relatively long fluctuation state).

(7-5-2. About the production in heaven mode)
During the heaven mode, the mode shifts to the "heaven production mode" that performs the production related to the heaven mode (the production for heaven). This heaven effect mode is shifted after the end of the ceiling game, or is a dedicated effect mode for the next game or later (1001st game or later), and ends when the heaven mode ends. During this heaven effect mode, the background display is switched to a special background display different from other game modes (for example, a "space background image" expressing outer space), and the heaven mode is notified. In addition, the remaining time reduction number of notification effects can be configured to be executable even in the heaven mode.

In addition, when giving a finite time reduction or an infinite time reduction as a ceiling privilege, as described above, when shifting the game mode to a game mode belonging to the time reduction mode, the heaven effect production mode is a time reduction effect mode (for example, Any of the time saving effect modes 1 to 4) can be adopted. Of course, a time saving effect mode (not shown) dedicated to other heavens may be provided. In any case, the production mode corresponding to the game mode may be used.

(Benefits in heaven mode)
In the heaven mode, in order to improve the playing motivation of the player who is addicted to the game, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect may be higher in the heaven mode than in the other game modes. That is, the heaven mode may be made to function as a "setting suggestion appearance chance zone" in which the setting suggestion effect is changed with a high probability. For example, the heaven mode changes the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect (particularly, the setting suggestion effect that can appear in the symbol variation display game) with a higher probability than at least the normal mode (general mode and / or precursor mode).

(Modified example of heaven mode)
(Other 4) In the first first rotation game in the heaven mode, a specific loss fluctuation pattern (variation at the time of entering heaven: see Remark 2 in FIG. 73) can be selectively configured. This fluctuation at the time of entering heaven is defined as a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is relatively long (for example, a fluctuation pattern longer than at least the longest loss fluctuation pattern: 36s in this case), and this fluctuation time is used. Then, at the first rotation after entering the heaven mode (preferably triggered by the start of the game of the first rotation (start of the symbol variation display)), at least a right-handed instruction effect, or at least a time-saving rush notification effect including a right-handed effect. Can be executed. In addition, since it is thought that many players will start right-handed after seeing this effect, it is possible to use the long fluctuation time of the fluctuation at the time of entering heaven to store the operation hold ball on the special figure 2 side. (It is possible to avoid the lottery on the special figure 1 side, which has a low degree of advantage). In addition, this example is suitable when the ceiling time reduction of the type activated at the end of the ceiling game is adopted.

Also, if you happen to win a big hit in the first game of the first rotation in heaven mode (if you include the support time reduction as a big hit lottery target, including the case where the support time reduction is won), a specific hit fluctuation pattern ( Winning fluctuation at the time of entering heaven: See Remark 6 in Fig. 71) can be configured to be selectable. As an effect related to the change in winning at the time of rushing into heaven, for example, after executing a part of the time-saving rush notification effect and a common effect (a part of the time-saving rush notification effect and the effect related to the big hit), the big hit It is possible to execute an effect related to winning (for example, an effect of notifying that it is a big hit). As a result, even if the jackpot is won in the first rotation of the game in heaven mode, a common effect is executed until the middle of the game between the jackpot and the loss, and then the jackpot and the loss. Since different effects are executed in, it is possible to prevent the player from easily realizing whether the game is a hit or a loss during the game (for example, immediately after the start of the game). In addition, at least when the winning fluctuation at the time of entering heaven is selected, the right-handed instruction effect (launch guidance notification effect) may be executed at the start of the game. Of course, it is possible to perform an effect that immediately reveals whether it is a hit or a loss. For example, in the case of a big hit, the big hit effect is performed without executing the time saving rush notification effect.

<9. About the specific advance notice production prohibition function in the precursor mode: Fig. 62>
Here, in the present embodiment, the specific notice effect prohibition function (specific notice effect prohibition means) operates during the precursor mode. Specifically, paying attention to the fact that the precursor mode is a game mode related to notification of the proximity of the ceiling and the ceiling mode is a game mode related to the granting of ceiling benefits, the precursor mode (precursor effect mode) and the ceiling mode (ceiling effect) Mode) prohibits the appearance of specific notice effects. In the case of the present embodiment, as the prohibition function, "pre-reading notice prohibiting means (specific look-ahead notice prohibiting means)" for prohibiting the execution of the pre-reading notice is provided. Hereinafter, “means for prohibiting pre-reading notice during precursors” will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 62.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a case where the look-ahead notice is prohibited by the means for prohibiting the look-ahead notice during the precursory sign. FIG. 62 describes a mode in which the “holding change notice” is treated as a prohibited object by the precursory pre-reading notice prohibiting means, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the “holding change notice” and / or “variation” is described as the prohibited object. It can be a "middle look-ahead notice".

(A. Configuration without pre-reading notice prohibition means (normal case): Fig. 62 (a))
A “normal case” will be described with reference to FIG. 62 (a). This "normal case" indicates a configuration in which the precursory middle-ahead advance notice prohibition means is not provided, and a configuration in which the precursory middle-ahead advance notice prohibition means described later is provided (Fig. (C-1) (c-2)). ) Is shown as a comparative example. The illustrated hold icon 770 is a "normal hold display (white hold)", and the hold icon 771 is a "high expectation hold display" of the special hold display (normal hold change notice), and the hold icon 772. Indicates "Ceiling hold display (ceiling hold change notice)". In addition, the hold icon 771 here indicates "rainbow-colored hold (reserved reservation display)" that can appear at the time of winning a big hit among the special hold displays.

Further, for convenience of explanation, FIG. (A) shows, for convenience of explanation, when three operation-holding balls of the 997th to 999th games exist, as the fourth operation-holding ball, the operation-holding ball related to the 1000th game (ceiling game). This is a representative case in which (hereinafter referred to as "ceiling game hold ball") has occurred.

In the case of the comparative example shown in Fig. (A), since the configuration does not provide the "preliminary advance notice prohibition means", the presence or absence of the special hold display (hereinafter referred to as "normal hold change notice") before the arrival of the ceiling game is determined. Regardless of this, the 1000th game hold display is allowed to execute the ceiling hold display (ceiling hold change notice). Here, "allowing" the ceiling hold display means that it may appear either when it always appears or when it appears when a predetermined lottery is won ((b) described later). ) (C) (C) (C). Therefore, in the case of this comparative example, even if there is a notice of change in the hold of the third rainbow-colored hold (this secured stay), the hold display of the fourth ceiling game hold ball is Fujimaru-kun's hold icon 772 (for ceiling). Can be changed to (pending display).

However, if the jackpot is won before reaching the ceiling, the ceiling function will not be activated (the number of ceiling games will be reset), so it can be said that there is little need to execute the hold display for the ceiling. In addition, if the hold change notice (special hold display) that announces the winning expectation and the ceiling hold change notice (ceiling hold display) that announces that the game is a ceiling game are displayed at the same time, the notices with different personalities will be displayed. The display will appear at the same time, which may confuse the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, these problems are solved by providing a means for prohibiting pre-reading notice during the precursory period.

(B. Configuration example in which the pre-reading notice prohibiting means is provided: FIG. 62 (b), (c-1), (c-2))
Hereinafter, a configuration example in which the above-mentioned “means for prohibiting pre-reading notice during precursors” will be described. This includes the "case of preferentially executing the normal look-ahead notice" shown in Fig. (B) and the "case of preferentially executing the ceiling look-ahead notice" shown in Figures (c-1) and (c-2). is there.

(Case of preferentially executing normal look-ahead notice: Fig. 62 (b))
FIG. 62 (b) shows a "case in which the normal look-ahead notice is prioritized", specifically, a case in which the ceiling look-ahead notice is prohibited when the reserved reservation exists before the arrival of the ceiling game (ceiling game hold ball). (Case where pre-reading notice is prohibited) ”is shown. Here, as in the case of the above figure (a), the case where the third operation holding ball is the “reserved retention” is shown.

In the case of this example, if the reserved reservation exists before the arrival of the ceiling game, the hold display of the 1000th game (ceiling game) is not changed to the ceiling hold display (ceiling hold change notice) and is "normal hold display". Appears. In other words, the "ceiling game hold ball" is configured as the "hold for the look-ahead prohibition target" by the means for prohibiting the look-ahead notice during the omen.

The reason why the pre-reading prohibited target hold is set to "ceiling game hold ball" is as follows. If there is a reserved reservation before the ceiling game, the jackpot will be won before the ceiling function is activated (before the ceiling privilege is granted), so there is little need to display the ceiling hold display. In addition, if the ceiling reservation display is prohibited when the reservation is present, if the hold display for the 1000th game remains the normal hold display, it is a speculation element that "there is a reservation before the ceiling game is reached". There is also a dramatic merit that the player who knows this can prevent wasteful hitting until the ceiling is reached. However, instead of prohibiting the ceiling hold display at all when the reserved stay exists, when the hold change notice (rainbow color hold) related to the secured stay has not appeared, that is, the look-ahead for the secured stay. If the advance notice lottery is "missing", the ceiling hold display may appear (allow). If the notice of change on hold related to the reserved stay has not appeared, the player cannot know that the reserved stay exists before the arrival of the ceiling game, but even if the hold display for the ceiling has appeared. Even so, if the jackpot is won before the ceiling game is reached, there is no particular disadvantage to the player. In addition, when the hold change notice (rainbow color hold) related to this reservation is displayed, the appearance of the ceiling hold display is not prohibited, but the high expectation hold change notice or higher (for example, green hold or higher) When the notice of change of hold is displayed, the display of the hold display for the ceiling may be prohibited.

(Case of preferential execution of pre-reading notice for ceiling: Fig. 62 (c-1) (c-2))
Next, the "case of preferentially executing the pre-reading notice for the ceiling" will be described.

FIG. 62 (c-1) shows, as an example of "a case where the pre-reading notice for the ceiling is preferentially executed".
(Α) A configuration example of "in the precursor mode, a part of the normal look-ahead notice is prohibited, while the ceiling hold change notice (ceiling hold display) is allowed".
(Β) It shows a configuration example that "in the precursor mode, the normal look-ahead notice is totally prohibited, while the ceiling hold change notice (ceiling hold display) is allowed".
In the configuration example shown in this figure (c-1), as shown in the above figure (b), the look-ahead prohibited target hold is not set as the “ceiling game hold ball”, but the look-ahead prohibited target hold is “digested during the precursor game”. This is a configuration example in which only the operation holding ball to be performed is used, and the ceiling game holding ball is excluded from the prohibition target.

In the above (α), "prohibiting a part of the normal look-ahead notice" means, for example, that among the normal hold change notices (special hold display), the appearance of the low expectation hold change notice is allowed, but it is high. Expectation hold The appearance of change notice is prohibited. Specifically, it has the following configurations 1, 2 and the like.
(Structure 1) Hold change notices below yellow hold (blue hold and yellow hold) are allowed to appear, and hold change notices above green (green hold, red hold and rainbow color), which have a higher expectation of winning than the yellow hold. The appearance of (pending) is prohibited.
(Structure 2) The appearance of the hold change notice (holding display other than the rainbow-colored hold) indicating other than the correctness is allowed, and the appearance of the hold change notice holding indicating the correctness is prohibited.

The above-mentioned "Structure 1" is intended to prohibit only high-expectation pending change notices such as green, red, and rainbow colors in the case of this reservation. On the other hand, the above-mentioned "Structure 2" prohibits only the "rainbow-colored hold" of the current reservation display among the high-expectation hold change notices. Therefore, in the case of the configuration 2, the occurrence of a hold change notice other than the “rainbow color hold” indicating the correctness is allowed.

In (β) above, "totally prohibiting pre-reading notice" means that normal pre-reading notice (here, hold change notice) is prohibited at all, and the appearance of the ceiling hold change notice (ceiling hold display) is It is a configuration that allows. Therefore, in the case of the above configuration (β), the normal look-ahead notice does not appear at all in the precursor mode, and only the ceiling hold change notice (ceiling hold display) is allowed to appear.

The reason for making the figure (c-1) ((α) or (β) above) is as follows. If the normal hold change notice (special hold display) is allowed to appear indiscriminately, the normal hold change notice and the ceiling hold display will be displayed at the same time, and the player (especially, the hold display) will be displayed. It causes confusion for beginners). In particular, if the high-expectation hold change notice and the ceiling hold change notice are mixed, the degree of confusion of the player increases. Therefore, it is preferable to prohibit the look-ahead notice itself, or at least prohibit the high-expectation hold change notice. Also, if part or all of the look-ahead notice is prohibited during the precursory mode, the player does not know that the reserve is present or likely to exist before the ceiling game is reached, but even if so. This is because even if the high-expectation hold change notice indicating that is not displayed, if the jackpot is won before the ceiling game is reached, it will not be particularly disadvantageous to the player. In addition, if the pre-reading notice itself in the precursor mode is completely prohibited, the burden of directing control can be reduced.

FIG. (C-2) is a configuration example in which the ceiling hold change notice is preferentially executed by defining a part of the period in the precursor mode as a look-ahead prohibited section, unlike the above figure (C-1). FIG. (C-2) shows, as a typical example, an example in which the maximum number of reserved balls before the ceiling game (the section from the 996th to the 999th game) is set as the look-ahead prohibited section. In the case of this example, the look-ahead notice is completely prohibited in the section of the 996th to 999th games. However, instead of prohibiting the look-ahead notice at all in the section, a configuration may be configured in which "a part of the look-ahead notice is prohibited" as shown in (α) of the above figure (c-1).

In addition, all of (a), (b), (c-1) and (c-2) of FIG. 62 are the number of ceiling games by the specific notification effect such as the above-mentioned "countdown display (residual ceiling number display effect)". It is possible to configure so that the number of remaining games up to can be notified. Here, the countdown display itself does not foretell the winning expectation, but merely informs the remaining ceiling game, and does not perform the advance notice function such as the look-ahead advance notice. However, the winning expectation may be announced by using the effect mode of the countdown display, that is, the possibility of the existence of the secured stay may be notified. For example, in the case where the pre-reading notice for the ceiling shown in Fig. (C-1) or (C-2) is preferentially executed, the operation holding balls (1-2) that occur in chronological order earlier than the secured retaining (third). Each time the item) is digested, a special countdown display (for example, a difference in display color or a difference in display size) that is different from the normal countdown display (display mode when there is no reserved ceiling) is performed to confirm the accuracy. It may suggest the existence of a hold. For example, if the normal countdown display uses a white number image, the special countdown display changes the number image to a color other than white (red), or the number image becomes huge. is there.

The present embodiment may include, for example, the following configuration regarding the look-ahead notice.
Based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (when the starting means detects the game ball), the acquisition means (S301, S302 in FIG. 10, S314 in FIG. 11) for acquiring predetermined game information, and
A lottery means (S410 in FIG. 12) that executes a lottery regarding winning based on the game information acquired by the above acquisition means, and
A symbol display means (special symbol display device 38, S309 in FIG. 10) that performs a variable display operation of the symbol and displays the lottery result by the lottery means according to the stop display mode of the symbol.
The hold storage means (hold storage area of RAM 203) holds and stores the game information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined maximum number of hold storages until it is subjected to the variable display operation of the game symbol in the symbol display means. , S311 to S314) in FIG.
Before the variable display operation of the game symbol based on the reserved memory is executed, at least the pre-reading determination means (S320 in FIG. 11) for pre-reading the lottery result by the lottery means and
A look-ahead notice effect control means (effect control unit 24, FIG. 18) configured to be able to execute and control a look-ahead notice that notifies information related to a look-ahead determination result by the look-ahead determination means.
A look-ahead notice prohibition control means (FIG. 62) that prohibits execution (display) of the look-ahead notice based on a predetermined prohibition condition, and
Ceiling privilege control means (FIG. 61B, S420, S421, S412, FIG. 64-66, etc. of FIG. 61B, FIG. When,
The above ceiling privilege is given (for example, the ceiling game is imminent, the ceiling privilege is given within the existing number of operation holding balls, or the symbol variation display game related to the target operation holding ball With the ceiling privilege advance notification control means for executing and controlling the ceiling front notification effect (for example, the ceiling hold change notice (ceiling hold display) in FIG. 62) that notifies in advance that the ceiling privilege will be given when it is executed. , And can be configured to control a plurality of types of game states (game modes). The pre-reading notice prohibiting means prohibits execution of the pre-reading notice during all or part of the specific game mode (FIGS. 62 (b) (c-1) (c-2)). The specific game mode is, for example, a game mode before the arrival of the ceiling game (before the transition to the ceiling mode), and specifically, a precursor mode immediately before the arrival of the ceiling game (the game mode immediately before the transition to the ceiling mode). In addition, the ceiling privilege control means specifically, after the predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, after the end of the electric support or after the big hit game, or after shifting to the game state with a low probability state, etc.), the hit game. Is not generated (or without winning a big hit), and usually when the number of fluctuations (number of games) of the symbol executed in the game state with a low probability state reaches a predetermined upper limit number (number of ceiling games). It works as a functional unit that controls the ceiling privilege (privilege game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the game state.

(Game mode related to latent state)
In addition, when providing the latent probability state, for example, as shown in FIG. 74, the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) for latent probability and the game state determination number YJ may be determined, and the game corresponding to the latent probability state may be determined. A "latent mode" may be provided as a mode, and a "latent effect mode" may be provided as an effect mode related to the latent mode.

<Processing on the main control unit side (second embodiment): FIGS. 63 to 68B>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 to 68B, the game operation processing on the main control unit 20 side of the present embodiment will be described. The same components (process contents) as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals (step numbers), and detailed description thereof will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

Regarding the processing on the main control unit side according to the second embodiment, the “main control side main processing” in FIG. 8 and the “main control side timer interrupt processing” in FIG. 9 related to the processing on the main control unit side in the first embodiment. , "Special symbol management process" in FIG. 10, "Special figure 1 start port check process" in FIG. 11, "Special electric accessory management process" in FIG. 15, and the like are substantially the same. .. Therefore, detailed description of these processing contents is omitted, and here, the point that the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment, specifically, "special symbol variation start processing" and "special" in FIG. The explanation will focus on "processing during symbol fluctuation" and "processing during special symbol confirmation time".

<21. Special symbol change start processing: Fig. 63>
The special symbol variation start processing (step S306) according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start processing.

In FIG. 63, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the number of balls on hold in FIG. 2 is zero (step S401), and if the number of balls on hold in FIG. 2 is not zero (step S401: NO), FIG. 2 The processing (steps S403 to S416) at the start of the fluctuation targeting the number of pending balls is executed. On the other hand, when the number of balls on hold in FIG. 2 is zero (step S401: YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not the number of balls on hold in special figure 1 is zero (step S402), and the number of balls on hold in special figure 1 is zero. If the number is not zero (step S402: NO), the processing at the start of fluctuation (steps S403 to S416) for the number of balls on hold in FIG. 1 is executed.

When the number of operating hold balls in both the special figure 2 operation hold ball number and the special figure 1 operation hold ball number is zero (step S401: YES and step S402: YES), the process proceeds to step S417 and the special symbol operation status is changed. It is determined whether or not it is "waiting (00H)" indicating the state of "no operation holding ball" (step S417).

If the special symbol operation status in the above "no operation hold ball" state is "waiting (01H)" (step S417: NO), the special symbol operation status is set to "waiting (00H)". (Step S418). Then, as the effect control command, a customer waiting command (BA04H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S419), and the special symbol change start process is exited.

If the number of balls on hold in FIG. 1 or the number of balls on hold in FIG. 2 is not zero (steps S401: NO or S402: NO), steps S403 to S416 are sequentially executed. Unless there is a particular need, the process will be described without distinguishing which operation-holding ball is targeted.

Proceeding to step S403, the number of operation-holding balls on the special drawing side to be used for the current fluctuation display operation is subtracted by 1 (step S403), and a "holding / subtraction command" including information on the number of operation-holding balls after the subtraction is issued to the effect control unit 24. (Step S404).

Next, the special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S405).

Next, the hold data stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407).

Next, the game state information transmission process is executed (step S408). In the game state information transmission process, a "game state designation command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The game state designation command here includes game state information that can specify the game state at the start of the game. When the effect control unit 24 receives the game state designation command, the effect control unit 24 grasps the game state based on the information contained therein, and manages the effect mode in a form that maintains consistency with the game state managed by the main control unit 20 side. To do. The configuration can be such that a "specified command" can be sent. Further, here, if necessary, a "time reduction command" including information on the special symbol time reduction counter (time reduction information) and an "ST number command" including information on the special symbol probability variation counter (ST number information) are used. It is transmitted and is used when the effect control unit 24 side displays the remaining time reduction number of times notification effect. When an infinite ceiling privilege is given, specifically, "infinite time reduction" with no limit on the number of time reductions, "infinite probability change" or "infinite latency" with no limit on the number of STs, or substantially When infinite time reduction, infinite probability change, or infinite latency that can be regarded as infinite number of times is given, in the game state (heaven mode) related to the privilege, the time reduction number command and ST number command are sent to reduce the control burden. It can be configured not to.

Further, the above-mentioned "residual number display effect" can be configured to be able to appear in any of the game modes of the time saving mode, the probability variation mode, and the heaven mode. As for the remaining number display effect related to the infinite system, as described above, an effect mode for notifying that the remaining number of times is infinite is preferable. For example, in the case of an image display effect, "remaining ∞ times" or "continue until the next big hit".

(About the display of the number of remaining ceilings)
Further, in the game state information transmission process in step S408, a "ceiling count command" including information on the number of remaining ceiling games (information on the ceiling counter described later) is also transmitted. The effect control unit 24 grasps the number of games remaining until reaching the ceiling based on the information included in the ceiling number command, and controls the appearance of the "residual ceiling number display effect". In the case of the present embodiment, this residual ceiling number display effect appears in the form of a countdown display during the precursor mode (precursor effect mode).

The above-mentioned "residual ceiling number display effect" can appear in all or part of the monitoring target (count target) period of the ceiling game. In the present embodiment, it can appear in "general mode" and / or "precursor mode". Further, when the residual ceiling number display effect is displayed in the normal mode, the effect mode can be different between the general mode and the precursor mode. For example, in the general mode, the number of remaining ceilings is notified in a small display area at the corner of the LCD screen (the countdown display is displayed small), and in the precursor mode, the number of remaining ceilings is displayed in the large display area in the center of the LCD screen. Notification (large countdown display) can be displayed.

(Processing route when the set value is normal: Processing route following S420)
Next, it is determined whether or not the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S409). When the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S409: ≠ 5AH), the above-mentioned "setting value command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and then the ceiling function management process shown in FIG. 64 is executed (step S420).

<13. Ceiling function management process: Fig. 64>
The ceiling function management process (step S420) will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the details of the ceiling function management process (step S420). This ceiling function management process is mainly a process of managing the number of remaining games up to the number of ceiling games.

In FIG. 64, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the "ceiling counter" is zero (step S901).

(Ceiling counter)
The number of ceiling games is counted by a "ceiling counter (specific game number counting means)" that is responsible for the function unit of the main control unit 20. This ceiling counter is a counter for managing (monitoring) the number of remaining ceiling games, and in the case of the present embodiment, it is used as a counter for managing the number of games that trigger the setting of data related to the granting of ceiling benefits (described later). Steps S903 to S904 (ceiling flag is turned ON), see step S915 in FIG. 66 showing details of the game state transition preparation process (step S412A) in FIG. 63).

(I-40) In the case of the present embodiment, the initial value is set in the ceiling counter when the RAM is cleared (step S031), when the time saving state ends (step S481A in FIG. 68B), and when the probability change state ends (FIG. 68B). Step S486A), at the end of the jackpot game (step S509 in FIG. 15), at the end of the support time shortening opening / closing game (step S504 in FIG. 15), when shifting from another game mode to the normal mode, the other internal game state is changed to the normal state. (Steps S481A and S486A in FIG. 68B, which will be described later), when the ceiling is reached (when the symbol variation related to the ceiling mode is stopped), and the like. The reason why the support time reduction opening / closing game is included is that in the present embodiment, the winning process of the support time reduction is prioritized over the ceiling time reduction.

The above-mentioned "ceiling counter" functions as a counting means for counting the number of times a specific event is executed, the number of times it is established, the number of times it occurs, and the like, and functions as a functional unit for monitoring the arrival of a ceiling activation trigger (ceiling privilege granting trigger). The "specific event" here means the execution of the symbol variation display game (hit fluctuation or loss fluctuation), big hit winning, small hit winning, losing winning, short support time winning, transition to a specific game state (specific). Transition to game mode, transition to specific variable pattern selection mode, transition to specific internal game state, etc.), execution of big hit game, small hit game, execution of support time saving opening and closing game, establishment of specific conditions related to the game, It is a specific event such as. In the present embodiment, the value of the ceiling counter is monitored to determine the arrival of the ceiling function activation trigger. Such a counting means is, for example, in the modification 1 and the modification 2 (FIGS. 75 and 76, grant forms (α) to (μ)) of the privilege granting form described later, the ceiling activation trigger or the predetermined privilege granting. It is used as a functional unit to monitor the arrival of an opportunity. Further, a plurality of ceiling counters can be provided as needed. As a result, it is possible to deal with the case where there are a plurality of specific events to be monitored.

(Count form of the number of ceiling games)
The ceiling counter can function as follows. Which counting form is adopted can be appropriately determined according to the playability. The details will be described below.

(I 38) When the RAM is cleared (see step S031 in FIG. 8), the timing for setting the initial value in the ceiling counter is the activation process of the “main control unit side timer interrupt process” shown in FIG. 9 (step in FIG. 8). It is preferable that the stage is prior to S036: CTC setting). In this configuration, the initial value of the ceiling counter is set when the RAM is cleared, so the hall side either continues the counter to the ceiling as it is, or clears the counter to the ceiling and sets the initial value. Can be selected. Further, it is preferable to set the ceiling counter before the main control unit side interrupt processing including the processing related to the game progress is activated. If the ceiling counter is set after the timer interrupt processing on the main control unit side is activated, the game may be started before the initial value is set in the ceiling counter, which may be a complicated process in terms of control. Therefore, it is preferable to set the ceiling counter before the interrupt processing on the main control unit side is activated.

The ceiling counter according to the present embodiment can be made to function as described below (I71) and (I72) according to the gaming state.
(I 71) The value of the ceiling counter is not updated (counted) at least during the support time reduction state (the value of the ceiling counter is retained (the counting of the number of remaining ceiling games is stopped)). Since the value of the ceiling counter is not updated during the support time reduction state, it is possible to prevent the ceiling function from being activated when the number of ceiling games is reached during the support time reduction state. For example, it is possible to prevent the ceiling time reduction from being given (the number of time reductions is updated) during the time reduction state. However, since the number of games in the support time reduction state is excluded from the monitoring target (count target) of the ceiling game, the number of ceiling games may increase, and the player may suffer a disadvantage.
(I 72) The value of the ceiling counter is updated (counted) at least during the support time reduction state. In this case, since the number of games in the support time reduction state is counted as the number of ceiling games, the player can aim to reach the ceiling while benefiting from the electric support state in the support time reduction state. However, there is a possibility that the ceiling function will be activated during the support time reduction state, and control processing will be required when the number of ceiling games arrives during the support time reduction state. For example, if the number of ceiling games arrives during the support time reduction state, do you give priority to the ceiling privilege (update (set) the current remaining time reduction number to 100 times due to the ceiling time reduction), or treat the ceiling privilege as invalid (set) It is necessary to decide whether to prohibit the activation of the ceiling function). In addition, when the ceiling privilege is treated effectively, for example, when the ceiling time reduction is given during the support time reduction state, is the current remaining time reduction number updated to 100 times due to the ceiling time reduction, or is the current time reduction number? It is necessary to determine whether to add to (+100 times). It is up to you to decide which one to use.

When the ceiling counter is zero (step S901: YES), the ceiling function management process is exited as it is without doing anything. In the present embodiment, in order to count the number of addictive games (number of ceiling games) in the normal state, an initial value is set in the ceiling counter when the game shifts to the normal state or when the jackpot game ends, but the number of ceiling games If the number of games to be counted in a specific internal game state or a specific game mode, such as a time saving state, a support time saving state, a heaven time saving state, or a probability change state, is to be monitored (counted), the ceiling counter is used. The timing for setting the initial value and the timing for updating (counting) the ceiling counter may be appropriately determined, and the number of executed games in a specific gaming state may be monitored.

On the other hand, if the ceiling counter is not zero (step S901: NO), the ceiling counter is subtracted by 1 (step S902), and if the subtraction result is not zero (step S903: NO), the ceiling function management process is exited and zero. If (step S903: YES), the ceiling flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S904). This ceiling flag is a flag for designating whether or not the ceiling counter has become zero, and is used in the game state transition preparation process of step S412A described later (see step S915 of FIG. 66 described later). In addition, the ceiling flag is cleared when a big hit is won or when the support time is shortened. With the above, the ceiling function management process is exited.

Returning to the description of FIG. 63 again, when the ceiling function management process in step S420 is completed, the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is then executed (step S410).

Next, the ceiling activation management process shown in FIG. 65 is executed (step S421).

<14. Ceiling activation management process: Fig. 65>
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the details of the ceiling activation management process (step S421) in FIG. 63. In this ceiling activation management process, it is monitored whether or not the ceiling function is activated, and the necessary setting process for granting the ceiling privilege when the ceiling function is activated is executed.

In FIG. 65, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the ceiling activation prohibition condition is satisfied (step S920). The "ceiling activation prohibition condition" is a condition for prohibiting (restricting) the activation of the ceiling function. Ceiling benefits will not be granted if the ceiling activation prohibition condition is met.

In the case of this embodiment, as described above, in the ceiling game (1000th game), if a big hit is won or a support time is shortened, even if the ceiling game is reached, the ceiling function activation prohibition condition is satisfied. Is established, the ceiling activation management process can be exited without performing the process of granting the ceiling privilege.

Here, when the jackpot determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (when the jackpot is won), or when the support time reduction determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (when the support time reduction is won), the ceiling activation prohibition condition is satisfied. If so (step S920: YES), the ceiling activation management process is exited without doing anything. Therefore, if a big hit or a short support time is won, even in the ceiling game, it is controlled to the "ceiling activation prohibited state", and the processing related to the winning is preferentially executed. Therefore, in order for the ceiling privilege to be granted, it is a condition that the player has been addicted to 1000 games (continuing to lose for 1000 games). In the present embodiment, the number of games to be monitored (the number of consecutive losses) is set to 1000 games in the normal state (normal mode), and the ceiling privilege is given when the game is addicted to the games.

When the ceiling activation prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S920: NO), then it is determined whether or not the ceiling activation flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S921). This "ceiling activation flag" is a flag for designating whether or not to activate the ceiling function (whether or not to grant the ceiling privilege), and when the flag is in the ON state (5AH), the ceiling privilege It is specified that the ceiling privilege is not given when the flag is in the OFF state (00H). The ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state when the ceiling counter becomes zero in the game state transition preparation process in step S412A described later (see steps S915 to S916 in FIG. 66 described later).

If the ceiling activation flag is not in the ON state (step S921: ≠ 5AH), it is assumed that the ceiling activation trigger has not arrived, and the ceiling activation management process is exited without doing anything.

On the other hand, when the ceiling activation flag is in the ON state (step S921: = 5AH), the processing necessary for granting the ceiling privilege (ceiling activation) is executed. Here, first, the value of each state buffer set in the game state transition preparation process (step S412A) described later is set in the corresponding state flag and counter (step S922: state flag setting process). As a result, the ceiling privilege (in this example, the ceiling time is shortened) will occur. In other words, when the ceiling game is reached (at the start of the ceiling game), the ceiling privilege is given (activated at the start of the ceiling game). In the case of the present embodiment, the value of each state buffer set in the game state transition preparation process in step S412A is the data set in the 999th game, that is, one game before the ceiling game. In the present embodiment, since the ceiling game start type is adopted, the ceiling counter is actually a game that triggers the execution of the ceiling activation preparation process (process routes of steps S915 to S917 and S914 in FIG. 66). The number (999th game) is counted.

By the state flag setting process of step S922, the data related to the ceiling privilege is set in the status flag and the counter, whereby the specified ceiling privilege state is controlled. In this embodiment, since the ceiling time reduction (the number of time reductions is 100 times) is treated as a ceiling privilege, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from the precursor mode "08H" to the ceiling mode "09H". Become.

When the status flag setting process is completed, each status buffer is cleared (step S923: various setting processes when the ceiling is activated), and the ceiling flag and the ceiling activation flag are turned off (00H) as the end process when the ceiling privilege is given. ) (Steps S924 to S925).

Next, the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S926). This ceiling activation flag is a flag that specifies that the ceiling privilege is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (5AH), it indicates that the ceiling privilege is in progress, and the flag is in the OFF state (00H). In the case, it indicates that the ceiling privilege is not in progress. In the case of this embodiment, it functions as a flag for designating whether or not the ceiling time is shortened.

The game state information transmission process (step S926) is executed. In the game state information transmission process here, a game state designation command including finite time reduction (time reduction state) information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. As a result, it is controlled to a finite time reduction state with the start of this game (1000th game), and a special symbol variation pattern based on the ceiling mode is selected in the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413) described later, and the ceiling effect mode. The production below will appear. With the above, the ceiling activation management process is exited.

(Modification example 1 of the timing of occurrence of ceiling benefits)
If the jackpot is won, the ceiling privilege may be given without controlling the ceiling function to the prohibited state. However, in this case, it will be a ceiling privilege only for this game (only for one game). This is because the jackpot game will start after the end of this game (ceiling game). However, even if it is a ceiling privilege for only one game, if a time saving state or a probability change state accompanied by an electric support state is given, the benefit of the electric support will be received until the end of this symbol variation display game. be able to. Specifically, there is an advantage that the lower starting port 35 can be easily won, and the operation holding ball on the special drawing 2 side is likely to be generated. When a game state accompanied by an electric support state is given as a ceiling privilege, it is preferable to make at least a right-handed instruction effect appear in this game and encourage the player to right-handed.

(Modification example 2 of the timing of occurrence of ceiling benefits)
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the above-mentioned "ceiling game start activation type" in which the ceiling privilege is given when the game starts has been described, but the above-mentioned "ceiling game end activation type" in which the ceiling privilege is given when the game ends. It may have the configuration of. In the case of the activation type at the end of the ceiling game, the ceiling privilege is given immediately after the end of the symbol variation display game. For example, if the ceiling privilege is a finite time reduction, the time reduction state occurs immediately after the end of 1000 games. If the ceiling privilege is "forced hit", the big hit game (forced hit game) by forced hit will be started after 1000 games are completed. When the end of the game is used as the trigger for activating the ceiling, the ceiling activation management process (step S421) may be performed in step S495 during the special symbol confirmation time process (FIG. 68B described later) related to the process at the end of the symbol variation display game. It may be executed after the processing.

(Modification example 3 of the timing of occurrence of ceiling benefits)
Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the ceiling privilege is given in the 1000th game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ceiling is based on the fact that the second grant condition is satisfied after the first grant condition is satisfied. Benefits may be granted. For example, if you are addicted to 1000 games (the first grant condition is satisfied), the ceiling privilege grant right is established, and the ceiling privilege is granted after the predetermined number of precursor games have been exhausted (the grant of the ceiling privilege is temporarily suspended, and multiple games are granted. Scheduled first). In this case, a plurality of types of precursor games can be provided (for example, 1 to 16 games), and the number of precursor games can be determined by lottery (lottery for the number of precursor games). When determining the number of precursor games by lottery, the lottery probability of each precursor game may be the same in all settings (settings 1 to 6), but it is preferable to determine the lottery probability according to the set value. For example, the higher the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively small number of games, and the lower the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively large number of games. If determined, it is possible to give the player a setting guessing factor based on the difference in the number of games. Further, when a specific number of precursor games (for example, 7 games) is selected, the lottery probability can be determined according to the set value, such as high setting confirmation or setting 6 confirmation.

(Modification example 4 of the timing of occurrence of ceiling benefits)
In the above-mentioned modification 3, a mode in which the ceiling privilege granting right is temporarily suspended until the predetermined number of precursor games is consumed, that is, an example in which the right holding period depends on the number of times the game is executed has been described. However, the right holding period does not depend on the number of times the game is executed, but may depend on the passage of time. For example, it is a "timed type" ceiling granting form in which a ceiling privilege is granted when a predetermined time has passed from the start of the ceiling game. Specifically, the ceiling privilege is given at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display game related to the ceiling game.

Returning to the description of FIG. 63 again, when the ceiling activation management process of step S421 is completed, the special stop symbol creation process is executed (step S411), and then the game state transition preparation process is executed (step S412A).

<15. Game state transition preparation process: Fig. 66>
The game state transition preparation process (step S412A) will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the details of the game state transition preparation process.

In this game state transition preparation process, when a big hit or a short support time is won, data for designating the transition destination game state (see FIG. 4) after the big hit game is stored in a predetermined buffer (state buffer). (Steps S911 to S914) and (steps S915 to S917), which is a loss and stores data for designating the ceiling privilege in a predetermined buffer when the ceiling flag is ON. I know. First, the processing content of the former "when a big hit is won" will be described.

(If you win the jackpot)
When the jackpot determination flag is ON (step S910: = 5AH), the "game state transition table (FIG. 42)" corresponding to the jackpot type is acquired (step S912), and various data are stored in the corresponding status buffer. (Step S914). As described above, "JTTBL1" is referred to in the case of a 10R and 4R probability variation jackpot, and "JTTBL-4" is referred to in the case of a 4R time saving jackpot. As a result, the game state after the big hit game is specified.

(If you win in a short time)
When the support time reduction determination flag is ON (step S911: = 5AH), the "game state transition table (FIG. 42)" corresponding to the support time reduction type is acquired (step S912), and various data are stored in the corresponding state buffers. Store (step S914). As described above, "JTTBL-4" is referred to in the case of the support time reduction A, "JTTBL-5" is referred to in the case of the support time reduction C, and "JTTBL-6" is referred to in the case of the support time reduction C. As a result, the game state after the support time shortening opening / closing game is specified.

(If it is lost and the ceiling flag is ON)
When the jackpot determination flag is not in the ON state (5AH) (step S910: ≠ 5AH), the support time reduction determination flag is not in the ON state (5AH) (step S911: ≠ 5AH), and the ceiling flag is in the ON state (step S915: = 5AH), the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (5AH) as part of the ceiling activation start preprocessing (preprocessing for granting the ceiling privilege) (step S916). In this process, the "ceiling activation flag" set to the ON state is confirmed in the ceiling activation management process (step S421) in the next game.

Next, the "ceiling game state transition table" shown in FIG. 69 is acquired (step S917). In FIG. 69, as a game state transition table for the ceiling corresponding to various ceiling benefits, JTTBL-10 to JTTBL-15 (table for imparting finite time reduction, infinite time reduction, finite probability variation, infinite probability variation, finite latency, and infinite latency). ) Is illustrated. Actually, the necessary ceiling game state transition table may be prepared according to the ceiling privilege type.

Next, the data defined in the acquired ceiling game state transition table is stored in the above-mentioned state buffer (step S914: state buffer setting process). The values stored in these state buffers are read out in the ceiling activation management process (see step S421 and step S922 in FIG. 65), and the predetermined storage areas of the RAM 203 (each of them) are the same as in the case where the jackpot is won. It is stored in the flag storage area and counter storage area corresponding to the status buffer of. As a result, the game state related to the ceiling privilege is specified. In addition, "* (times)" and "* (H)" in the figure are arbitrary data values, and mean that appropriate values can be set according to playability and design values. For example, in the case of the present embodiment, the ceiling time reduction (finite time reduction: time reduction number of times 100) is typically described as the ceiling privilege. Therefore, in this case, the data value as shown in the “finite time reduction” column in the figure. Is stipulated.

(I39) If you want to realize infinite time reduction with the ceiling privilege, set the data to cause the time reduction state (set 5AH in the general electric accessory open extension buffer-special symbol time reduction state transition buffer), and the number of time reductions. Infinite time reduction can be realized even if the counter is set to 0 so that the time reduction counter is not subtracted. More specifically, when the number of time reductions is 0, the determination result of step S478 during the special symbol confirmation time of FIG. 68A is YES, and as long as the loss continues, the time reduction state end setting process of S481A is not executed forever. Further, the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) may not be changed (0 is set in the special symbol fluctuation count counters 1 to 3 buffers so that the determination result in step S488 follows the processing route of YES).

When the jackpot determination flag, the support time reduction determination flag, and the ceiling flag are in the OFF state (00H) (when steps S910 and S911 are ≠ 5AH and step S915 is ≠ 5AH), the game is played as it is without doing anything. Exit the state transition preparation process.

Returning to the description of the special symbol variation start processing of FIG. 63 again. After completing the game state transition preparation process in step S412, the special symbol variation pattern creation process is then executed (step S413). In the special symbol variation pattern creation process, as described above, the target variation pattern distribution is based on the current game mode (variation pattern selection mode (Tcode)), jackpot lottery result, special symbol type, number of pending balls, etc. Acquire a table (see FIGS. 70-73).

After completing the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process in step S413, the changing flag corresponding to the current fluctuation start side is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S414).

Next, a decorative symbol designation command capable of specifying the symbol lottery result information obtained in the special stop symbol creation process in step S411 is created, and this is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S415).

Then, as the setting process at the start of fluctuation, the special symbol operation status is switched to "changing (02H)" (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H is stored in the random number storage area for determination (zero clear) (step S416). ).

As described above, when the special symbol variation start processing is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 10 is performed, and thus the variation display of the special symbol is started. As a result, the process goes through the special symbol management process (step S093) and proceeds to the special electric accessory management process (step S095) of FIG.

<23. Processing during special symbol change: Fig. 67>
Next, the process during special symbol change (step S307) shown in FIG. 10 will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol changing process (step S307) of FIG.

In FIG. 67, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed (step S451). If the special symbol accessory operation timer is not zero (step S451: NO), the change time of the special symbol has not yet elapsed, that is, the special symbol is changing, so this special symbol change processing is performed without doing anything. Exit.

When the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S451: YES), a "fluctuation stop command" indicating that the special symbol has been changed is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S451: YES). S452). By this fluctuation stop command, the effect control unit 24 grasps that the special symbol variation display game has ended after the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, and stops the decorative symbol currently being displayed in the variation display (confirmed display). As a result, the special symbol variation display game is terminated, and the decorative symbol variation display game is also terminated.

Next, as a setting process when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the special symbol confirmation signal output time (for example, 100 ms) is stored in the special symbol confirmation timer of the RAM 203, and the confirmation display time is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. The special symbol operation status is switched to "Confirming (03H)" (03H is stored in the special symbol operation status), 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special symbol changing flag (step S453), and this special symbol changing process is performed. Exit. The above-mentioned "special symbol confirmation signal output time" is a margin time for securing the output time of the special symbol confirmation signal for notifying the hall computer HC from the frame external terminal board 21 that the special symbol has been confirmed and displayed. Is. Further, the "fixed display time" is a time (stop display time) for holding the stop display when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed. During this fixed display time, the decorative symbol is also fixedly displayed (mainly stopped).

(Example of modification of confirmed display time)
Here, the definite display time according to the present embodiment includes the usual 500 ms, and the definite display time according to the fluctuation pattern is set. Specifically, a fixed display time that satisfies the following relationships can be set. Of the ceiling fluctuations shown in the remarks column shown in the figure, fluctuations related to the support time reduction winning (variations per support time reduction), precursory final fluctuations, ceiling entry fluctuations, and loss fluctuations in the general mode, the loss fluctuations in the general mode are The normal 500 ms is set as the fixed display time, and for other fluctuation patterns, a fixed display time different from the normal 500 ms can be set. Then, for the fluctuation patterns other than the loss fluctuation in the general mode shown in the figure, a fixed display time longer than 500 ms can be set.

(Italy 84) At least the fixed display time V of the ceiling fluctuation (see the column of the ceiling in FIG. 73: in particular, the ceiling fluctuation related to the activation type at the end of the ceiling game) and the fluctuation pattern related to the winning of the support time reduction (for example, in FIG. 70). See Remark 3: The fixed display time W (hereinafter referred to as “support time reduction winning fluctuation”) is different (fixed display time V ≠ fixed display time W). In this case, when performing an effect (time-saving rush notification effect) that notifies the rush to the time-saving state by using each confirmed display time, depending on the type of the time-saving state (here, the ceiling time-saving state or support). (Time saving state), it is possible to execute an appropriate time saving rush notification effect (the same applies to (I85) and (I86) described later).
(Italy 85) At least the fixed display time V of the ceiling fluctuation (particularly, the ceiling fluctuation related to the activation type at the end of the ceiling game) is longer than the fixed display time W of the support time shortening winning fluctuation (fixed display time W < Confirmed display time V).
(Italy 86) At least the support time is shorter than the final display time V of the ceiling fluctuation (particularly, the ceiling fluctuation related to the activation type at the end of the ceiling game). It is longer than the final display time W of the winning fluctuation (confirmed display time V <confirmed). Display time W).

When the above special symbol changing process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 10 is performed, the special symbol management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process of step S095 of FIG.

<26. Processing during special symbol confirmation time (processing when fluctuation is stopped): Fig. 68A and Fig. 68B>
Next, the processing during the special symbol confirmation time (step S308) will be described. 68A and 68B are flowcharts showing the details of the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) of FIG.

In FIGS. 68A and 68B, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S471). A “fixed display time” is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here (see step S307 of the above-mentioned special symbol changing process). Until the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S471: NO), the process is exited during the special symbol confirmation time without doing anything.

When the special symbol operation timer becomes zero (step S471: YES), it is assumed that the special symbol variation display game has ended, and the special symbol operation status is switched to "waiting (01H)" (special symbol operation). 01H is stored in the status) (step S472), and the current game state information is stored in the game state determination area of the RAM (step S473).

Next, the jackpot determination flag is acquired, and the state of the jackpot determination flag is determined (step S474).

(When the jackpot judgment flag is ON)
In the determination in step S474, when the jackpot determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S474: = 5AH), various setting processes are performed when the jackpot symbol is stopped (step S475A). Here, as shown in the figure, the jackpot determination flag is set to the OFF state (00H), the condition device operation flag is set to the ON state (5AH) assuming that the jackpot is won, and the probability and electric support during the jackpot game are low. Set to the state of no state (clear various flags and counters). In addition, the ceiling counter is cleared (I-40), the ceiling flag, the ceiling activation flag, and the ceiling activation flag related to the ceiling function are set to the OFF state (00H), respectively, and the ceiling counter is cleared (00H).

(When the jackpot judgment flag is OFF)
In the determination in step S474, when the jackpot determination flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S474: ≠ 5AH), then the state of the support time reduction determination flag is determined (step S476). When the support time reduction determination flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S476: ≠ 5AH), the process proceeds to step S478. When the support time reduction determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S476: = 5AH), various setting processing is performed when the support time reduction symbol is stopped (step S477), and the process proceeds to step S478.

Proceeding to the process of step S478, it is determined whether or not the special symbol time reduction counter (remaining time reduction counter) is zero (step S478). When the special symbol time reduction counter is zero (step S478: YES), the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything.

On the other hand, when the special symbol time reduction counter is not zero (step S478: NO), the special symbol time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 (step S479) as the digestion of the fluctuation number this time, and the special symbol time reduction counter after subtraction It is determined whether or not it is zero (step S480).

If the special symbol time reduction counter after subtraction is not zero (step S480: NO), the number of end times of the special symbol time reduction state has not been reached, so the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol time reduction counter after subtraction is zero (step S480: YES), the setting process at the end of the time reduction is performed (step S481A).

(Setting process at the end of time reduction: Step S481A)
Here, as the setting process at the end of the time reduction, as shown in the figure, the electric chew support function is set to the OFF state, the Tcode is set to "00H (general mode)", the counter for the number of consecutive villas is cleared (00H), and the like. , Performs the transition setting process from the time saving state to the normal state. As a result, in the next special symbol variation display game, the variation pattern of the special symbol related to the "general mode" will be selected.

The case where the "setting process at the end of the time reduction" of step S481A is executed is the case where the game mode shifts from the "time reduction mode" to the normal mode (general mode), specifically, the internal game state is the "time reduction state". This is the case of shifting to the "normal state". Therefore, here, the initial value (999 times) is set in the ceiling counter in order to start counting the number of remaining ceiling games as the next game shifts to the normal state (general mode). In the present embodiment, the game in which the ceiling counter value becomes zero is the game immediately before the ceiling game (999th game), and in the game immediately before the ceiling game, various setting processes before the start of the ceiling privilege, concretely, In the game state transition preparation process (step S412 in FIG. 63), the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (5AH), and data for designating the ceiling privilege is stored in each state buffer (FIG. 66). Steps S915-S917, S914). Then, in the ceiling activation management process (step S421 in FIG. 63) at the start of the next game (ceiling game), the data in the state buffer is read out and set in various flags and counters related to the game state designation. (S921 to S926 in FIG. 65). As a result, the ceiling privilege is given at the start of the ceiling game. The ceiling counter may be set to "1000" as an initial value. In this case, it is monitored whether or not the ceiling counter has become zero, that is, whether or not it is the 1000th game, and if it is zero, it is monitored. For example, it is sufficient to directly set the specified data related to the ceiling privilege to various flags and counters without going through the state buffer.

(Regarding the control process of the above "Ceiling game end type" that grants ceiling benefits when the game ends)
(I34) Here, in the case of the above-mentioned "ceiling activation type at the end of the ceiling game", the above-mentioned "ceiling activation management process (step S421, FIG. 65 showing the details thereof)" which is a subroutine is set to, for example, a fixed display time. If you want to give the ceiling privilege at the end of the above, execute the ceiling activation management process (step S421) after the final process (step S494 described later) of the special symbol confirmation time process related to the end of the symbol variation display game. Just let me do it. Further, when it is desired to generate the ceiling privilege at the end of the fluctuation time, for example, after the processing of step S451 (after the fluctuation time has elapsed) during the processing during the special symbol change in FIG. 67, the ceiling activation management processing (step). S421) may be executed (in the case of a big hit, the ceiling privilege is not given (steps 474 to S475A)). In this case, when 999 is set in the ceiling counter as in the present embodiment, the ceiling privilege is given at the end of the 999 game, and when 1000 is set, the ceiling privilege is given at the end of 1000 games. In any case, a specific event related to the game (here, the number of losses in the normal state) is counted, and when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, zero), the ceiling function activation trigger or the ceiling privilege is given. It may be configured so that it can be given. If the processing method of this embodiment (see FIGS. 63 to 68B) is adopted, for example, in the old model, the start of the game was set as the ceiling activation trigger (the configuration of the activation type at the start of the ceiling game), but the new model Then, when it is desired to activate the ceiling at the end of the game (the configuration of the activation type at the end of the ceiling game), there is an advantage that the design can be easily changed and the compatibility between the old model and the new model can be improved.

After completing the setting process at the end of the time reduction in step S481A, the game state information transmission process is then executed (step S482). Here, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The game state specification command here includes information for designating that the time saving state has ended. When the effect control unit 24 receives this game state designation command, it grasps that the time saving state has ended in this game, and shifts the effect mode to the normal effect mode. In addition, the game state specification command can include information that can identify the completed time saving state type (time saving state due to big hit, support time saving state, ceiling time saving state, etc.).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation counter (remaining ST count) is zero (step S483). If the special symbol probability variation counter is zero (step S483: YES), the process proceeds to step S488. On the other hand, when the special symbol probability variation counter is not zero (step S483: NO), the special symbol probability variation counter is subtracted by 1 (step S484) as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time, and the special symbol probability variation after the subtraction is performed. It is determined whether or not the number of times counter is zero (step S485).

If the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero (step S485: NO), the number of STs has not ended, so the process proceeds to step S488 without doing anything.

When the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is zero (step S485: YES), it is assumed that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol has reached the specified ST number (65535 in this embodiment), and the setting process at the end of probability variation is performed. Execute (step S486A). Here, as the setting process at the end of the probability change, as shown in the figure, the function related to the probability change state is set to the OFF state, the Tcode is set to "00H (in general mode)", and the ceiling counter and the number of consecutive villa counters are cleared ( Execute the transition setting process from the probabilistic state to the normal state, such as 00H).

After completing the setting process at the end of the probability change in step S486A, the game state information transmission process is then executed (step S487). Here, as in step S482, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, but the information included in the game state designation command here includes the end of the high probability state (probability change state or latent state). Contains information that specifies. When the effect control unit 24 receives this game state designation command, it grasps that the probability change state has ended in this game, and shifts the effect mode to the normal effect mode.

When the special symbol change count counter is zero (step S488: YES), the process is exited during the special symbol confirmation time without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol variation counter is not zero (step S488: NO), the special symbol variation counter is subtracted by 1 (step S489) as the digestion of the current variation, and the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is subtracted. Is zero (step S490).

If the special symbol variation counter after subtraction is not zero (step S490: NO), it is assumed that the update timing (update game) of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is not set, and the process is exited during this special symbol confirmation time without doing anything.

When the special symbol change count counter after subtraction is zero (step S489: YES), it is assumed that the update timing of the change pattern selection mode (Tcode) has arrived, and the game state update process is executed (step S491).

After completing the game state update process in step S491, the game state information transmission process is then executed (step S492). Here, as in step S482, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, but the information included in the game state designation command here can specify the updated variation pattern selection mode (Tcode). Contains information. When the effect control unit 24 receives this game state designation command, it grasps the updated variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) and shifts the effect mode to the effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode).

Next, the precursor mode transition management process is executed (step S494). In the precursor mode transition management process, the ceiling counter is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling counter is the number of precursor mode transition trigger games. In the case of this embodiment, since the precursor mode is entered from the 990th game (see FIGS. 100A and 100B), when the ceiling counter N indicates the 989th game in this game (ceiling counter N = 10), the precursor mode is entered. Perform the migration setting process of. Here, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "00H" in the general mode to "01H" in the precursor mode. As a result, the game shifts to the precursor mode from the 990th game of the next game, and the variation pattern of the special symbol related to the precursor mode is selected. In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 320 (c-2), the 996th to 999th games in the precursor mode are set as the look-ahead prohibited section. At this time, the value of the ceiling counter is checked. It is determined whether or not it is the 996th game to the 999th game. When the CPU 201 determines that the current game is in the look-ahead section, the determination process result of step S316 (determination process of whether or not the special figure 1 look-ahead is prohibited) shown in FIG. 11 is set to "YES" and has already been described. As described above, a winning command having the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") is created, and the look-ahead notice is prohibited.

Further, the precursor mode transition management process includes the game state information transmission process, and transmits the game state designation command as in step S482. The game state designation command transmitted here includes information regarding the transition to the precursor mode (may include pre-reading prohibited section information). By this game state designation command, the effect control unit 24 grasps that the mode has been shifted to the precursor mode, and shifts the effect mode to the precursor mode.

When the precursor mode transition management process of step S494 is completed, the special symbol confirmation time process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 10 is performed, and the special symbol management process (step S093) is exited. Then, the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process (step S095) of FIG.

[Modified example of privilege granting form 1: FIG. 75]
In the above embodiment, a configuration has been described in which a ceiling privilege is given when a predetermined number of games are executed without winning a big hit during the normal mode (at least the internal gaming state is in the normal state). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the following imparted forms (α) to imparted forms (ζ) can be used.

<Grant form (α): Fig. 75 (a)>
(Α) Regardless of the game mode or the internal game state, the number of executed games is counted, and the counted number of games reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, the 1000th game) without winning at least a big hit. In some cases, a ceiling privilege is given (see Fig. 75 (a)). In the case of this configuration, not only the normal state (normal mode) but also the number of games executed during the time saving state (time saving mode) and the probability change state (probability change mode) are counted. Therefore, the ceiling privilege can be given purely according to how many games have been addicted to from this big hit.

<Grant form (β): Fig. 75 (b)>
(Β) The number of games in the “game state with low probability state (low probability game state)” is counted, and the counted number of games is the predetermined number of games (for example, 1000 games) without winning at least a big hit. When the eye) is reached, a ceiling privilege will be given. Hereinafter, as the number of ceiling games, the form of counting the number of games in the “low probability game state)” is also referred to as the “low probability game state count form”.

The low-probability game state count form includes "a ceiling privilege can be given based on the ceiling counter reaching a predetermined value during the ceiling time reduction state" and "based on the ceiling counter reaching a predetermined value during the jackpot time reduction state". It includes count forms such as "Ceiling benefits can be granted" and "Ceiling benefits can be granted based on the ceiling counter reaching a predetermined value during the support time reduction".

In the case of this example, the number of games executed during the gaming state (high probability gaming state) accompanied by the high probability state is excluded from the counting target. Here, the "game state with a low probability state" corresponds to the "normal state" or "time saving state" when focusing on the internal gaming state, and the "normal mode" or "time saving state" when focusing on the game mode. "Mode" is applicable.

FIG. 75 (b) typically shows a 4R time reduction jackpot (support time reduction may be possible) (time reduction state of 100 time reduction times: hereinafter referred to as “time reduction A”) and 100 ST times (not shown). The probability variation jackpot 1 and the probability variation time reduction jackpot 2 of "ST number 25 times + time reduction number 75 times" (not shown) and the probability variation time reduction jackpot 3 of "ST number 25 times + time reduction number 75 times" (not shown) are different. The case where it was applied to this example (grant form (β)) for a big hit is shown. In the figure, "a big hit that gives 100 times of electric support" is shown so that the three can be easily compared. For each jackpot, the number of games required from the end of the electric support (101st game) to the ceiling game (1000th game) (referred to as "required game number X" in this example) is as follows.

In the case of a big hit to which the time saving A is given with reference to FIG. 75 (b), the time saving state is shifted to the time saving state of 100 times of the time saving after the end of the big hit game, and the time saving of 100 times is counted. Therefore, the required number of games X is "900 games" (see "Time saving A" in FIG. 75 (b)).
On the other hand, in the case of a time-saving probability variation jackpot, the number of games from the end of the electric support to the arrival at the ceiling differs depending on the number of STs.

“ST25”, “ST75”, and “ST100” in FIG. 75 (b) indicate cases in which the above-mentioned probability variation time reduction jackpot 3, probability variation time reduction jackpot 2, and probability variation time reduction jackpot 1 were won, respectively.
(A) In the case of ST25 (ST number 25 times + time reduction number 75 times), the required number of games X is "925 games" because the time reduction number 75 times after the end of ST25 times is counted.
(B) In the case of ST75 (75 STs + 25 time reductions), the required number of games X is "975 games" because 25 time reductions after the end of ST75 are counted.
(C) In the case of ST100 (ST number of times 100 times), since the probability change state is in progress for 100 games until the end of the electric support, these 100 games are excluded from the count target. Therefore, the required number of games X is 1000 games. In other words, the smaller the profitability, the smaller the number of games required from the end of the electric support to the number of ceiling games.

Summarizing the relationships shown in the figure, the relationship of "time reduction A (time reduction 100 times) <ST25 <ST75 <ST100" is obtained with respect to the above "required number of games X". That is, the more the game mode (internal game game state) with a relatively low profit level is shifted, the more the number of games required from the end of the electric support to the ceiling (the number of games required in the normal mode (normal state)). It becomes a peculiar relationship that it decreases. This point that "the number of games required to be played in the normal mode (normal state) is reduced" can be said to be a relief function having a character different from the ceiling privilege.

(When RAM is cleared)
(I 48) In this example (granting form (β)), the number of games in the gaming state (normal state and time saving state) accompanied by the low probability state is counted as the number of ceiling games. , The case where the RAM clear is executed will be described. When RAM clear is executed, the current value of the ceiling counter (current number of remaining ceiling games) is cleared, and the initial value of the number of ceiling games (1000 games) is reset to the ceiling counter. After clearing the RAM, the internal gaming state is set to the initial state "normal state", and the gaming mode is set to the "normal mode (general mode)". Therefore, after clearing the RAM, the ceiling is reached when 1000 games are digested in the normal state. On the other hand, when going through a time-saving jackpot (for example, 4R time-saving jackpot with 100 time-saving times), the number of ceiling games is set to 1000 games in the jackpot game. When digested, it reaches the ceiling.

That is, the number of games to reach the ceiling in the normal state differs depending on whether the RAM is cleared or the 4R time-saving jackpot is passed (the number of games to be digested in the normal state is shortened by the number of time reductions, which is substantially the same. The number of typical ceiling games fluctuates). In this case, the following problems arise. When the RAM is cleared, the number of ceiling games is set to the initial value, so if you play in the morning, you will always play under unfavorable ceiling arrival conditions, which may affect the rate of attracting customers in the morning. is there. However, since there is a possibility of clearing the RAM by changing the setting, the expectation of a high setting by changing the setting increases, but in the case of a gaming machine that does not have the setting function, the above problem still remains. Therefore, it can be said that it is preferable to count the number of games in the normal state as the number of ceiling games as in the present embodiment.

Further, as a means for solving the above problem, a configuration in which an advantageous number of ceiling games can be set at the time of clearing the RAM may be used. For example, when clearing the RAM, 800 games are set as the first initial value, and when the initial value is set under other conditions, in the present embodiment, after the time saving state ends, the probability change state ends, and the jackpot game ends. Although there are cases such as after the end of the support time reduction, when the ceiling game is set by these setting triggers, 1000 games are set as the second initial value. That is, the number of ceiling games that satisfies the relationship of "first initial value (set when RAM is cleared) <second initial value (when set at a timing other than RAM clear)" is set. In this way, even when the first game is played after clearing the RAM, the game is not played under the unfavorable ceiling arrival condition, and it is considered that the rate of attracting customers in the morning can be rather improved. As described in (I 53-3) above, at the time of clearing the RAM, one of the plurality of ceiling time reductions can be determined by lottery.

(I 54) The following can be performed depending on whether the ceiling is reached after the RAM is cleared or the ceiling is reached after a big hit.
(I-54-1) The fluctuation pattern distribution table to be referred to is common (the selectable fluctuation patterns are common).
(I 54-2) The confirmed display time is the same.
(I 54-3) The time saving rush notification effect is common when the ceiling game (ceiling mode) or the first rotation of the heaven mode is performed.

(Modified example of ceiling count in grant form (β))
(I 113) In this example (grant form (β)), the number of games in the game state accompanied by the low probability state is counted by the number of ceiling games (low probability game state count form), but the time is shortened. If the ceiling counter becomes zero during the state, the ceiling flag is set in the "ceiling function management process" shown in FIG. 64 without executing the process (step S904) in which the ceiling flag is ON (5AH). It is possible to maintain the OFF state and leave the ceiling counter at zero so as not to execute the ceiling activation preparation process (process routes of steps S915 to S917 and S914 during the game state transition process shown in FIG. 66). .. In this case, even if the ceiling is reached during a time-saving state such as during a support time-saving state, the change pattern selection mode (Tcode) dedicated to the ceiling is not changed, and the ceiling function is activated (giving a ceiling privilege). ) Can be prevented.
(Italy 114) In the low-probability game state counting mode (may include the configuration of (Italy 113) described above), it is a normal state to reset the initial value after the ceiling counter becomes zero during the time saving state. It is assumed that it has moved to.
(Italy 115) In the low probability game state count form (which may include the configuration of (Italy 113) or (Italy 114) described above), even if the ceiling counter reaches a predetermined value during the time saving state, the look-ahead notice is prohibited. It is configured so that it is not judged as. For example, in the case of the present embodiment, as described above, the 996th to 999th games in the precursor mode are set as the look-ahead prohibited section. At this time, the value of the ceiling counter is checked and the 996th game to the 996th game are set. It is judged whether or not it is the 999th game. Therefore, even though it is not in the precursor mode, the look-ahead notice is configured so as not to be determined as a prohibited section, and the look-ahead notice is not prohibited during the time saving state (for example, during the support time saving state).
(Italy 117) In the low probability game state count form (which may include the configuration of (Italy 113), (Italy 114) or (Italy 115) described above), the fluctuation pattern even if the ceiling counter becomes zero during the time saving state. The selection mode (Tcode) is configured not to be updated (the fluctuation pattern table is not changed). For example, when the ceiling counter is updated during the support time reduction state and the ceiling counter reaches a predetermined value (zero), the support time reduction state is achieved by not selecting the ceiling-specific fluctuation pattern (ceiling fluctuation). It is possible to prevent the ceiling mode, the ceiling activation preparation process, and the process related to the activation of the ceiling function (granting the ceiling privilege) from being executed.
(I 65) In the low probability game state count form (which may include the configurations of (I 113), (I 114) or (I 115), (I 117) described above), the ceiling counter is updated during the jackpot time saving state. Although processing is performed, it can be configured so that the ceiling counter is not updated during the ceiling time reduction state. Since the ceiling time reduction has not been activated yet during the jackpot time reduction state, the ceiling counter is updated. On the other hand, during the ceiling time reduction state, since the ceiling time reduction is already activated, the update of the ceiling counter is interrupted, and every time the ceiling counter becomes zero, the ceiling function is activated (giving a ceiling privilege) and the ceiling time reduction loops. It is possible to prevent the ceiling from being lost.
(I 118) In the low-probability game state count form (which may include the configurations of (I 113), (I 114), (I 115), (I 65) or (I 117) described above), the support time is shortened. Performs the ceiling counter update process, but can be configured not to perform the ceiling counter update process during the ceiling time reduction state. Since the ceiling time reduction has not been activated yet during the support time reduction state, the ceiling counter is updated. On the other hand, during the ceiling time reduction state, since the ceiling time reduction is already activated, the update of the ceiling counter is interrupted, and every time the ceiling counter becomes zero, the ceiling function is activated (giving a ceiling privilege) and the ceiling time reduction loops. It is possible to prevent the ceiling from being lost.

<Grant form (γ): Fig. 75 (c)>
(Γ) The number of games in a specific variable pattern selection mode (specific Tcode) is counted, and a ceiling privilege is given when the counted number of games reaches a predetermined number without winning a big hit. In order to facilitate the understanding of this example, as a virtual gaming machine, there are two gaming modes, "normal A mode" and "normal B mode", in which the variable pattern selection mode is different as the game mode corresponding to the normal mode. An example of a gaming machine capable of controlling the transition of modes will be described.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 75 (c), for example, the count target is the number of executed games in the "normal B mode". In this case, since the execution game of "normal A mode" is not counted, the ceiling privilege is not given no matter how much the game is executed in normal A mode, but it is executed during "normal B mode". When the number of games reaches a predetermined number, the ceiling privilege can be given. The transition conditions between "normal A mode" and "normal B mode" (transition conditions for variable pattern selection mode) include, for example, "cause mode transition when a small hit is won" or "number of executed games (number of executed games). Depending on the number of fluctuations), a mode transition occurs. " Using this example, it is possible to create the playability as shown in (A) or (B) below.

[(A) Case where the fluctuation pattern selection mode shifts due to the small hit winning]
A case where the transition of the fluctuation pattern selection mode is caused by the small hit winning will be described. As an example of this case, for example, when a small hit (winning probability 1/50) is provided on the special figure 1 side and a small hit (promotion lottery) is won during the "normal A mode" regarding the transition of the variable pattern selection mode. To "normal B" (shift to normal B mode after small hit game), and if you win the small hit again during "normal B mode" (fall lottery), switch to "normal A mode" Shift (shift to normal A mode after a small hit game). Then, regarding the granting of ceiling benefits, if a predetermined number of games (for example, 70 games) are addicted without winning a small hit or a big hit in the "normal B mode" (70 games are lost continuously in the normal B mode). If) Ceiling benefits are granted. In the case of this case, the ceiling privilege is not given no matter how much you are addicted to in the normal A mode, but if you are addicted to 70 games in the normal B mode, the ceiling privilege is given. Therefore, it is possible to create a novel playability in which the normal B mode functions as a "ceiling privilege granting chance period", that is, a "chance zone", which is advantageous to the player. A plurality of small hits may be provided. For example, when the first small hit is won during the normal A mode, the mode shifts to the normal B mode, and when the second small hit is won during the normal B mode, the normal A is performed. You may shift to the mode. In this case, the first small hit and the second small hit may have different winning probabilities, or may have the same winning probability. In addition, the winning probability of a small hit can be determined according to the set value. For example, the higher the set value, the higher the winning probability of the first small hit (the small hit that triggers the transition to the normal B mode (chance zone)), and the second small hit (the trigger to shift to the normal A mode). If the winning probability of (small hit) is set low, the higher the setting, the lower the probability of falling from the normal B mode. That is, it is possible to create a playability in which the higher the set value, the higher the probability of granting the ceiling privilege. The probability of winning a small hit, the variable pattern selection mode for counting, and the number of games for which ceiling benefits are given can be appropriately determined in consideration of playability.

[B: A case where the fluctuation pattern selection mode shifts due to the number of fluctuations]
Next, a case where the fluctuation pattern selection mode shifts due to the number of fluctuations will be described. As an example of this case, for example, regarding the transition of the variable pattern selection mode, when the first number of games (for example, 50 games) are executed during the normal A mode, the transition to the "normal B mode" is performed, and the "normal B mode" When the second number of games (for example, 40 games) is executed during the operation, the mode shifts to the "normal A mode". Then, when the number of games in the normal B mode reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, 400 games), the ceiling privilege is given. In this example, it is possible to reach 400 games, which is the number of games reaching the ceiling, when the mode is changed to the normal B mode 10 times. It should be noted that the number of games reaching the ceiling is not fixed, but a plurality of types of games such as 400 games, 600 games, and 800 games are provided, and any number of games can be determined by lottery. You may. In this case, the number of games reaching the ceiling is randomized, and the fun of the game can be improved. Further, the higher the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively small number of games (400 games), and the lower the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively large number of games (800 games). If the lottery probability is determined according to the set value, the higher the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege, and conversely, the lower the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege. In addition, a setting estimation element can be given to the player depending on the difference in the number of games reaching the ceiling.

Further, instead of counting the number of games in the specific fluctuation pattern selection mode, the count target may be "the number of transitions to the specific fluctuation pattern selection mode". In this case, the ceiling privilege can be given when the number of transitions to the specific variation pattern selection mode (normal B mode in this example) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). Further, a plurality of types of the above-mentioned transition times may be provided (for example, 7 times, 8 times, 9 times, 10 times, etc.), and any of the transition times may be determined by a lottery (transition number lottery). In this case, the higher the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively small number of transitions (for example, 7 times), and the lower the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively large number of transitions (for example, 10 times). If the lottery probability of the number of transitions is determined according to the set value, the higher the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege, and conversely, the lower the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege. In addition, a setting estimation element can be given to the player depending on the difference in the number of games reaching the ceiling.

<Grant form (δ)>
Also, instead of counting the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol), (δ) "the number of executions of the normal symbol variation display game (the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol)" is counted. May be good. In this case, it is preferable to count the "number of fluctuations of the normal symbol" in the gaming state accompanied by the low probability state (normal state and / or time saving state). For example, when the number of executions of the normal map variation display game in the normal mode (normal state) is counted and the predetermined number of games (for example, the 2000th game) is reached, the ceiling privilege can be given.

<Grant form (ε)>
Further, (ε) the number of times of winning a "small hit" in which the condition device does not operate can be counted, and the ceiling privilege can be given when the number of times of winning reaches a predetermined number without winning a big hit. For example, the probability of winning a small hit is set to 1/100, and when the winning of a small hit reaches 10 times, a ceiling privilege is given. In addition, instead of the number of times the "small hit" is won, the number of times the special electric accessory is operated (the number of times the small hit game is executed) when the small hit is won may be counted. In addition, this example can also be applied to the small hit winning type support time reduction.
Further, a plurality of types of the above-mentioned winning times may be provided (for example, 7 times, 8 times, 9 times, 10 times), and any number of times may be determined by lottery (ceiling transition winning number lottery). In this case, the higher the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively small number of winnings (for example, 7 times), and the lower the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively large number of winnings (for example, 10 times). If the lottery probability of each winning number is determined according to the set value, the higher the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege, and conversely, the lower the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege. Further, depending on the difference in the number of games reaching the ceiling, a setting guessing element can be given to the player (the same applies to the "granting form ζ" described below).

<Grant form (ζ)>
Further, (ζ) the number of times of winning “per auxiliary” is counted, and when the predetermined number of times of winning is reached, the ceiling privilege can be given. In this case, it is preferable to count the number of winnings in a gaming state (normal state and / or latent state) with at least a low probability of lottery per auxiliary (normal symbol probability change function not activated). In addition, instead of the number of winnings of "auxiliary hit", the number of executions of the Fuden open game may be counted.

The above-mentioned grant forms (ε) and (ζ) are characterized in that the condition for granting the ceiling privilege does not depend on the number of times the symbol variation display game is executed (the number of symbol variations).

Regarding the above-described embodiment, grant form (α) and grant form (β), it has been described that the ceiling privilege is given when a predetermined number of games (ceiling games) is reached, but the present invention is not limited to this. As in the above-mentioned grant form (γ), the number of ceiling games may be determined by a predetermined lottery (lottery for the number of ceiling games). Specifically, a plurality of types of ceiling games can be provided (for example, 500 games, 700 games, 1000 games), and the number of ceiling games can be determined by lottery. In this case as well, the higher the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively small number of games, and the lower the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively large number of games. Can be determined.

[Modification 2 of the privilege granting form (divided privilege granting form): FIG. 76]
In the first modification of the above embodiment and the privilege granting embodiment, the embodiment in which the ceiling activation trigger is once (the ceiling privilege is granted in the 1000th game) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to set multiple (at least twice) privilege activation triggers (small privilege granting triggers), and to grant large benefits (for example, profit equivalent to ceiling benefits) by the small benefits granted by each privilege activation trigger. It can be configured (split privilege grant form). This variant 2 is, in that it uses multiple privilege activation triggers, rather than the purpose of "giving a privilege to rescue the player from a big hit", "base up during a specific gaming state ( For example, the purpose of "base up in the normal state (normal mode))" is strong.

As a typical example of this modification 2, for example, an upper limit is set for the number of time reductions given between big hits, and the upper limit number of time reductions is given in a plurality of times. Specifically, a "large privilege (corresponding to a ceiling privilege)" with a finite time reduction of 100 times is given (divided) in four times according to a "small privilege" with a finite time reduction of 25 times. Is. Therefore, this modification satisfies the following relational expression (10).

The upper limit of the number of time reductions to be given (hereinafter referred to as "upper limit time reduction number") is X times, the number of times of grant is Y times, and the number of times the upper limit time reduction number is divided (hereinafter referred to as "division time reduction number") is Zk times (k = 1 to Y: In the following, it may be simply referred to as "Z")
"ΣZk = X k = 1 to Y" ... Equation (10)
Meet. For example, when the upper limit time reduction number X is 100 times and the division grant number Y is 4 times, the total number of division time reductions (Z1 + Z2 + Z3 + Z4) in the case of granting 4 times before the next big hit is won is 100 of the upper limit time reduction times. The time saving state is given so that the number of times (Z1 + Z2 + Z3 + Z4 = 100). The number of division time reductions Zk may be the same or substantially the same number of division time reductions, or at least one may be a different number of division time reductions. That is, it may be configured to divide and grant small benefits of the same or substantially the same profit, or may be configured to divide and grant different small benefits. As an example of the former, for example, 25 times of time saving are divided into 4 times and the upper limit time saving number is 100 times (the same number of times of dividing time is given), and as an example of the latter, for example, the first time to the fourth time. The number of division time reductions is set to "20 times, 20 times, 20 times, and 40 times" (partially different number of division time reductions) and "15 times, 35 times, 20 times, and 30 times" (different division time reductions, respectively). Number of times) and so on. In addition, as the number of Hamari games increases, a small privilege with a relatively high degree of profit may be given. For example, the number of times of division time reduction from the first time to the fourth time can be set to "10 times, 20 times, 30 times and 40 times".

It should be noted that the values for setting the upper limit time reduction number X, the granting number Y, and the division time reduction number Z can be appropriately determined in consideration of game playability and the like. For example, the upper limit time reduction number X can be set to the number of times (for example, 300 times) that satisfies the relationship of "upper limit time reduction number X> maximum time reduction number due to big hit". However, in order not to give excessive benefits, the upper limit time reduction number X is set to at least "upper limit time reduction number X ≤ maximum time reduction number due to big hit (100 times)" or "minimum time reduction number due to big hit (50 times) ≤ upper limit". It is preferable that the relationship satisfies "time reduction number X <maximum time reduction number by big hit (100 times)".

In addition, there may be a plurality of privilege activation triggers (granting number Y), for example, "what game to give or how many games are given regardless of the game state", "specific game". It is also possible to appropriately determine which game of the state to give, "how many games are played in a specific gaming state," and the like.

In addition, after the maximum number of time reductions (large privilege) has been granted, no further time reduction status is granted, and the privilege is not granted until the next big hit. After the grant of the big privilege is finished, the sufficient privilege is given, in other words, it is assumed that the relief function is fulfilled, and the privilege is not given until the next big hit. However, a ceiling privilege (FIG. 100B, FIG. 69) may be provided separately. For example, after the division privilege grant is completed, the ceiling privilege can be granted when the predetermined number of games is addicted to 1000 games without winning the next big hit. In addition, the setting suggestion effect can be configured to appear in at least one of the plurality of privilege activation triggers. In this case, when the privilege activation opportunity (privilege granting game) arrives, the setting suggestion information can be obtained in addition to the privilege granting, so that the fun of the game can be improved.

Further, here, a configuration in which a finite time reduction is given as a great privilege has been described, but it goes without saying that it can also be applied to a finite probability variation or a finite latency. In this case, if the above-mentioned "time reduction number" is appropriately read as "ST number" and "time reduction state" is appropriately read as "probability change state" or "latent probability state", a finite probability change (large privilege) is divided and given (small privilege). It is self-evident that the concept is a configuration in which a finite probability variation is given multiple times, or a configuration in which a finite latent probability (large privilege) is divided and given (a finite latent probability of a small privilege is given multiple times). For example, the upper limit time reduction number X may be read as “upper limit ST number X”, the division time reduction number Z may be read as “division ST number”, and the like. As an example, in the above formula (10), the upper limit of the number of STs to be given (upper limit ST number) is X times, the number of grants is Y times, and the number of times the upper limit ST number is divided (number of divided STs) is Zk times. When (k = 1 to Y) is set, it may be read as satisfying "ΣZk = X k = 1 to Y".

(Specific example of modification 2: FIG. 76)
This modification (modification example 2) can be roughly divided into a "periodic granting form" in which a privilege is given periodically (regularly) such as "a small privilege is given each time a predetermined number of games are executed". ", And there are" aperiodic grant forms "that do not periodically divide and grant. First, a periodic grant form will be described with reference to FIG. 76.

[Periodic grant form]
<A. Specific Example 1 of Periodic Grant Form (Grant Form (κ)): FIG. 76 (a)>
FIG. 76 (a) shows an example of the periodic grant form (grant form (κ)). In FIG. 76 (a), every time a predetermined number of games (here, 100 games) are executed during the normal state (normal mode) after the end of the electric support by the big hit (p0 in the figure) ( P1, p3, p5, p7) shown in the figure, and a small privilege "finite time reduction of 25 times of time reduction (25 times of division time reduction)" are given. Here, the number of grants is set to 4, and by granting a total of 4 small benefits, the grant of the large benefit "finite time reduction of 100 times of time reduction (upper limit of 100 times of time reduction)" is completed. It shows the case to do.

For details, as shown in FIG. 76 (a), the 100 games from the 1st to the 100th games (p1) after the end of the electric support (p0) are controlled to the normal state (period without division), and the 101st game. When the first privilege activation opportunity (privilege grant opportunity) arrives, a finite time reduction (25 times of time reduction) of a small privilege is given, and the 25 games from the 101st to 125th games (p2) are controlled to the time reduction state. (Controlled to a shorter time by the first small privilege).
Next, the 100 games from the 126th to the 225th games (p3) are controlled to the normal state again (period without division grant), and the second privilege activation opportunity arrives at the 226th game, and the finite time reduction of the small privilege ( The time saving number 25 times) is given, and the time saving state is controlled between the 25 games from the 226th to the 250th games (p4) (controlled to the time saving state by the second small privilege).
Next, the 100 games from the 251 to 350 games (p5) are controlled to the normal state again (period without division grant), and the third privilege activation opportunity arrives at the 351st game, and the finite time reduction of the small privilege (the finite time reduction of the small privilege ( The time reduction number 25 times) is given, and the time reduction state is controlled until the 351 to 375th game (p6) (control to the time reduction state by the third small privilege).
Then, the 376th to 475th games (p7) are controlled to the normal state again, and the final (4th) privilege activation opportunity arrives at the 476th game, and the finite time reduction (25 times of time reduction) of the small privilege is reached. It is granted and controlled to the time saving state from the 476th to the 500th game (p8) (controlled to the time saving state by the 4th small privilege), and with the above, the grant of the big privilege "Limited time saving of 100 times of time saving" is completed. To do. That is, small benefits (25 times of time reduction) are given periodically (every 100 games) divided into 4 times, and if 500 games are addicted after the end of the electric support, all of the maximum number of time reductions of 100 times will be given. Become. In other words, such a grant form is the same phenomenon as granting a maximum of 4 sets with the game period of "100 times of executed games in the normal state + 25 times of shortened time" as one set, and the limiter function is provided. It can be said that it has a privilege granting function. Although the effect mode is not shown, it may be configured so that the mode can be controlled to shift to the game mode or the effect mode according to the internal game state.

(When granting infinite benefits)
In the above example, the configuration in which the finite time reduction is divided and given as a big privilege has been described, but the upper limit time reduction number of times is infinite, that is, the "infinite time reduction" can be divided and given. When the big privilege is "infinite time reduction", for example, a predetermined number of division time reductions (small privilege) may be permanently given every 100 games until the next big hit is won. Further, as in FIG. 76A, 25 times of division time reduction are given for every 100 games, but an infinite number of division time reductions may be given to the 476th game (p7 of the final grant). In this case, the time saving state can be continued even after the 501st game. Of course, an infinite probability variation or an infinite latent probability with an infinite upper limit ST number can be divided and given. In this case, as described above, the above-mentioned "time reduction number" may be appropriately read as "ST number of times", and "time reduction state" may be appropriately read as "probability change state" or "latent probability state".

<B. Specific Example 2 of Periodic Grant Form (Grant Form (κ)): FIG. 76 (b)>
In the above-mentioned grant form (κ), the periodic grant form of “dividing the ceiling privilege” has been described. Next, as another periodic grant form, the profit state granted by winning the jackpot is "infinite time reduction", "finite time reduction", "infinite probability variation", "finite probability variation", "infinite latency", or "finite". A configuration (grant form (λ)) in which "infinity" and the like are divided and given by a plurality of privilege activation triggers will be described.

In this example, the profits such as the time saving state (infinite time saving, finite time saving), the probability change state (infinite probability change, finite probability change), and the latent probability state (infinite latent probability, finite latent probability) given by winning the big hit are obtained multiple times. It is a configuration in which the benefits are divided and granted according to the trigger of the privilege activation. That is, instead of immediately giving the total number of time reductions and the total number of STs after the big hit game as in the above embodiment (see FIGS. 4, 100A, 100B, etc.), the total number of times is given to the small amount over a long game period. It is a structure that goes. In this example, in the case of a time saving big hit, the number of time saving given by the big hit corresponds to the "upper limit time saving number" (large privilege), and the number of time saving given in installments corresponds to the above "divided time saving number" (small privilege). To do. Further, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot or a latent jackpot, the number of STs given by the jackpot corresponds to the "upper limit ST number" (large privilege), and the number of STs given in installments is the above "divided ST number" (small privilege). Corresponds to. FIG. 76 (b) shows a specific example thereof.

FIG. 76 (b) shows, as a representative example of this example (granting form (λ)), time-saving jackpots α to γ (for example, finite time-saving jackpots with 50 time-saving times and finite time-savings with 100 time-saving times). The case of winning the big hit, the infinite time short big hit) is illustrated. FIG. (A) shows a case of normal granting without dividing the number of time reductions when the time reduction jackpot of 50 times (corresponding to the time reduction jackpot 2 in FIG. 4) is won, and FIG. When the time saving jackpot of 100 times (corresponding to the 4R time saving jackpot in Fig. 4) is won, the case where the time saving number of 100 times is divided into two times and given in two times (the divided time saving number of 50 times is divided into two times) The case where the time reduction is given in a divided manner) is shown, and FIG. Shows the case where an infinite number of times is given to.

As shown in FIGS. (A) to (C) with reference to FIG. 76 (b), when any of the time saving jackpots α to γ is won, the number of time savings is first set regardless of which jackpot is won. Fifty times are given, and then different game transitions are followed according to the winning jackpot type. Here, as shown in the figure, when it is determined that the effect modes are shared, the playability described below can be created.

(Time saving number of secret games)
When the time-saving jackpots α to γ are won, the jackpot type won in the symbol variation display game effect (such as the notice effect including the decoration stop symbol) and the hit-time effect is kept secret. The production mode after the big hit game is also a common time reduction production mode (underwater acoustic battle mode: see FIG. 7B) up to 50 times of the first time reduction (between 1 to 50 games) (sections a0 to p0 in the figure). , The 51st to 150th games after that are also common normal production modes (sections p0 to p1 in the figure). Therefore, the winning jackpot type is kept secret from the production until the 150th game elapses, and during this time, the player enjoys the game while expecting the winning of the time-saving jackpot β or the time-saving jackpot γ. Here, if the jackpot won this time is the time-saving jackpot α, the normal production mode is continued after the 151st game (p1 or later), so at this point, the jackpot won this time was the time-saving jackpot α. It turns out that. However, if the winning jackpot is a time-saving jackpot β or a time-saving jackpot γ, a time-saving state occurs in the 151st game, and the game shifts to the time-saving effect mode again. Therefore, at this stage, the time-saving jackpot β or the time-saving jackpot γ It is a secret state which of γ was won. Therefore, the player will play the game hoping that the time saving state will not end in 200 games (p2 in the figure) (while expecting the winning of the time saving jackpot γ). Then, if the time saving state continues after 201 games, it is confirmed that the winning jackpot is the time saving jackpot γ, that is, the infinite time saving, and the player can proceed with the game under the high base state until the next jackpot with peace of mind. Can be done. In this way, by gradually disclosing the number of time reductions in the concealed state, the player's expectation for the continuation of the electric support, the tension of the end of the electric support, and the uplifting feeling when the continuation of the electric support is found are fueled. It is possible to create such playability (hidden game with a reduced number of times). In the time saving state after 201 games where the infinite time saving is known, the normal time saving effect mode (underwater acoustic battle mode) may be used, but as shown in the figure, a special time saving effect mode different from the normal time saving effect mode is used. (Special time saving effect mode) may be made to appear, and it may be definitively notified that the time saving has been infinite.

In the above, the relationship between the three time reduction jackpots α to γ (finite time reduction jackpot with 50 time reductions, finite time reduction jackpot with 100 time reductions, and infinite time reduction jackpot) with different number of time reductions has been described. If there are two different time-saving jackpots, the above-mentioned time-saving number of secret games can be realized. Further, in the example of FIG. 76 (b), the time reduction jackpots α to γ having different time reduction times have been described, but the same phenomenon also occurs for the support time reductions in which the time reduction times are different. The same event also occurs for probability variation jackpots with different ST times (for example, finite probability variation jackpot α with 50 STs, finite probability variation jackpot β with 100 STs, and infinite probability variation jackpot γ). It is possible to realize a "ST count concealment game" in which the number of STs is disclosed step by step.

[Aperiodic grant form]
<Grant form (μ)>
In the above-mentioned grant forms (κ) and (λ), the mode in which the small benefits are given periodically has been described, but the form in which the small benefits are given aperiodically may be used (aperiodic grant). form). For example, the privilege activation trigger is the 200th game, the 350th game, the 600th game, the 800th game, and the like. In the case of the aperiodic grant form, a plurality of privilege activation triggers may be determined by lottery, or a plurality of privilege activation trigger scenarios (scenarios in which the number of multiple privilege activation trigger games is predetermined) may be set. It may be provided so that one of the privilege activation trigger scenarios can be determined by lottery. Other points (matters related to large benefits, small benefits, etc.) overlap with those described in the above-mentioned grant forms (κ) and (λ), so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[Other grant forms]
<Grant form (ν)>
In the above-mentioned split benefit granting form, a mode in which the small benefit is split and granted up to the profit of the large benefit has been described. However, the configuration may not be limited to the profit of the big privilege. For example, the "specific privilege" is given periodically or aperiodically, but the upper limit of the profit to be given is not set. In short, the big privilege is the infinite system privilege (infinite time reduction, infinite probability variation or infinite latent probability), and the small privilege is the finite system privilege (predetermined time reduction number of time reduction states, predetermined ST number of finite probability variation or predetermined ST). The number of times is finite latency), and the small privilege is given periodically or aperiodically until the next big hit without any limitation on the number of times Y is given. This example is different from the "divided grant", which has an upper limit, in that the number of grants Y is unlimited (the number of grants is infinite). For example, if this example is explained with reference to FIG. 76 (a), the small privilege "finite time reduction of 25 times" is periodically given (granted every 100 games in the normal state). The grant will not be completed at the time of p8 (4th time), and will be granted permanently until the next big hit. Further, for example, to explain using FIGS. 76 (b) and (C), at the time of p2, instead of switching the privilege to be given to "infinite time reduction", the small privilege "finite time reduction of 50 times reduction" is given. , P2 and later are also given periodically (give every 100 games in the normal state). When the number of grants reaches a predetermined number of times or a predetermined number of games, the advantage (profit state) of the small privilege may be increased. For example, according to FIG. 76 (a), when the number of grants reaches 10, the “time reduction number of times”, which is relatively more advantageous than the current small privilege “time reduction of 25 times, finite time reduction”. It can be "50 times finite time reduction" (medium privilege). The conditions for switching from the small privilege to the medium privilege can be the case where the predetermined number of times of grant and / or the predetermined number of games are reached.

<Special grant form 1>
(Italy 50) A case where the relationship of "M <N" is satisfied when the number of time reductions due to the ceiling time reduction is N and the number of ceiling games (initial value of the ceiling counter) is M.
When the game in the ceiling time reduction state is also counted as the number of ceiling games (the case where the ceiling counter is updated during the ceiling time reduction state), if the above-mentioned "M <N" relationship is satisfied, even if the time reduction is finite. It is possible to generate a ceiling time reduction (permanent time reduction) that is substantially the same as an infinite time reduction. .. More specifically, if the number of ceiling games is 1000 (M = 1000) and the number of time reductions due to ceiling time reduction is 1200 (N = 1200), 1200 ceiling time reductions will be granted upon the first arrival at the ceiling. Become. Then, since the number of ceiling games is counted again from the first number of ceiling games (1000th game), the ceiling is reached again before the 1200th game, which is the end of the ceiling time reduction state, arrives (second time). (Reaching the ceiling), the second ceiling time reduction of 1200 times is granted, and so on, unless the end condition of the ceiling time reduction is satisfied, the time reduction state is repeatedly granted. According to this configuration, even if the ceiling time reduction of a finite time reduction is given, the time reduction state continues forever, so that the jackpot cannot be won and the ceiling time reduction state does not end. According to this configuration, if the ceiling time reduction is given even once, the time reduction state can be maintained until the big hit is won, so that the player can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

<Special grant form 2>
(I 58) In the present embodiment, one ceiling game has been described, but a plurality of ceiling games may be defined.
Specifically, when the number of games for the first ceiling is reached without winning the jackpot, the first ceiling time reduction is given (the first ceiling function is activated), and the player exits without winning the jackpot during the first ceiling time reduction state. After that, when the number of second ceiling games is reached without winning a big hit, the second ceiling time reduction is given (the second ceiling function is activated). According to this configuration, since a plurality of ceiling games that trigger ceiling activation are provided, a major feature is that ceiling benefits can be given step by step.
The number of first ceiling games and the number of second ceiling games may be the same or different. Further, the first time reduction number related to the first ceiling time reduction and the second time reduction number related to the second ceiling time reduction may be the same or different. Further, the performance of the first ceiling time reduction and the performance of the second ceiling time reduction may be the same or different. Here, the "performance of shortening the ceiling time" means the degree of profit (ball ejection performance) depending on the operation mode (opening / closing operation pattern of the movable wing piece 47) of the normal electric opening game.

In the case of this configuration, from the viewpoint of gradually granting the ceiling privilege and relieving the player from being addicted, it is preferable that "the number of second ceiling games <the number of first ceiling games". If you encounter a big addiction, you can prevent the player's willingness to play by giving the ceiling privilege earlier than the previous time. Further, it is preferable that the degree of advantage of the ceiling time reduction is "first ceiling time reduction <second ceiling time reduction". This is to prevent the player's motivation to play from being significantly reduced by giving a ceiling privilege that is more profitable than the previous time when he / she encounters a big addiction.

The above-described embodiment can have the following configurations (1) to (6). The corresponding elements in the embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
(1) A launching means (launching device 13, FIG. 3) capable of launching a game ball into the gaming area (gaming area 3a in FIG. 2), and
When the starting means (starting ports 34, 35) detects a game ball, a lottery means (S410 in FIG. 66) for drawing a lottery for a plurality of types of hits, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a win, the hit game execution control means (FIG. 15) that controls the execution of the hit game and the winning game execution control means (FIG. 15).
A gaming machine including symbol display means (special symbol display devices 38a, 38b) that display variable symbols and display the lottery result by the lottery means according to the stop display mode of the symbol.
A gaming state control means capable of controlling a low probability gaming state with a low probability state in which the lottery probability of winning is a predetermined normal probability and a high probability gaming state with a high probability state in which the lottery probability is higher than the normal probability. (FIG. 4, FIG. 100A, FIG. 100B, FIG. 63, S412, FIG. 66) and
After the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the hit game is not generated by the hit game execution control means, and the number of fluctuations of the symbol executed in the low probability game state becomes a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 1000 times). Bonus game state control means (FIG. 100B (ceiling mode, heaven mode column)), FIG. 63, which controls the privilege game state (ceiling privilege (FIG. 100B, FIG. 69)) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state when the value is reached. S420 to S421, S412A, FIGS. 64-66, 69, 75, etc.).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
(2) Advantageous gaming state control means (FIG.) for controlling the entry state into the starting means to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a time saving state) accompanied by an advantageous entry state (for example, an electric support state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. 6 (column of time saving mode), S412 of FIG. 63, FIG. 66, FIGS. 68A to 68B, etc.) are further provided.
The advantageous game state control means is configured to be able to control the advantageous game state after the hit game.
The gaming machine according to (1) above.
(3) The privileged gaming state and the advantageous gaming state have different advantages for the player (for example, the number of time reductions due to the ceiling time reduction and the number of time reductions due to the jackpot or support time reduction are different).
The gaming machine according to (2) above.
(4) The advantageous game state control means is
At least the first advantageous gaming state (for example, 100 times of time saving) and the second advantageous gaming state (for example, 200 times of time saving) which is more advantageous than the first advantageous gaming state, depending on the winning type won by the lottery means. ) And at least controllable,
The gaming machine according to (2) above.
(5) The above-mentioned privilege game state control means is
Control to the first advantageous gaming state as the privileged gaming state (for example, the case where the heaven time is reduced 100 times).
The gaming machine according to (4) above.
(6) The above-mentioned privilege game state control means is
Control as the above-mentioned privileged gaming state to the above-mentioned second advantageous gaming state (for example, the case where the national time reduction is 200 times of time reduction).
The gaming machine according to (4) above.
(7) The effect control means capable of controlling a plurality of types of effect modes related to the game state is further provided (effect control unit 24), and the effect mode related to the privileged game state is different from the effect mode related to the advantageous game state. Production mode (for example, time saving production mode (Fig. 100A), heaven production mode (Fig. 100B)),
The gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (6) above.

Further, the above-described embodiment and the imparted forms (granted forms (α) to (μ): FIGS. 75 to 76) related to the modified examples can be the following (Structure A) to (Structure G).
(Structure A)
A launching means that can launch a game ball into the game area,
When the starting means detects the game ball, the lottery means for executing the lottery regarding the hit, and the lottery means.
A symbol display means that performs a variable display operation of the symbol and displays the lottery result by the lottery means according to the stop display mode of the symbol.
A gaming machine provided with a profit state generating means capable of generating a profit state advantageous to a player based on a predetermined generation condition.
The above-mentioned means of generating a profit state is
When the lottery by the above lottery means is won, the winning game execution control means for executing and controlling the winning game and the winning game execution control means
After the above-mentioned winning game is completed, the first profit state generating means for generating the first profit state and the first profit state generating means,
After the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the second profit state generation means for generating the second profit state when the specific generation condition is satisfied without executing the hit game is provided.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
(Structure B)
The first profit state and the second profit state are the same profit state,
The gaming machine of the above configuration A, characterized in that.
(Structure C)
The first profit state and the second profit state are different from each other.
The gaming machine according to the above configuration A, characterized in that.
(Structure D)
The profit status of the second profit status is lower than that of the first profit status.
The gaming machine according to the above configuration A, characterized in that.
(Structure E)
The first profit state is started after the end of the winning game, and then ends when a predetermined game period elapses.
The second profit state is started after the specific occurrence condition is satisfied, then ends once when the predetermined game period elapses, and is restarted when the specific occurrence condition is satisfied again. ,
The gaming machine according to the above configuration A or the above configuration B.
(Structure F)
The first profit state is started after the end of the winning game, and then ends when a predetermined number of games have elapsed.
The second profit state is started after the specific occurrence condition is satisfied, and then continues until the winning game is won.
The gaming machine according to the above configuration A or the above configuration C.
(Structure G)
The first profit state is started after the end of the winning game, and then ends when the first game period elapses.
The second profit state is started when the specific generation condition is satisfied, and then ends when the second game period shorter than the first game period elapses, and when the specific generation condition is satisfied again, the second profit state is satisfied. 2 Profit status resumes,
The gaming machine according to any one of the above-mentioned configuration A, the above-mentioned configuration C, and the above-mentioned configuration D.

(Modification example related to model type)
In this embodiment, the ST type model has been described. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the ST type model, and may be a model in which the transition mode of the gaming state is defined as follows, for example, the following models (machine 1) to (machine 4).

(Machine 1) "V probability variation type"
A specific area through which the game ball can pass is provided in the large winning opening, and if one or more specific jackpots (for example, probabilistic jackpot) are won, the game ball can easily pass through the specific area (passable). On the other hand, if you win another big hit (for example, time saving big hit) or support time saving, it is configured to make it difficult or impossible to pass through a specific area, and if the game ball passes through a specific area (so-called "V prize"" ) Only, it may be a so-called "V probability variation type" model in which the special symbol probability variation function is activated to shift to the probability variation state or the latent probability state.

(Machine 2) "Fall lottery type"
In the game state (latent state or probability change state) accompanied by a high probability state, a so-called "fall lottery" is performed in each game with a predetermined fall probability, such as a transition lottery from a high probability state to a low probability state (fall lottery). It may be a "lottery type" model. In this fall lottery type, when a fall lottery is won, the winning game (falling game) shifts to a low probability state (at least the special symbol probability change function is set to OFF), and the big hit lottery in the winning game is also in a low probability state. It is designed to be drawn at. There are the following cases (A) to (C) as the game state transition form when the fall lottery is won. (A) Probability change state (ST) → Time saving state (time saving mode), (B) Probability change state → Normal state (normal mode), (C) Latent probability state (latent probability mode) → Normal state (normal mode). In such a fall lottery type, in the fall game, the game state is shifted to a gaming state with at least a low probability state. Therefore, when the execution game in the normal state or the time saving state is counted as the ceiling game, it is preferable to count the falling game as the first game. In addition, except for the fall game, the next game may be counted as the first game.

The ST type model described in the above embodiment and the fall lottery type of this example (machine 2) are mainly "presence or absence of a fall lottery (fall lottery means)" and "fall transition control based on the fall lottery result (fall lottery result). The only difference is the presence or absence of the fall transition control means). Therefore, regarding the matters related to game playability (for example, FIGS. 100A and 100B) described in the present embodiment, before winning the fall lottery (in the case of a gaming state with a high probability state), it is applied to the embodiment related to the probability change state. It is possible, and after winning the fall lottery (when the fall lottery is won and the game state is shifted to the game state with a low probability state), the embodiment relating to the normal state or the time saving state (the game state of the fall transition destination). Applicable to.

By the way, the conventional fall lottery type has only one type of fall probability regardless of the jackpot type (type of winning symbol), and the game tends to be monotonous, which lacks the fun of the game. Therefore, a plurality of types of fall probabilities are provided according to the jackpot type. In this case, each jackpot may have different fall probabilities, or some may have the same or different fall probabilities. Assuming that the gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment is a "fall lottery type", for example, the probability of falling is set to 1/200, 1/150, 1/100 for probability variation jackpot 1-3 (special figure 1 side). The jackpots 4 to 7 (special figure 2 side) are 1/240, and if the jackpot belonging to the special figure 1 side is won, the fall probability is different, and if the jackpot on the special figure 2 side is won, the same fall probability. Can be. Further, as a means for providing a plurality of types of fall probabilities, the fall probabilities can be determined according to the set values (settings 1 to 6). In other words, at least the first set value and the second set value can be configured so that the fall probabilities are different. For example, the lower the set value, the higher the fall probability can be set.

Further, the number of STs may be the same for each jackpot, may be different, or may be partially different. Further, the number of STs can include not only a finite number but also an infinite number. For example, the number of STs may be 25, 75, 100, or the number of STs for each jackpot may be 100, infinite, or the like, as in Probabilistic Big Hits 1 to 7 shown in FIG. However, in the case of the fall lottery type, if the fall lottery is won before the number of STs is exhausted, the probability will be forcibly shifted to the low probability state (the number of STs will be forcibly set to zero). Further, when the fall lottery is won, the setting suggestion effect (set suggestion effect at the time of fall) may be made executable by the effect means. In this case, the execution probability of the fall setting suggestion effect can be determined according to the set value.

Regarding the above-mentioned fall lottery type, for example, the following configurations (T1) to (T3) can be used.
(T1)
Acquisition means for acquiring a plurality of types of game information including the first game information (random number for jackpot determination) and the second game information (random number for fall determination) based on the establishment of the start condition (for example, FIG. 11). S314: In the case of this example, a random number for jackpot judgment, a random number for special symbol judgment, a random number for fluctuation pattern, and a random number for fall judgment can be acquired).
A lottery means (S410 in FIG. 63) that executes a lottery regarding a plurality of types of hits based on the first game information acquired by the acquisition means.
A symbol display means (special symbol display device 38, S309 in FIG. 10) that performs a variable display operation of the symbol and displays the lottery result by the lottery means according to the stop display mode of the symbol.
When the symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode in the symbol display means (when the lottery result of the lottery means is a hit), the hit game execution control means (FIG. 15) for controlling the execution of the hit game, and
After the winning game is completed, the probability fluctuation control means (S412A in FIG. 63, FIG. 66) capable of controlling the lottery probability to be won by the lottery means to a high probability state in which the probability is higher than the predetermined normal probability, and
In the case of the high probability state, the fall lottery means (mainly) for executing the fall lottery as to whether or not to shift from the high probability state to the low probability state based on the second game information (fall determination random value). Control unit 20) and
A gaming machine T including a fall transition control means (main control unit 20) that controls the transition from the high probability state to the low probability state when the fall lottery is won.
The above-mentioned plurality of types of hits include at least a first hit and a second hit.
When the first hit is won (when the winning game by the first hit is executed) and when the second hit is won (when the winning game by the second hit is executed), the above It can be configured so that the fall lottery probability by the fall lottery means is different.

(T2)
The gaming machine T is configured so that the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a predetermined result differs depending on the set value that can be changed in a plurality of stages. In this case, the set value that can be changed in the plurality of steps includes at least the first set value and the second set value, and the first set value and the second set value are configured so that the fall probability is different. be able to.

(T3)
The gaming machine T is configured so that the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a predetermined result differs depending on the set value that can be changed in a plurality of stages.
The above-mentioned plurality of types of hits include at least a first hit and a second hit.
The setting values that can be changed in the above-mentioned multiple stages include at least the first setting value and the second setting value.
It is configured so that the fall lottery probability by the fall lottery means differs between the case where the first hit is won and the case where the second hit is won.
When the set value is the first set value, at least the second hit is not included in the lottery result by the lottery means.

The gaming machine T is configured to be able to control a plurality of types of gaming states (at least two gaming states including the probabilistic state and / or the latent state among the probabilistic state, the latent probable state, the time saving state, and the normal state). can do. Further, in the above ((T1) to (T3), when the fall lottery by the fall lottery means is won, the setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing the setting suggestion effect suggesting the current set value can be further provided. ..

(Machine 3) "Limiter mounted type"
When a big hit is won, it may be a so-called "limiter-equipped type" model having a limiter function that limits the number of times of continuous transition to a high probability state to a predetermined upper limit number (limit number of times). This limiter-mounted type corresponds to, for example, the so-called "limiter machine (set type)" disclosed in Japanese Patent No. 5075301.

In the case of the limiter-equipped type, until the number of jackpot wins reaches a predetermined limit (until the number of continuous operations of the condition device reaches a predetermined upper limit), the gaming state after the jackpot game ends is a gaming state with a high probability state (a gaming state with a high probability state). It shifts to the probabilistic state or the latent state). For example, when the limit number of times is 5, the game state after the big hit game is controlled to a high probability state from the first big hit to the fourth big hit, and the benefit of the big hit lottery under the high probability state up to a maximum of 4 big hits. You can receive it. However, when the fifth jackpot is won, the "limiter function" starts operating when the limit number of times is reached (limiter function is ON), and the gaming state after the jackpot game ends is a gaming state with a low probability state (time saving state). Or it shifts to the normal state). If a jackpot is won while the limiter function is operating, the limiter function during operation is canceled (limiter function is OFF), and the gaming state after the jackpot game ends shifts to a gaming state with a high probability until the limit number is reached again. Will be done. In this respect, a limiter machine having a limit of 5 times is also referred to as a "5 times pack machine".

By the way, the conventional limiter machine has only one type of limit number of times, and the game tends to be monotonous, which lacks the fun of the game. Therefore, a plurality of types of limit times are provided according to the jackpot type. In this case, each jackpot may have a different limit number of times, or a part of it may have a different limit number of times.

For example, the jackpots A to D can be provided, and the limit number of jackpots A to D can be set to 2, 3, 4, 5, and 5. In addition, the symbol lottery rate for each jackpot can be determined as appropriate. In addition, it can be appropriately determined whether to shift to the probabilistic state or the latent state depending on which jackpot is won. For example, all of the jackpots A to C may be transferred to the probabilistic state or the latent state, or only one or a plurality of specific jackpots may be transitioned to the probabilistic state (for example, when the jackpot A is won). Will shift to the probable state, and if the other jackpots B, C, and D are won, it will shift to the latent state). The number of STs is preferably infinite, but the number of STs may be the same for each jackpot, may be different, or may be partially different. Further, when the number of STs is finite, even if the number of STs ends and the state shifts to the normal state or the time saving state, the gaming state after the big hit game is again in the high probability state until the limit number is reached. It is possible to shift to a gaming state accompanied by. In addition, among the jackpots A to D, when a specific jackpot is won, the game state (time saving state or normal state) accompanied by the low probability state may be shifted to the gaming state (time saving state or normal state) without shifting to the high probability state, and the time saving state is set. It can be appropriately determined whether to shift to the normal state or to shift to the normal state.

Also in the case of the limiter machine, the matters related to game playability (for example, FIGS. 21 to 76) described in the present embodiment can be applied to the embodiment related to the probability changing state with respect to the gaming state accompanied by the high probability state before reaching the limiter number of times. Therefore, the gaming state accompanied by the low probability state after reaching the limiter number of times can be applied to the embodiment related to the normal state and the time saving state (the gaming state after reaching the limit number of times).

(Machine 4) "Simultaneous fluctuation type"
It may be a so-called "simultaneous fluctuation type" in which the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 can be executed in parallel. For example, it is a so-called "simultaneous variable machine" disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-171527. In the simultaneous variable machine, the monitoring target of the number of ceiling games is the total number of fluctuations (total number of executed games) of the number of variable display times (number of executed games) in Special Figure 1 and the number of variable display times (number of executed games) in Special Figure 2. In this case, when one special figure wins a normal small hit and the other special figure is forcibly lost and stopped, the special figure for which the forced loss is stopped is also counted as one variable display.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 77 to 82, an example of an effect when the ceiling function is activated by reaching the ceiling from a certain gaming state and the ceiling time is shortened will be described. Here, as ceiling benefits, a case in which a ceiling time reduction activated at the start of the ceiling game (FIGS. 77 to 79) and a ceiling time reduction activated at the end of the ceiling game (FIGS. 80 to 82) will be described.

<Case where the ceiling function is activated while the ceiling time is shortened (when the ceiling game is activated at the start of the game)>
(Italy 119-120) FIG. 77 shows an example of the effect of reaching the ceiling in the ceiling time reduction of the type activated at the start of the ceiling game in the low probability game state counting mode.

The production example of FIG. 77 shows a case in which the ceiling is continuously reached. Here, the case where the ceiling is reached from the normal state for the first time (first time) and the ceiling time reduction state for the second time are shown. The case that reached the ceiling from is shown. In this example, the number of ceiling games is 1000 times, and the number of times of shortening the ceiling time is 1000 times, which will be described as a representative example (the same applies to FIGS. 78 to 82 described later). When the ceiling is reached continuously, it is preferable that the effect content is as described below.

(When reaching the ceiling for the first time)
In the case of the ceiling time reduction that is activated at the start of the ceiling game, as already explained, the ceiling function is activated at the start of the symbol change (game start) of the ceiling game (1000th rotation), and the ceiling time reduction state occurs (Fig. 63). ~ FIG. 66). Therefore, with the start of the game at the 1000th rotation, the "effect screen transition effect" is displayed. This effect screen transition effect is an effect that appears when the game mode is changed, and is, for example, a "shutter effect" that changes the background image or the like before and after the shutter display to notify the game mode transition. Further, with the activation of the ceiling function, the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (step S926 in FIG. 65). When the CPU 201 confirms that the ceiling activation flag has been turned ON, the CPU 201 outputs a ceiling signal as an outer end signal from the frame external terminal board 21 (step S099 in FIG. 9). As a result, the fact that the ceiling time is shortened is sent to the external device (hall computer HC or data counter DT).

Then, when the effect screen transition effect is completed, the effect screen for the ceiling effect mode is displayed, and the arrival at the ceiling is notified (the illustrated ceiling rush notification). At this time, along with the predetermined variable effect (for example, the effect including the ceiling rush effect 781 of Remark 1 in FIG. 61B), as the first right-handed instruction effect on the LCD screen, a large "⇒ right-handed!" Or "Oh!" A small "⇒" image is displayed in the right corner of the LCD screen as the second right-handed instruction effect. Is displayed (right-handed notification (small) in the figure), and the right-handed notification LED (right-handed display device 39b) lights up. As a result, the player grasps that he has entered a state of "right-handed advantage" and starts right-handed. The first right-handed instruction effect (right-handed notification (large)) is terminated in the middle of the game, and the second right-handed instruction effect (right-handed notification (small)) is continuously notified. Further, the right-handed notification LED (right-handed display device 39b) keeps lighting until the electric support state ends.

When the ceiling game is over, the game mode is shifted to "heaven mode", and the production under the heaven production mode appears. In addition, "residual ceiling number display effect (notification of the number of residual ceiling games shown)" that informs the number of remaining ceiling games up to the next number of ceiling games, and / or "residual time reduction" that informs the number of remaining time reductions. The number-of-times notification effect (not shown) may or may not be executed (the same applies to FIGS. 78 to 82 described later). Further, in this example, the series of effects appearing in the ceiling game is For example, it is an effect based on "ceiling fluctuation (see the column of" ceiling "in FIG. 73)" (the same applies to FIGS. 78 to 82 described later).

(When reaching the ceiling for the second time)
As the game progresses, the 2000th rotation, that is, the second ceiling game is reached without winning a big hit, the ceiling function is activated again, and the ceiling time is shortened. In this second ceiling game, the effects related to the short ceiling rush, such as the "effect screen transition effect" that appeared in the first ceiling game and the first right-handed instruction effect that displays a large "right-handed →" image, are Since it has already been done, it will not appear again. Instead, a "ceiling continuation notification effect (shown ceiling continuation notification)" may be displayed to notify that the ceiling is continuous. It should be noted that the illustrated "residual ceiling number display effect (notification of the number of residual ceiling games shown)" may or may not be executed.

In this way, the production during the second and subsequent ceiling games is different from the production during the first ceiling game, but according to this configuration, the player feels uncomfortable by performing the production according to the progress of the game. The feature is that it can be prevented from being given. The number of consecutive villas for activating the ceiling function (reaching the ceiling) can be managed by the main control unit 20 side, and the information can be transmitted to the effect control unit 24 side to manage the number of consecutive villas on the effect control unit 24 side as well. (The same applies to the production example shown in FIG. 80, which will be described later).

(Modification example: Italy 121)
In the above, it has been explained that the effects during the second and subsequent ceiling games are different from the effects during the first ceiling game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect executed during the first ceiling game (when the ceiling is reached from the normal state) and the case where the ceiling is reached during the second and subsequent consecutive ceiling games (when the ceiling time is shortened). ) May be executed in common (same) as the effect. According to this configuration, it is easy for the player to know that the number of ceilings has been reset again, that is, that the ceiling function has been activated again and the ceiling privilege has been granted. The same ceiling fluctuation is selected for the first time and the second and subsequent times, and the production based on this is also common, which leads to a reduction in the control burden. Further, in the present embodiment, it is considered that the second and subsequent arrivals at the ceiling are extremely rare cases due to the probability of a big hit lottery. In such a case, it is considered that there is no particular problem even if the same effect is performed every time when the ceiling is reached in a row. The example of this (I 121) is the same for FIG. 80, which will be described later.

<Case where the ceiling function is activated during the jackpot time reduction state (when the ceiling game is activated at the start of the game)>
(I 122) The production example of FIG. 78 shows a case where the ceiling is reached during the jackpot time reduction state and the ceiling time reduction of the type activated at the start of the ceiling game is activated as a ceiling privilege. The contents substantially the same as those described with reference to FIG. 77 are appropriately omitted in order to avoid duplicate description.

With reference to FIG. 78, in the ceiling game at the 1000th rotation, the “effect screen transition effect (shutter effect)” appears at the start of the game at the 1000th rotation. Further, as the ceiling function is activated, the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (step S926 in FIG. 65). When the CPU 201 confirms that the ceiling activation flag has been turned ON, the CPU 201 outputs an in-ceiling signal as an outer end signal from the frame external terminal board 21 (step S099 in FIG. 9). This point is the same as the case of FIG. 77.

However, in the case of this example, before the ceiling time reduction occurs, the "winning easy flag" that specifies that the electric support state is in the electric support state is in the ON state, and based on this flag, the jackpot time reduction is used as the outer end signal. A "big hit time reduction signal" indicating the state is output (ON state = output, OFF state = output stop). The easy-to-win flag is a flag provided to specify the presence / absence of the electric support state, apart from the general electric accessory open extension state flag and the special symbol time reduction state flag that specify the presence / absence of the electric support state. As a result, the fact that the jackpot time is shortened is sent to the external device (hall computer HC or data counter DT). At the activation timing of the ceiling function (for example, the timing when the ceiling activation flag is ON), the jackpot time saving signal and the winning easy flag are turned off, but the winning easy flag remains ON and the jackpot is hit. It may be configured not to output only the time saving signal. Further, even if the winning easy flag is left in the ON state, the jackpot time saving signal may not be output provided that the ceiling activation flag is in the ON state.

If the ceiling is reached during the jackpot time reduction state and the ceiling time reduction state occurs, it is not necessary to notify this again because it is already in the "right-handed advantage" electric support state before reaching the ceiling ("right" in the figure). Hit notification (small) + right-handed LED "). Therefore, in this example, the above-mentioned "first right-handed instruction effect (right-handed notification (large))" is not executed.

(I 123) When the jackpot time saving state and the ceiling time saving state are configured in individual production modes instead of the common production mode (for example, the time saving production mode and the ceiling production mode), it means that the ceiling has been reached. In order to make it easier for the player to recognize, the effect screen transition effect, ceiling rush effect, etc. will be performed. Further, when reaching the ceiling, a dedicated fluctuation pattern table (“FH90” shown in FIG. 73: see the column of “ceiling” in the same figure) is used, and the fluctuation pattern table for shortening the time used during the jackpot time saving state (FIG. 39, FIG. 40) is not used. In the case of the effect mode in which the jackpot time reduction state and the ceiling time reduction state are common, the effect mode may be continued. In the figure, an example is shown in which the effect mode during the jackpot time saving state is the "time saving effect mode", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving effect mode dedicated to the jackpot time saving state (big hit time saving effect mode). May be provided.

<Case where the ceiling function is activated during the support time reduction state (when the ceiling game is activated at the start)>
(I-124) The production example of FIG. 79 shows a case where the ceiling is reached during the support time reduction state and the ceiling time reduction of the activation type at the start of the ceiling game is activated as a ceiling privilege. The contents substantially the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78 are appropriately omitted in order to avoid duplicate description.

As can be seen from the contents of the illustration with reference to FIG. 79, regarding the production during the ceiling game at the 1000th rotation, only the jackpot time saving state shown in FIG. 78 is replaced with the support time saving state, and the ceiling from the support time saving state. When the above is reached, the content is substantially the same as that described with reference to FIG. 78. Similarly, for the 999th rotation immediately before the ceiling, the jackpot time reduction state shown in FIG. 78 is replaced with the support time reduction state, which is substantially the same as the content described in FIG. 78. Therefore, here, in order to avoid duplicate description, the description will be centered on the illustrated outer end signal.

In the case of this example, the support time reduction / medium flag is ON before the ceiling time reduction state occurs, and based on this flag, a "support time reduction / medium signal" indicating the support time reduction state is output as an outer end signal. Has been done. As a result, the fact that the support time is shortened is sent to the external device (hall computer HC or data counter DT). At the timing of activation of the ceiling function, the support time reduction / medium signal and the support time reduction / medium flag are turned off, but the support time reduction / medium flag remains ON and only the support time reduction / medium signal is not output. You may. Further, even if the support time reduction / medium flag is left in the ON state, the support time reduction / medium signal may not be output provided that the ceiling activation flag is in the ON state.

(I 124) When the support time reduction state and the ceiling time reduction state are configured in individual production modes instead of the common production mode (for example, the time reduction production mode and the ceiling production mode), the ceiling is reached. In order to make it easier for the player to recognize this, the effect screen transition effect, ceiling rush effect, etc. will be performed. Further, when reaching the ceiling, a dedicated fluctuation pattern table (“FH90” shown in FIG. 73: see the column of “ceiling” in the same figure) is used, and the fluctuation pattern table for shortening the time used during the support time saving state (FIG. 39, FIG. 40) is not used. When the support time reduction state and the ceiling time reduction state are common production modes, the production mode may be continued. In the figure, an example is shown in which the effect mode during the support time reduction state is the "time reduction effect mode", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time reduction effect mode dedicated to the support time reduction state (support time reduction effect mode) is shown. May be provided. This (I 124) is the same as in FIG. 82, which will be described later.

<Case where the ceiling function is activated while the ceiling time is shortened (in the case of activation type at the end of the ceiling game)>
FIG. 80 shows an example of the effect of reaching the ceiling in the ceiling time reduction of the type activated at the end of the ceiling game in the low probability game state counting mode. The contents substantially the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79 are appropriately omitted in order to avoid duplicate description.

The production example of FIG. 80 shows a case where the ceiling is continuously reached, as in the case of FIG. 78 described above.

(When reaching the ceiling for the first time)
In the case of the ceiling time reduction that is activated at the end of the ceiling game, as already explained, the ceiling function is activated at the end of the fixed display time (game end) of the ceiling game (1000th rotation), and the ceiling time reduction state occurs (Fig. 63 to 66 modified examples). Therefore, regardless of whether or not the next game is started, the ceiling time is shortened after the ceiling game is completed (see the figure after the symbol stop period has elapsed). Therefore, in this example, a peculiar production system that is not in the activation type at the end of the ceiling game is executed. It will be described in detail below.

In the case of the activation type at the end of the ceiling game, pay attention to the fact that the ceiling time is shortened at the end of the ceiling game, and when the fluctuation time of the symbol of the ceiling game (1000th rotation) has elapsed (for example, the fluctuation time of the symbol has elapsed). (Predetermined timing before the lapse of the confirmed display time), the "ceiling activation effect" that can notify that the ceiling function will be activated after the end of this game is executed. As shown in the figure, this ceiling activation effect can be executed until the next game is started. As a result, the number of balls on hold for operation becomes zero at the end of the ceiling game, and even during the period of waiting for customers, the ceiling activation effect is executed. Can be notified. The ceiling activation effect grants a ceiling privilege that is activated at the end of the ceiling game in that it can notify that the situation is practically advantageous for right-handed strike even when the right-handed instruction effect is not displayed. Suitable for cases. In this example, as shown in the figure, even if the ceiling function is activated, if the operation hold ball is zero, the player will be waiting for customers with the effect screen under the normal mode until the next game is started. ing. In such a case, if the ceiling activation effect is displayed, the player can easily grasp that the ceiling time is shortened even while waiting for a customer.

It is also possible to start the right-handed instruction effect when the ceiling game ends (may be executed simultaneously (overlapping) with the above ceiling activation effect). In this example, as shown in the figure, after the ceiling game symbol stop period elapses, that is, after the confirmed display time elapses, the above "first right-handed instruction effect (right-handed notification (large))" is displayed and right-handed. An example of notifying the player that the situation is advantageous is shown. It is preferable that the first right-handed instruction effect can be displayed even during the customer waiting effect (demo display). Further, when executing the first right-handed instruction effect, it is not necessary to execute the ceiling activation effect.

Further, with the end of the ceiling game, the ceiling function is activated and the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (step S926 in FIG. 65). When the CPU 201 confirms that the ceiling activation flag has been turned ON, the CPU 201 outputs an in-ceiling signal as an outer end signal from the frame external terminal board 21 (step S099 in FIG. 9). As a result, the fact that the ceiling time is shortened is sent to the external device (hall computer HC or data counter DT).

When the operation holding ball occurs, the game of the 1001st rotation is started. As can be seen from the illustration, the effect during the ceiling game at the 1001st rotation is substantially the same as the effect content at the 1000th rotation (effect screen transition effect, ceiling rush notification, etc.) shown in FIG. 78. Therefore, the description is omitted here in order to avoid duplicate description.

When the ceiling game is completed, the game mode is shifted from the ceiling mode to the "heaven mode", and the production under the heaven production mode appears (similar to the production example of FIG. 78).

(When reaching the ceiling for the second time)
As the game progresses, the 2000th rotation, that is, the second ceiling game is reached without winning a big hit, the ceiling function is activated again, and the ceiling time is shortened. In this second ceiling game, the first right-handed image that displays the "directed screen transition effect" and the large "right-handed →" image that appeared in the first ceiling game, similar to the effect described in FIG. 78. Instructions and effects will not appear again. Instead, a "ceiling continuation notification effect (shown ceiling continuation notification)" may be displayed to notify that the ceiling is continuous.

<Case where the ceiling function is activated during the jackpot time reduction state (in the case of activation type at the end of the ceiling game)>
The production example of FIG. 81 shows a case where the ceiling is reached during the jackpot time reduction state and the ceiling time reduction of the activation type at the end of the ceiling game is activated as a ceiling privilege. This example shows a case where an operation holding ball exists in the ceiling game at the 1000th rotation. The contents substantially the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 78 and 80 will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

With reference to FIG. 81, at the end of the symbol stop display period of the 1000th rotation ceiling game (when the symbol confirmation display time elapses), the ceiling function is activated and the ceiling time reduction state occurs. In the case of this example, since the case where the operation holding ball exists at the end of the 1000th rotation is described, the ceiling time is already shortened at the start of the next game. What should not be confused here is that in the case of the type that is activated at the end of the ceiling game, even if there is an operation hold ball at the time of the ceiling game, a ceiling time reduction state will occur in the next game (the ceiling function will be activated). is not it. To the last, at the end of the ceiling game, a ceiling time reduction condition occurs. In terms of processing, after the final display time in the ceiling game has elapsed, the ceiling activation management process of FIG. 65 is executed during the processing during the special symbol confirmation time of FIGS. 68A to 68B, and the ceiling function is activated. Therefore, if there is an operation hold ball at the end of the ceiling game, to be precise, after the ceiling time reduction state occurs at the end of the ceiling game, the oldest operation hold ball in chronological order is performed in the next interrupt process 4 ms later. The special symbol management process (S092 in FIG. 9) is executed, and the symbol variation display, that is, the next game is started. Therefore, the ceiling time reduction state does not occur at the start of the next game.

The content of the effect during the game at the 1001st rotation is substantially the same as the effect example of FIG. 78. Further, the outer end signal is substantially the same as that in FIG. 78. Therefore, these explanations are omitted here in order to avoid duplicate description.

<Case where the ceiling function is activated during the support time reduction state (when the ceiling game is activated at the end)>
The production example of FIG. 82 shows a case where the ceiling is reached during the support time reduction state and the ceiling time reduction of the activation type at the start of the ceiling game is activated as a ceiling privilege. The contents substantially the same as those described in FIGS. 79 to 81 will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

As can be seen from the contents of the illustration with reference to FIG. 82, with respect to the production during the ceiling game at the 1001st rotation, the jackpot time saving state shown in FIG. When it reaches, it is substantially the same as the content of FIG. 81. Similarly, for the 1000th rotation immediately before the ceiling, the jackpot time reduction state shown in FIG. 81 is replaced with the support time reduction state, which is substantially the same as the content shown in FIG. 81. Therefore, here, in order to avoid duplicate description, the description will be centered on the illustrated outer end signal.

In the case of this example, the support time reduction / medium flag is ON before the ceiling time reduction state occurs, and based on this flag, a "support time reduction / medium signal" indicating the support time reduction state is output as an outer end signal. Has been done. As a result, the fact that the support time is shortened is sent to the external device (hall computer HC or data counter DT). What should not be confused here is that in the case of the ceiling game start activation type shown in FIG. 79, the ceiling function activation timing is the 1000th rotation game “start”, and the ceiling activation flag ON timing is also the 1000th rotation. In contrast to the game "at the start" of the above, in the case of the ceiling game activation type in this example, the activation timing of the ceiling function is the 1000th rotation game "at the end", and the ON timing of the ceiling activation flag is also 1000. This is the point of the game "at the end" of the rotation. In this example as well, as in the case of the activation type at the start of the ceiling game in FIG. 79, the support time reduction / medium signal and the support time reduction / medium flag are turned off at the activation timing of the ceiling function, but the support time reduction / medium flag is in the ON state. It may be configured so that only the support time shortening and medium signals are not output. Further, even if the support time reduction / medium flag is left in the ON state, the support time reduction / medium signal may not be output provided that the ceiling activation flag is in the ON state.

Further, in this example as well, as in the case of the activation type at the start of the ceiling game shown in FIG. 79, the case where the support time saving state and the ceiling time saving state are configured in individual production modes instead of the common production mode (for example, time reduction production). Mode and ceiling effect mode), in order to make it easier for the player to recognize that the player has reached the ceiling, the effect screen transition effect, ceiling rush effect, etc. are performed. Further, when reaching the ceiling, a dedicated fluctuation pattern table (“FH90” shown in FIG. 73: see the column of “ceiling” in the same figure) is used, and the fluctuation pattern table for shortening the time used during the support time saving state (FIG. 39, FIG. 40) is not used. When the support time reduction state and the ceiling time reduction state are common production modes, the production mode may be continued. In the figure, an example is shown in which the effect mode during the support time reduction state is the "time reduction effect mode", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time reduction effect mode dedicated to the support time reduction state (support time reduction effect mode) is shown. May be provided.

It may be a configuration in which one or a plurality of all the embodiments described above (including all of the various configurations and modifications described in each embodiment) are combined, and the contents described in each embodiment are individual embodiments. It is not limited to only.

Further, in the embodiment described above, a ball game machine that uses a game ball as a game medium has been described, but the present invention is not limited to the ball game machine. For example, it may be an arrange ball machine or a sparrow ball game machine, and as other game media, a game machine using a game medal (rotary body type game machine) or a game medium using an electromagnetic recording means is used. It may be a management type gaming machine to be managed.

The present invention is useful for gaming machines.

1 Pachinko machine,
2 Front frame (door),
3, 3a game board, game area,
19 Game ball payout device,
20 Main control unit (main control board),
24 Production control unit (Production control board, LCD control board)
28 Launch control board,
29 Payout control board,
34, 34a Upper start port, upper start port sensor 35, 35a Lower start port, lower start port sensor,
37, 37a Normal symbol start port, normal symbol start port sensor,
38a, 38b special symbol display device,
39a Ordinary symbol display device,
50, 52a Large winning opening, large winning opening sensor 41, 41c Ordinary variable winning device, ordinary electric accessory solenoid,
52, 52c Special variable winning device, large winning opening solenoid,
36, 45, 46 Liquid crystal display, decorative lamps, speakers,
49 out mouth,
94 setting key switch,
95 setting change switch,
96 Setting change completion switch,
97 Setting indicator,
98 RAM clear switch,
201, 202, 203 Main control CPU, main control ROM, main control RAM,
241 and 242, 243 effect control CPU, effect control ROM, effect control RAM.

Claims (1)

An acquisition means for acquiring a plurality of types of random values including at least a first random value and a second random value based on the establishment of a start condition, and
A winning determination means for executing a winning determination regarding a predetermined winning based on the first random value, and a winning determination means.
A symbol determination means for determining the type of winning based on the result of the winning determination and the second random number value, and
A symbol display means capable of performing a variable display operation of a symbol and stopping and displaying the symbol in a display mode according to a determination result of the symbol determination means.
A special electric accessory that can be opened or expanded at the entrance of the big prize opening,
An accessory continuous operation means capable of continuously operating a special electric accessory,
A gaming machine including a gaming state control means capable of controlling a time-saving state in which a rate of executing the fluctuation display operation of the symbol is high in a variation time shorter than that of a normal state.
The target of the winning judgment by the winning judgment means is
At least a big hit that triggers the operation of the accessory continuous operation means and a special time reduction that does not trigger the operation of the accessory continuous operation means are included.
The game state control means
If the special time reduction is won, the time reduction state is controlled.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images